—

ABB industrial drives

ACS580MV primary control program

Firmware manual
—
List of related manuals in English

Option manuals and guides Code (English)

ACS-AP-x assistant control panels user’s manual 3AUA0000085685
Drive composer Start-up and maintenance PC tool User’s manual 3AUA0000094606
ACS580MV hardware manual 2UBB004520
Manuals and quick guides for I/O extension modules, fieldbus
adapters, encoder interfaces, etc.

You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet. See
section www.abb.com/drives on the inside of the back cover. For manuals not available
in the Document library, contact your local ABB representative.
 Firmware manual
ACS580MV primary control program

Table of contents

 2024 ABB Ltd. All Rights Reserved. 3BHS811381 Rev V

EN
EFFECTIVE: 2024-06-01
 Table of contents 5

Table of contents
1. Introduction to the manual
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Contents of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Related documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Cybersecurity disclaimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Safety
2. Control locations and operating modes
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Local control vs. external control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
External control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Operating modes of the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Speed control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Frequency control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Special control modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

3. Using the control panel

4. Program features
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Drive configuration and programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Programming via parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Adaptive programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Control interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Programmable analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Programmable analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Programmable digital inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Programmable relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Programmable I/O extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Fieldbus control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Master/follower functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Scalar control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Reference ramping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Constant speeds/frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Critical speeds/frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
DC magnetization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
6 Table of contents

Current ramp-up start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

High frequency injection start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
ID run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Application control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Process PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
DC voltage control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Overvoltage control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Undervoltage control (power loss ride-through) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Motor thermal protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Other programmable protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Automatic fault resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Fault and warning messages, data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Signal supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Maintenance timers and counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Energy saving calculators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Load analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
User parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
User lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Parameter checksum calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Data storage parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

5. Parameters
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Summary of parameter groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
01 Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
03 Input references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
04 Warnings and faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
05 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
06 Control and status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
07 System info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
10 Standard DI, RO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
11 Standard DIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
12 Standard AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
13 Standard AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
14 I/O extension module 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
15 I/O extension module 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
16 I/O extension module 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
17 Control hub IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
19 Operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
20 Start/stop/direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
21 Start/stop mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
22 Speed reference selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
23 Speed reference ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
24 Speed reference conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
25 Speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
26 Torque reference chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
 Table of contents 7

28 Frequency reference chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

30 Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
31 Fault functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
32 Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
33 Generic timer & counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
34 Protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
35 Motor thermal protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
36 Load analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
40 Process PID set 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
41 Process PID set 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
45 Energy efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
46 Monitoring/scaling settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
47 Data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
49 Panel port communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
51 FBA A settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
52 FBA A data in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
53 FBA A data out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
54 FBA B settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
55 FBA B data in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
56 FBA B data out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
59 Embedded Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
60 DDCS communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
61 D2D and DDCS transmit data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
62 D2D and DDCS receive data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
70 Power module values phase A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
71 Power module values phase B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
72 Power module values phase C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
73 PEBB CB temperature and humidity measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
77 PMSM start mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
78 PMSM TC Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
81 System control and monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
82 Charging, MCB control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
83 Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
84 Motor temperature monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
85 SBU control and monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
87 AC500 I/O interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
90 Feedback selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
95 HW configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
96 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
97 Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
98 User motor parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
99 Motor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

6. Additional parameter data

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Fieldbus addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Parameter groups 1…9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Parameter groups 10…99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
8 Table of contents

7. Fault tracing
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Warnings and faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Pure events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Editable messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Warning/fault history and analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Other data loggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Parameters that contain warning/fault information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Fault messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

8. Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Basics of the fieldbus control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Control word and Status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Contents of the fieldbus Control word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Contents of the fieldbus Status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
The state diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Setting up the drive for fieldbus control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Parameter setting example: FPBA (PROFIBUS DP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
The start sequence for the parameter example: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

9. Synchronized bypass function

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
System setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
RSYC board solution system diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
RSYC-01 board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
CVMI2B solution system diagram (motor sync to same mains supply as drive input) . .
430
CVMI2B solution system diagram (motor sync to different mains supply than drive in-
put) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
SBU control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Sync to mains sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
VSD sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Reference chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
I/O device and signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Start sequence of sync to mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Parameter setting example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
 Table of contents 9

10. Control chain diagrams

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Speed reference source selection I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Speed reference source selection II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Speed reference ramping and shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Motor feedback configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Load feedback and position counter configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Speed error calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Torque reference source selection and modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Operating mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Reference selection for torque controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Torque limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Torque controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Frequency reference selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Frequency reference modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Master/Follower communication I (Master) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Master/Follower communication II (Follower) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Process PID setpoint and feedback source selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Process PID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Further information

Product and service inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Document library on the Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
10 Table of contents
Introduction to the manual 11

1
Introduction to the manual
What this chapter contains
This chapter describes the contents of the manual. It also contains
information on the compatibility, safety and intended audience.

Applicability
This manual applies to the ACS580MV primary control program (version 2.74).
The firmware version of the control program is visible in parameter 07.05
Firmware version, or the System info in the main menu on the control panel.

Safety instructions
Follow all safety instructions delivered with the drive.
• Read the complete safety instructions before you install, commission, or
use the drive. The complete safety instructions are delivered with the drive
as part of the Hardware manual.
• Read the firmware function-specific warnings and notes before changing
parameter values. These warnings and notes are included in the parameter
descriptions presented in chapter Parameters.

Target audience
This manual is intended for people who design, commission, or operate the
drive system.
12 Introduction to the manual

Contents of the manual

This manual contains the following chapters:
• Using the control panel provides basic instructions for the use of the
control panel.
• Control locations and operating modes describes the control locations and
operating modes of the drive.
• Program features contains descriptions of the features of the ACS580MV
primary control program.
• Parameters describes the parameters used to program the drive.
• Additional parameter data contains further information on the
parameters.
• Fault tracing lists the warning and fault messages with possible causes
and remedies.
• Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter describes the communication
to and from a fieldbus network using an optional fieldbus adapter module.
• Control chain diagrams showing the parameter structure within the drive.

Related documents
A list of related manuals is printed on the inside of the front cover.
Introduction to the manual 13

Terms and abbreviations

Term/abbreviation Definition
ACS-AP-S Type of control panel used with ACS580MV drives
AI Analog input; interface for analog input signals
AO Analog output; interface for analog output signals
BCU Control unit used in ACS580MV drives based on BCON
controller.
DC link DC circuit between rectifier and inverter
DDCS Distributed drives communication system; a protocol used
in optical fiber communication
DI Digital input; interface for digital input signals
DIO Digital input/output; interface that can be used as a digital
input or output
DO Digital output; interface for digital output signals
Drive Frequency converter for controlling AC motors. The drive
consists of a several power modules which are connecting
the grid side to the inverter side.
The ACS580MV primary control program is used to control
the inverter part of the drive.
FAIO-01 Optional analog I/O extension module
FBA Fieldbus adapter
FCAN-0x Optional CANopen adapter
FDCO-0x Optional DDCS communication module
FDNA-0x Optional DeviceNet adapter
FECA-01 Optional EtherCAT® adapter
FENA-11 Optional Ethernet/IP adapter
FIO-01 Optional digital I/O extension module
FIO-11 Optional analog I/O extension module
FLON-0x Optional LONWORKS® adapter
FPBA-0x Optional PROFIBUS DP adapter
FSCA-0x Optional Modbus adapter
FSO-xx Optional safety functions module
HTL High-threshold logic
IGBT Insulated gate bipolar transistor; a voltage-controlled
semiconductor type widely used in inverters and IGBT
supply units due to their easy controllability and high
switching frequency
I/O Input/Output
AM Asynchronous Machine
PMSM Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine
14 Introduction to the manual

Term/abbreviation Definition
Network control With fieldbus protocols based on the Common Industrial
Protocol (CIPTM), such as DeviceNet and Ethernet/IP,
denotes the control of the drive using the Net Ctrl and Net
Ref objects of the ODVA AC/DC Drive Profile. For more
information, see www.odva.org, and the following manuals:
• FDNA-01 DeviceNet adapter module User’s manual
(3AFE68573360 [English]), and
• FENA-01/-11 Ethernet adapter module User’s manual
(3AUA0000093568 [English]).
Parameter User-adjustable operation instruction to the drive, or signal
measured or calculated by the drive
PID controller Proportional–integral–derivative controller. Drive speed
control is based on PID algorithm.
PM Power module (semiconductor stack).
PLC Programmable logic controller
Power unit Contains the power electronics and power connections of
the drive (or inverter module). The drive control unit is
connected to the power unit.
PTC Positive temperature coefficient
RDCO-0x Optional DDCS communication module
RFG Ramp function generator.
RO Relay output; interface for a digital output signal.
Implemented with a relay.
TTL Transistor-transistor logic
UPS Uninterruptible power supply; power supply equipment
with battery to maintain output voltage during power
failure

Cybersecurity disclaimer
This product is designed to be connected to and to communicate information
and data via a network interface. It is Customer's sole responsibility to provide
and continuously ensure a secure connection between the product and
Customer network or any other network (as the case may be). Customer shall
establish and maintain any appropriate measures (such as but not limited to
the installation of firewalls, application of authentication measures, encryption
of data, installation of anti-virus programs, etc) to protect the product, the
network, its system and the interface against any kind of security breaches,
unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or
information. ABB and its affiliates are not liable for damages and/or losses
related to such security breaches, any unauthorized access, interference,
intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information.
See also section User lock (page 53).
 Control locations and operating modes 15

2
Control locations and
operating modes
What this chapter contains
This chapter describes the control locations and operating modes supported by
the control program.
16 Control locations and operating modes

Local control vs. external control

The ACS580MV has two main control locations: external and local. The control
location is selected with the Loc/Rem key on the control panel or in the Drive
composer PC tool.

ACS580MV
External control
PLC
I/O 1)

Local control

Fieldbus adapter (Fxxx) or

DDCS communication
module

Control panel or Drive

composer PC tool (optional)

M
3~
MOTOR

1) Extra inputs/outputs can be added by installing optional I/O extension modules (FIO-
xx) in drive slots.

 Local control
The control commands are given from the control panel keypad or from a PC
equipped with Drive composer when the drive is set to local control. Speed
mode is available for local control; frequency mode is available when scalar
motor control mode is used (see parameter 19.16 Local control mode).
Local control is mainly used during commissioning and maintenance. The
control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in
local control. Changing the control location to local can be prevented by
parameter 19.17 Local control disable.
The user can select by a parameter (49.05 Communication loss action) how the
drive reacts to a control panel or Drive composer PC tool communication break.
(The parameter has no effect in external control.)
 Control locations and operating modes 17

 External control
When the drive is in external control, control commands are given through
• the I/O terminals (digital and analog inputs), or optional I/O extension
modules
• an optional fieldbus adapter module
• the control panel
Two external control locations, EXT1 and EXT2, are available. The user can select
the sources of the start and stop commands separately for each location by
parameters 20.01…20.10. The operating mode can be selected separately for
each location, which enables quick switching between different operating
modes. Selection between EXT1 and EXT2 is done via any binary source such as
a digital input or fieldbus control word (see parameter 19.11 Ext1/Ext2
selection). The source of reference is selectable for each operating mode
separately.
The control location selection is checked on a 2 ms time level.
Using the control panel as an external control source
The control panel can also be used as a source of start/stop commands and/or
reference in external control. Selections for the control panel are available in the
start/stop command source and reference source selection parameters.
Reference source selection parameters have two selections for the control
panel. The difference between the two selections is in the initial reference value
after the reference source switches to the control panel.
The panel reference is saved whenever another reference source is selected. If
the reference source selection parameter is set to Control panel (ref saved), the
saved value is used as the initial reference when control switches back to the
panel. Note that only one type of reference can be saved at a time: for example,
attempting to use the same saved reference with different operating modes
causes the drive to trip on 7083 Panel reference conflict. The panel reference
can be separately limited by parameters in group 49 Panel port communication.
With the reference source selection parameter set to Control panel (ref copied),
the initial panel reference value depends on whether the operating mode
changes with the reference source. If the source switches to the panel and the
operating mode does not change, the last reference from the previous source is
adopted. If the operating mode changes, the drive actual value corresponding
to the new mode is adopted as the initial value.
18 Control locations and operating modes

Operating modes of the drive

The drive can operate in several operating modes with different types of
reference. The mode is selectable for each control location (Local, EXT1 and
EXT2) in parameter group 19 Operation mode.
The following is a general representation of the reference types and control
chains. The page numbers refer to detailed diagrams in chapter Control chain
diagrams.

Speed Speed reference Speed reference Speed error Motor feedback

reference source selection ramping and calculation configuration
source selection II shaping (p 445) (p 443)
I (p 441) (p 442)
(p 440)

Torque Speed
reference controller
source selection (p 446)
and
modification
(p 447)

Reference Operating
selection for mode selection
torque (p 448)
controller
(p 449)

Torque
limitation
(p 450)

Torque
controller
(p 451)

Vector motor
control mode

Frequency Frequency
reference reference Scalar motor
source selection modification control mode
and (p 453)
modification
(p 452)
 Control locations and operating modes 19

 Speed control mode

The motor follows a speed reference given to the drive. This mode is used with
estimated speed as feedback.
Speed control mode is available in both local and external control. It is also
available in both scalar and vector control modes.

 Frequency control mode

The motor follows a frequency reference given to the drive. Frequency control is
only available in scalar motor control mode.

 Special control modes

In addition to the control modes mentioned above, the following special control
modes are available:
• Emergency stop modes Off1 and Off3: Drive stops along the defined
deceleration ramp and drive modulation stops.
• Jogging mode: Drive starts and accelerates to the defined speed when the
jogging signal is activated. For more information, see section Jogging (page
38).
20 Control locations and operating modes
 Using the control panel 21

3
Using the control panel
Refer to ACS-AP-x assistant control panels user’s manual (3AUA0000085685
[English]).
22 Using the control panel
 Program features 23

4
Program features
What this chapter contains
The control program contains all of the parameters (including actual signals)
within the drive. This chapter describes some of the more important functions
within the control program, how to use them and how to program them to
operate.
24 Program features

Drive configuration and programming

The drive control program is divided into two parts:
• firmware program
• application program.

Drive control program

Application program Firmware

Speed control
Function block
program Frequency control
Parameter Drive logic

Standard
interface I/O interface M
Fieldbus interface
block library
Protections
Feedback

The firmware program performs the main control functions, including speed
control, drive logic (start/stop), I/O, feedback, communication and protection
functions. Firmware functions are configured and programmed with
parameters, and can be extended by application programming.

 Programming via parameters

Parameters configure all of the standard drive operations and can be set via
• the control panel, as described in chapter Using the control panel
• the Drive composer PC tool, as described in Drive composer user’s manual
(3AUA0000094606 [English]), or
• the fieldbus interface, as described in chapters Fieldbus control through a
fieldbus adapter.
All parameter settings are stored automatically to the permanent memory of
the drive. However, it is highly recommended to force a save by using parameter
96.07 Parameter save manually before powering down the control unit after any
parameter changes have been made.
If necessary, the default parameter values can be restored by parameter 96.06
Parameter restore.
 Program features 25

 Adaptive programming
Note: Adaptive programming function is not supported by current ACS580MV
software version.
Conventionally, the user can control the operation of the drive by parameters.
However, the standard parameters have a fixed set of choices or a setting
range. To further customize the operation of the drive, an adaptive program can
be constructed out of a set of function blocks.
The Drive composer pro PC tool (version 1.10 or later, available separately) has
an Adaptive programming feature with a graphical user interface for building
the custom program. The function blocks include the usual arithmetic and
logical functions, as well as eg. selection, comparison and timer blocks. The
program can contain a maximum of 20 blocks. The adaptive program is
executed on a 10 ms time level.
For selecting input to the program, the user interface has pre-selections for the
physical inputs, common actual values, and other status information of the
drive. Parameter values as well as constants can also be defined as inputs. The
output of the program can be used eg. as a start signal, external event or
reference, or connected to the drive outputs. Note that connecting the output
of the adaptive program to a selection parameter will write-protect the
parameter.
The status of the adaptive program is shown by parameter 07.30 Adaptive
program status. The adaptive program can be disabled by 96.201 Disable
adaptive program.
For more information, see the Adaptive programming application guide
(3AXD50000028574 [English]).
26 Program features

Control interfaces
 Programmable analog inputs
The control unit has two programmable analog inputs. Each of the inputs can
be independently set as a voltage (0/2…10 V or -10…10 V) or current (0/4…20
mA) input by a jumper or switch on the control unit. Each input can be filtered,
inverted and scaled. The number of analog inputs can be increased by installing
FIO-11 or FAIO-01 I/O extensions (see Programmable I/O extensions below).

Settings
Parameter group 12 Standard AI (page 87).

 Programmable analog outputs

The control unit has two current (0…20 mA) analog outputs. Each output can be
filtered, inverted and scaled. The number of analog outputs can be increased by
installing FIO-11 or FAIO-01 I/O extensions (see Programmable I/O extensions
below).

Settings
Parameter group 13 Standard AO (page 92).

 Programmable digital inputs and outputs

The control unit has six digital inputs, a digital start interlock input, and two
digital input/outputs (I/O that can be set as either an input or an output).
One digital input (DI6) doubles as a PTC thermistor input. See section Motor
thermal protection (page 46).
The number of digital inputs/outputs can be increased by installing FIO-01 or
FIO-11 I/O extensions (see Programmable I/O extensions below).

Settings
Parameter groups 10 Standard DI, RO (page 81) and 11 Standard DIO (page 87).

 Programmable relay outputs

The control unit has three relay outputs. The signal to be indicated by the
outputs can be selected by parameters.
Relay outputs can be added by installing FIO-01 I/O extensions.

Settings
Parameter group 10 Standard DI, RO (page 81).
 Program features 27

 Programmable I/O extensions

Inputs and outputs can be added by using I/O extension modules. One to three
modules can be mounted on the slots of the control unit.
The table below shows the number of I/O on the control unit as well as optional
I/O extension modules.

Location Digital Digital I/Os Analog Analog Relay

inputs inputs outputs outputs
(DI) (DIO) (AI) (AO) (RO)
Control unit 6 0 2 2 3
FIO-01 - 4 - - 2
FIO-11 - 2 3 1 -
FAIO-01 - - 2 2 -

Three I/O extension modules can be activated and configured using parameter
groups 14…16.
Note: Each configuration parameter group contains parameters that display
the values of the inputs on that particular extension module. These parameters
are the only way of utilizing the inputs on I/O extension modules as signal
sources. To connect to an input, choose the setting Other in the source selector
parameter, then specify the appropriate value parameter (and bit, for digital
signals) in group 14, 15 or 16.

Settings
Parameter groups 14 I/O extension module 1 (page 97), 15 I/O extension module
2 (page 120) and 16 I/O extension module 3 (page 123).

 Fieldbus control
The drive can be connected to several different automation systems through its
fieldbus interfaces. See chapter Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
(page 415).

Settings
Parameter groups 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA) (page 248), 51 FBA A settings
(page 254), 52 FBA A data in (page 256), and 53 FBA A data out (page 257)
28 Program features

Motor control
 Master/follower functionality
General
The master/follower functionality can be used to link several drives together so
that the load can be evenly distributed between the drives. This is ideal in
applications where the motors are coupled to each other via gearing, chain,
belt, etc.
The external control signals are typically connected to one drive only which acts
as the master. The master controls up to 10 followers by sending broadcast
messages over an electrical cable or fiber optic link. The master can read
feedback signals from up to 3 selected followers.

Speed-con-
trolled mas-

M
~
Process master

M
Process fol- ~
lower
(For example) Torque- or
Master Follower
Control word speed-con-
Speed reference
DDCS
DDCS

Master/follower link
(For example)
Status word
01.01 Motor speed

Fieldbus control

External control system

(eg. PLC)
 Program features 29

The master drive is typically speed-controlled and the other drives follow its
torque or speed reference. In general, a follower should be
• torque-controlled when the motor shafts of the master and the follower are
rigidly coupled by gearing, chain etc. so that no speed difference between
the drives is possible
• speed-controlled when the motor shafts of the master and the follower are
flexibly coupled so that a slight speed difference is possible. When both the
master and the follower are speed-controlled, drooping is also typically used
(see parameter 25.08 Drooping rate). The distribution of load between the
master and follower can alternatively be adjusted as described under Load
share function with a speed-controlled follower below.
Note: With a speed-controlled follower (without load sharing), pay attention to
the acceleration and deceleration ramp times of the follower. If the ramp times
are set longer than in the master, the follower will follow its own
acceleration/deceleration ramp times rather than those from the master. In
general, it is recommended to set identical ramp times in both the master and
the follower(s). Any ramp shape settings (see parameters 23.16…23.19) should
only be applied in the master.
In some applications, both speed control and torque control of the follower are
required. In those cases, the operating mode can be switched by parameter (
19.12 Ext1 control mode or 19.14 Ext2 control mode). Another method is to set
one external control location to speed control mode, the other to torque control
mode. Then, a digital input of the follower can be used to switch between the
control locations. See chapter Control locations and operating modes (page 19).
With torque control, follower parameter 26.15 Load share can be used to scale
the incoming torque reference for optimal load sharing between the master and
the follower. Some torque-controlled follower applications, eg. where the
torque is very low, or very low speed operation is required, may require encoder
feedback.
If a drive needs to quickly switch between master and follower statuses, one
user parameter set (see page 53) can be saved with the master settings,
another with the follower settings. The suitable settings can then be activated
using eg. digital inputs.

Load share function with a speed-controlled follower

Load sharing between the master and a speed-controlled follower can be used
in various applications. The load share function is implemented by fine-tuning
the follower speed reference with an additional trim signal based on a torque
reference. The torque reference is selected by parameter 23.42 Follower speed
corr torq source (by default, reference 2 received from the master). Load share
is adjusted by parameter 26.15 Load share and activated by the source selected
by 23.40 Follower speed correction enable. Parameter 23.41 Follower speed
correction gain provides a gain adjustment for the speed correction. The final
30 Program features

correction signal added to the speed reference is shown by 23.39 Follower

speed correction out. See the block diagram on page 454.
Notes:
• The function can be enabled only when the drive is a speed-controlled
follower in remote control mode.
• Drooping (25.08 Drooping rate) is ignored when the load share function is
active.
• The master and follower should have the same speed control tuning values.
• The speed correction term is limited by the speed error window parameters
24.44 Speed error window low and 24.43 Speed error window high. An active
limitation is indicated by 06.19 Speed control status word.
• For a reliable ramp stop of a follower,
• both 24.43 Speed error window high and 24.44 Speed error window low
must be set smaller than 21.06 Zero speed limit (or speed error window
control disabled altogether by 24.41 Speed error window control enable),
and
• 24.11 Speed correction must be set smaller than 21.06 Zero speed limit.

Communication
A master/follower link can be built by connecting the drives together with fiber
optic cables (may require additional equipment depending on existing drive
hardware). The medium is selected by parameter 60.01 M/F communication
port.
Parameter 60.03 M/F mode defines whether the drive is the master or a
follower on the communication link. Typically, the speed-controlled process
master drive is also configured as the master in the communication.
The communication on the master/follower link is based on the DDCS protocol,
which employs data sets (specifically, data set 41). One data set contains three
16-bit words. The contents of the data set are freely configurable using
parameters 61.01…61.03. The data set broadcast by the master typically
contains the control word, speed reference and torque reference, while the
followers return a status word with two actual values.
The default setting of parameter 61.01 M/F data 1 selection is Follower CW. With
this setting in the master, a word consisting of bits 0…11 of 06.01 Main control
word and four bits selected by parameters 06.45…06.48 is broadcast to the
followers. However, bit 3 of the follower control word is modified so that it
remains on as long as the master is modulating, and its switching to 0 causes
the follower to coast to a stop. This is to synchronize the stopping of both
master and follower.
Note: When the master is ramping down to a stop, the follower observes the
decreasing reference but receives no stop command until the master stops
 Program features 31

modulating and clears bit 3 of the follower control word. Because of this, the
maximum and minimum speed limits on the follower drive should not have the
same sign – otherwise the follower would be pushing against the limit until the
master finally stops.
Three words of additional data can optionally be read from each follower. The
followers from which data is read are selected by parameter 60.14 M/F follower
selection in the master. In each follower drive, the data to be sent is selected by
parameters 61.01…61.03. The data is transferred in integer format over the link,
and displayed by parameters 62.28…62.36 in the master. The data can then be
forwarded to other parameters using 62.04…62.12.
To indicate faults in the followers, each follower must be configured to transmit
its status word as one of the above-mentioned data words. In the master, the
corresponding target parameter must be set to Follower SW. The action to be
taken when a follower is faulted is selected by 60.17 Follower fault action.
External events (see parameter group 31 Fault functions) can be used to
indicate the status of other bits of the status word.
Block diagrams of the master/follower communication are presented on pages
454 and 419.

Construction of the master/follower link

The master/follower link is formed by connecting the drives together using
either
• fiber optic cables. Drives with a ZCU control unit require an additional FDCO
DDCS communication module; drives with a BCU control unit require an
RDCO module.
Connection examples are shown below. Note that a star configuration using
fiber optic cables requires an NDBU-95C DDCS branching unit.
Ring configuration with fiber optic cables

Master Follower 1 Follower 2

(BCU) Control unit (BCU) Control unit (BCU) Control unit

RDCO RDCO RDCO
CH2 CH2 CH2
T R T R T R

T = Transmitter; R = Receiver
32 Program features

Star configuration with fiber optic cables (1)

Master Follower 1 Follower 2

(BCU) Control unit (BCU) Control unit (BCU) Control unit

RDCO RDCO RDCO
CH2 CH2 CH2
T R T R T R

Follower 3

(BCU) Control unit

T = Transmitter
R = Receiver

RDCO
CH2
T R
R T R T R T R T
MST CH CH CH
NDBU

Star configuration with fiber optic cables (2)

Master Follower 1 Follower 2

(BCU) Control unit (BCU) Control unit (BCU) Control unit

RDCO RDCO RDCO
CH2 CH2 CH2
T R T R T R

Follower 3
(BCU) Control unit

T = Transmitter
R = Receiver
RDCO
CH2
T R

R T R T R T R T
CHx CH CH CH
NDBU
X13 = RE-
 Program features 33

Example parameter settings

The following is a checklist of parameters that need to be set when configuring
the master/follower link. In this example, the master broadcasts the Follower
control word, a speed reference and a torque reference. The follower returns a
status word and two actual values (this is not compulsory but is shown for
clarity).
Master settings:
• Master/follower link activation
• 60.01 M/F communication port (fiber optic channel)
• (60.02 M/F node address = 1)
• 60.03 M/F mode = DDCS master (for both fiber optic and wire
connection)
• 60.05 M/F HW connection (Ring or Star for fiber optic, Star for wire)
• Data to be broadcast to the followers
• 61.01 M/F data 1 selection = Follower CW (Follower control word)
• 61.02 M/F data 2 selection = Used speed reference
• 61.03 M/F data 3 selection = Torque reference act 5
• Data to be read from the followers (optional)
• 60.14 M/F follower selection (selection of followers that data is read
from)
• 62.04 Follower node 2 data 1 sel … 62.12 Follower node 4 data 3 sel
(mapping of data received from followers)
Follower settings:
• Master/follower link activation
• 60.01 M/F communication port (fiber optic channel)
• 60.02 M/F node address = 2…60
• 60.03 M/F mode = DDCS follower (for both fiber optic and wire
connection)
• 60.05 M/F HW connection (Ring or Star for fiber optic, Star for wire)
• Mapping of data received from master
• 62.01 M/F data 1 selection = CW 16bit
• 62.02 M/F data 2 selection = Ref1 16bit
• 62.03 M/F data 3 selection = Ref2 16bit
• Selection of operating mode and control location
• 19.12 Ext1 control mode = Speed or Torque
• 20.01 Ext1 commands = M/F link
• 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type = Level
• Selection of reference sources
• 22.11 Speed ref1 source = M/F reference 1
• 26.11 Torque ref1 source = M/F reference 2
• Selection of data to be sent to master (optional)
• 61.01 M/F data 1 selection = SW 16bit
34 Program features

• 61.02 M/F data 2 selection = Act1 16bit

• 61.03 M/F data 3 selection = Act2 16bit

Specifications of the fiber optic master/follower link

• Maximum fiber optic cable length:
• RDCO-04 with POF (Plastic Optic Fiber): 30 m
• RDCO-04 with HCS (Hard-clad Silica Fiber): 200 m
• For distances up to 1000 m, use two NOCR-01 optical
converter/repeaters with glass optic cable (GOF, 62.5 micrometers,
Multi-Mode)
• Transmission rate: 4 Mbit/s
• Total performance of the link: < 5 ms to transfer references between the
master and followers.
• Protocol: DDCS (Distributed Drives Communication System)

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter groups 60 DDCS communication (page 262), 61 D2D and DDCS
transmit data (page 266) and 62 D2D and DDCS receive data (page 267).

 Scalar control
It is possible to select scalar control as motor control method. In scalar control
mode, the switching of the output semiconductors is controlled to achieve the
constant ratio between motor voltage and frequency (V/f) thus achieving
constant flux. The reference value for the motor frequency (or speed) can be set
by various sources and the voltage is adjusted accordingly.
Motor control and protection requires measurement of the DC voltages and
two motor phase currents. Stator flux is calculated by integrating the motor
voltage in vector space. Actual motor shaft speed is not needed for the motor
control.
IR compensation for scalar motor control
IR compensation (also known as
voltage boost) is available only when Motor voltage
the motor control mode is scalar.
When IR compensation is activated, IR compensation
the drive gives an extra voltage boost
to the motor at low speeds. IR
compensation is useful in
applications that require a high No compensation
break-away torque. In step-up
applications, voltage cannot be fed f (Hz)
through the transformer at 0 Hz, so
 Program features 35

an additional breakpoint is available for defining the compensation near zero

frequency.
In vector control, no IR compensation is possible or needed as it is applied
automatically.

Settings
• Parameters 19.20 Scalar control reference unit (page 130), 97.13 IR
compensation (page 311).
• Parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain (page 180).

 Vector control
ACS580MV supports vector control mode. The switching of the output
semiconductors is controlled to achieve the required stator flux and motor
torque. The reference value for the torque controller comes from the speed
controller.
Motor control requires measurement of the DC voltage and two motor phase
currents. Stator flux is calculated by integrating the motor voltage in vector
space. Motor torque is calculated as a cross product of the stator flux and the
rotor current. Actual motor shaft speed is not needed for the motor control.
See also section Scalar control(page 34).

 Reference ramping
Acceleration and deceleration ramping times can be set individually for speed
and frequency reference.
With a speed or frequency reference, the ramps are defined as the time it takes
for the drive to accelerate or decelerate between zero speed or frequency and
the value defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling or 46.02 Frequency scaling.
The user can switch between two preset ramp sets using a binary source such
as a digital input. For speed reference, also the shape of the ramp can be
controlled.

Special acceleration/deceleration ramps

The acceleration/deceleration times for the jogging function can be defined
separately; see section Jogging (page 38).
A deceleration ramp can be defined for emergency stop (“Off3” mode).
36 Program features

Settings
• Speed reference ramping: Parameters 23.11…23.19 and 46.01
(pages 151 and 240).
• Frequency reference ramping: Parameters 28.71…28.75 and 46.02
(pages 185 and 240).
• Jogging: Parameters 23.20 and 23.21 (page 154).
• Emergency stop (“Off3” mode): Parameter 23.23 Emergency stop time
(page 154).

 Constant speeds/frequencies
Constant speeds and frequencies are predefined references that can be quickly
activated, for example, through digital inputs. It is possible to define up to 7
constant speeds for speed control and 7 constant frequencies for frequency
control.

WARNING: Constant speeds and frequencies override the normal

reference irrespective of where the reference is coming from.

Settings
Parameter groups 22 Speed reference selection (page 143) and 28 Frequency
reference chain (page 180).

 Critical speeds/frequencies
Critical speeds (sometimes called “skip speeds”) can be predefined for
applications where it is necessary to avoid certain motor speeds or speed
ranges because of, for example, mechanical resonance problems.
The critical speeds function prevents the reference from dwelling within a
critical band for extended times. When a changing reference (22.87 Speed
reference act 7) enters a critical range, the output of the function (22.01 Speed
ref unlimited) freezes until the reference exits the range. Any instant change in
the output is smoothed out by the ramping function further in the reference
chain.
The function is also available for scalar motor control with a frequency
reference. The input of the function is shown by 28.96 Frequency ref act 7, the
output by 28.97 Frequency ref unlimited.
 Program features 37

Example
A fan has vibrations in the range of 540 to 690 rpm and 1380 to 1560 rpm. To
make the drive avoid these speed ranges,
• enable the critical speeds function by turning on bit 0 of parameter 22.51
Critical speed function, and
• set the critical speed ranges as in the figure below.

22.01 Speed ref unlimited (rpm)

(output of function)

1 Par. 22.52 = 540 rpm

1560 2 Par. 22.53 = 690 rpm
1380 3 Par. 22.54 = 1380 rpm
690 4 Par. 22.55 = 1560 rpm
540

1 2 3 4 22.87 Speed reference act 7 (rpm)

(input of function)

Settings
• Critical speeds: parameters 22.51…22.57 (page 149)
• Critical frequencies: parameters 28.51…28.57 (page 184).
38 Program features

 Jogging
The jogging function enables the use of a momentary switch to briefly rotate
the motor. The jogging function is typically used during servicing or
commissioning to control the machinery locally.
Two jogging functions (1 and 2) are available, each with their own activation
sources and references. The signal sources are selected by parameters 20.26
Jogging 1 start source and 20.27 Jogging 2 start source. When jogging is
activated, the drive starts and accelerates to the defined jogging speed (22.42
Jogging 1 ref or 22.43 Jogging 2 ref) along the defined jogging acceleration
ramp (23.20 Acc time jogging). After the activation signal switches off, the drive
decelerates to a stop along the defined jogging deceleration ramp (23.21 Dec
time jogging).
The figure and table below provide an example of how the drive operates during
jogging. In the example, the ramp stop mode is used (see parameter 21.03 Stop
mode).
Jog cmd = State of source set by 20.26 Jogging 1 start source or 20.27
Jogging 2 start source
Jog enable = State of source set by 20.25 Jogging enable
Start cmd = State of drive start command.

Jog cmd

Jog enable

Start cmd

Speed

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1415 16 17 18 t

Phase Jog Jog Start Description

cmd enable cmd
1-2 1 1 0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the
acceleration ramp of the jogging function.
2-3 1 1 0 Drive follows the jog reference.
3-4 0 1 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration
ramp of the jogging function.
4-5 0 1 0 Drive is stopped.
 Program features 39

Phase Jog Jog Start Description

cmd enable cmd
5-6 1 1 0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the
acceleration ramp of the jogging function.
6-7 1 1 0 Drive follows the jog reference.
7-8 0 1 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration
ramp of the jogging function.
8-9 0 1->0 0 Drive is stopped. As long as the jog enable signal is on,
start commands are ignored. After jog enable switches
off, a fresh start command is required.
9-10 x 0 1 Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the
selected acceleration ramp (parameters 23.11…23.19).
10-11 x 0 1 Drive follows the speed reference.
11-12 x 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the selected
deceleration ramp (parameters 23.11…23.19).
12-13 x 0 0 Drive is stopped.
13-14 x 0 1 Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the
selected acceleration ramp (parameters 23.11…23.19).
14-15 x 0->1 1 Drive follows the speed reference. As long as the start
command is on, the jog enable signal is ignored. If the
jog enable signal is on when the start command switches
off, jogging is enabled immediately.
15-16 0->1 1 0 Start command switches off. The drive starts to
decelerate along the selected deceleration ramp
(parameters 23.11…23.19).
When the jog command switches on, the decelerating
drive adopts the deceleration ramp of the jogging
function.
16-17 1 1 0 Drive follows the jog reference.
17-18 0 1->0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration
ramp of the jogging function.

See also the block diagram on page 442.

40 Program features

Notes:
• Jogging is not available when the drive is in local control.
• Jogging cannot be enabled when the drive start command is on, or the drive
started when jogging is enabled. Starting the drive after the jog enable
switches off requires a fresh start command.

WARNING! If jogging is enabled and activated while the start command is

on, jogging will activate as soon as the start command switches off.

• If both jogging functions are activated, the one that was activated first has
priority.
• Jogging uses the speed control mode.
• Ramp shape times (parameters 23.16…23.19) do not apply to jogging
acceleration/deceleration ramps.
• The inching functions activated through fieldbus (see 06.01 Main control
word, bits 8…9) use the references and ramp times defined for jogging, but
do not require the jog enable signal.

Settings
Parameters 20.25 Jogging enable (page 138), 20.26 Jogging 1 start source (page
138), 20.27 Jogging 2 start source (page 138), 22.42 Jogging 1 ref (page 148),
22.43 Jogging 2 ref (page 148), 23.20 Acc time jogging (page 154) and 23.21 Dec
time jogging (page 154).

 DC magnetization
DC magnetization depending on the selected start mode (21.01 Vector Start
modeor 21.19 Scalar start mode), it can be applied to guarantee the highest
possible breakaway torque. By adjusting the magnetization time (21.02
Magnetization time), it is possible to synchronize the motor start. 21.10 DC
current reference is effective in scalar control mode.

Settings
Parameters 21.19 Scalar start mode, 21.02 Magnetization time, 21.01 Vector
Start mode and 21.10 DC current reference.
Note: DC magnetization only works for AM.
 Program features 41

 Current ramp-up start

Current and frequency is ramped up to target value in defined time to rotate
stator magnetic field in proper speed and intensity, as a result, rotor can catch
up and lock with the rotating stator magnetic field.
• only used for motor start from standstill.
• can work for both salient and non-salient pole PMSM.
• starting torque is limited.
• may lead to backspin of motor shaft.

Settings
Parameters 77.01 Start mode (page 274) and 77.02 Standstill mode (page 274).
Note: Current ramp-up start is used for PMSM that works in vector control
mode.

 High frequency injection start

A high frequency voltage is injected, and the response current (motor current) is
measured to identify rotor position, then start.
• only used for motor start from standstill.
• saliency-based estimation, this method is limited to salient PMSM.
• high starting torque is allowed.
• during rotor position identification, motor noise may be observed, but not
lead to backspin of motor shaft.

Settings
Parameters 77.01 Start mode (page 274) and 77.02 Standstill mode (page 274).
Note:
High frequency injection method is used for PMSM that works in vector control
mode.

 ID run
Motor identification run. During the identification run, the drive will identify the
characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control.

Settings
Parameters 99.13 ID run requested.
42 Program features

Application control
 Process PID control
There is a built-in process PID controller in the drive. The controller can be used
to control process variables such as pressure, flow or fluid level.
In process PID control, a process reference (setpoint) is connected to the drive
instead of a speed reference. An actual value (process feedback) is also brought
back to the drive. The process PID control adjusts the drive speed in order to
keep the measured process quantity (actual value) at the desired level
(setpoint).
Process PID control operates on a 2 ms time level.
The simplified block diagram below illustrates the process PID control. For a
more detailed block diagram, see page 456.

Setpoint
Limitation
Process Speed, torque or
Filter PID frequency
AI1 reference chain
AI2
Process
••• actual
values
D2D
FBA

The control program contains two complete sets of process PID controller
settings that can be alternated whenever necessary; see parameter 40.57 PID
set1/set2 selection.
Note: Process PID control is only available in external control; see section Local
control vs. external control (page 20).
 Program features 43

Quick configuration of the process PID controller

1. Activate the process PID controller (parameter 40.07 Set 1 PID operation
mode).
2. Select a feedback source (parameters 40.08…40.11).
3. Select a setpoint source (parameters 40.16…40.25).
4. Set the gain, integration time, derivation time, and the PID output levels
(40.32 Set 1 gain, 40.33 Set 1 integration time, 40.34 Set 1 derivation time,
40.36 Set 1 output min and 40.37 Set 1 output max).
5. The PID controller output is shown by parameter 40.01 Process PID output
actual. Select it as the source of, for example, 22.11 Speed ref1 source.

Sleep function for process PID control

The sleep function can be used in PID control applications that involve relatively
long periods of low demand (for example, a tank is at level), During such
periods, the sleep function saves energy by stopping the motor completely,
instead of running the motor slowly below the efficient operating range of the
system. When the feedback changes, the PID controller wakes the drive up.
Note: The sleep function is disabled when mechanical brake control (see page
45) is active.
Example: The drive controls a pressure boost pump. The water consumption
falls at night. As a consequence, the process PID controller decreases the motor
speed. However, due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the
centrifugal pump at low speeds, the motor would never stop rotating. The sleep
function detects the slow rotation and stops unnecessary pumping after the
sleep delay has passed. The drive shifts into sleep mode, still monitoring the
pressure. The pumping resumes when the pressure falls under the wake-up level
(setpoint - wake-up deviation) and the wake-up delay has passed.
44 Program features

Setpoint Sleep boost time (40.45)

Sleep boost step (40.46)

Time
Actual value Wake-up delay
(40.48)
Non-inverted
(40.31 = Not inverted (Ref - Fbk))

Wake-up level
(Setpoint - Wake-up deviation
Time
Actual value

Wake-up level
(Setpoint + Wake-up deviation

Inverted (40.31 = Inverted (Fbk -

Ref))
Time
PID controller output

tsd = Sleep delay (40.44) Sleep mode

t < tsd tsd

Sleep level
(40.43)

Time
STOP START

Tracking
In tracking mode, the PID block output is set directly to the value of parameter
40.50 (or 41.50) Set 1 tracking ref selection. The internal I term of the PID
controller is set so that no transient is allowed to pass on to the output, so
when the tracking mode is left, normal process control operation can be
resumed without a significant bump.

Settings
• Parameter 96.04 Macro select (macro selection)
• Parameter groups 40 Process PID set 1 (page 310) and 41 Process PID set 2
(page 323).
 Program features 45

DC voltage control
 Overvoltage control
Overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link is typically needed when the
motor is in generating mode. The motor can generate when it decelerates or
when the load overhauls the motor shaft, causing the shaft to turn faster than
the applied speed or frequency. To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the
overvoltage control limit, the overvoltage controller automatically decreases
the generating torque when the limit is reached. The overvoltage controller also
increases any programmed deceleration times if the limit is reached.

 Undervoltage control (power loss ride-through)

If the incoming supply voltage is cut off, the drive will continue to operate by
utilizing the kinetic energy of the rotating motor. The drive will be fully
operational as long as the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive. The
drive can continue operation until undervoltage fault is tripped.

Umains
IM fout UDC
(A) (Hz) (V DC)
UDC
160 80 1000

120 60 750

fout
80 40 500

IM
40 20 250

t (s)
1.6 4.8 8 11.2 14.4

UDC= intermediate circuit voltage of the drive, fout = output frequency of the drive, IM =
motor current
Loss of supply voltage at nominal load (fout = 40 Hz). The intermediate circuit DC voltage
drops to the minimum limit. The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the
mains is switched off. The drive runs the motor in generator mode. The motor speed
falls but the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy.
46 Program features

 Emergency stop
The emergency stop signal is connected to the input selected by parameter
21.05 Emergency stop source. An emergency stop can also be generated
through fieldbus (parameter 06.01 Main control word, bits 0…2).
• The mode of the emergency stop is Off3: Stop by the emergency stop ramp
defined by parameter 23.23 Emergency stop time.

Notes:
• The installer of the equipment is responsible for installing the emergency
stop devices and all additional devices needed for the emergency stop
function to fulfill the required emergency stop categories. For more
information, contact your local ABB representative.
• After an emergency stop signal is detected, the emergency stop function
cannot be canceled even though the signal is canceled.
• If the minimum (or maximum) torque limit is set to 0%, the emergency stop
function may not be able to stop the drive.

Settings
Parameters 06.17 Drive status word 2 (page 70), 06.18 Start inhibit status word
(page 71), 21.05 Emergency stop source (page 130), 23.23 Emergency stop time
(page 154).

 Motor thermal protection

The control program features a motor temperature monitoring function.
The motor temperature can be monitored using sensors installed in the
windings.

Temperature monitoring using PTC sensors

One PTC sensor can be connected to digital input DI6.

+24VD
T

DI6

The resistance of the PTC sensor increases when its temperature rises. The
increasing resistance of the sensor decreases the voltage at the input, and
eventually its state switches from 1 to 0, indicating overtemperature.
 Program features 47

The figure below shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of
temperature.
Ω
4000

1330

550

100

For detailed wiring information, refer to the Hardware Manual of the drive.

Temperature monitoring using Pt100 sensors

1…3 Pt100 sensors can be connected in series to an analog input and an analog
output.
The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 9.1 mA through the
sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as
does the voltage over the sensor. The temperature measurement function
reads the voltage through the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius.
It is possible to adjust the motor temperature supervision limits and select how
the drive reacts when overtemperature is detected.
For the wiring of the sensor, refer to the Hardware Manual of the drive.

Temperature monitoring using KTY84 sensors

One KTY84 sensor can be connected to an analog input and an analog output on
the control unit.
The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 2.0 mA through the
sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as
does the voltage over the sensor. The temperature measurement function
reads the voltage through the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius.
48 Program features

The figure and table below show typical KTY84 sensor resistance values as a
function of the motor operating temperature.
Ω
3000

2000
KTY84 scaling
90 °C = 936 Ω
110 °C = 1063 Ω
130 °C = 1197 Ω 1000
150 °C = 1340 Ω

0 T oC

-100 0 100 200 300

It is possible to adjust the motor temperature supervision limits and select how
the drive reacts when overtemperature is detected.
For the wiring of the sensor, refer to the Hardware Manual of the drive.

Motor fan control logic (parameters 35.100…35.106)

If the motor has an external cooling fan, it is possible to use a drive signal (for
example, running/stopped) to control the starter of the fan via a relay or digital
output. A digital input can be selected for fan feedback. A loss of the feedback
signal will optionally cause a warning or a fault.
Start and stop delays can be defined for the fan. In addition, a feedback delay
can be set to define the time within which feedback must be received after the
fan starts.

Settings
Parameter group 35 Motor thermal protection (page 210).

 Other programmable protection functions

External events (parameters 31.01…31.10)
Five different event signals from the process can be connected to selectable
inputs to generate trips and warnings for the driven equipment. When the
signal is lost, an external event (fault, warning, or a mere log entry) is generated.
The contents of the messages can be edited on the control panel by selecting
Menu - Settings - Edit texts.
 Program features 49

Stall protection (parameters 31.24…31.28)

The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the
supervision limits (current, frequency and time) and choose how the drive
reacts to a motor stall condition.

Overspeed protection (parameter 31.30)

The user can set overspeed limits by specifying a margin that is added to the
currently-used maximum and minimum speed limits.

Local control loss detection (parameter 49.05)

The parameter selects how the drive reacts to a control panel or Drive composer
PC tool communication break.

 Automatic fault resets

The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent, overvoltage,
undervoltage and external faults. The user can also specify a fault that is
automatically reset.
By default, automatic resets are off and must be specifically activated by the
user.

Settings
Parameters 31.12…31.16 (page 196).
50 Program features

Diagnostics
 Fault and warning messages, data logging
See chapter Fault tracing (page 363).

 Signal supervision
Three signals can be selected to be supervised by this function. Whenever a
supervised signal exceeds or falls below predefined limits, a bit in 32.01
Supervision status is activated, and a warning or fault generated. The contents
of the message can be edited on the control panel by selecting Menu - Settings
- Edit texts.
The supervised signal is low-pass filtered.

Settings
Parameter group 32 Supervision (page 199).

 Maintenance timers and counters

The program has six different maintenance timers or counters that can be
configured to generate a warning when a pre-defined limit is reached. The
contents of the message can be edited on the control panel by selecting Menu -
Settings - Edit texts.
The timer/counter can be set to monitor any parameter. This feature is
especially useful as a service reminder.
There are three types of counters:
• On-time timers. Measures the time a binary source (for example, a bit in a
status word) is on.
• Signal edge counters. The counter is incremented whenever the monitored
binary source changes state.
• Value counters. The counter measures, by integration, the monitored
parameter. An alarm is given when the calculated area below the signal peak
exceeds a user-defined limit.

Settings
Parameter group 33 Generic timer & counter (page 202).

 Energy saving calculators

This feature consists of the following functionalities:
• An energy optimizer that adjusts the motor flux in such a way that the total
system
 Program features 51

efficiency is maximized
• A counter that monitors used and saved energy by the motor and displays
them in
kWh, currency or volume of CO2 emissions, and
• A load analyzer showing the load profile of the drive (see separate section on
page 51).
Note: The accuracy of the energy savings calculation is directly dependent on
the accuracy of the reference motor power given in parameter 45.19
Comparison power.

Settings
Parameter group 45 Energy efficiency (page 238).

 Load analyzer
Peak value logger
The user can select a signal to be monitored by a peak value logger. The logger
records the peak value of the signal along with the time the peak occurred, as
well as motor current, DC voltage and motor speed at the time of the peak. The
peak value is sampled at 2 ms intervals.

Amplitude loggers
The control program has two amplitude loggers. Depending on the setting of
parameter 36.08 Logger function, the loggers are active continuously or only
when the drive is modulating.
For amplitude logger 2, the user can select a signal to be sampled at 200 ms
intervals, and specify a value that corresponds to 100%. The collected samples
are sorted into 10 read-only parameters according to their amplitude. Each
parameter represents an amplitude range 10 percentage points wide, and
displays the percentage of the collected samples that have fallen within that
range.
52 Program features
Percentage of samples

80…90%
40…50%

50…60%
30…40%

60…70%

70…80%
20…30%
10…20%
0…10%

>90%
Amplitude ranges
(parameters 36.40…36.49)

Amplitude logger 1 is fixed to monitor motor current, and cannot be reset. With
amplitude logger 1, 100% corresponds to the maximum output current of the
drive (Imax). The measured current is logged continuously. The distribution of
samples is shown by parameters 36.20…36.29.

Settings
Parameter group 36 Load analyzer (page 217).
 Program features 53

Miscellaneous
 User parameter sets
The drive supports four user parameter sets that can be saved to the
permanent memory and recalled using drive parameters. It is also possible to
use digital inputs to switch between user parameter sets.
A user parameter set contains all editable values in parameter groups 10…99
except
• I/O extension module settings (groups 14…16)
• data storage parameters (group 47)
• fieldbus communication settings (groups 51…56)
As the motor settings are included in the user parameter sets, make sure the
settings correspond to the motor used in the application before recalling a user
set.

Settings
Parameters 96.10…96.13 (page 300).

 User lock
For better cyber security, it is highly recommended that you set a master pass
code to prevent eg. the changing of parameter values and/or the loading of
firmware and other files.

WARNING! ABB will not be liable for damages or losses caused by the
failure to activate the user lock using a new pass code. See Cyber security
disclaimer (page 2).The user defined master pass code cannot be overridden. If
the master pass code is lost, a re-commissioning of the drive is necessary.

To activate the user lock for the first time, enter the default pass code,
10000000, into 96.02 Pass code. This will make parameters 96.100…96.102
visible. Then enter a new pass code into 96.100 Change user pass code, and
confirm the code in 96.101 Confirm user pass code. In 96.102 User lock
functionality, define the actions that you want to prevent (we recommend you
select all the actions unless otherwise required by the application).
To close the user lock, enter an invalid pass code into 96.02 Pass code, activate
96.08 Control board boot, or cycle the power. With the lock closed, parameters
96.100…96.102 are hidden.
To reopen the lock, enter your pass code into 96.02 Pass code. This will again
make parameters 96.100…96.102 visible.
54 Program features

Settings
Parameters 96.02 (page 299) and 96.100…96.102 (page 309).

 Parameter checksum calculation

A parameter checksum can be calculated from a user-definable set of
parameters to monitor changes in the drive configuration. The calculated
checksum is compared to 1…4 reference checksums; in case of a mismatch, an
event (a pure event, warning or fault) is generated.
By default, the set of parameters included in the calculation contain most
parameters with the exception of
• actual signals
• parameter group 47 Data storage
• parameters that are activated to validate new settings (such as 51.27 and
96.07)
• parameters that are not saved to the flash memory (such as 96.24…96.26)
• dynamic parameters (eg. parameters that vary according to hardware), and
• application program parameters.
The default set can be edited using the Drive composer PC tool.

Settings
Parameters 96.53…96.59 (page 304).

 Data storage parameters

Twenty-four (sixteen 32-bit, eight 16-bit) parameters are reserved for data
storage. These parameters are unconnected by default and can be used for
linking, testing and commissioning purposes. They can be written to and read
from using other parameters’ source or target selections.

Settings
Parameter group 47 Data storage (page 243).
 Parameters 55

5
Parameters
What this chapter contains
The chapter describes the parameters, including actual signals, of the control
program.

Terms and abbreviations

Term Definition
Actual signal Type of parameter that is the result of a measurement or calculation
by the drive, or contains status information. Most actual signals are
read-only, but some (especially counter-type actual signals) can be
reset.
Def (In the following table, shown on the same row as the parameter
name)
The default value of a parameter.
FbEq16 (In the following table, shown on the same row as the parameter
range, or for each selection)
16-bit fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on
the panel and the integer used in communication when a 16-bit value
is selected for transmission to an external system.
A dash (-) indicates that the parameter is not accessible in 16-bit
format.
The corresponding 32-bit scalings are listed in chapter Additional
parameter data (page 317).
Other The value is taken from another parameter.
Choosing “Other” displays a parameter list in which the user can
specify the source parameter.
Other [bit] The value is taken from a specific bit in another parameter.
Choosing “Other” displays a parameter list in which the user can
specify the source parameter and bit.
Parameter Either a user-adjustable operating instruction for the drive, or an
actual signal.
p.u. Per unit
56 Parameters

Summary of parameter groups

Group Contents Page
01 Actual values Basic signals for monitoring the drive. 59
03 Input references Values of references received from various sources. 63
04 Warnings and faults Information on warnings and faults that occurred last. 64
05 Diagnostics Various run-time-type counters and measurements related to 67
drive maintenance.
06 Control and status Drive control and status words. 68
words
07 System info Drive hardware and firmware information. 79
10 Standard DI, RO Configuration of digital inputs and relay outputs. 81
11 Standard DIO Configuration of digital input/outputs. 87
12 Standard AI Configuration of standard analog inputs. 87
13 Standard AO Configuration of standard analog outputs. 92
14 I/O extension module 1 Configuration of I/O extension module 1. 97
15 I/O extension module 2 Configuration of I/O extension module 2. 120
16 I/O extension module 3 Configuration of I/O extension module 3. 123
17 Control hub IO Monitoring of Control Hub input/output signals. 127
19 Operation mode Selection of local and external control location sources and 128
operating modes.
20 Start/stop/direction Start/stop/direction and run/start/jog enable signal source 130
selection; positive/negative reference enable signal source
selection.
21 Start/stop mode Start and stop modes; emergency stop mode and signal 139
source selection; DC magnetization settings;
22 Speed reference Speed reference selectionSee the control chain diagrams on 143
selection pages 440…442.
23 Speed reference ramp Speed reference ramp settings (programming of the 151
acceleration and deceleration rates for the drive).
24 Speed reference Speed error calculation; speed error window control. 151
conditioning
25 Speed control Speed controller settings. 145
26 Torque reference chain Settings for the torque reference chain. 161
28 Frequency reference Settings for the frequency reference chain. 180
chain
30 Limits Drive operation limits. 188
31 Fault functions Configuration of external events; selection of behavior of the 194
drive upon fault situations.
32 Supervision Configuration of signal supervision functions 1…3. 199
33 Generic timer & counter Configuration of Generic timers/counters. 202
34 Protections Motor protection functions 209
35 Motor thermal Motor thermal protection settings such as temperature 210
protection measurement configuration and motor fan control
configuration.
36 Load analyzer Peak value and amplitude logger settings. 217
40 Process PID set 1 Settings for the energy saving calculators. 221
 Parameters 57

Group Contents Page

41 Process PID set 2 Settings for the energy saving calculators. 235
45 Energy efficiency Settings for the energy saving calculators. 238
46 Monitoring/scaling Speed supervision settings; actual signal filtering; general 240
settings scaling settings.
47 Data storage Data storage parameters that can be written to and read from 243
using other parameters’ source and target settings.
49 Panel port Communication settings for the control panel port on the 245
communication drive.
50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA) Fieldbus communication configuration. 248
51 FBA A settings Fieldbus adapter A configuration. 254
52 FBA A data in Selection of data to be transferred from drive to fieldbus 256
controller through fieldbus adapter A.
53 FBA A data out Selection of data to be transferred from fieldbus controller to 257
drive through fieldbus adapter A.
54 FBA B settings Fieldbus adapter B configuration. 257
55 FBA B data in Selection of data to be transferred from drive to fieldbus 259
controller through fieldbus adapter B.
56 FBA B data out Selection of data to be transferred from fieldbus controller to 259
drive through fieldbus adapter B.
59 Embedded Ethernet Configuration of the embedded fieldbus (EFB) interface. 260
70 Power module values Power module measurements from all power modules of 271
phase A phase A.
71 Power module values Power module measurements from all power modules of 272
phase B phase B.
72 Power module values Power module measurements from all power modules of 273
phase C phase C.
73 PEBB CB temperature Measured temperature and humidity values from all power 273
and humidity
measurements modules.

77 PMSM start mode PM motor starting method settings 274

78 PMSM TC Control PM motor TC control settings 275
81 System control and The application software parameters used for system control 275
monitoring and monitoring.
82 Charging, MCB control MCB control (drive charging control). 280
83 Cooling system Converter cooling system control. 286
84 Motor temperature Converter cooling system control. 289
monitoring
85 SBU control and Synchronized bypass unit(SBU) configuration. 292
monitoring
87 AC500 I/O interface Configuration of AC500 digital inputs and relay / transistor 296
outputs.
90 Feedback selection Motor and load feedback configuration. 297
96 System Language selection; access levels; parameter save and 298
restore; control unit reboot; user parameter sets; unit
selection.
97 Motor control Motor model settings. 310
58 Parameters

Group Contents Page

98 User motor parameters Motor values supplied by the user that are used in the motor 311
model. model.
99 Motor data Motor configuration settings. 313

Naming convention
The labeling of the converter and motor electrical variables is based on the following convention:

Refer to the HW manual for more details.

 Parameters 59

Parameter listing
No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq
16
01
01 Actual values Basic signals for monitoring the drive.
All parameters in this group are read-only unless
otherwise noted.
01.01 Motor speed used Measured or estimated motor speed depending on which -
type of feedback is used (see parameter 90.41 Motor
feedback selection). A filter time constant for this signal
can be defined by parameter 46.11 Filter time motor
speed.
-30000.00 … Measured or estimated motor speed. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
01.02 Motor speed Estimated motor speed in rpm. A filter time constant for -
estimated this signal can be defined by parameter 46.11 Filter time
motor speed.
-30000.00 … Estimated motor speed. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
01.03 Motor speed % Shows the value of 01.01 Motor speed used in percent of 10 = 1%
the synchronous speed of the motor.
-1000.00 … Measured or estimated motor speed. See par.
1000.00% 46.01
01.06 Output frequency Estimated drive output frequency in Hz. A filter time -
constant for this signal can be defined by parameter 46.12
Filter time output frequency.
-600.00 … 600.00 Estimated output frequency. See par.
Hz 46.02
01.07 Motor current Measured motor current (rms). -
0.00 … 30000.00 A Motor current. 1A = 1A
01.08 Grid current Measured transformer primary side current (rms). -
0.00 … 585.00 A Grid current. 1A = 1A
01.10 Motor torque Motor torque in percent of the nominal motor torque. See -
also parameter 01.30 Nominal torque scale.
A filter time constant for this signal can be defined by
parameter 46.13 Filter time motor torque.
-1600.0 … 1600.0% Motor torque. See par.
46.03
01.11 DC voltage Measured DC link voltage. -
When the drive is charged or modulating, this parameter
displays an average of DC link voltages of all power modules.
During the discharge, this parameter displays the maximum
of all active power modules’ DC link voltages.
This parameter displays zero when all power modules are
off. This parameter displays the last value that power
module connects BCU when power module lost
connection with BCU.
0.00 … 2000.00 V DC link voltage. 10 = 1 V
01.13 Output voltage Calculated motor voltage in V AC. -
0…20000 V Motor voltage. 1=1V
60 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
01.14 Output power Drive output power. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 -
Unit selection. A filter time constant for this signal can be
defined by parameter 46.14 Filter time power out.
-32768.00 … Output power. 1 = 1 unit
32767.00 kW or hp
01.15 Output power % of Shows the value of 01.14 Output power in percent of the -
motor nom nominal power of the motor.
-300.00 … 300.00% Output power. 1 = 1%
01.17 Motor shaft power Estimated mechanical power at motor shaft. The unit is -
selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection. A filter time
constant for this signal can be defined by parameter 46.14
Filter time power out.
-32768.00 … Motor shaft power. 1 = 1 unit
32767.00 kW or hp
01.18 Inverter GWh Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in -
motoring either direction) in full gigawatt-hours. The minimum
value is zero.
0…32767 GWh Energy in GWh. 1 = 1 GWh
01.19 Inverter MWh Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in -
motoring either direction) in full megawatt-hours. Whenever the
counter rolls over, 01.18 Inverter GWh motoring is
incremented.The minimum value is zero.
0…1000 MWh Energy in MWh. 1 = 1 MWh
01.20 Inverter kWh Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in -
motoring either direction) in full kilowatt-hours. Whenever the
counter rolls over, 01.19 Inverter MWh motoring is
incremented.The minimum value is zero.
0…1000 kWh Energy in kWh. 10 = 1 kWh
01.24 Flux actual % Used flux reference in percent of nominal flux of motor. -
0…200% Flux reference. 1 = 1%
01.29 Speed change rate Rate of speed reference change after the speed ramp -
generator.
-15000 … 15000 Rate of speed change. 1=1
rpm/s rpm/s
01.30 Nominal torque scale Torque that corresponds to 100% of nominal motor -
torque.
Note: This value is copied from parameter 99.12 Motor
nominal torque if entered. Otherwise the value is
calculated from other motor data.
0.000… Nominal torque. 1 = 100
4000000.000N.m unit
01.31 Ambient temperature Measured ambient temperature in the inverter unit -
cabinet.
-100.0… 500.0 °C Ambient temperature. 1 = 1 °C
01.32 Trafo winding U1 Measured transformer winding temperature in phase U1. -
temperature
-100.0… 500.0 °C Transformer winding U1 temperature. 1 = 1 °C
01.33 Trafo winding V1 Measured transformer winding temperature in phase V1. -
temperature
 Parameters 61

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
-100.0… 500.0 °C Transformer winding V1 temperature. 1 = 1 °C
01.34 Trafo winding W1 Measured transformer winding temperature in phase W1. -
temperature
-100.0… 500.0 °C Transformer winding W1 temperature. 1 = 1 °C
01.35 INU air pressure Measured air pressure drop across the inverter unit -
cabinet.
-1000.0.… 1000.0 pa INU air pressure. 1 = 1 pa
01.40 Phase U2 motor Measured motor current in phase U2. -
current
-825 … 825 A Motor current phase U2. 1A = 1A
01.41 Phase V2 motor Measured motor current in phase V2. -
current
-825 … 825 A Motor current phase V2. 1A = 1A
01.42 Phase W2 motor Measured motor current in phase W2. -
current
-825 … 825 A Motor current phase W2. 1A = 1A
01.43 Phase U2 motor Measured motor voltage phase U2. -
voltage
-20500 … 20500 V Motor voltage phase U2. 1V = 1V
01.44 Phase V2 motor Measured motor voltage phase V2. -
voltage
-20500 … 20500 V Motor voltage phase V2. 1V = 1V
01.45 Phase W2 motor Measured motor voltage phase W2. -
voltage
-20500 … 20500 V Motor voltage phase W2. 1V = 1V
01.46 Phase A average DC Average DC link voltage of power modules in phase A. -
voltage The average DC voltage displayed in this parameter is
valid during discharge up to the point when all power
modules turn off (stop communicating with BCU). After
all power modules are turned off, this parameter keeps
the last value of DC link voltage before the turn off.
0 … 1400 V Average DC link voltage phase A. 1V = 1V
01.47 Phase B average DC Average DC link voltage of power modules in phase B. -
voltage See parameter 01.46 for more details.
0 … 1400 V Average DC link voltage phase B. 1V = 1V
01.48 Phase C average DC Average DC link voltage of power modules in phase C. -
voltage See parameter 01.46 for more details.
0 … 1400 V Average DC link voltage phase C. 1V = 1V
01.49 Phase U1 grid Measured transformer primary side current in phase U1. -
current
-825 … 825 A Grid current phase U1. 1A = 1A
01.50 Phase V1 grid Measured transformer primary side current in phase V1. -
current
-825 … 825 A Grid current phase V1. 1A = 1A
01.51 Phase W1 grid Measured transformer primary side current in phase W1. -
current
62 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
-825 … 825 A Grid current phase W1. 1A = 1A
01.52 Phase A average Average secondary input voltage (phase-to-phase rms) of -
secondary voltage power modules in Phase A.
0 … 1500 V Average secondary input voltage phase A. 1V = 1V
01.53 Phase B average Average secondary input voltage (phase-to-phase rms) of -
secondary voltage power modules in Phase B.
0 … 1500 V Average secondary input voltage phase B. 1V = 1V
01.54 Phase C average Average secondary input voltage (phase-to-phase rms) of -
secondary voltage power modules in Phase C.
0 … 1500 V Average secondary input voltage phase C. 1V = 1V
01.55 Motor common Motor common mode voltage -
mode voltage
0…2000.000 Motor common mode voltage. 1V=1V
01.61 Abs motor speed Absolute value of 01.01 Motor speed used. -
used
0.00 … 30000.00 Measured or estimated motor speed. See
rpm P46.01
01.62 Abs motor speed% Absolute value of 01.03 Motor speed %. -
0.00 … 1000.00% Measured or estimated motor speed. 10 = 1%
01.63 Abs output frequency Absolute value of 01.06 Output frequency. -
0.00 … 600.00 Hz Estimated output frequency. See par.
46.02
01.64 Abs motor torque Absolute value of 01.10 Motor torque. -
0.0 … 1600.0% Motor torque. See par.
46.03
01.65 Abs output power Absolute value of 01.14 Output power. -
0.00 … 32767.00 kW Output power. 1 = 1 unit
or hp
01.66 Abs output power % Absolute value of 01.15 Output power % of motor nom. -
motor nom
0.00 … 300.00% Output power. 10 = 1%
01.68 Abs motor shaft Absolute value of 01.17 Motor shaft power. -
power
0.00 … 32767.00 kW Motor shaft power. 1 = 1 unit
or hp
01.70 Ambient temperature Measured temperature of incoming cooling air. -
% The amplitude range of 0…100% corresponds to 0…60 °C
or 32…140 °F.
See also 01.31 Ambient temperature.
-200.00 … 200.00% Cooling air temperature. 1 = 1%
01.167 Phase U1 grid Measured grid voltage in phase U1. -
voltage Only valid when enable P85.36
-20500.00…20500.00 V Grid voltage phase U1 1V = 1V
01.168 Phase V1 grid Measured grid voltage in phase V1.
voltage Only valid when enable P85.36
-20500.00…20500.00 V Grid voltage phase V1 1V = 1V
 Parameters 63

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
01.169 Phase W1 grid Measured grid voltage in phase W1.
voltage Only valid when enable P85.36
-20500.00…20500.00 V Grid voltage phase W1 1V = 1V
01.170 SBU grid voltage Parameter displays the actual grid voltage for SBU -
application.
0 … 20000 V Grid voltage. 1V = 1V
01.171 SBU motor voltage Parameter displays the actual drive output voltage on -
motor side for SBU application.
0 … 20000 V Motor voltage. 1V = 1V
01.173 PMSM rotor Actual PM motor rotor position angle -
position
-180…180deg PM motor position 1=1deg
01.174 PMSM last ramp Actual PM motor rotor position angle after last ramp stop -
stop position
-180…180deg PM motor position 1=1deg
01.185 Phase U2 motor RMS Measured motor RMS voltage in phase U2. -
voltage
0 … 20500 V Motor RMS voltage phase U2. 1V = 1V
01.186 Phase V2 motor RMS Measured motor RMS voltage in phase V2. -
voltage
0 … 20500 V Motor RMS voltage phase V2. 1V = 1V
01.187 Phase W2 motor Measured motor RMS voltage in phase W2. -
RMS voltage
0 … 20500 V Motor RMS voltage phase W2. 1V = 1V
01.188 Phase U1 grid RMS Measured grid RMS voltage in phase U1. -
voltage
0 … 20500 V Grid RMS voltage phase U1. 1V = 1V
01.189 Phase V1 grid RMS Measured grid RMS voltage in phase V1. -
voltage
0 … 20500 V Grid RMS voltage phase V1. 1V = 1V
01.190 Phase W1 grid RMS Measured grid RMS voltage in phase W1. -
voltage
0 … 20500 V Grid RMS voltage phase W1. 1V = 1V
01.201 Motor current % of Show the value of 01.07 Motor current in percentage of -
motor nom the measured motor current.
0.00 … 1000.00% Output motor current. 1 = 1%
03
03 Input references Values of references received from various sources.
All parameters in this group are read-only unless
otherwise noted.
03.01 Panel reference Reference 1 given from the control panel or Drive -
composer PC tool.
Unit (rpm, Hz or %) depends on parameter Local ref unit.
-100000.00 … Control panel or Drive composer PC tool reference. 1 = 10
100000.00
64 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
03.02 Panel reference 2 Remote reference given from the control panel or Drive -
composer PC tool.
-30000.00 … Remote control panel or Drive composer PC tool 1 = 10
30000.00 reference.
03.05 FB A reference 1 Reference 1 received through fieldbus adapter A. -
See also chapter Fieldbus control through a fieldbus
adapter (page 415).
-100000.00 … Reference 1 from fieldbus adapter A. 1 = 10
100000.00
03.06 FB A reference 2 Reference 2 received through fieldbus adapter A. -
-100000.00 … Reference 2 from fieldbus adapter A. 1 = 10
100000.00
03.07 FB B reference 1 Reference 1 received through fieldbus adapter B. -
-100000.00 … Reference 1 from fieldbus adapter B. 1 = 10
100000.00
03.08 FB B reference 2 Reference 2 received through fieldbus adapter B. -
-100000.00 … Reference 2 from fieldbus adapter B. 1 = 10
100000.00
03.13 M/F or D2D ref1 Master/follower reference 1 received from the master. 1 = 10
The value has been scaled according to parameter 60.10
M/F ref1 type.
See also section Master/follower functionality (page 31).
-30000.00 … Scaled reference 1 received from master. 1 = 10
30000.00
03.14 M/F or D2D ref2 Master/follower reference 2 received from the master. 1 = 10
The value has been scaled according to parameter 60.11
M/F ref2 type.
-30000.00 … Scaled reference 2 received from master. 1 = 10
30000.00
03.30 FB A reference 1 Reference 1 received through fieldbus adapter A as a 32- -
int32 bit integer.
-2147483648 … Reference 1 from fieldbus adapter A. -
2147483647
03.31 FB A reference 2 Reference 2 received through fieldbus adapter A as a 32- -
int32 bit integer.
-2147483648 … Reference 2 from fieldbus adapter A. -
2147483647
04
04 Warnings and faults Information on warnings and faults that occurred last.
For explanations of individual warning and fault codes,
see chapter Fault tracing.
All parameters in this group are read-only unless
otherwise noted.
04.01 Tripping fault Code of the 1st active fault (the fault that caused the -
current trip).
0000h…FFFFh 1st active fault. 1=1
04.02 Active fault 2 Code of the 2nd active fault. -
0000h…FFFFh 2nd active fault. 1=1
 Parameters 65

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
04.03 Active fault 3 Code of the 3rd active fault. -
0000h…FFFFh 3rd active fault. 1=1
04.04 Active fault 4 Code of the 4th active fault. -
0000h…FFFFh 4th active fault. 1=1
04.05 Active fault 5 Code of the 5th active fault. -
0000h…FFFFh 5th active fault. 1=1
04.06 Active warning 1 Code of the 1st active warning. -
0000h…FFFFh 1st active warning. 1=1
04.07 Active warning 2 Code of the 2nd active warning. -
0000h…FFFFh 2nd active warning. 1=1
04.08 Active warning 3 Code of the 3rd active warning. -
0000h…FFFFh 3rd active warning. 1=1
04.09 Active warning 4 Code of the 4th active warning. -
0000h…FFFFh 4th active warning. 1=1
04.10 Active warning 5 Code of the 5th active warning. -
0000h…FFFFh 5th active warning. 1=1
04.11 Latest fault Code of the 1st stored (non-active) fault. -
0000h…FFFFh 1st stored fault. 1=1
04.12 2nd latest fault Code of the 2nd stored (non-active) fault. -
0000h…FFFFh 2nd stored fault. 1=1
04.13 3rd latest fault Code of the 3rd stored (non-active) fault. -
0000h…FFFFh 3rd stored fault. 1=1
04.14 4th latest fault Code of the 4th stored (non-active) fault. -
0000h…FFFFh 4th stored fault. 1=1
04.15 5th latest fault Code of the 5th stored (non-active) fault. -
0000h…FFFFh 5th stored fault. 1=1
04.16 Latest warning Code of the 1st stored (non-active) warning. -
0000h…FFFFh 1st stored warning. 1=1
04.17 2nd latest warning Code of the 2nd stored (non-active) warning. -
0000h…FFFFh 2nd stored warning. 1=1
04.18 3rd latest warning Code of the 3rd stored (non-active) warning. -
0000h…FFFFh 3rd stored warning. 1=1
04.19 4th latest warning Code of the 4th stored (non-active) warning. -
0000h…FFFFh 4th stored warning. 1=1
04.20 5th latest warning Code of the 5th stored (non-active) warning. -
0000h…FFFFh 5th stored warning. 1=1
04.23 Tripping fault Aux Aux code of the 1st active fault (the fault that caused the -
code current trip).
0000 0000h…FFFF Aux code of 1st active fault. 1=1
FFFFh
66 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
04.24 Active fault 2 Aux Aux code of the 2nd active fault. -
code
0000 0000h…FFFF Aux code of 2nd active fault.
FFFFh 1=1

04.25 Active fault 3 Aux Aux code of the 3rd active fault. -
code
0000 0000h…FFFF Aux code of 3rd active fault. 1=1
FFFFh
04.26 Active fault 4 Aux Aux code of the 4th active fault. -
code
0000 0000h…FFFF Aux code of 4th active fault. 1=1
FFFFh
04.27 Active fault 5 Aux Aux code of the 5th active fault. -
code
0000 0000h…FFFF Aux code of 5th active fault. 1=1
FFFFh
04.40 Event word1 User-defined event word. This word collects the status of -
the events (warnings, faults or pure events) selected by
parameters 04.41...04.72.
For each event, an auxiliary code can optionally be
specified for filtering.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 User bit 0 1 = Event selected by parameters 04.41 (and 04.42) is active
1 User bit 1 1 = Event selected by parameters 04.43 (and 04.44) is active
... ... ...
15 User bit 15 1 = Event selected by parameters 04.71 (and 04.72) is active

0000h…FFFFh User-defined event word. 1=1

04.41 Event word1 bit0 Selects the hexadecimal code of an event (waming, fault 0000h
code or pure event) whose status is shown as bit 0 of 04.40
Event word1. The event codes are listed in chapter Fault
tracing (page 363).
0000h…FFFFh Code of event. 1=1
04.42 Event word1 bit0 aux Specifies an auxiliary code for the event selected by the 0000
code previous parameter. The selected event is indicated by 0000h
the event word only if its auxiliary code matches the value
of this parameter.
With a value of 0000 0000h, the event word will indicate
the event regardless of the auxiliary code.
0000 0000h...FFFF Code of warning, fault or pure event. 1=1
FFFFh
04.43 Event word1 bit1 Selects the hexadecimal code of an event (waming, fault 0000h
code or pure event) whose status is shown as bit 1 of 04.40
Event word1. The event codes are listed in chapter Fault
tracing (page 363).
0000h... FFFFh Code of event. 1=1
 Parameters 67

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
04.44 Event word1 bit1 aux Specifies an auxiliary code for the event selected by the 0000
code previous parameter. The selected event is indicated by 0000h
the event word only if its auxiliary code matches the value
of this parameter.
With a value of 0000 0000h, the event word will indicate
the event regardless of the auxiliary code.
0000 0000h...FFFF Code of warning, fault or pure event. 1=1
FFFFh
... ... ... ...
04.71 Event word1 bit15 Selects the hexadecimal code of an event (waming, fault 0000h
code or pure event) whose status is shown as bit 15 of 04.40
Event word1. The event codes are listed in chapter Fault
tracing (page 363).
0000h... FFFFh Code of event. 1=1
04.72 Event word1 bit15 Specifies an auxiliary code for the event selected by the 0000
aux code previous parameter. The selected event is indicated by 0000h
the event word only if its auxiliary code matches the value
of this parameter.
With a value of 0000 0000h, the event word will indicate
the event regardless of the auxiliary code.
0000 0000h...FFFF Code of warning, fault or pure event. 1=1
FFFFh
05
05 Diagnostics Various run-time-type counters and measurements related to
drive maintenance.
All parameters in this group are read-only unless
otherwise noted.
05.01 On-time counter On-time counter. The counter runs when the drive is -
powered.
0…65535 days On-time counter. 1 = 1 day
05.02 Run-time counter Motor run-time counter. The counter runs when the -
inverter modulates.
0…65535 days Motor run-time counter. 1 = 1 day
05.09 Time from power-up 500-microsecond ticks elapsed since the last boot of the -
control unit.
0…4294967295 500-microsecond ticks since last boot. 1=1
05.41 Main fan service Not applicable for ACS580MV. -
counter
0…150% Main cooling fan age. 1 = 1%
05.42 Aux. fan service Not applicable for ACS580MV. -
counter
0…150% Auxiliary cooling fan age. 1 = 1%
05.112 Maximum IGBT Maximum of all IGBT temperature displayed in Group 70, -
temperature 71 and 72
0…141°C 10 = 1°C
05.121 MCB closing counter Counter for closing MCB -
0...65535 Counter for closing MCB. 1=1
68 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
06
06 Control and status Drive control and status words.
words
06.01 Main control word The main control word of the drive. This parameter shows -
the control signals as received from the selected sources
(such as digital inputs, the fieldbus interfaces and the
application program).
The bit assignments of the word are as described on page
421. The related status word and state diagram are
presented on pages 422 and 423 respectively.
Note: Bits 12…15 can be used to carry additional control
data, and used as a signal source by any binary-source
selector parameter.
This parameter is read-only.
0000h…FFFFh Main control word. 1=1
06.02 Application control The drive control word received from the application -
word program (if any). The bit assignments are described on
page 421.
This parameter is read-only.
0000h…FFFFh Application program control word. 1=1
06.03 transparent control The unaltered control word received from the PLC -
word through fieldbus adapter A.
This parameter is read-only.
00000000h … Control word received through fieldbus adapter A. -
FFFFFFFFh
06.04 FBA B transparent The unaltered control word received from the PLC -
control word through fieldbus adapter B.
This parameter is read-only.
00000000h … Control word received through fieldbus adapter B. 1=1
FFFFFFFFh
06.11 Main status word Main status word of the drive. -
The bit assignments are described on page 422. The
related control word and state diagram are presented on
pages 421 and 423 respectively.
This parameter is read-only.
0000h…FFFFh Main status word. 1=1
 Parameters 69

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
06.16 Drive status word 1 Drive status word 1. -
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 Enabled 1 = Both Run enable (20.12 ) and start enable (20.19 ) signals are
present. Note: This bit is not affected by the presence of a fault.
1 Inhibited 1 = Start inhibited. See parameters 06.18 and 06.25 for the source of
the inhibiting signal.
2 DC charged 1 = DC circuit has been charged
3 Ready to 1 = Drive is ready to receive a start command
start
4 Following 1 = Drive is ready to follow given reference
reference
5 Started 1 = Drive has been started
6 Modulating 1 = Drive is modulating (output stage is being controlled)
7 Limiting 1 = Any operating limit (speed, torque, etc.) is active
8 Local 1 = Drive is in local control
control
9 Network 1 = Drive is in network control (see page 14)
ctrl
10 Ext1 active 1 = Control location EXT1 active
11 Ext2 active 1 = Control location EXT2 active
12 Reserved
13 Start 1 = Start requested
request
14...15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Drive status word 1. 1=1

70 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
06.17 Drive status word 2 Drive status word 2. -
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 Identification run 1 = Motor identification (ID) run has been performed
done
1 Magnetized 1 = The motor has been magnetized
2 Torque control 1 = Torque control mode active
3 Speed control 1 = Speed control mode active
4 Voltage control Not applicable for ACS580MV
5 Safe reference active 1 = A “safe” reference is being applied by functions such as
parameters 49.05 and 50.02
6 Last speed active 1 = A “last speed” reference is being applied by functions
such as parameters 49.05 and 50.02
7 Loss of reference 1 = Reference signal lost
8 Emergency stop 1 = Emergency stop failed (see parameters 31.32 and 31.33)
failed
9 Jogging active 1 = Jogging enable signal is on
10 Above limit 1 = Actual speed, frequency or torque equals or exceeds limit
(defined by parameters 46.31…46.33). Valid in both
directions of rotation.
11 Emergency stop 1 = An emergency stop command signal is active, or the drive
active is stopping after receiving an emergency stop command.
12 Reduced run 1 = Reduced run active (see section Parameter group 47 Data
storage (page 243). on page 54)
13 Reserved
14 Stop failed Not applicable for ACS580MV
15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Drive status word 2. 1=1

 Parameters 71

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
06.18 Start inhibit status Start inhibit status word. This word specifies the source -
word of the inhibiting signal that is preventing the drive from
starting.
The conditions marked with an asterisk (*) only require
that the start command is cycled. In all other instances,
the inhibiting condition must be removed first.
See also parameter 06.25 Drive inhibit status word 2, and
06.16 Drive status word 1, bit 1.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 Not ready run 1 = DC voltage is missing or drive has not been parametrized
correctly. Check the parameters in groups 95 and 99.
1 Ctrl location changed * 1 = Control location has changed
2 SSW inhibit 1 = Control program is keeping itself in inhibited state
3 Fault reset * 1 = A fault has been reset
4 Lost start enable 1 = Start enable signal missing
5 Lost run enable 1 = Run enable signal missing
6 FSO inhibit 1 = Operation prevented by FSO-xx safety functions module
7 STO 1 = Safe torque off active
8 Current calibration * 1 = Current calibration routine has finished
ended
9 ID run ended * 1 = Motor identification run has finished
10 Auto phase ended * 1 = Autophasing routine has finished
11 Off1 1 = Emergency stop signal (mode off1)
12 Em Off2 1 = Emergency stop signal (mode off2)
13 Em Off3 1 = Emergency stop signal (mode off3)
14 Auto reset inhibit 1 = The autoreset function is inhibiting operation
15 Jogging active 1 = The jogging enable signal is inhibiting operation
This bit ts true when change from remote Control to local
control after jogging is running.

0000h…FFFFh Start inhibit status word. 1=1

72 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
06.19 Speed control status Speed control status word. -
word This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 Zero speed 1 = Drive is running at zero speed
1 Forward 1 = Drive is running in forward direction above zero speed
limit (par. 21.06)
2 Reverse 1 = Drive is running in reverse direction above zero speed
limit (par. 21.06)
3 Out of window 1 = Speed error window control active (see par. 24.41)
4 Internal speed 1 = Estimated speed feedback used (see par. 90.41)
feedback
5 Encoder 1 feedback Not applicable for ACS580MV
6 Encoder 2 feedback Not applicable for ACS580MV
7 Constant speed req 1 = A constant speed or frequency has been selected; see
par.
06.20.
8 MF speed corr min 1 = Minimum limit of speed correction (in a speed-
controlled
follower) has been reached.
9 MF speed corr max 1 = Maximum limit of speed correction (in a speed-
controlled
follower) has been reached.
10…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Speed control status word. 1=1

06.20 Constant speed Constant speed/frequency status word. Indicates which -
status word constant speed or frequency is active (if any). See also
parameter 06.19 Speed control status word, bit 7, and
section Constant speeds/frequencies (page 36).
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 Constant speed 1 1 = Constant speed or frequency 1 selected
1 Constant speed 2 1 = Constant speed or frequency 2 selected
2 Constant speed 3 1 = Constant speed or frequency 3 selected
3 Constant speed 4 1 = Constant speed or frequency 4 selected
4 Constant speed 5 1 = Constant speed or frequency 5 selected
5 Constant speed 6 1 = Constant speed or frequency 6 selected
6 Constant speed 7 1 = Constant speed or frequency 7 selected
7…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Constant speed/frequency status word. 1=1

 Parameters 73

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
06.25 Drive inhibit status Drive inhibit status word 2. This word specifies the source -
word 2 of the inhibiting signal that is preventing the drive from
starting.
See also parameter 06.18 Start inhibit status word, and
06.16 Drive status word 1, bit 1.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 Follower drive 1 = A follower drive is preventing the master from starting.
1 Application 1 = The application program is preventing the drive from
starting.
2 Reserved
3 Encoder feedback Reserved
4 Ref source Reserved
parametrization
5 Starting freezed Reserved
6 No Motor Data Reserved
7 Cap Reforming 1= Capacitor reforming function enabled
8 PM SW Force DL 1= Power module software force download enabled
9…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Start inhibit status word. 1=1

06.29 MSW bit 10 sel Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit Above
10 of 06.11 Main status word. limit
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Above limit Bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 70). 2
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.30 MSW bit 11 sel Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit Ext ctrl
11 of 06.11 Main status word. loc
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Ext ctrl loc Bit 11 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 68). 2
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.31 MSW bit 12 sel Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit Ext run
12 of 06.11 Main status word. enable
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Ext run enable Inverted bit 5 of 06.18 Start inhibit status word (see page 2
71).
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.32 MSW bit 13 sel Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit False
13 of 06.11 Main status word.
False 0. 0
74 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
True 1. 1
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.33 MSW bit 14 sel Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit False
14 of 06.11 Main status word.
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
0000h…FFFFh Supply unit status word. 1=1
06.45 Follower CW user bit Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit MCW user
0 selection 12 of the Follower control word to follower drives. (Bits bit 0
0…11 of the Follower control word are taken from 06.01
Main control word.)
See also section Master/follower functionality (page 31).
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
MCW user bit 0 Bit 12 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 68). 2
MCW user bit 1 Bit 13 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 68). 3
MCW user bit 2 Bit 14 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 68). 4
MCW user bit 3 Bit 15 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 68). 5
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.46 Follower CW user bit Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit MCW user
1 selection 13 of the Follower control word to follower drives. (Bits bit 1
0…11 of the Follower control word are taken from 06.01
Main control word.)
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
MCW user bit 0 Bit 12 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 68). 2
MCW user bit 1 Bit 13 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 68). 3
MCW user bit 2 Bit 14 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 68). 4
MCW user bit 3 Bit 15 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 68). 5
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.47 Follower CW user bit Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit MCW user
2 selection 14 of the Follower control word to follower drives. (Bits bit 2
0…11 of the Follower control word are taken from 06.01
Main control word.)
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
MCW user bit 0 Bit 12 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 68). 2
MCW user bit 1 Bit 13 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 68). 3
MCW user bit 2 Bit 14 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 68). 4
MCW user bit 3 Bit 15 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 68). 5
 Parameters 75

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.48 Follower CW user bit Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit MCW user
3 selection 15 of the Follower control word to follower drives. (Bits bit 3
0…11 of the Follower control word are taken from 06.01
Main control word.)
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
MCW user bit 0 Bit 12 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 68). 2
MCW user bit 1 Bit 13 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 68). 3
MCW user bit 2 Bit 14 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 68). 4
MCW user bit 3 Bit 15 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 68). 5
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.50 User status word 1 User-defined status word. This word shows the status of -
the binary sources selected by parameters 06.60…06.75.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 User status bit 0 Status of source selected by parameter 06.60
1 User status bit 1 Status of source selected by parameter 06.61
… … …
15 User status bit 15 Status of source selected by parameter 06.75

0000h…FFFFh User-defined status word. 1=1

06.60 User status word 1 bit Selects a binary source whose status is shown as bit 0 of False
0 sel 06.50 User status word 1.
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.61 User status word 1 bit Selects a binary source whose status is shown as bit 1 of Out of
1 sel 06.50 User status word 1. window
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Out of window Bit 3 of 06.19 Speed control status word (see page 72). 2
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.62 User status word 1 bit Selects a binary source whose status is shown as bit 2 of Emergenc
2 sel 06.50 User status word 1. y stop
failed
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Emergency stop Bit 8 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 70). 2
failed
76 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.63 User status word 1 bit Selects a binary source whose status is shown as bit 3 of Magnetiz
3 sel 06.50 User status word 1. ed
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Magnetized Bit 1 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 70). 2
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.64 User status word 1 bit Selects a binary source whose status is shown as bit 4 of Run
4 sel 06.50 User status word 1. disable
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Run disable Bit 5 of 06.18 Start inhibit status word (see page 71). 2
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.65 User status word 1 bit Selects a binary source whose status is shown as bit 5 of False
5 sel 06.50 User status word 1.
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.66 User status word 1 bit Selects a binary source whose status is shown as bit 6 of False
6 sel 06.50 User status word 1.
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.67 User status word 1 bit Selects a binary source whose status is shown as bit 7 of Identifica
7 sel 06.50 User status word 1. tion run
done
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Identification run Bit 0 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 70). 2
done
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.68 User status word 1 bit Selects a binary source whose status is shown as bit 8 of Start
8 sel 06.50 User status word 1. inhibition
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Start inhibition Bit 7 of 06.18 Start inhibit status word (see page 71). 2
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
 Parameters 77

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
06.69 User status word 1 bit Selects a binary source whose status is shown as bit 9 of Limiting
9 sel 06.50 User status word 1.
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Limiting Bit 7 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 69). 2
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.70 User status word 1 bit Selects a binary source whose status is shown as bit 10 of Torque
10 sel 06.50 User status word 1. control
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Torque control Bit 2 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 70). 2
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.71 User status word 1 bit Selects a binary source whose status is shown as bit 11 of Zero
11 sel 06.50 User status word 1. speed
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Zero speed Bit 0 of 06.19 Speed control status word (see page 72). 2
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.72 User status word 1 bit Selects a binary source whose status is shown as bit 12 of Internal
12 sel 06.50 User status word 1. speed
feedback
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Internal speed Bit 4 of 06.19 Speed control status word (see page 72). 2
feedback
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.73 User status word 1 bit Selects a binary source whose status is shown as bit 13 of False
13 sel 06.50 User status word 1.
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.74 User status word 1 bit Selects a binary source whose status is shown as bit 14 of False
14 sel 06.50 User status word 1.
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.75 User status word 1 bit Selects a binary source whose status is shown as bit 15 of False
15 sel 06.50 User status word 1.
False 0. 0
78 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
True 1. 1
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
06.100 User control word 1 User-defined control word 1. -
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 User control word 1 bit 0 User-defined bit.
sel
1 User control word 1 bit 1 User-defined bit.
sel
… … …
15 User control word 1 bit User-defined bit.
15 sel

0000h…FFFFh User-defined control word 1. 1=1

06.101 User control word 2 User-defined control word 2. -
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 User control word 2 bit 0 User-defined bit.
sel
1 User control word 2 bit 1 User-defined bit.
sel
… … …
15 User control word 2 bit User-defined bit.
15 sel

0000h…FFFFh User-defined control word 2. 1=1

06.110 Aux CW Auxiliary control word -

Bit Name Description

0 MCB feedback closed 1 = MCB feedback signal CLOSED is active.
1 Direction 0 = FORWARD, 1 = REVERSE.
2 MCB close cmd active MCB close command is sent to digital output.
3 MCB feedback open MCB feedback signal OPEN is active.
4 MCB close cmd monitor MCB close command is given
5 DC link discharged DC link is discharged
6 MCB ready to switch on MCB is ready to switch on
7...15 AUX CW bit 7…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Auxiliary control word. 1=1

06.111 Aux SW Auxiliary status word -
 Parameters 79

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16

Bit Name Description

0 Drive is charged 1 = All Power modules send the information that they are
charged;
0 = Not all Power modules send the information that they
are charged.
1…15 AUX SW bit 1…15 Reserved.

0000h…FFFFh Auxiliary status word. 1=1

07
07 System info Drive hardware and firmware information.
All parameters in this group are read-only.
07.04 Firmware name Firmware identification. -
07.05 Firmware version Version number of the firmware. -
07.06 Loading package Name of the firmware loading package. -
name
07.07 Loading package Version number of the firmware loading package. -
version
07.08 Bootloader version Version number of bootloader. -
07.11 Cpu usage Microprocessor load in percent. -
0…100% Microprocessor load. 1 = 1%
07.14 PM number per Power module number of each phase derived from drive -
phase from license license
0…9 1=1
07.15 Power module SW Power module SW version (major.minor[.patch[.build]]) 0.00.0.0
version that is compatible with the current product software. If
SW version of one or more power modules is different
from the version specified in this parameter a SW
download from BCON to all power modules shall be
initiated. During SW download the fault 607E PM
Software update in progress shall be active.
0.0.0.0…255.255.25 Power module SW version. 1 = 1 unit
5.255
07.16 Control hub FW Installed control hub FW version 0.00.0.0
version (major.minor[.patch[.build]]). It must be equal or bigger
than 07.18 Control Hub FW version required. Otherwise a
the drive will trip with the fault 607D Control hub version
incompatibility.
0.0.0.0…255.255.25 Installed control hub FW version. 1 = 1 unit
5.255
07.17 CVMI2 FW version CVMI2 FW version (major.minor[.patch[.build]]). 0.00.0.0
0.0.0.0…255.255.25 Installed CVMI2 FW version. 1 = 1 unit
5.255
07.18 Control Hub FW Minimum control hub FW version 0.00.0.0
version required (major.minor[.patch[.build]]) that is compatible with the
current product software. If the control hub FW version
(shown in 07.16 Control hub FW version is older than the
one specified in this parameter the drive shall trip with
the fault 607D Control hub version incompatibility.
80 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
0.0.0.0…255.255.25 Required control hub FW version. 1 = 1 unit
5.255
07.19 Power module rating Power module rating ID in the range from 1 to 9 (0: is 0
undefined), according to the license key information.
0…9 Power module rating R1 to R9 1 = 1 unit
07.20 Power module type Power module type R. -
07.23 Application name First five ASCII letters of the name given to the -
application program in the programming tool. The full
name is visible under System info on the control panel or
the Drive composer PC tool.
_N/A_ = None.
07.24 Application version Application program version number given to the -
application program in the programming tool. Also visible
under System info on the control panel or the Drive
composer PC tool.
07.25 Customization First five ASCII letters of the name given to the -
package name customization package. The full name is visible under
System info on the control panel or the Drive composer
PC tool.
_N/A_ = None.
07.26 Customization Customization package version number. Also visible -
package version under System info on the control panel or the Drive
composer PC tool.
07.30 Adaptive program Shows the status of the adaptive program. -
status See section Adaptive programming (page 27).

Bit Name Description

0 Initialized 1 = Adaptive program initialized
1 Editing 1 = Adaptive program is being edited
2 Edit done 1 = Editing of adaptive program finished
3 Running 1 = Adaptive program running
4…13 Reserved
14 State changing 1 = State change in progress in adaptive programming
engine
15 Faulted 1 = Error in adaptive program

0000h…FFFFh Adaptive program status. 1=1

07.40 IEC application Cpu Displays the peak loading of the microprocessor caused -
usage peak by the application program. This parameter can, for
example, be used to check the effect of a given
application program functionality on the CPU load.
The value is in percent of an internally-defined quota.
Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset
depressed for over 3 seconds.
0.0 … 100.0% Peak microprocessor loading caused by application 10 = 1%
program.
 Parameters 81

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
07.41 IEC application Cpu Displays the average loading of the microprocessor -
load average caused by the application program. The value is in
percent of an internally-defined quota.
0.0 … 100.0% Average microprocessor loading caused by application 10 = 1%
program.
07.118 SBU CVMI version SBU CVMI2 FW version 0.00.0.0
Only valid when enable P85.36
0.0.0.0…255.255.255 Installed SBU CVMI2 FW version. 1 = 1 uni
.255
07.119 CVMI2 FW version Minimum CVMI2 FW version that is compatible with the -
required current product software. If the CVMI2 FW version (shown
in 07.17 CVMI2 FW version or 07.118 SBU CVMI version) is
older than the one specified in this parameter, a warning
of ‘6122 CVMI2 version incompatibility’ will be triggered.
0.0.0.0…255.255.25 - 1=1
5.255
10
10 Standard DI, RO Configuration of digital inputs and relay outputs.
10.01 DI status Displays the electrical status of digital inputs DIIL and -
DI6…DI1. The activation/deactivation delays of the inputs
(if any are specified) are ignored.
Bits 0…5 reflect the status of DI1…DI6; bit 15 reflects the
status of the DIIL input. Example: 1000000000010011b =
DIIL, DI5, DI2 and DI1 are on, DI3, DI4 and DI6 are off.
This parameter is read-only.
0000h…FFFFh Status of digital inputs. 1=1
10.02 DI delayed status Displays the status of digital inputs DIIL and DI6…DI1. -
This word is updated only after activation/deactivation
delays (if any are specified).
Bits 0…5 reflect the delayed status of DI1…DI6; bit 15
reflects the delayed status of the DIIL input.
This parameter is read-only.
0000h…FFFFh Delayed status of digital inputs. 1=1
10.03 DI force selection The electrical statuses of the digital inputs can be 0000h
overridden for eg. testing purposes. A bit in parameter
10.04 DI force data is provided for each digital input, and
its value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this
parameter is 1.

Bit Value
0 1 = Force DI1 to value of bit 0 of parameter 10.04 DI force data.
1 1 = Force DI2 to value of bit 1 of parameter 10.04 DI force data.
2 1 = Force DI3 to value of bit 2 of parameter 10.04 DI force data.
3 1 = Force DI4 to value of bit 3 of parameter 10.04 DI force data.
4 1 = Force DI5 to value of bit 4 of parameter 10.04 DI force data.
5 1 = Force DI6 to value of bit 5 of parameter 10.04 DI force data.
6…14 Reserved
15 1 = Force DIIL to value of bit 15 of parameter 10.04 DI force data.

0000h…FFFFh Override selection for digital inputs. 1=1

82 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
10.04 DI force data Allows the data value of a forced digital input to be 0000h
changed from 0 to 1. It is only possible to force an input
that has been selected in parameter 10.03 DI force
selection.
Bit 0 is the forced value for DI1; bit 15 is the forced value
for the DIIL input.
0000h…FFFFh Forced values of digital inputs. 1=1
10.05 DI1 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital input DI1. 0.0 s

1
*DI status
0

1
**Delayed DI
status 0

Time
tOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn = 10.05 DI1 ON delay

tOff = 10.06 DI1 OFF delay
*Electrical status of digital input. Indicated by 10.01 DI status.
**Indicated by 10.02 DI delayed status.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for DI1. 10 = 1 s
10.06 DI1 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital input DI1. See 0.0 s
parameter 10.05 DI1 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for DI1. 10 = 1 s
10.07 DI2 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital input DI2. 0.0 s

1
*DI status
0

1
**Delayed DI
status 0

Time
tOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn = 10.07 DI2 ON delay

tOff = 10.08 DI2 OFF delay
*Electrical status of digital input. Indicated by 10.01 DI status.
**Indicated by 10.02 DI delayed status.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for DI2. 10 = 1 s
10.08 DI2 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital input DI2. See 0.0 s
parameter 10.07 DI2 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for DI2. 10 = 1 s
 Parameters 83

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
10.09 DI3 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital input DI3. 0.0 s

1
*DI status
0

1
**Delayed DI
status 0

Time
tOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn = 10.09 DI3 ON delay

tOff = 10.10 DI3 OFF delay
*Electrical status of digital input. Indicated by 10.01 DI status.
**Indicated by 10.02 DI delayed status.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for DI3. 10 = 1 s
10.10 DI3 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital input DI3. See 0.0 s
parameter 10.09 DI3 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for DI3. 10 = 1 s
10.11 DI4 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital input DI4. 0.0 s

1
*DI status
0

1
**Delayed DI
status 0

Time
tOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn = 10.11 DI4 ON delay

tOff = 10.12 DI4 OFF delay
*Electrical status of digital input. Indicated by 10.01 DI status.
**Indicated by 10.02 DI delayed status.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for DI4. 10 = 1 s
10.12 DI4 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital input DI4. See 0.0 s
parameter 10.11 DI4 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for DI4. 10 = 1 s
84 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
10.13 DI5 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital input DI5. 0.0 s

1
*DI status
0

1
**Delayed DI
status 0

Time
tOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn = 10.13 DI5 ON delay

tOff = 10.14 DI5 OFF delay
*Electrical status of digital input. Indicated by 10.01 DI status.
**Indicated by 10.02 DI delayed status.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for DI5. 10 = 1 s
10.14 DI5 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital input DI5. See 0.0 s
parameter 10.13 DI5 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for DI5. 10 = 1 s
10.15 DI6 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital input DI6. 0.0 s

1
*DI status
0

1
**Delayed DI
status 0

Time
tOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn = 10.15 DI6 ON delay

tOff = 10.16 DI6 OFF delay
*Electrical status of digital input. Indicated by 10.01 DI status.
**Indicated by 10.02 DI delayed status.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for DI6. 10 = 1 s
10.16 DI6 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital input DI6. See 0.0 s
parameter 10.15 DI6 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for DI6. 10 = 1 s
10.21 RO status Status of relay outputs RO3…RO1. Example: 00000001b = -
RO1 is energized, RO2…RO3 are de-energized.
0000h…FFFFh Status of relay outputs. 1=1
10.24 RO1 source Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO1. Ready run
Not energized Output is not energized. 0
Energized Output is energized. 1
Ready run Bit 1 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 68). 2
Enabled Bit 0 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 69). 4
Started Bit 5 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 69). 5
 Parameters 85

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Magnetized Bit 1 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 70). 6
Running Bit 6 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 69). 7
Ready ref Bit 2 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 68). 8
At setpoint Bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 68). 9
Reverse Bit 2 of 06.19 Speed control status word (see page 72). 10
Zero speed Bit 0 of 06.19 Speed control status word (see page 72). 11
Above limit Bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 70). 12
Warning Bit 7 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 68). 13
Fault Bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 68). 14
Fault (-1) Inverted bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 68). 15
Start request Bit 13 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 69). 16
Open brake Not supported. 22
command
Ext2 active Bit 11 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 69). 23
Remote control Bit 9 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 68). 24
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 199). 33
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 199). 34
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 199). 35
RO/DIO control Bit 0 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 87). 40
word bit0
RO/DIO control Bit 1 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 87). 41
word bit1
RO/DIO control Bit 2 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 87). 42
word bit2
RO/DIO control Bit 8 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 87). 43
word bit8
RO/DIO control Bit 9 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 87). 44
word bit9
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
10.25 RO1 ON delay Defines the activation delay for relay output RO1. 0.0 s

1
Status of
selected source
0

1
RO status
0

Time
tOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn = 10.25 RO1 ON delay

tOff = 10.26 RO1 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for RO1. 10 = 1 s
86 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
10.26 RO1 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO1. See 0.0 s
parameter 10.25 RO1 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for RO1. 10 = 1 s
10.27 RO2 source Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO2. Running
For the available selections, see parameter 10.24 RO1
source.
10.28 RO2 ON delay Defines the activation delay for relay output RO2. 0.0 s

1
Status of
selected source
0

1
RO status
0

Time
tOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn = 10.28 RO2 ON delay

tOff = 10.29 RO2 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for RO2. 10 = 1 s
10.29 RO2 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO2. See 0.0 s
parameter 10.28 RO2 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for RO2. 10 = 1 s
10.30 RO3 source Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output Fault (-1)
RO3.
For the available selections, see parameter 10.24 RO1
source.
10.31 RO3 ON delay Defines the activation delay for relay output RO3. 0.0 s

1
Status of
selected source
0

1
RO status
0

Time
tOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn = 10.31 RO3 ON delay

tOff = 10.32 RO3 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for RO3. 10 = 1 s
10.32 RO3 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO3. See 0.0 s
parameter 10.31 RO3 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for RO3. 10 = 1 s
10.51 DI filter time Defines a filtering time for parameter 10.01 DI status. 10.0 ms
0.3 … 100.0 ms Filtering time for 10.01. 10 = 1 ms
 Parameters 87

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
10.99 RO/DIO control word Storage parameter for controlling the relay outputs and 0000h
digital input/outputs eg. through the embedded fieldbus
interface.
To control the relay outputs (RO) and the digital
input/outputs (DIO) of the drive, send a control word
with the bit assignments shown below as Modbus I/O
data. Set the target selection parameter of that particular
data (58.101…58.124) to RO/DIO control word. In the
source selection parameter of the desired output, select
the appropriate bit of this word.

Bit Name Description

0 RO1 Source bits for relay outputs
1 RO2 RO1…RO3 (see parameters 10.24,
10.27 and 10.30).
2 RO3
3…7 Reserved
8 DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV.
9 DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV.
10…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh RO/DIO control word 1=1

11
11 Standard DIO Configuration of digital input/outputs.
The DIO are internally used for the MCB control.
11.01 DIO status Displays the status of digital input/outputs DIO2…DIO1. -
The activation/deactivation delays (if any are specified)
are ignored.
Example: 0b00001 = DIO1 is on, remainders are off.
This parameter is read-only

Bit Name Function

0 Fault (-1) 1 = No fault, digital output
1 MCB feedback status 1 = MCB feedback status closed active, digital input
CLOSED

0000h…FFFFh Status of digital input/outputs. 1=1

12
12 Standard AI Configuration of standard analog inputs.
12.01 AI tune Triggers the analog input tuning function.
Connect the signal to the input and select the appropriate
tuning function.
No action AI tune is not activated. 0
AI1 min tune Current analog input AI1 signal value is set as minimum 1
value of AI1 into parameter 12.17 AI1 min. The value reverts
back to No action automatically.
AI1 max tune Current analog input AI1 signal value is set as maximum 2
value of AI1 into parameter 12.18 AI1 max. The value
reverts back to No action automatically.
AI2 min tune Current analog input AI2 signal value is set as minimum 3
value of AI2 into parameter 12.27 AI2 min. The value
reverts back to No action automatically.
88 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
AI2 max tune Current analog input AI2 signal value is set as maximum 4
value of AI2 into parameter 12.28 AI2 max. The value
reverts back to No action automatically.
12.03 AI supervision Selects how the drive reacts when an analog input signal No action
function moves out of the minimum and/or maximum limits
specified for the input.
The inputs and the limits to be observed are selected by
parameter 12.04 AI supervision selection.
No action No action taken. 0
Fault Drive trips on 80A0 AI supervision. 1
Warning Drive generates an A8A0 AI supervision warning. 2
Last speed Drive generates a warning (A8A0 AI supervision) and 3
freezes the speed (or frequency) to the level the drive was
operating at. The speed/frequency is determined on the
basis of actual speed using 850 ms low-pass filtering.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
Speed ref safe Drive generates a warning (A8A0 AI supervision) and sets 4
the speed to the speed defined by parameter 22.41 Speed
ref safe (or 28.41 Frequency ref safe when frequency
reference is being used).
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
12.04 AI supervision Specifies the analog input limits to be supervised. See 0000h
selection parameter 12.03 AI supervision function.

Bit Name Description

0 AI1 < MIN 1 = Minimum limit supervision of AI1 active.
1 AI1 > MAX 1 = Maximum limit supervision of AI1 active.
2 AI2 < MIN 1 = Minimum limit supervision of AI2 active.
3 AI2 > MAX 1 = Maximum limit supervision of AI2 active.
4…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Activation of analog input supervision. 1=1

 Parameters 89

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
12.05 AI supervision force Activates analog input supervision separately for each 0000h
control location (see section Local control vs. external
control (page 16).
The parameter is primarily intended for analog input
supervision when the input is connected to the
application program and not selected as a control source
by drive parameters.

Bit Name Description

0 AI1 Ext1 1 = AI1 supervision active when EXT1 is being used.
1 AI1 Ext2 1 = AI1 supervision active when EXT2 is being used.
2 AI1 Local 1 = AI1 supervision active when local control is being used.
3 Reserved
4 AI2 Ext1 1 = AI2 supervision active when EXT1 is being used.
5 AI2 Ext2 1 = AI2 supervision active when EXT2 is being used.
6 AI2 Local 1 = AI2 supervision active when local control is being used.
7…15 Reserved

0000 0000b ... Analog input supervision selection. 1=1

0111 0111b
12.11 AI1 actual value Displays the value of analog input AI1 in mA or V -
(depending on whether the input is set to current or
voltage by a hardware setting).
This parameter is read-only.
-22.000 … 22.000 Value of analog input AI1. 1000 = 1
mA or V mA or V
12.12 AI1 scaled value Displays the value of analog input AI1 after scaling. See -
parameters 12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min and 12.20 AI1 scaled
at AI1 max.
This parameter is read-only.
-32768.000 … Scaled value of analog input AI1. 1=1
32767.000
12.15 AI1 unit selection Selects the unit for readings and settings related to V
analog input AI1.
Note: This setting must match the corresponding
hardware setting on the drive control unit (see the
hardware manual of the drive). Control board reboot
(either by cycling the power or through parameter 96.08
Control board boot) is required to validate any changes in
the hardware settings.
V Volts. 2
mA Milliamperes. 10
90 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
12.16 AI1 filter time Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI1. 0.100 s

%
Unfiltered signal
100

63 Filtered signal

t
T

O = I × (1 - e-t/T)

I = filter input (step)

O = filter output
t = time
T = filter time constant

Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface

hardware (approximately 0.25 ms time constant). This
cannot be changed by any parameter.
0.000 … 30.000 s Filter time constant. 1000 = 1 s
12.17 AI1 min Defines the minimum site value for analog input AI1. 0.000 mA
Set the value actually sent to the drive when the analog or V
signal from plant is wound to its minimum setting.
-22.000 … 22.000 Minimum value of AI1. 1000 = 1
mA or V mA or V
12.18 AI1 max Defines the maximum site value for analog input AI1. 20.000 m
Set the value actually sent to the drive when the analog A or
signal from plant is wound to its maximum setting. 10.000 V
-22.000 … 22.000 Maximum value of AI1. 1000 = 1
mA or V mA or V
 Parameters 91

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min Defines the real internal value that corresponds to the 0.000
minimum analog input AI1 value defined by parameter
12.17 AI1 min. (Changing the polarity settings of 12.19 and
12.20 can effectively invert the analog input.)
AIscaled (12.12)

12.20

AIin (12.11)
12.17
12.18

12.19

-32768.000 … Real value corresponding to minimum AI1 value. 1=1

32767.000
12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max Defines the real internal value that corresponds to the 1500.0
maximum analog input AI1 value defined by parameter
12.18 AI1 max. See the drawing at parameter 12.19 AI1
scaled at AI1 min.
-32768.000 … Real value corresponding to maximum AI1 value. 1=1
32767.000
12.21 AI2 actual value Displays the value of analog input AI2 in mA or V -
(depending on whether the input is set to current or
voltage by a hardware setting).
This parameter is read-only.
-22.000 … 22.000 Value of analog input AI2. 1000 = 1
mA or V mA or V
12.22 AI2 scaled value Displays the value of analog input AI2 after scaling. See -
parameters 12.29 AI2 scaled at AI2 min and 12.30 AI2
scaled at AI2 max.
This parameter is read-only.
-32768.000 … Scaled value of analog input AI2. 1=1
32767.000
12.25 AI2 unit selection Selects the unit for readings and settings related to mA
analog input AI2.
Note: This setting must match the corresponding
hardware setting on the drive control unit (see the
hardware manual of the drive). Control board reboot
(either by cycling the power or through parameter 96.08
Control board boot) is required to validate any changes in
the hardware settings.
V Volts. 2
mA Milliamperes. 10
92 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
12.26 AI2 filter time Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI2. See 0.100 s
parameter 12.16 AI1 filter time.
0.000 … 30.000 s Filter time constant. 1000 = 1 s
12.27 AI2 min Defines the minimum site value for analog input AI2. 0.000 mA
Set the value actually sent to the drive when the analog or V
signal from plant is wound to its minimum setting.
-22.000 … 22.000 Minimum value of AI2. 1000 = 1
mA or V mA or V
12.28 AI2 max Defines the maximum site value for analog input AI2. 20.000 m
Set the value actually sent to the drive when the analog A or
signal from plant is wound to its maximum setting. 10.000 V
-22.000 … 22.000 Maximum value of AI2. 1000 = 1
mA or V mA or V
12.29 AI2 scaled at AI2 min Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum 0.000
analog input AI2 value defined by parameter 12.27 AI2 min.
(Changing the polarity settings of 12.29 and 12.30 can
effectively invert the analog input.)
AIscaled (12.22)

12.30

AIin (12.21)
12.27
12.28

12.29

-32768.000 … Real value corresponding to minimum AI2 value. 1=1

32767.000
12.30 AI2 scaled at AI2 max Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum 100.000
analog input AI2 value defined by parameter 12.28 AI2
max. See the drawing at parameter 12.29 AI2 scaled at AI2
min.
-32768.000 … Real value corresponding to maximum AI2 value. 1=1
32767.000
13
13 Standard AO Configuration of standard analog outputs.
13.11 AO1 actual value Displays the value of AO1 in mA. -
This parameter is read-only.
0.000 … 22.000 mA Value of AO1. 1000 = 1
mA
13.12 AO1 source Selects a signal to be connected to analog output AO1. Motor
Alternatively, sets the output to excitation mode to feed a speed
constant current to a temperature sensor. used
Zero None. 0
 Parameters 93

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Motor speed used 01.01 Motor speed used (page 59). 1
Output frequency 01.06 Output frequency (page 59). 3
Motor current 01.07 Motor current (page 59). 4
Motor torque 01.10 Motor torque (page 59). 6
DC voltage 01.11 DC voltage (page 59). 7
Power inu out 01.14 Output power (page 60). 8
Speed ref ramp in 23.01 Speed ref ramp input (page 151). 10
Speed ref ramp out 23.02 Speed ref ramp output (page 151). 11
Speed ref used 24.01 Used speed reference (page 145). 12
Torq ref used 26.02 Torque reference used (page 161). 13
Freq ref used 28.02 Frequency ref ramp output (page 180). 14
Force Pt100 The output is used to feed an excitation current to 1…3 20
excitation Pt100 sensors. See section Motor thermal protection
(page 46).
Force KTY84 The output is used to feed an excitation current to a 21
excitation KTY84 sensor. See section Motor thermal protection
(page 46).
Force PTC excitation The output is used to feed an excitation current to 1…3 22
PTC sensors. See section Motor thermal protection (page
46).
Force Pt1000 The output is used to feed an excitation current to 1…3 23
excitation Pt1000 sensors. See section Motor thermal protection
(page 46).
AO1 data storage 13.91 AO1 data storage (page 97). 37
AO2 data storage 13.92 AO2 data storage (page 97). 38
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
13.16 AO1 filter time Defines the filtering time constant for analog output AO1. 0.100 s

%
Unfiltered signal
100

63 Filtered signal

t
T
O = I × (1 - e-t/T)

I = filter input (step)

O = filter output
t = time
T = filter time constant

0.000 … 30.000 s Filter time constant. 1000 = 1 s

94 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
13.17 AO1 source min Defines the real minimum value of the signal (selected by 0.0
parameter 13.12 AO1 source) that corresponds to the
minimum required AO1 output value (defined by
parameter 13.19 AO1 out at AO1 src min).

IAO1 (mA)

13.20

13.19

13.17 13.18 Signal (real)

selected by
13.12

Programming 13.17 as the maximum value and 13.18 as

the minimum value inverts the output.

IAO1 (mA)

13.20

13.19

13.18 13.17 Signal (real)

selected by
13.12

-32768.0 … 32767.0 Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO1 output 1=1
value.
13.18 AO1 source max Defines the real maximum value of the signal (selected by 1500.0
parameter 13.12 AO1 source) that corresponds to the
maximum required AO1 output value (defined by
parameter 13.20 AO1 out at AO1 src max). See parameter
13.17 AO1 source min.
-32768.0 … 32767.0 Real signal value corresponding to maximum AO1 output 1=1
value.
13.19 AO1 out at AO1 src Defines the minimum output value for analog output AO1. 0.000 mA
min See also drawing at parameter 13.17 AO1 source min.
0.000 … 22.000 mA Minimum AO1 output value. 1000 = 1
mA
 Parameters 95

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
13.20 AO1 out at AO1 src Defines the maximum output value for analog output 20.000
max AO1. mA
See also drawing at parameter 13.17 AO1 source min.
0.000 … 22.000 mA Maximum AO1 output value. 1000 = 1
mA
13.21 AO2 actual value Displays the value of AO2 in mA. -
This parameter is read-only.
0.000 … 22.000 mA Value of AO2. 1000 = 1
mA
13.22 AO2 source Selects a signal to be connected to analog output AO2. Motor
Alternatively, sets the output to excitation mode to feed a current
constant current to a temperature sensor.
For the selections, see parameter 13.12 AO1 source.
13.26 AO2 filter time Defines the filtering time constant for analog output AO2. 0.100 s
See parameter 13.16 AO1 filter time.
0.000 … 30.000 s Filter time constant. 1000 = 1 s
96 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
13.27 AO2 source min Defines the real minimum value of the signal (selected by 0.0
parameter 13.22 AO2 source) that corresponds to the
minimum required AO2 output value (defined by
parameter 13.29 AO2 out at AO2 src min).

IAO2 (mA)

13.30

13.29

13.27 13.28 Signal (real)

selected by
13.22

Programming 13.27 as the maximum value and 13.28 as

the minimum value inverts the output.

IAO2 (mA)

13.30

13.29

13.28 13.27 Signal (real)

selected by
13.22

-32768.0 … 32767.0 Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO2 output 1=1
value.
13.28 AO2 source max Defines the real maximum value of the signal (selected by 100.0
parameter 13.22 AO2 source) that corresponds to the
maximum required AO2 output value (defined by
parameter 13.30 AO2 out at AO2 src max). See parameter
13.27 AO2 source min.
-32768.0 … 32767.0 Real signal value corresponding to maximum AO2 output 1=1
value.
13.29 AO2 out at AO2 src Defines the minimum output value for analog output AO2. 0.000 mA
min See also drawing at parameter 13.27 AO2 source min.
0.000 … 22.000 mA Minimum AO2 output value. 1000 = 1
mA
 Parameters 97

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
13.30 AO2 out at AO2 src Defines the maximum output value for analog output 20.000
max AO2. mA
See also drawing at parameter 13.27 AO2 source min.
0.000 … 22.000 mA Maximum AO2 output value. 1000 = 1
mA
13.91 AO1 data storage Storage parameter for controlling analog output AO1 eg. 0.00
through fieldbus.
In 13.12 AO1 source, select AO1 data storage. Then set this
parameter as the target of the incoming value data.
With the embedded fieldbus interface, simply set the
target selection parameter of that particular data
(58.101…58.124) to AO1 data storage.
-327.68 … 327.67 Storage parameter for AO1. 100 = 1
13.92 AO2 data storage Storage parameter for controlling analog output AO2 eg. 0.00
through fieldbus.
In 13.22 AO2 source, select AO2 data storage. Then set
this parameter as the target of the incoming value data.
With the embedded fieldbus interface, simply set the
target selection parameter of that particular data
(58.101…58.124) to AO2 data storage.
-327.68 … 327.67 Storage parameter for AO2. 100 = 1
14
14 I/O extension module Configuration of I/O extension module 1.
1 See also section Programmable I/O extensions (page 27).
Note: The contents of the parameter group vary
according to the selected I/O extension module type.
14.01 Module 1 type Activates (and specifies the type of) I/O extension None
module 1.
None Inactive. 0
FIO-01 FIO-01. 1
FIO-11 FIO-11. 2
FDIO-01 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 3
FAIO-01 FAIO-01. 4
14.02 Module 1 location Specifies the slot (1…3) on the control unit of the drive Slot 1
into which the I/O extension module is installed.
Slot 1 Slot 1. 1
Slot 2 Slot 2. 2
Slot 3 Slot 3. 3
4…254 Reserved. 1=1
14.03 Module 1 status Displays the status of I/O extension module 1. No option
No option No module detected in the specified slot. 0
No communication A module has been detected but cannot be 1
communicated with.
Unknown The module type is unknown. 2
FIO-01 An FIO-01 module has been detected and is active. 15
FIO-11 An FIO-11 module has been detected and is active. 20
FAIO-01 An FAIO-01 module has been detected and is active. 24
98 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
14.05 DIO status (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) -
Displays the status of the digital input/outputs on the
extension module. The activation/deactivation delays (if
any are specified) are ignored.
Bit 0 indicates the status of DIO1.
Note: The number of active bits in this parameter
depends on the number of digital input/outputs on the
extension module.
Example: 00001001b = DIO1 and DIO4 are on, remainder
are off.
This parameter is read-only.
0000h…FFFFh Status of digital input/outputs. 1=1
14.06 DIO delayed status (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) -
Displays the delayed status of the digital input/outputs
on the extension module. This word is updated only after
activation/deactivation delays (if any are specified).
Bit 0 indicates the status of DIO1.
Note: The number of active bits in this parameter
depends on the number of digital input/outputs on the
extension module.
Example: 0000001001b = DIO1 and DIO4 are on,
remainder are off.
This parameter is read-only.
0000h…FFFFh Delayed status of digital input/outputs. 1=1
14.08 DIO filter time (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11)
Defines a filtering time for parameter 14.05 DIO status.
The filtering time will only affect the DIOs that are in
input mode.
0.8...100.0 ms Filtering time for 14.05. 10 = 1 ms
14.09 DIO1 function (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) Input
Selects whether DIO1 of the extension module is used as a
digital input or output.
Output DIO1 is used as a digital output. 0
Input DIO1 is used as a digital input. 1
14.10 DIO1 filter gain (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11) 7.5 us
Determines a filtering time for DIO1 when it is used as an
input.
7.5 us 7.5 microseconds. 0
195 us 195 microseconds. 1
780 us 780 microseconds. 2
4.680 ms 4.680 milliseconds. 3
14.11 DIO1 output source (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) Not
Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital energized
input/output DIO1 of the extension module when
parameter 14.09 DIO1 function is set to Output.
Not energized Output is not energized. 0
Energized Output is energized. 1
Ready run Bit 1 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 68). 2
Enabled Bit 0 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 69). 4
 Parameters 99

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Started Bit 5 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 69). 5
Magnetized Bit 1 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 70). 6
Running Bit 6 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 69). 7
Ready ref Bit 2 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 68). 8
At setpoint Bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 68). 9
Reverse Bit 2 of 06.19 Speed control status word (see page 72). 10
Zero speed Bit 0 of 06.19 Speed control status word (see page 72). 11
Above limit Bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 70). 12
Warning Bit 7 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 68). 13
Fault Bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 68). 14
Fault (-1) Inverted bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 68). 15
Start request Bit 13 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 69). 16
Open brake Not supported. 22
command
Ext2 active Bit 11 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 69). 23
Remote control Bit 9 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 68). 24
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 199). 33
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 199). 34
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 199). 35
RO/DIO control Bit 0 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 87). 40
word bit0
RO/DIO control Bit 1 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 87). 41
word bit1
RO/DIO control Bit 2 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 87). 42
word bit2
RO/DIO control Not applicable for ACS580MV. 43
word bit8
RO/DIO control Not applicable for ACS580MV. 44
word bit9
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
100 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
14.12 DIO1 ON delay (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) 0.0 s
Defines the activation delay for digital input/output DIO1.

1
*DIO status
0

1
**Delayed DIO
status 0

Time
tOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn = 14.12 DIO1 ON delay

tOff = 14.13 DIO1 OFF delay
*Electrical status of DIO (in input mode) or status of selected source (in output mode).
Indicated by 14.05 DIO status.
**Indicated by 14.06 DIO delayed status.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for DIO1. 10 = 1 s
14.13 DIO1 OFF delay (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) 0.0 s
Defines the deactivation delay for digital input/output
DIO1. See parameter 14.12 DIO1 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for DIO1. 10 = 1 s
14.14 DIO2 function (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) Input
Selects whether DIO2 of the extension module is used as
a digital input or output.
Output DIO2 is used as a digital output. 0
Input DIO2 is used as a digital input. 1
14.15 DIO2 filter gain (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11) 7.5 us
Determines a filtering time for DIO2 when it is used as an
input.
7.5 us 7.5 microseconds. 0
195 us 195 microseconds. 1
780 us 780 microseconds. 2
4.680 ms 4.680 milliseconds. 3
14.16 DIO2 output source (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) Not
Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital energized
input/output DIO2 when parameter 14.14 DIO2 function is
set to Output.
For the available selections, see parameter 14.11 DIO1
output source.
 Parameters 101

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
14.17 DIO2 ON delay (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) 0.0 s
Defines the activation delay for digital input/output DIO2.

1
*DIO status
0

1
**Delayed DIO
status 0

Time
tOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn = 14.17 DIO2 ON delay

tOff = 14.18 DIO2 OFF delay
*Electrical status of DIO (in input mode) or status of selected source (in output mode).
Indicated by 14.05 DIO status.
**Indicated by 14.06 DIO delayed status.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for DIO2. 10 = 1 s
14.18 DIO2 OFF delay (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) 0.0 s
Defines the deactivation delay for digital input/output
DIO2. See parameter 14.17 DIO2 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for DIO2. 10 = 1 s
14.19 DIO3 function (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01) Input
Selects whether DIO3 of the extension module is used as
a digital input or output.
Output DIO3 is used as a digital output. 0
Input DIO3 is used as a digital input. 1
14.19 AI supervision (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) No action
function Selects how the drive reacts when an analog input signal
moves out of the minimum and/or maximum limits
specified for the input.
The inputs and the limits to be observed are selected by
parameter 14.20 AI supervision selection.
No action No action taken. 0
Fault Drive trips on 80A0 AI supervision. 1
Warning Drive generates an A8A0 AI supervision warning. 2
Last speed Drive generates a warning (A8A0 AI supervision) and 3
freezes the speed (or frequency) to the level the drive was
operating at. The speed/frequency is determined on the
basis of actual speed using 850 ms low-pass filtering.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
Speed ref safe Drive generates a warning (A8A0 AI supervision) and sets 4
the speed to the speed defined by parameter 22.41 Speed
ref safe (or 28.41 Frequency ref safe when frequency
reference is being used).
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
102 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
14.20 AI supervision (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0000h
selection Specifies the analog input limits to be supervised. See
parameter 14.19 AI supervision function.

Bit Name Description

0 AI1 < MIN 1 = Minimum limit supervision of AI1 active.
1 AI1 > MAX 1 = Maximum limit supervision of AI1 active.
2 AI2 < MIN 1 = Minimum limit supervision of AI2 active.
3 AI2 > MAX 1 = Maximum limit supervision of AI2 active.
4 AI3 < MIN 1 = Minimum limit supervision of AI3 active(FIO-11 only).
5 AI3 < MIN 1 = Maximum limit supervision of AI3 active(FIO-11 only).
6…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Activation of analog input supervision. 1=1

14.21 DIO3 output source (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01) Not
Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital energized
input/output DIO3 when parameter 14.19 DIO3 function is
set to Output.
For the available selections, see parameter 14.11 DIO1
output source.
14.21 Al tune (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type =FIO-11or FAIO-01) No action
Triggers the analog input tuning function, which enables
the use of actual measurements as the minimum and
maximum input values instead of potentally inaccurate
estimates.
Apply the minimum or maximum signal to the input and
select the appropriate tuning function.
See also the drawing at parameter 14.35 AI1 scaled at AI1
min.
No action Tuning action completed or no action has been 0
requested.The parameter automatially reverts to this
value after any tuning action.
AI1 min tune The measured value of Al1 is set as the minimum value of 1
Al1 into parameter 14.33 AI1 min.
AI1 max tune The measured value of Al1 is set as the maximum value of 2
Al1 into parameter 14.34 AI1 max.
AI2 min tune The measured value of Al2 is set as the minimum value of 3
Al2 into parameter 14.48 AI2 min.
AI2 max tune The measured value of Al2 is set as the maximum value of 4
Al2 into parameter 14.49 AI2 max.
AI3 min tune The measured value of Al3 is set as the minimum value of 5
Al3 into parameter 14.63 AI3 min.
AI3 max tune The measured value of Al3 is set as the maximum value of 6
Al3 into parameter 14.64 AI3 max.
 Parameters 103

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
14.22 DIO3 ON delay (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
Defines the activation delay for digital input/output
DIO3.

1
*DIO status
0

1
**Delayed DIO
status 0

Time
tOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn = 14.22 DIO3 ON delay

tOff = 14.23 DIO3 OFF delay
*Electrical status of DIO (in input mode) or status of selected source (in output mode).
Indicated by 14.05 DIO status.
**Indicated by 14.06 DIO delayed status.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for DIO3. 10 = 1 s
14.22 AI force selection (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0000h
The true readings of the analog inputs can be overridden
for eg. testing purposes. A forced value parameter is
provided for each analog input, and its value is applied
whenever the corresponding bit in this parameter is 1.

Bit Value
0 1 = Force AI1 to value of parameter 14.28 AI1 force data.
1 1 = Force AI2 to value of parameter 14.43 AI2 force data.
2 1 = Force AI3 to value of parameter 14.58 AI3 force data (FIO-11 only).
3…15 Reserved.

0000h … FFFFh Forced values selector for analog inputs. 1=1

14.23 DIO3 OFF delay (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
Defines the deactivation delay for digital input/output
DIO3. See parameter 14.22 DIO3 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for DIO3. 10 = 1 s
14.24 DIO4 function (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01) Input
Selects whether DIO4 of the extension module is used as
a digital input or output.
Output DIO4 is used as a digital output. 0
Input DIO4 is used as a digital input. 1
14.26 DIO4 output source (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01) Not
Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital energized
input/output DIO4 when parameter 14.24 DIO4 function
is set to Output.
For the available selections, see parameter 14.11 DIO1
output source.
104 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
14.26 AI1 actual value (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
Displays the value of analog input AI1 in mA or V
(depending on whether the input is set to current or
voltage).
This parameter is read-only.
-22.000 … 22.000 Value of analog input AI1. 1000 = 1
mA or V mA or V
14.27 DIO4 ON delay (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
Defines the activation delay for digital input/output
DIO4.

1
*DIO status
0

1
**Delayed DIO
status 0

Time
tOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn = 14.27 DIO4 ON delay

tOff = 14.28 DIO4 OFF delay
*Electrical status of DIO (in input mode) or status of selected source (in output mode).
Indicated by 14.05 DIO status.
**Indicated by 14.06 DIO delayed status.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for DIO4. 10 = 1 s
14.27 AI1 scaled value (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
Displays the value of analog input AI1 after scaling. See
parameter 14.35 AI1 scaled at AI1 min.
This parameter is read-only.
-32768.000 … Scaled value of analog input AI1. 1=1
32767.000
14.28 DIO4 OFF delay (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
Defines the deactivation delay for digital input/output
DIO4. See parameter 14.27 DIO4 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for DIO4. 10 = 1 s
14.28 AI1 force data (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
Forced value that can be used instead of the true reading
of the input. See parameter 14.22 AI force selection.
-22.000 … 22.000 Forced value of analog input AI1. 1000 = 1
mA or V mA or V
14.29 AI1 HW switch (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
position Shows the position of the hardware current/voltage
selector on the I/O extension module.
Note: The setting of the current/voltage selector must
match the unit selection made in parameter 14.30 AI1 unit
selection. I/O module reboot either by cycling the power
or through parameter 96.08 Control board boot is
required to validate any changes in the hardware
settings.
V Volts. 2
 Parameters 105

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
mA Milliamperes. 10
14.30 AI1 unit selection (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) V
Selects the unit for readings and settings related to
analog input AI1.
Note: This setting must match the corresponding
hardware setting on the I/O extension module (see the
manual of the I/O extension module). The hardware
setting is shown by parameter 14.29 AI1 HW switch
position. I/O module reboot either by cycling the power
or through parameter 96.08 Control board boot is
required to validate any changes in the hardware
settings.
V Volts. 2
mA Milliamperes. 10
14.31 RO status (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01) -
Status of relay outputs on the I/O extension module.
Example: 00000001b = RO1 is energized, RO2 is de-
energized.
0000h…FFFFh Status of relay outputs. 1=1
14.31 AI1 filter gain (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) No
Selects a hardware filtering time for AI1. filtering
See also parameter 14.32 AI1 filter time.
No filtering No filtering. 0
125 us 125 microseconds. 1
250 us 250 microseconds. 2
500 us 500 microseconds. 3
1 ms 1 millisecond. 4
2 ms 2 milliseconds. 5
4 ms 4 milliseconds. 6
7.9375 ms 7.9375 milliseconds. 7
106 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
14.32 AI1 filter time (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.040 s
Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI1.

%
Unfiltered signal
100

63 Filtered signal

t
T

O = I × (1 - e-t/T)

I = filter input (step)

O = filter output
t = time
T = filter time constant

Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface

hardware. See parameter 14.31 AI1 filter gain.
0.000 … 30.000 s Filter time constant. 1000 = 1 s
14.33 AI1 min (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
Defines the minimum value for analog input AI1. or V
-22.000 … 22.000 Minimum value of AI1. 1000 = 1
mA or V mA or V
14.34 RO1 source (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01) Not
Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO1. energized
For the available selections, see parameter 14.11 DIO1
output source.
14.34 AI1 max (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 10.000
Defines the maximum value for analog input AI1. mA or V
-22.000 … 22.000 Maximum value of AI1. 1000 = 1
mA or V mA or V
14.35 RO1 ON delay (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
Defines the activation delay for relay output RO1.

1
Status of
selected source
0

1
RO status
0

Time
tOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn = 14.35 RO1 ON delay

tOff = 14.36 RO1 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for RO1. 10 = 1 s
 Parameters 107

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
14.35 AI1 scaled at AI1 min (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000
Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum
analog input AI1 value defined by parameter 14.33 AI1 min.
AIscaled (14.27)

14.36

AIin (14.26)
14.33
14.34

14.35

-32768.000 … Real value corresponding to minimum AI1 value. 1=1

32767.000
14.36 RO1 OFF delay (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO1. See
parameter 14.35 RO1 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for RO1. 10 = 1 s
14.36 AI1 scaled at AI1 max (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 100.000
Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum
analog input AI1 value defined by parameter 14.34 AI1
max. See the drawing at parameter 14.35 AI1 scaled at AI1
min.
-32768.000 … Real value corresponding to maximum AI1 value. 1=1
32767.000
14.37 RO2 source (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01) Not
Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO2. energized
For the available selections, see parameter 14.11 DIO1
output source.
14.38 RO2 ON delay (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
Defines the activation delay for relay output RO2.

1
Status of
selected source
0

1
RO status
0

Time
tOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn = 14.38 RO2 ON delay

tOff = 14.39 RO2 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for RO2. 10 = 1 s
108 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
14.39 RO2 OFF delay (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO2. See
parameter 14.38 RO2 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for RO2. 10 = 1 s
14.41 AI2 actual value (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
Displays the value of analog input AI2 in mA or V
(depending on whether the input is set to current or
voltage).
This parameter is read-only.
-22.000 … 22.000 Value of analog input AI2. 1000 = 1
mA or V mA or V
14.42 AI2 scaled value (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
Displays the value of analog input AI2 after scaling. See
parameter 14.50 AI2 scaled at AI2 min.
This parameter is read-only.
-32768.000 … Scaled value of analog input AI2. 1=1
32767.000
14.43 AI2 force data (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
Forced value that can be used instead of the true reading
of the input. See parameter 14.22 AI force selection.
-22.000 … 22.000 Forced value of analog input AI2. 1000 = 1
mA or V mA or V
14.44 AI2 HW switch (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
position Shows the position of the hardware current/voltage
selector on the I/O extension module.
Note: The setting of the current/voltage selector must
match the unit selection made in parameter 14.45 AI2 unit
selection. I/O module reboot either by cycling the power
or through parameter 96.08 Control board boot is
required to validate any changes in the hardware
settings.
V Volts. 2
mA Milliamperes. 10
14.45 AI2 unit selection (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) mA
Selects the unit for readings and settings related to
analog input AI2.
Note: This setting must match the corresponding
hardware setting on the I/O extension module (see the
manual of the I/O extension module). The hardware
setting is shown by parameter 14.44 AI2 HW switch
position. I/O module reboot either by cycling the power
or through parameter 96.08 Control board boot is
required to validate any changes in the hardware
settings.
V Volts. 2
mA Milliamperes. 10
14.46 AI2 filter gain (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) No
Selects a hardware filtering time for AI2. filtering
See also parameter 14.47 AI2 filter time.
No filtering No filtering. 0
125 us 125 microseconds. 1
 Parameters 109

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
250 us 250 microseconds. 2
500 us 500 microseconds. 3
1 ms 1 millisecond. 4
2 ms 2 milliseconds. 5
4 ms 4 milliseconds. 6
7.9375 ms 7.9375 milliseconds. 7
14.47 AI2 filter time (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.100 s
Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI2.

%
Unfiltered signal
100

63 Filtered signal

t
T

O = I × (1 - e-t/T)

I = filter input (step)

O = filter output
t = time
T = filter time constant

Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface

hardware. See parameter 14.46 AI2 filter gain.
0.000 … 30.000 s Filter time constant. 1000 = 1 s
14.48 AI2 min (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
Defines the minimum value for analog input AI2. or V
-22.000 … 22.000 Minimum value of AI2. 1000 = 1
mA or V mA or V
14.49 AI2 max (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 10.000
Defines the maximum value for analog input AI2. mA or V
-22.000 … 22.000 Maximum value of AI2. 1000 = 1
mA or V mA or V
110 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
14.50 AI2 scaled at AI2 min (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000
Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum
analog input AI2 value defined by parameter 14.48 AI2
min.
AIscaled (14.42)

14.51

AIin (14.41)
14.48
14.49

14.50

-32768.000 … Real value corresponding to minimum AI2 value. 1=1

32767.000
14.51 AI2 scaled at AI2 max (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 100.000
Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum
analog input AI2 value defined by parameter 14.49 AI2
max. See the drawing at parameter 14.50 AI2 scaled at AI2
min.
-32768.000 … Real value corresponding to maximum AI2 value. 1=1
32767.000
14.56 AI3 actual value (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11) -
Displays the value of analog input AI3 in mA or V
(depending on whether the input is set to current or
voltage).
This parameter is read-only.
-22.000 … 22.000 Value of analog input AI3. 1000 = 1
mA or V mA or V
14.57 AI3 scaled value (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11) -
Displays the value of analog input AI3 after scaling. See
parameter 14.65 AI3 scaled at AI3 min.
This parameter is read-only.
-32768.000 … Scaled value of analog input AI3. 1=1
32767.000
14.58 AI3 force data (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11) 0.000 mA
Forced value that can be used instead of the true reading
of the input. See parameter 14.22 AI force selection.
-22.000 … 22.000 Forced value of analog input AI3. 1000 = 1
mA or V mA or V
 Parameters 111

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
14.59 AI3 HW switch (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11) -
position Shows the position of the hardware current/voltage
selector on the I/O extension module.
Note: The setting of the current/voltage selector must
match the unit selection made in parameter 14.60 AI3 unit
selection. I/O module reboot either by cycling the power
or through parameter 96.08 Control board boot is
required to validate any changes in the hardware
settings.
V Volts. 2
mA Milliamperes. 10
14.60 AI3 unit selection (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11) mA
Selects the unit for readings and settings related to
analog input AI3.
Note: This setting must match the corresponding
hardware setting on the I/O extension module (see the
manual of the I/O extension module). The hardware
setting is shown by parameter 14.59 AI3 HW switch
position. I/O module reboot either by cycling the power
or through parameter 96.08 Control board boot is
required to validate any changes in the hardware
settings.
V Volts. 2
mA Milliamperes. 10
14.61 AI3 filter gain (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11) No
Selects a hardware filtering time for AI3. filtering
See also parameter 14.62 AI3 filter time.
No filtering No filtering. 0
125 us 125 microseconds. 1
250 us 250 microseconds. 2
500 us 500 microseconds. 3
1 ms 1 millisecond. 4
2 ms 2 milliseconds. 5
4 ms 4 milliseconds. 6
7.9375 ms 7.9375 milliseconds. 7
112 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
14.62 AI3 filter time (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11) 0.100 s
Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI3.

%
Unfiltered signal
100

63 Filtered signal

t
T

O = I × (1 - e-t/T)

I = filter input (step)

O = filter output
t = time
T = filter time constant

Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface

hardware. See parameter 14.61 AI3 filter gain.
0.000 … 30.000 s Filter time constant. 1000 = 1 s
14.63 AI3 min (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11) 0.000 mA
Defines the minimum value for analog input AI3. or V
-22.000 … 22.000 Minimum value of AI3. 1000 = 1
mA or V mA or V
14.64 AI3 max (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11) 10.000
Defines the maximum value for analog input AI3. mA or V
-22.000 … 22.000 Maximum value of AI3. 1000 = 1
mA or V mA or V
 Parameters 113

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
14.65 AI3 scaled at AI3 min (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11) 0.000
Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum
analog input AI3 value defined by parameter 14.63 AI3
min.
AIscaled (14.57)

14.66

AIin (14.56)
14.63
14.64

14.65

-32768.000 … Real value corresponding to minimum AI3 value. 1=1

32767.000
14.66 AI3 scaled at AI3 max (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11) 100.000
Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum
analog input AI3 value defined by parameter 14.64 AI3
max. See the drawing at parameter 14.65 AI3 scaled at AI3
min.
-32768.000 … Real value corresponding to maximum AI3 value. 1=1
32767.000
14.71 AO force selection (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 00b
The value of the analog output can be overridden for eg.
testing purposes. A forced value parameter (14.78 AO1
force data) is provided for the analog output, and its
value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this
parameter is 1.

Bit Value
0 1 = Force AO1 to value of parameter 14.78 AO1 force data.
1 1 = Force AO2 to value of parameter 14.88 AO2 force data (FAIO-01 only).
2…31 Reserved.

00b…11b Forced values selector for analog outputs. 1=1

14.76 AO1 actual value (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
Displays the value of AO1 in mA.
This parameter is read-only.
0.000 … 22.000 mA Value of AO1. 1000 = 1
mA
114 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
14.77 AO1 source (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) Zero
Selects a signal to be connected to analog output AO1.
Alternatively, sets the output to excitation mode to feed a
constant current to a temperature sensor.
Zero None. 0
Motor speed used 01.01 Motor speed used (page 59). 1
Output frequency 01.06 Output frequency (page 59). 3
Motor current 01.07 Motor current (page 59). 4
Motor torque 01.10 Motor torque (page 59). 6
DC voltage 01.11 DC voltage (page 59). 7
Power inu out 01.14 Output power (page 60). 8
Speed ref ramp in 23.01 Speed ref ramp input (page 151). 10
Speed ref ramp out 23.02 Speed ref ramp output (page 151). 11
Speed ref used 24.01 Used speed reference (page 145). 12
Torq ref used 26.02 Torque reference used (page 161). 13
Freq ref used 28.02 Frequency ref ramp output (page 180). 14
Force PT100 The output is used to feed an excitation current to 1…3 20
excitation Pt100 sensors. See section Motor thermal protection
(page 46).
Force KTY84 The output is used to feed an excitation current to a 21
excitation KTY84 sensor. See section Motor thermal protection
(page 46).
Force PTC excitation The output is used to feed an excitation current to 1…3 22
PTC sensors. See section Motor thermal protection (page
46).
Force Pt1000 The output is used to feed an excitation current to 1…3 23
excitation Pt1000 sensors. See section Motor thermal protection
(page 46).
AO1 data storage 13.91 AO1 data storage (page 97). 37
AO2 data storage 13.92 AO2 data storage (page 97). 38
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
14.78 AO1 force data (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
Forced value that can be used instead of the selected
output signal. See parameter 14.71 AO force selection.
0.000 … 22.000 mA Forced value of analog output AO1. 1000 = 1
mA
 Parameters 115

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
14.79 AO1 filter time (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.100 s
Defines the filtering time constant for analog output AO1.

%
Unfiltered signal
100

63 Filtered signal

t
T
O = I × (1 - e-t/T)

I = filter input (step)

O = filter output
t = time
T = filter time constant

0.000 … 30.000 s Filter time constant. 1000 = 1 s

116 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
14.80 AO1 source min (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.0
Defines the real value of the signal (selected by parameter
14.77 AO1 source) that corresponds to the minimum AO1
output value (defined by parameter 14.82 AO1 out at AO1
src min).
IAO1 (mA)

14.83

14.82

14.80 14.81 Signal (real)

selected by par.
14.77
IAO1 (mA)

14.83

14.82

14.81 14.80 Signal (real)

selected by par.
14.77

-32768.0 … 32767.0 Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO1 output 1=1
value.
14.81 AO1 source max (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 100.0
Defines the real value of the signal (selected by parameter
14.77 AO1 source) that corresponds to the maximum AO1
output value (defined by parameter 14.83 AO1 out at AO1
src max). See parameter 14.80 AO1 source min.
-32768.0 … 32767.0 Real signal value corresponding to maximum AO1 output 1=1
value.
14.82 AO1 out at AO1 src (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
min Defines the minimum output value for analog output AO1.
See also drawing at parameter 14.80 AO1 source min.
0.000 … 22.000 mA Minimum AO1 output value. 1000 = 1
mA
14.83 AO1 out at AO1 src (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 10.000
max Defines the maximum output value for analog output mA
AO1.
See also drawing at parameter 14.80 AO1 source min.
0.000 … 22.000 mA Maximum AO1 output value. 1000 = 1
mA
 Parameters 117

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
14.86 AO2 actual value (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FAIO-01) -
Displays the value of AO2 in mA.
This parameter is read-only.
0.000 … 22.000 mA Value of AO2. 1000 = 1
mA
14.87 AO2 source (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FAIO-01) Zero
Selects a signal to be connected to analog output AO2.
Alternatively, sets the output to excitation mode to feed a
constant current to a temperature sensor.
Zero None. 0
Motor speed used 01.01 Motor speed used (page 59). 1
Output frequency 01.06 Output frequency (page 59). 3
Motor current 01.07 Motor current (page 59). 4
Motor torque 01.10 Motor torque (page 59). 6
DC voltage 01.11 DC voltage (page 59). 7
Power inu out 01.14 Output power (page 60). 8
Speed ref ramp in 23.01 Speed ref ramp input (page 151). 10
Speed ref ramp out 23.02 Speed ref ramp output (page 151). 11
Speed ref used 24.01 Used speed reference (page 145). 12
Torq ref used 26.02 Torque reference used (page 161). 13
Freq ref used 28.02 Frequency ref ramp output (page 180). 14
Force PT100 The output is used to feed an excitation current to 1…3 20
excitation Pt100 sensors. See section Motor thermal protection
(page 46).
Force KTY84 The output is used to feed an excitation current to a 21
excitation KTY84 sensor. See section Motor thermal protection
(page 46).
Force PTC excitation The output is used to feed an excitation current to 1…3 22
PTC sensors. See section Motor thermal protection (page
46).
Force Pt1000 The output is used to feed an excitation current to 1…3 23
excitation Pt1000 sensors. See section Motor thermal protection
(page 46).
AO1 data storage 13.91 AO1 data storage (page 97). 37
AO2 data storage 13.92 AO2 data storage (page 97). 38
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
14.88 AO2 force data (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
Forced value that can be used instead of the selected
output signal. See parameter 14.71 AO force selection.
0.000 … 22.000 mA Forced value of analog output AO2. 1000 = 1
mA
118 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
14.89 AO2 filter time (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FAIO-01) 0.100 s
Defines the filtering time constant for analog output AO2.

%
Unfiltered signal
100

63 Filtered signal

t
T
O = I × (1 - e-t/T)

I = filter input (step)

O = filter output
t = time
T = filter time constant

0.000 … 30.000 s Filter time constant. 1000 = 1 s

 Parameters 119

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
14.90 AO2 source min (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FAIO-01) 0.0
Defines the real value of the signal (selected by parameter
14.87 AO2 source) that corresponds to the minimum AO2
output value (defined by parameter 14.92 AO2 out at AO2
src min).
IAO1 (mA)

14.93

14.92

14.90 14.91 Signal (real)

selected by par.
14.87
IAO1 (mA)

14.93

14.92

14.91 14.90 Signal (real)

selected by par.
14.87

-32768.0 … 32767.0 Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO2 output 1=1
value.
14.91 AO2 source max (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FAIO-01) 100.0
Defines the real value of the signal (selected by parameter
14.87 AO2 source) that corresponds to the maximum AO2
output value (defined by parameter 14.93 AO2 out at AO2
src max). See parameter 14.90 AO2 source min.
-32768.0 … 32767.0 Real signal value corresponding to maximum AO2 output 1=1
value.
14.92 AO2 out at AO2 src (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
min Defines the minimum output value for analog output AO2.
See also drawing at parameter 14.90 AO2 source min.
0.000 … 22.000 mA Minimum AO2 output value. 1000 = 1
mA
14.93 AO2 out at AO2 src (Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FAIO-01) 10.000
max Defines the maximum output value for analog output mA
AO2.
See also drawing at parameter 14.90 AO2 source min.
0.000 … 22.000 mA Maximum AO2 output value. 1000 = 1
mA
120 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
15
15 I/O extension module Configuration of I/O extension module 2.
2 See also section Programmable I/O extensions (page 27).
Note: The contents of the parameter group vary
according to the selected I/O extension module type.
15.01 Module 2 type See parameter 14.01 Module 1 type. None
15.02 Module 2 location See parameter 14.02 Module 1 location. Slot 1
15.03 Module 2 status See parameter 14.03 Module 1 status. No option
15.05 DIO status (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) -
See parameter 14.05 DIO status.
15.06 DIO delayed status (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) -
See parameter 14.06 DIO delayed status.
15.08 DIO filter time (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) 10.0 ms
See parameter 14.08 DIO filter time.
15.09 DIO1 function (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) Input
See parameter 14.09 DIO1 function.
15.10 DIO1 filter gain (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11) 7.5 us
See parameter 14.10 DIO1 filter gain.
15.11 DIO1 output source (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) Not
See parameter 14.11 DIO1 output source. energized
15.12 DIO1 ON delay (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.12 DIO1 ON delay.
15.13 DIO1 OFF delay (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.13 DIO1 OFF delay.
15.14 DIO2 function (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) Input
See parameter 14.14 DIO2 function.
15.15 DIO2 filter gain (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11) 7.5 us
See parameter 14.15 DIO2 filter gain.
15.16 DIO2 output source (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) Not
See parameter 14.16 DIO2 output source. energized
15.17 DIO2 ON delay (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.17 DIO2 ON delay.
15.18 DIO2 OFF delay (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.18 DIO2 OFF delay.
15.19 DIO3 function (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01) Input
See parameter 14.19 DIO3 function.
15.19 AI supervision (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) No action
function See parameter 14.19 AI supervision function.
15.20 AI supervision (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0000h
selection See parameter 14.20 AI supervision selection.
15.21 DIO3 output source (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01) Not
See parameter 14.21 DIO3 output source. energized
15.22 DIO3 ON delay (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.22 DIO3 ON delay.
15.22 AI force selection (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0000000
See parameter 14.22 AI force selection. 0h
 Parameters 121

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
15.23 DIO3 OFF delay (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.23 DIO3 OFF delay.
15.24 DIO4 function (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01) Input
See parameter 14.24 DIO4 function.
15.26 DIO4 output source (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01) Not
See parameter 14.26 DIO4 output source. energized
15.26 AI1 actual value (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
See parameter 14.26 AI1 actual value.
15.27 DIO4 ON delay (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.27 DIO4 ON delay.
15.27 AI1 scaled value (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
See parameter 14.27 AI1 scaled value.
15.28 DIO4 OFF delay (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.28 DIO4 OFF delay.
15.28 AI1 force data (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
See parameter 14.28 AI1 force data.
15.29 AI1 HW switch (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
position See parameter 14.29 AI1 HW switch position.
15.30 AI1 unit selection (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) mA
See parameter 14.30 AI1 unit selection.
15.31 RO status (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01) -
See parameter 14.31 RO status.
15.31 AI1 filter gain (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) No
See parameter 14.31 AI1 filter gain. filtering
15.32 AI1 filter time (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.040 s
See parameter 14.32 AI1 filter time.
15.33 AI1 min (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
See parameter 14.33 AI1 min. or V
15.34 RO1 source (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01) Not
See parameter 14.34 RO1 source. energized
15.34 AI1 max (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 10.000
See parameter 14.34 AI1 max. mA or V
15.35 RO1 ON delay (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.35 RO1 ON delay.
15.35 AI1 scaled at AI1 min (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000
See parameter 14.35 AI1 scaled at AI1 min.
15.36 RO1 OFF delay (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.36 RO1 OFF delay.
15.36 AI1 scaled at AI1 max (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 100.000
See parameter 14.36 AI1 scaled at AI1 max.
15.37 RO2 source (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01) Not
See parameter 14.37 RO2 source. energized
15.38 RO2 ON delay (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.38 RO2 ON delay.
15.39 RO2 OFF delay (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.39 RO2 OFF delay.
122 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
15.41 AI2 actual value (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
See parameter 14.41 AI2 actual value.
15.42 AI2 scaled value (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
See parameter 14.42 AI2 scaled value.
15.43 AI2 force data (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
See parameter 14.43 AI2 force data.
15.44 AI2 HW switch (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
position See parameter 14.44 AI2 HW switch position.
15.45 AI2 unit selection (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) mA
See parameter 14.45 AI2 unit selection.
15.46 AI2 filter gain (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) No
See parameter 14.46 AI2 filter gain. filtering
15.47 AI2 filter time (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.100 s
See parameter 14.47 AI2 filter time.
15.48 AI2 min (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
See parameter 14.48 AI2 min. or V
15.49 AI2 max (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 10.000
See parameter 14.49 AI2 max. mA or V
15.50 AI2 scaled at AI2 min (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000
See parameter 14.50 AI2 scaled at AI2 min.
15.51 AI2 scaled at AI2 max (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 100.000
See parameter 14.51 AI2 scaled at AI2 max.
15.56 AI3 actual value (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11) -
See parameter 14.56 AI3 actual value.
15.57 AI3 scaled value (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11) -
See parameter 14.57 AI3 scaled value.
15.58 AI3 force data (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11) 0.000 mA
See parameter 14.58 AI3 force data.
15.59 AI3 HW switch (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11) -
position See parameter 14.59 AI3 HW switch position.
15.60 AI3 unit selection (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11) mA
See parameter 14.60 AI3 unit selection.
15.61 AI3 filter gain (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11) No
See parameter 14.61 AI3 filter gain. filtering
15.62 AI3 filter time (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11) 0.100 s
See parameter 14.62 AI3 filter time.
15.63 AI3 min (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11) 0.000 mA
See parameter 14.63 AI3 min. or V
15.64 AI3 max (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11) 10.000
See parameter 14.64 AI3 max. mA or V
15.65 AI3 scaled at AI3 min (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11) 0.000
See parameter 14.65 AI3 scaled at AI3 min.
15.66 AI3 scaled at AI3 max (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11) 100.000
See parameter 14.66 AI3 scaled at AI3 max.
15.71 AO force selection (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 00b
See parameter 14.71 AO force selection.
 Parameters 123

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
15.76 AO1 actual value (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
See parameter 14.76 AO1 actual value.
15.77 AO1 source (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) Zero
See parameter 14.77 AO1 source.
15.78 AO1 force data (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
See parameter 14.78 AO1 force data.
15.79 AO1 filter time (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.100 s
See parameter 14.79 AO1 filter time.
15.80 AO1 source min (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.0
See parameter 14.80 AO1 source min.
15.81 AO1 source max (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 100.0
See parameter 14.81 AO1 source max.
15.82 AO1 out at AO1 src (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
min See parameter 14.82 AO1 out at AO1 src min.
15.83 AO1 out at AO1 src (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 10.000
max See parameter 14.83 AO1 out at AO1 src max. mA
15.86 AO2 actual value (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FAIO-01) -
See parameter 14.86 AO2 actual value.
15.87 AO2 source (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FAIO-01) Zero
See parameter 14.87 AO2 source.
15.88 AO2 force data (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
See parameter 14.88 AO2 force data.
15.89 AO2 filter time (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FAIO-01) 0.100 s
See parameter 14.89 AO2 filter time.
15.90 AO2 source min (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FAIO-01) 0.0
See parameter 14.90 AO2 source min.
15.91 AO2 source max (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FAIO-01) 100.0
See parameter 14.91 AO2 source max.
15.92 AO2 out at AO2 src (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
min See parameter 14.92 AO2 out at AO2 src min.
15.93 AO2 out at AO2 src (Visible when 15.01 Module 2 type = FAIO-01) 10.000
max See parameter 14.93 AO2 out at AO2 src max. mA
16
16 I/O extension module Configuration of I/O extension module 3.
3 See also section Programmable I/O extensions (page 27).
Note: The contents of the parameter group vary
according to the selected I/O extension module type.
16.01 Module 3 type See parameter 14.01 Module 1 type. None
16.02 Module 3 location See parameter 14.02 Module 1 location. Slot 1
16.03 Module 3 status See parameter 14.03 Module 1 status. No option
16.05 DIO status (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) -
See parameter 14.05 DIO status.
16.06 DIO delayed status (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) -
See parameter 14.06 DIO delayed status.
16.08 DIO filter time (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) 10.0 ms
See parameter 14.08 DIO filter time.
124 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
16.09 DIO1 function (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) Input
See parameter 14.09 DIO1 function.
16.10 DIO1 filter gain (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11) 7.5 us
See parameter 14.10 DIO1 filter gain.
16.11 DIO1 output source (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) Not
See parameter 14.11 DIO1 output source. energized
16.12 DIO1 ON delay (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.12 DIO1 ON delay.
16.13 DIO1 OFF delay (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.13 DIO1 OFF delay.
16.14 DIO2 function (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) Input
See parameter 14.14 DIO2 function.
16.15 DIO2 filter gain (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11) 7.5 us
See parameter 14.15 DIO2 filter gain.
16.16 DIO2 output source (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) Not
See parameter 14.16 DIO2 output source. energized
16.17 DIO2 ON delay (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.17 DIO2 ON delay.
16.18 DIO2 OFF delay (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.18 DIO2 OFF delay.
16.19 DIO3 function (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01) Input
See parameter 14.19 DIO3 function.
16.19 AI supervision (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) No action
function See parameter 14.19 AI supervision function.
16.20 AI supervision (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0000h
selection See parameter 14.20 AI supervision selection.
16.21 DIO3 output source (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01) Not
See parameter 14.21 DIO3 output source. energized
16.22 DIO3 ON delay (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.22 DIO3 ON delay.
16.22 AI force selection (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0000000
See parameter 14.22 AI force selection. 0h
16.23 DIO3 OFF delay (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.23 DIO3 OFF delay.
16.24 DIO4 function (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01) Input
See parameter 14.24 DIO4 function.
16.26 DIO4 output source (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01) Not
See parameter 14.26 DIO4 output source. energized
16.26 AI1 actual value (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
See parameter 14.26 AI1 actual value.
16.27 DIO4 ON delay (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.27 DIO4 ON delay.
16.27 AI1 scaled value (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
See parameter 14.27 AI1 scaled value.
16.28 DIO4 OFF delay (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.28 DIO4 OFF delay.
 Parameters 125

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
16.28 AI1 force data (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
See parameter 14.28 AI1 force data.
16.29 AI1 HW switch (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
position See parameter 14.29 AI1 HW switch position.
16.30 AI1 unit selection (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) mA
See parameter 14.30 AI1 unit selection.
16.31 RO status (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11) -
See parameter 14.31 RO status.
16.31 AI1 filter gain (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) No
See parameter 14.31 AI1 filter gain. filtering
16.32 AI1 filter time (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.040 s
See parameter 14.32 AI1 filter time.
16.33 AI1 min (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
See parameter 14.33 AI1 min. or V
16.34 RO1 source (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01) Not
See parameter 14.34 RO1 source. energized
16.34 AI1 max (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 10.000
See parameter 14.34 AI1 max. mA or V
16.35 RO1 ON delay (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.35 RO1 ON delay.
16.35 AI1 scaled at AI1 min (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000
See parameter 14.35 AI1 scaled at AI1 min.
16.36 RO1 OFF delay (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.36 RO1 OFF delay.
16.36 AI1 scaled at AI1 max (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 100.000
See parameter 14.36 AI1 scaled at AI1 max.
16.37 RO2 source (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01) Not
See parameter 14.37 RO2 source. energized
16.38 RO2 ON delay (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.38 RO2 ON delay.
16.39 RO2 OFF delay (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01) 0.0 s
See parameter 14.39 RO2 OFF delay.
16.41 AI2 actual value (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
See parameter 14.41 AI2 actual value.
16.42 AI2 scaled value (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
See parameter 14.42 AI2 scaled value.
16.43 AI2 force data (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
See parameter 14.43 AI2 force data.
16.44 AI2 HW switch (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
position See parameter 14.44 AI2 HW switch position.
16.45 AI2 unit selection (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) mA
See parameter 14.45 AI2 unit selection.
16.46 AI2 filter gain (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) No
See parameter 14.46 AI2 filter gain. filtering
16.47 AI2 filter time (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.100 s
See parameter 14.47 AI2 filter time.
126 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
16.48 AI2 min (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
See parameter 14.48 AI2 min. or V
16.49 AI2 max (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 10.000
See parameter 14.49 AI2 max. mA or V
16.50 AI2 scaled at AI2 min (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000
See parameter 14.50 AI2 scaled at AI2 min.
16.51 AI2 scaled at AI2 max (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 100.000
See parameter 14.51 AI2 scaled at AI2 max.
16.56 AI3 actual value (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11) -
See parameter 14.56 AI3 actual value.
16.57 AI3 scaled value (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11) -
See parameter 14.57 AI3 scaled value.
16.58 AI3 force data (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11) 0.000 mA
See parameter 14.58 AI3 force data.
16.59 AI3 HW switch (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11) -
position See parameter 14.59 AI3 HW switch position.
16.60 AI3 unit selection (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11) mA
See parameter 14.60 AI3 unit selection.
16.61 AI3 filter gain (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11) No
See parameter 14.61 AI3 filter gain. filtering
16.62 AI3 filter time (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11) 0.100 s
See parameter 14.62 AI3 filter time.
16.63 AI3 min (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11) 0.000 mA
See parameter 14.63 AI3 min. or V
16.64 AI3 max (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11) 10.000
See parameter 14.64 AI3 max. mA or V
16.65 AI3 scaled at AI3 min (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11) 0.000
See parameter 14.65 AI3 scaled at AI3 min.
16.66 AI3 scaled at AI3 max (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11) 100.000
See parameter 14.66 AI3 scaled at AI3 max.
16.71 AO force selection (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 00b
See parameter 14.71 AO force selection.
16.76 AO1 actual value (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) -
See parameter 14.76 AO1 actual value.
16.77 AO1 source (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) Zero
See parameter 14.77 AO1 source.
16.78 AO1 force data (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
See parameter 14.78 AO1 force data.
16.79 AO1 filter time (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.100 s
See parameter 14.79 AO1 filter time.
16.80 AO1 source min (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.0
See parameter 14.80 AO1 source min.
16.81 AO1 source max (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 100.0
See parameter 14.81 AO1 source max.
16.82 AO1 out at AO1 src (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
min See parameter 14.82 AO1 out at AO1 src min.
 Parameters 127

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
16.83 AO1 out at AO1 src (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01) 10.000
max See parameter 14.83 AO1 out at AO1 src max. mA
16.86 AO2 actual value (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FAIO-01) -
See parameter 14.86 AO2 actual value.
16.87 AO2 source (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FAIO-01) Zero
See parameter 14.87 AO2 source.
16.88 AO2 force data (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
See parameter 14.88 AO2 force data.
16.89 AO2 filter time (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FAIO-01) 0.100 s
See parameter 14.89 AO2 filter time.
16.90 AO2 source min (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FAIO-01) 0.0
See parameter 14.90 AO2 source min.
16.91 AO2 source max (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FAIO-01) 100.0
See parameter 14.91 AO2 source max.
16.92 AO2 out at AO2 src (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FAIO-01) 0.000 mA
min See parameter 14.92 AO2 out at AO2 src min.
16.93 AO2 out at AO2 src (Visible when 16.01 Module 3 type = FAIO-01) 10.000
max See parameter 14.93 AO2 out at AO2 src max. mA
19
17 Control hub IO Monitoring of Control Hub input/output signals
17.01 Control hub DO Displays the status of the digital outputs on the control -
status hub. The activation/deactivation delays are not used.
Bit 0 indicates the status of DO1.
Note: The number of active bits in this parameter
depends on the number of digital outputs on the control
hub.
Example: 00001001b = DO1 and DO4 are on, remainder
are off.
This parameter is read-only.
0000h…FFFFh Status of control hub digital outputs. 1=1
17.02 Control hub DO Displays selected drive signal to be connected to digital -
source outputs of control hub.
This parameter is read-only.
0000h…FFFFh Signal source for control hub digital outputs. 1=1
17.05 Control hub DI status Displays the status of the digital inputs on the control -
hub. The activation/deactivation delays are not used.
Bit 0 indicates the status of DI1.
Note: The number of active bits in this parameter
depends on the number of digital inputs on the control
hub.
Example: 00001001b = DI1 and DI4 are on, others are off.
This parameter is read-only.
128 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16

Bit Function
0 1 = INU fan 1 status OK
1 1 = INU fan 2 status OK
2 1 = INU fan 3 status OK
3 1 = INU fan 4 status OK
4…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Status of control hub digital inputs 1=1

19
19 Operation mode Selection of local and external control location sources and
operating modes.
See also section Operating modes of the drive (page 18).
19.01 Actual operation Displays the operating mode currently used. -
mode See parameters 19.11…19.14.
This parameter is read-only.
Zero None. 1
Speed Speed control (in DTC motor control mode). 2
Torque Torque control (in vector motor control mode). 3
Min The torque selector is comparing the output of the speed 4
controller (25.01 Torque reference speed control) and
torque reference (26.74 Torque ref ramp out) and the
smaller of the two is used.
Max The torque selector is comparing the output of the speed 5
controller (25.01 Torque reference speed control) and
torque reference (26.74 Torque ref ramp out) and the
greater of the two is used.
Add The speed controller output is added to the torque 6
reference.
Voltage DC voltage control. 7
Scalar (Hz) Frequency control in scalar motor control mode. 10
Scalar (rpm) Speed control in scalar motor control mode. 11
Forced magn. Motor is in magnetizing mode. 20
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection Selects the source for external control location EXT1
EXT1/EXT2 selection.
0 = EXT1
1 = EXT2
EXT1 EXT1 (permanently selected). 0
EXT2 EXT2 (permanently selected). 1
FBA A MCW bit 11 Control word bit 11 received through fieldbus interface A. 2
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 3
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 4
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 5
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 6
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 7
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 8
 Parameters 129

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 12
EFB MCW bit 11 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 32
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
19.12 Ext1 control mode Selects the operating mode for external control location Speed
EXT1.
Zero None. 1
Speed Speed control. The torque reference used is 25.01 Torque 2
reference speed control (output of the speed reference
chain).
Torque Torque control. The torque reference used is 26.74 Torque 3
ref ramp out (output of the torque reference chain).
Minimum Combination of selections Speed and Torque: the torque 4
selector compares the speed controller output (25.01
Torque reference speed control) and the torque reference
(26.74 Torque ref ramp out) and selects the smaller of the
two.
If speed error becomes negative, the drive follows the
speed controller output until speed error becomes
positive again. This prevents the drive from accelerating
uncontrollably if the load is lost in torque control.
Maximum Combination of selections Speed and Torque: the torque 5
selector compares the speed controller output (25.01
Torque reference speed control) and the torque reference
(26.74 Torque ref ramp out) and selects the greater of the
two.
If speed error becomes positive, the drive follows the
speed controller output until speed error becomes
negative again. This prevents the drive from accelerating
uncontrollably if the load is lost in torque control.
Add Combination of selections Speed and Torque: Torque 6
selector adds the speed reference chain output to the
torque reference chain output.
19.14 Ext2 control mode Selects the operating mode for external control location Speed
EXT2.
For the selections, see parameter 19.12 Ext1 control mode.
19.16 Local control mode Selects the operating mode for local control. Speed
Speed Speed control. The torque reference used is 25.01 Torque 0
reference speed control (output of the speed reference
chain).
Torque Torque control. The torque reference used is 26.74 Torque 1
ref ramp out (output of the torque reference chain).
19.17 Local control disable Enables/disables local control (start and stop buttons on No
the control panel, and the local controls on the Drive
composer PC tool).
WARNING! Before disabling local control, ensure
that the control panel is not needed for stopping
the drive.
No Local control enabled. 0
130 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Yes Local control disabled. Note: Make sure P81.15 = 1
"parameter" firstly, and then set P19.17 to YES.
19.20 Scalar control Selects the reference type for scalar motor control mode. Rpm
reference unit See also section Operating modes of the drive (page 18).
Hz Hz. The reference is taken from parameter 28.02 0
Frequency ref ramp output (output of the frequency
control chain).
Rpm Rpm. The reference is taken from parameter 23.02 Speed 1
ref ramp output (speed reference after ramping and
shaping).
20
20 Start/stop/direction Start/stop/direction and run/start/jog enable signal source
selection; positive/negative reference enable signal source
selection.
For information on control locations, see section Local
control vs. external control (page 16).
20.01 Ext1 commands Selects the source of start, stop and direction commands In1 Start;
for external control location 1 (EXT1). In2 Dir
See also parameters 20.02…20.05.
Not selected No start or stop command sources selected. 0
In1 Start The source of the start and stop commands is selected by 1
parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1 source. The state transitions of
the source bits are interpreted as follows:

State of source 1 (20.03) Command

0 -> 1 (20.02 = Edge) Start
1 (20.02 = Level)
0 Stop

In1 Start; In2 Dir The source selected by 20.03 Ext1 in1 source is the start 2
signal; the source selected by 20.04 Ext1 in2 source
determines the direction. The state transitions of the
source bits are interpreted as follows:

State of source 1 State of source 2 Command

(20.03) (20.04)
0 Any Stop
0 -> 1 (20.02 = Edge) 0 Start
1 (20.02 = Level) forward
1 Start
In1 Start fwd; In2 The source selected by 20.03 Ext1 in1 source is the 3
Start rev forward start signal; the source selected by 20.04 Ext1 in2
source is the reverse start signal. The state transitions of
the source bits are interpreted as follows:

State of source 1 State of source 2 Command

(20.03) (20.04)
0 0 Stop
0 -> 1 (20.02 = Edge) 0 Start
1 (20.02 = Level) forward
0 0 -> 1 (20.02 = Edge) Start
1 (20.02 = Level) reverse
1 1 Stop
 Parameters 131

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
In1P Start; In2 Stop The sources of the start and stop commands are selected 4
by parameters 20.03 Ext1 in1 source and 20.04 Ext1 in2
source. The state transitions of the source bits are
interpreted as follows:

State of source 1 State of source 2 Command

(20.03) (20.04)
0 -> 1 1 Start
Any 0 Stop

Notes:
• The start signal is always edge-triggered with this setting
regardless of parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type.
• When source 2 is 0, the Start and Stop keys on the control
panel are disabled.
In1P Start; In2 Stop; The sources of the start and stop commands are selected 5
In3 Dir by parameters 20.03 Ext1 in1 source and 20.04 Ext1 in2
source. The source selected by 20.05 Ext1 in3 source
determines the direction. The state transitions of the
source bits are interpreted as follows:

State of State of State of Command

source 1 source 2 source 3
(20.03) (20.04) (20.05)
0 -> 1 1 0 Start forward
0 -> 1 1 1 Start reverse
Any 0 Any Stop

Notes:
• The start signal is always edge-triggered with this setting
regardless of parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type.
• When source 2 is 0, the Start and Stop keys on the control
panel are disabled.
In1P Start fwd; In2P The sources of the start and stop commands are selected 6
Start rev; In3 Stop by parameters 20.03 Ext1 in1 source, 20.04 Ext1 in2 source
and 20.05 Ext1 in3 source. The state transitions of the
source bits are interpreted as follows:

State of State of State of Command

source 1 source 2 source 3
(20.03) (20.04) (20.05)
0 -> 1 Any 1 Start forward
Any 0 -> 1 1 Start reverse
Any Any 0 Stop

Note: The start signal is always edge-triggered with this

setting regardless of parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger
type.
Control panel The start and stop commands are taken from the control 11
panel.
Fieldbus A The start and stop commands are taken from fieldbus 12
adapter A.
Note: The start signal is always level-triggered with this
setting regardless of parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger
type.
132 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Embedded fieldbus Not applicable for ACS580MV. 14
M/F link The start and stop commands are taken from another 15
drive through the master/follower link.
Note: The start signal is always level-triggered with this
setting regardless of parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger
type.
Application Program Not applicable for ACS580MV. 21
ATF Reserved. 22
DDCS controller Not applicable for ACS580MV. 16
20.02 Ext1 start trigger type Defines whether the start signal for external control Edge
location EXT1 is edge-triggered or level-triggered.
Note: This parameter is only effective when parameter
20.01 Ext1 commands is set to In1 Start, In1 Start; In2 Dir
or In1 Start fwd; In2 Start rev.
Edge The start signal is edge-triggered. 0
Level The start signal is level-triggered. 1
20.03 Ext1 in1 source Selects source 1 for parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands. DI1
Not selected 0 (always off). 0
Selected 1 (always on). 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
20.04 Ext1 in2 source Selects source 2 for parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands. DI2
For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1
source.
20.05 Ext1 in3 source Selects source 3 for parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands. Not
For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1 selected
source.
20.06 Ext2 commands Selects the source of start, stop and direction commands Not
for external control location 2 (EXT2). selected
See also parameters 20.07…20.10.
Not selected No start or stop command sources selected. 0
In1 Start The source of the start and stop commands is selected by 1
parameter 20.08 Ext2 in1 source. The state transitions of
the source bits are interpreted as follows:

State of source 1 (20.08) Command

0 -> 1 (20.07 = Edge) Start
1 (20.07 = Level)
0 Stop
 Parameters 133

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
In1 Start; In2 Dir The source selected by 20.08 Ext2 in1 source is the start 2
signal; the source selected by 20.09 Ext2 in2 source
determines the direction. The state transitions of the
source bits are interpreted as follows:

State of source 1 State of source 2 Command

(20.08) (20.09)
0 Any Stop
0 -> 1 (20.07 = Edge) 0 Start
1 (20.07 = Level) forward
1 Start
In1 Start fwd; In2 The source selected by 20.08 Ext2 in1 source is the 3
Start rev forward start signal; the source selected by 20.09 Ext2 in2
source is the reverse start signal. The state transitions of
the source bits are interpreted as follows:

State of source 1 State of source 2 Command

(20.08) (20.09)
0 0 Stop
0 -> 1 (20.07 = Edge) 0 Start
1 (20.07 = Level) forward
0 0 -> 1 (20.07 = Edge) Start
1 (20.07 = Level) reverse
1 1 Stop

In1P Start; In2 Stop The sources of the start and stop commands are selected 4
by parameters 20.08 Ext2 in1 source and 20.09 Ext2 in2
source. The state transitions of the source bits are
interpreted as follows:

State of source 1 State of source 2 Command

(20.08) (20.09)
0 -> 1 1 Start
Any 0 Stop

Notes:
• The start signal is always edge-triggered with this setting
regardless of parameter 20.07 Ext2 start trigger type.
• When source 2 is 0, the Start and Stop keys on the control
panel are disabled.
134 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
In1P Start; In2 Stop; The sources of the start and stop commands are selected 5
In3 Dir by parameters 20.08 Ext2 in1 source and 20.09 Ext2 in2
source. The source selected by 20.10 Ext2 in3 source
determines the direction. The state transitions of the
source bits are interpreted as follows:

State of State of State of Command

source 1 source 2 source 3
(20.08) (20.09) (20.10)
0 -> 1 1 0 Start forward
0 -> 1 1 1 Start reverse
Any 0 Any Stop

Notes:
• The start signal is always edge-triggered with this setting
regardless of parameter 20.07 Ext2 start trigger type.
• When source 2 is 0, the Start and Stop keys on the control
panel are disabled.
In1P Start fwd; In2P The sources of the start and stop commands are selected 6
Start rev; In3 Stop by parameters 20.08 Ext2 in1 source, 20.09 Ext2 in2
source and 20.10 Ext2 in3 source. The state transitions of
the source bits are interpreted as follows:

State of State of State of Command

source 1 source 2 source 3
(20.08) (20.09) (20.10)
0 -> 1 Any 1 Start forward
Any 0 -> 1 1 Start reverse
Any Any 0 Stop

Note: The start signal is always edge-triggered with this

setting regardless of parameter 20.07 Ext2 start trigger
type.
Control panel The start and stop commands are taken from the control 11
panel.
Fieldbus A The start and stop commands are taken from fieldbus 12
adapter A.
Note: The start signal is always level-triggered with this
setting regardless of parameter 20.07 Ext2 start trigger
type.
Embedded fieldbus Not applicable for ACS580MV. 14
M/F link Not applicable for ACS580MV. 15
Application Program Not applicable for ACS580MV. 21
ATF Reserved. 22
DDCS controller Not applicable for ACS580MV. 16
20.07 Ext2 start trigger type Defines whether the start signal for external control Edge
location EXT2 is edge-triggered or level-triggered.
Note: This parameter is only effective when parameter
20.06 Ext2 commands is set to In1 Start, In1 Start; In2 Dir
or In1 Start fwd; In2 Start rev.
Edge The start signal is edge-triggered. 0
Level The start signal is level-triggered. 1
 Parameters 135

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
20.08 Ext2 in1 source Selects source 1 for parameter 20.06 Ext2 commands. Not
For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1 selected
source.
20.09 Ext2 in2 source Selects source 2 for parameter 20.06 Ext2 commands. Not
For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1 selected
source.
20.10 Ext2 in3 source Selects source 3 for parameter 20.06 Ext2 commands. Not
For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1 selected
source.
20.11 Run enable stop Selects the way the motor is stopped when the run enable Coast
mode signal switches off. The source of the run enable signal is
selected by parameter 20.12 Run enable 1 source.
Coast Stop by switching off the output semiconductors of the
drive.
The motor coasts to a stop.
Ramp Stop along the active deceleration ramp. See parameter
group 23 Speed reference ramp.
Torque limit Stop according to torque limits (parameters 30.19 and
30.20).
20.12 Run enable 1 source Selects the source of the external run enable signal. If the Selected
run enable signal is switched off, the drive will not start. If
already running, the drive will stop according to the
setting of parameter20.11 Run enable stop mode .
1 = Run enable signal on.
Note: The warning that indicates a missing signal can be
suppressed using parameter 20.30 Enable signals
warning function.
See also parameter 20.19 Enable start command .
Not selected 0 0
Selected 1 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
FBA A MCW bit 3 Control word bit 3 received through fieldbus interface A. 30
EFB MCW bit 3 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 32
DIIL Not applicable for ACS580MV. 33
136 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Active control Control word bit 3 received from the active control 34
source MCW bit 3 source.
Notes:
• If the drive is running in fieldbus control, switching bit 3
off effectively removes both the start and run enable
signals.
In this case, the stop mode is determined by either 20.11
Run enable stop mode or 21.03 Stop mode, whichever
mode has higher priority. The order of stop modes from
highest to lowest priority is Coast – Torque limit – Ramp.
• In case the active source is the control panel, PC tool or
drive I/O, the run enable signal is always on.
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
20.19 Enable start Select the source for the start signal. Selected
command 1 = Start enable.
With the signal switched off, any drive start command is
inhibited.
Switching the signal off while the drive is running will not
stop the drive.
Switching the signal off while the drive is charged but not
running will open MCB.
Switching the signal off while the drive is not charged
prevents the MCB from closing as long as this signal
remains 0.
Notes:
• If a level-triggered start command is on when the start
enable signal switches on, the drive will start. (An edge-
triggered start signal must be cycled for the drive to
start.) See parameters 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type,
20.07 Ext2 start trigger type and 20.29 Local start
trigger type.
• The warning that indicates a missing signal can be
suppressed using parameter 20.30 Enable signals
warning function.
See also parameter 20.12 Run enable 1 source.
Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
DIIL Not applicable for ACS580MV. 30
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
 Parameters 137

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
20.23 Positive speed Selects the source of the positive speed enable Selected
enable command.
1 = Positive speed enabled.
0 = Positive speed interpreted as zero speed reference. In
the figure below, 23.01 Speed ref ramp input is set to zero
after the positive speed enable signal has cleared.
Actions in different control modes:
Speed control: Speed reference is set to zero and the
motor is stopped along the currently active deceleration
ramp. The rush controller prevents additional torque
terms from running the motor in the positive direction.
Torque control: The rush controller monitors the rotation
direction of the motor.

20.23 Positive speed enable

20.24 Negative speed

enable

23.01 Speed ref ramp input

01.01 Motor speed used

Example: The motor is rotating in the forward direction.

To stop the motor, the positive speed enable signal is
deactivated by a hardware limit switch (e.g. via digital
input). If the positive speed enable signal remains
deactivated and the negative speed enable signal is
active, only reverse rotation of the motor is allowed.
Not selected 0 0
Selected 1 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
20.24 Negative speed Selects the source of the negative speed reference enable Selected
enable command. See parameter 20.23 Positive speed enable.
138 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
20.25 Jogging enable Selects the source for a jog enable signal. Not
(The sources for jogging activation signals are selected selected
by parameters 20.26 Jogging 1 start source and 20.27
Jogging 2 start source.)
1 = Jogging is enabled.
0 = Jogging is disabled.
Note: Jogging can be enabled only when no start
command from an external control location is active. On
the other hand, if jogging is already enabled, the drive
cannot be started from an external control location (apart
from inching commands through fieldbus).
See section Jogging (page 38).
Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
20.26 Jogging 1 start If enabled by parameter 20.25 Jogging enable, selects the Not
source source for the activation of jogging function 1. (Jogging selected
function 1 can also be activated through fieldbus
regardless of parameter 20.25.)
1 = Jogging 1 active.
Note: If both jogging 1 and 2 are activated, the one that
was activated first has priority.
Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
20.27 Jogging 2 start If enabled by parameter 20.25 Jogging enable, selects the Not
source source for the activation of jogging function 2. (Jogging selected
function 2 can also be activated through fieldbus
regardless of parameter 20.25.)
1 = Jogging 2 active.
For the selections, see parameter 20.26 Jogging 1 start
source.
Note: If both jogging 1 and 2 are activated, the one that
was activated first has priority.
 Parameters 139

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
20.29 Local start trigger Defines whether the start signal for local control (for Edge
type example, control panel or Drive composer PC tool) is
edge-triggered or level-triggered.
Edge The start signal is edge-triggered. 0
Level The start signal is level-triggered. 1
20.30 Enable signals Selects enable signal (eg. run enable, start enable) 00b
warning function warnings to be suppressed. This parameter can be used
to prevent these warnings from flooding the event log.
Whenever a bit of this parameter is set to 1, the
corresponding warning is suppressed, i.e. no warning is
generated even if the signal is switched off.
The bits of this binary number correspond to the
following warnings:

Bit Name Warning

0 Enable Start AFEA Enable operation signal missing
1 Run enable 1 AFEB Run enable missing
2...15 Reserved

00b…11h Suppression of “enable signal missing” warnings. 1=1

21
21 Start/stop mode Start and stop modes; emergency stop mode and signal
source selection; DC magnetization settings.
21.01 Vector Start mode Selects the motor start function for the vector motor Automati
control mode, ie. when 99.04 Motor control mode is set to c
vector.
Note:
• For the scalar motor control mode this parameter has no
effect. Start mode for scalar motor control should be set
in 21.19 Scalar start mode.
• Starting into a rotating motor is not possible when DC
magnetizing is selected (Constant time).
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
See also section DC magnetization (page 40).
Constant time The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before start. 1
The pre-magnetizing time is defined by parameter 21.02
Magnetization time. This mode should be selected if
constant pre-magnetizing time is required. This setting
also guarantees the highest possible break-away torque
when the pre-magnetizing time is set long enough.
Note: This mode cannot be used to start into a rotating
motor.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set
magnetizing time has passed even if motor
magnetization is not completed. In applications
where a full break-away torque is essential, ensure that
the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow
generation of full magnetization and torque.
140 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Automatic Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most 2
cases. It includes the flying start function (starting into a
rotating motor).
Speed searching area is limited by 30.11Minimum speed,
30.12 Maximum speed.
Note: Par1.01 Motor speed used and Par1.02 Motor speed
estimated are not actual motor speed during this ‘speed
searching’ period before actual motor speed found.
21.02 Magnetization time Defines the pre-magnetization time when 5000 ms
• parameter 21.01 Vector Start mode is set to Constant time
(in vector motor control mode), or
• parameter 21.19 Scalar start mode is set to Constant time
(in scalar motor control mode).
After the start command, the drive automatically
premagnetizes the motor for the set time. To ensure full
magnetizing, set this parameter to the same value as, or
higher than, the rotor time constant. If not known, use the
rule-of-thumb value given in the table below:

Motor rated power Constant magnetizing

time
10 to 200 kW > 200 to 1000 ms
200 to 1000 kW > 1000 to 2000 ms

Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive

is running.
0 … 10000 ms Constant DC magnetizing time. 1 = 1 ms
21.03 Stop mode Selects the way the motor is stopped when a stop Coast
command is received.
Coast Stop by switching off the output semiconductors of the 0
drive. The motor coasts to a stop.
WARNING! If a mechanical brake is used, ensure it
is safe to stop the drive by coasting.
Ramp Stop along the active deceleration ramp. See parameter 1
group 23 Speed reference ramp on page 151.
Torque limit Stop according to torque limits (parameters 30.19and 2
30.20).
21.05 Emergency stop Selects the source of the emergency stop signal. Inactive
source 0 = Emergency stop active (true)
1 = Normal operation
Note:
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
Active (false) 0 0
Inactive (true) 1 1
DIIL DIIL input (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 15). 2
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 3
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 4
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 5
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 6
 Parameters 141

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 7
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 8
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 9
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
21.06 Zero speed limit Defines the zero speed limit. The motor is stopped along 30.00 rpm
a speed ramp (when ramped stop is selected) until the
defined zero speed limit is reached. After the zero speed
delay, the motor coasts to a stop.
0.00 … 30000.00 Zero speed limit. See par.
rpm 46.01
142 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
21.07 Zero speed delay Defines the delay for the zero speed delay function. The 0 ms
function is useful in applications where a smooth and
quick restarting is essential. During the delay, the drive
knows the rotor position accurately.
Without zero speed delay:
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along
a ramp. When actual motor speed falls below the value of
parameter 21.06 Zero speed limit, inverter modulation is
stopped and the motor coasts to a standstill.

Speed

Speed controller switched

off: Motor coasts to a stop.

21.06 Zero speed limit

Time

With zero speed delay:

The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along
a ramp. When actual motor speed falls below the value of
parameter 21.06 Zero speed limit, the zero speed delay
function activates. During the delay the function keeps
the speed controller live: the inverter modulates, motor is
magnetized and the drive is ready for a quick restart. Zero
speed delay can be used e.g. with the jogging function.

Speed
Speed controller remains
active. Motor is decelerated
to true zero speed.

21.06 Zero speed limit

Delay Time

0 … 30000 ms Zero speed delay. 1 = 1 ms

21.10 DC current reference Defines the DC current in percent of the motor nominal 30.0%
current. See section DC magnetization (page 40).
0.0 … 100.0% DC current reference 1 = 1%
21.12 Continuous Activates/deactivates (or selects a source that Off
magnetization activates/deactivates) continuous magnetization.
command Not applicable for ACS580.
0 = Normal operation
1 = Magnetization active
Off 0. 0
On 1. 1
 Parameters 143

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
21.19 Scalar start mode Selects the motor start function for the scalar control Normal
mode.
Note:
• The start function for the Vector motor control mode is
selected by parameter 21.01 Vector Start mode.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
See also section DC magnetization (page 40).
Normal Immediate start from zero speed. 0
Constant time The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before start. The pre- 1
magnetizing time is defined by parameter 21.02
Magnetization time. This mode should be selected if
constant pre-magnetizing time is required (e.g. if the
motor start must be synchronized with the release of a
mechanical brake). This setting also guarantees the
highest possible break-away torque when the pre-
magnetizing time is set long enough.
Note: This mode cannot be used to start into a rotating
motor.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set
magnetizing time has passed even if motor
magnetization is not completed. In applications
where a full break-away torque is essential, ensure that
the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow
generation of full magnetization and torque.
Automatic Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most 2
cases. This setting can be used in applications where
flying starts (i.e. starting into a rotating motor) are
required.
Speed searching area is limited by 30.11Minimum speed,
30.12 Maximum speed, 30.13Minimum frequency and
30.14 Maximum frequency.
If scalar speed control mode is selected, speed searching
range is:
{+Max[|Par30.12|,|Par30.11|],-Max[|Par30.12|,|Par30.11|]}.
If scalar frequency control mode is selected, frequency
searching range is:
{+Max[|Par30.14|,|Par30.13|],-Max[|Par30.14|,|Par30.13|]}.
Note: Par1.01 Motor speed used and Par1.02 Motor speed
estimated are not actual motor speed during this ‘speed
searching’ period before actual motor speed found.
22
22 Speed reference Speed reference selectionSee the control chain diagrams
selection on pages 440…442.

22.01 Speed ref unlimited Displays the output of the speed reference selection -
block. See the control chain diagram on page 441.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.00 … Value of the selected speed reference. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
144 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
22.11 Speed ref1 source Selects speed reference source 1. AI1 scaled
Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and
22.12 Speed ref2 source. A digital source selected by 22.14
Speed ref1/2 selection can be used to switch between the
two sources, or a mathematical function (22.13 Speed ref1
function) applied to the two signals to create the
reference.

22.11
22.13
0
AI Ref1
FB
22.81
…… ADD 22.14
Other SUB 0
MUL 22.83
22.12 MIN 1
MAX
0
AI 22.82
FB
……
Other

Zero None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 89). 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 91). 2
FB A ref1 03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 64). 4
FB A ref2 03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 64). 5
EFB ref1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 8
EFB ref2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 9
DDCS ctrl ref1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DDCS ctrl ref2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
M/F reference 1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 12

M/F reference 2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 13

Motor 15
potentiometer Not supported.
PID Not applicable for ACS580MV. 16
Control panel (ref Control panel reference, with initial value from last-used 18
saved) panel
reference. See section Using the control panel as an
external control source.
Control panel (ref Control panel reference, with initial value from previous 19
copied) source or actual value. See section Using the control panel
as an external control source.
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
 Parameters 145

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
22.12 Speed ref2 source Selects speed reference source 2. Zero
For the selections, and a diagram of reference source
selection, see parameter 22.11 Speed ref1 source.
22.13 Speed ref1 function Selects a mathematical function between the reference Ref1
sources selected by parameters 22.11 Speed ref1 source
and 22.12 Speed ref2 source. See diagram at 22.11 Speed
ref1 source.
Ref1 Signal selected by 22.11 Speed ref1 source is used as 0
speed reference 1 as such (no function applied).
Add (ref1 + ref2) The sum of the reference sources is used as speed 1
reference 1.
Sub (ref1 - ref2) The subtraction ([22.11 Speed ref1 source] - [22.12 Speed 2
ref2 source]) of the reference sources is used as speed
reference 1.
Mul (ref1 × ref2) The multiplication of the reference sources is used as 3
speed reference 1.
Min (ref1, ref2) The smaller of the reference sources is used as speed 4
reference 1.
Max (ref1, ref2) The greater of the reference sources is used as speed 5
reference 1.
22.14 Speed ref1/2 Configures the selection between speed references 1 and Follow
selection 2. See diagram at 22.11 Speed ref1 source. Ext1/Ext2
0 = Speed reference 1 selection
1 = Speed reference 2
Speed reference 1 0. 0
Speed reference 2 1. 1
Follow Ext1/Ext2 Speed reference 1 is used when external control location 2
selection EXT1 is active. Speed reference 2 is used when external
control location EXT2 is active.
See also parameter 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection.
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 3
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 4
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 5
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 6
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 7
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 8
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 12
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
22.15 Speed additive 1 Defines a reference to be added to the speed reference Zero
source after reference selection (see page 440).
For the selections, see parameter 22.11 Speed ref1 source.
Note: For safety reasons, the additive is not applied when
any of the stop functions are active.
146 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
22.16 Speed share Defines a scaling factor for the selected speed reference 1.000
(speed reference 1 or 2, multiplied by the defined value).
Speed reference 1 or 2 is selected by parameter 22.14
Speed ref1/2 selection.
-8.000 …8.000 Speed reference scaling factor. 1000 = 1
22.17 Speed additive 2 Defines a reference to be added to the speed reference Zero
source after the speed share function (see page 440).
For the selections, see parameter 22.11 Speed ref1 source.
Note: For safety reasons, the additive is not applied when
any of the stop functions are active.
22.21 Constant speed Determines how constant speeds are selected, and 00b
function whether the rotation direction signal is considered or not
when applying a constant speed.

Bit Name Information

0 Constant 1 = Packed: 7 constant speeds are selectable using the three
speed mode sources defined by parameters 22.22, 22.23 and 22.24.
0 = Separate: Constant speeds 1, 2 and 3 are separately activated by
the sources defined by parameters 22.22, 22.23 and 22.24
respectively. In case of conflict, the constant speed with the smaller
number takes priority.
1 Direction 1 = Start dir: To determine running direction for a constant speed,
enable the sign of the constant speed setting (parameters 22.26…22.32) is
multiplied by the direction signal (forward: +1, reverse: -1). This
effectively allows the drive to have 14 (7 forward, 7 reverse)
constant speeds if all values in 22.26…22.32 are positive.
WARNING: If the direction signal is reverse and the active
constant speed is negative, the drive will run in the forward
direction.
0 = Accord Par: The running direction for the constant speed is
determined by the sign of the constant speed setting (parameters
22.26…22.32).
2…15 Reserved

00b…11b Constant speed configuration word. 1=1

 Parameters 147

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
22.22 Constant speed sel1 When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is DI5
0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant
speed 1.
When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is
1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 22.23 Constant
speed sel2 and 22.24 Constant speed sel3 select three
sources whose states activate constant speeds as
follows:

Source defined Source defined Source defined Constant speed active

by par. 22.22 by par. 22.23 by par. 22.24
0 0 0 None
1 0 0 Constant speed 1
0 1 0 Constant speed 2
1 1 0 Constant speed 3
0 0 1 Constant speed 4
1 0 1 Constant speed 5
0 1 1 Constant speed 6
1 1 1 Constant speed 7

Not selected 0 (always off). 0

Selected 1 (always on). 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
22.23 Constant speed sel2 When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is Not
0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant selected
speed 2.
When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is
1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 22.22 Constant
speed sel1 and 22.24 Constant speed sel3 select three
sources that are used to activate constant speeds. See
table at parameter 22.22 Constant speed sel1.
For the selections, see parameter 22.22 Constant speed
sel1.
22.24 Constant speed sel3 When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is Not
0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant selected
speed 3.
When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is
1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 22.22 Constant
speed sel1 and 22.23 Constant speed sel2 select three
sources that are used to activate constant speeds. See
table at parameter 22.22 Constant speed sel1.
For the selections, see parameter 22.22 Constant speed
sel1.
148 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
22.26 Constant speed 1 Defines constant speed 1 (the speed the motor will turn 300.00
when constant speed 1 is selected). rpm
-30000.00 … Constant speed 1. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
22.27 Constant speed 2 Defines constant speed 2. 0.00 rpm
-30000.00 … Constant speed 2. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
22.28 Constant speed 3 Defines constant speed 3. 0.00 rpm
-30000.00 … Constant speed 3. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
22.29 Constant speed 4 Defines constant speed 4. 0.00 rpm
-30000.00 … Constant speed 4. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
22.30 Constant speed 5 Defines constant speed 5. 0.00 rpm
-30000.00 … Constant speed 5. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
22.31 Constant speed 6 Defines constant speed 6. 0.00 rpm
-30000.00 … Constant speed 6. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
22.32 Constant speed 7 Defines constant speed 7. 0.00 rpm
-30000.00 … Constant speed 7. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
22.41 Speed ref safe Defines a safe speed reference value that is used with 0.00 rpm
supervision functions such as
• 12.03 AI supervision function
• 49.05 Communication loss action
• 50.02 comm loss func
• 50.32 FBA B comm loss func.
-30000.00 … Safe speed reference. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
22.42 Jogging 1 ref Defines the speed reference for jogging function 1. For 0.00 rpm
more information on jogging, see page 38.
-30000.00 … Speed reference for jogging function 1. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
22.43 Jogging 2 ref Defines the speed reference for jogging function 2. For 0.00 rpm
more information on jogging, see page 38.
-30000.00 … Speed reference for jogging function 2. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
 Parameters 149

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
22.51 Critical speed Enables/disables the critical speeds function. Also 00b
function determines whether the specified ranges are effective in
both rotating directions or not.
See also section Critical speeds/frequencies (page 36).

Bit Name Information

0 Enable 1 = Enable: Critical speeds enabled.
0 = Disable: Critical speeds disabled.
1 Sign mode 1 = Signed: The signs of parameters 22.52…22.57 are taken into
account.
0 = Absolute: Parameters 22.52…22.57 are handled as absolute
values. Each range is effective in both directions of rotation.
2…15 Reserved

00b…11b Critical speeds configuration word. 1=1

22.52 Critical speed 1 low Defines the low limit for critical speed range 1. 0.00 rpm
Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of
22.53 Critical speed 1 high.
-30000.00 … Low limit for critical speed 1. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
22.53 Critical speed 1 high Defines the high limit for critical speed range 1. 0.00 rpm
Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the
value of 22.52 Critical speed 1 low.
-30000.00 … High limit for critical speed 1. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
22.54 Critical speed 2 low Defines the low limit for critical speed range 2. 0.00 rpm
Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of
22.55 Critical speed 2 high.
-30000.00 … Low limit for critical speed 2. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
22.55 Critical speed 2 high Defines the high limit for critical speed range 2. 0.00 rpm
Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the
value of 22.54 Critical speed 2 low.
-30000.00 … High limit for critical speed 2. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
22.56 Critical speed 3 low Defines the low limit for critical speed range 3. 0.00 rpm
Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of
22.57 Critical speed 3 high.
-30000.00 … Low limit for critical speed 3. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
22.57 Critical speed 3 high Defines the high limit for critical speed range 3. 0.00 rpm
Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the
value of 22.56 Critical speed 3 low.
-30000.00 … High limit for critical speed 3. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
150 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
22.81 Speed reference act Displays the value of speed reference source 1 (selected -
1 by parameter 22.11 Speed ref1 source). See the control
chain diagram on page 440.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.00 … Value of reference source 1. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
22.82 Speed reference act Displays the value of speed reference source 2 (selected -
2 by parameter 22.12 Speed ref2 source). See the control
chain diagram on page 440.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.00 … Value of reference source 2. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
22.83 Speed reference act Displays the value of speed reference after the -
3 mathematical function applied by parameter 22.13 Speed
ref1 function and reference 1/2 selection (22.14 Speed
ref1/2 selection). See the control chain diagram on page
440.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.00 … Speed reference after source selection. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
22.84 Speed reference act Displays the value of speed reference after application of -
4 1st speed additive (22.15 Speed additive 1 source). See the
control chain diagram on page 440.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.00 … Speed reference after additive 1. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
22.85 Speed reference act Displays the value of speed reference after the -
5 application of the speed share scaling factor (22.16 Speed
share). See the control chain diagram on page 440.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.00 … Speed reference after speed share scaling. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
22.86 Speed reference act Displays the value of speed reference after application of -
6 2nd speed additive (22.17 Speed additive 2 source). See
the control chain diagram on page 440.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.00 … Speed reference after additive 2. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
22.87 Speed reference act Displays the value of speed reference before application -
7 of critical speeds. See the control chain diagram on page
441.
The value is received from 22.86 Speed reference act 6
unless overridden by
• any constant speed
• a jogging reference
• network control reference
• control panel reference
• safe speed reference.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.00 … Speed reference before application of critical speeds. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
 Parameters 151

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
23
23 Speed reference ramp Speed reference ramp settings (programming of the
acceleration and deceleration rates for the drive).
See the control chain diagram on page 442.
23.01 Speed ref ramp input Displays the used speed reference (in rpm) before it -
enters the ramping and shaping functions. See the
control chain diagram on page 442.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.00 … Speed reference before ramping and shaping. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
23.02 Speed ref ramp Displays the ramped and shaped speed reference in rpm. -
output See the control chain diagram on page 442.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.00 … Speed reference after ramping and shaping. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
23.11 Ramp set selection Selects the source that switches between the two sets of DI4
acceleration/deceleration ramp times defined by
parameters 23.12…23.15.
0 = Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are active
1 = Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are active
Acc/Dec time 1 0. 0
Acc/Dec time 2 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 12
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
23.12 Acceleration time 1 Defines acceleration time 1 as the time required for the 20.000 s
speed to change from zero to the speed defined by
parameter 46.01 Speed scaling (not to parameter 30.12
Maximum speed).
If the speed reference increases faster than the set
acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the
acceleration rate.
If the speed reference increases slower than the set
acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the
reference.
If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will
automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to
exceed the drive torque limits.
0.000 …1800.000 s Acceleration time 1. 10 = 1 s
152 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
23.13 Deceleration time 1 Defines deceleration time 1 as the time required for the 20.000 s
speed to change from the speed defined by parameter
46.01 Speed scaling (not from parameter 30.12 Maximum
speed) to zero.
If the speed reference decreases slower than the set
deceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the
reference.
If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration
rate, the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate.
If the deceleration rate is set too short, the drive will
automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to
exceed drive torque limits (or not to exceed a safe DC link
voltage).
0.000 …1800.000 s Deceleration time 1. 10 = 1 s
23.14 Acceleration time 2 Defines acceleration time 2. See parameter 23.12 60.000 s
Acceleration time 1.
0.000 …1800.000 s Acceleration time 2. 10 = 1 s
23.15 Deceleration time 2 Defines deceleration time 2. See parameter 23.13 60.000 s
Deceleration time 1.
0.000 …1800.000 s Deceleration time 2. 10 = 1 s
 Parameters 153

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
23.16 Shape time acc 1 Defines the shape of the acceleration ramp at the 0.000 s
beginning of the acceleration.
0.000 s: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or
deceleration and for slow ramps.
0.001…1000.000 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal
for lifting applications. The S-curve consists of
symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear
part in between.
Acceleration:
Linear ramp:
23.17 = 0 s
Speed

Linear ramp:
23.16 = 0 s

S-curve ramp:
23.17 > 0 s

S-curve ramp:
23.16 > 0 s

Time

Deceleration:
Speed
S-curve ramp:
23.18 > 0 s

Linear ramp:
23.18 = 0 s
S-curve ramp:
23.19 > 0 s

Linear ramp:
23.19 = 0 s

Time

0.000 …1800.000 s Ramp shape at start of acceleration. 10 = 1 s

23.17 Shape time acc 2 Defines the shape of the acceleration ramp at the end of 0.000 s
the acceleration. See parameter 23.16 Shape time acc 1.
0.000 …1800.000 s Ramp shape at end of acceleration. 10 = 1 s
23.18 Shape time dec 1 Defines the shape of the deceleration ramp at the 0.000 s
beginning of the deceleration. See parameter 23.16 Shape
time acc 1.
0.000 …1800.000 s Ramp shape at start of deceleration. 10 = 1 s
154 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
23.19 Shape time dec 2 Defines the shape of the deceleration ramp at the end of 0.000 s
the deceleration. See parameter 23.16 Shape time acc 1.
0.000 …1800.000 s Ramp shape at end of deceleration. 10 = 1 s
23.20 Acc time jogging Defines the acceleration time for the jogging function i.e. 60.000 s
the time required for the speed to change from zero to
the speed value defined by parameter 46.01 Speed
scaling.
0.000 …1800.000 s Acceleration time for jogging. 10 = 1 s
23.21 Dec time jogging Defines the deceleration time for the jogging function i.e. 60.000 s
the time required for the speed to change from the speed
value defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling to zero.
0.000 …1800.000 s Deceleration time for jogging. 10 = 1 s
23.23 Emergency stop time In speed control mode, this parameter defines the 3.000 s
deceleration rate for emergency stop Off3 as the time it
would take for the speed to decrease from the value of
parameter 46.01 Speed scaling to zero. In frequency
control mode, this parameter specifies the time it would
take for the frequency to decrease from the value of 46.02
Frequency scaling to zero.
Note: Emergency stop Off1 uses the standard
deceleration ramp as defined by parameters 23.11…23.19
(speed and torque control) or 28.71…28.75 (frequency
control).
0.000 …1800.000 s Emergency stop Off3 deceleration time. 10 = 1 s
23.24 Speed ramp in zero Selects a source that forces the speed reference to zero Inactive
source just before it enters the ramp function.
0 = Force speed reference to zero before the ramp
function
1 = Speed reference continues towards the ramp function
as normal
Active 0. 0
Inactive 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 12
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
 Parameters 155

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
23.26 Ramp out balancing Selects the source for enabling/disabling speed reference Not
enable ramp balancing. selected
This function is used to generate a smooth transfer from
a torque- or tension-controlled motor back to being
speed-controlled. The balancing output would be tracking
the present “line” speed of the application and when
transfer is required, the speed reference can then be
quickly “seeded” to the correct line speed. Balancing is
also possible in the speed controller, see parameter 25.09
Speed ctrl balancing enable. See also parameter 23.27
Ramp out balancing ref.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
23.27 Ramp out balancing Defines the reference for speed ramp balancing. The 0.00 rpm
ref output of the ramp generator is forced to this value when
balancing is enabled by parameter 23.26 Ramp out
balancing enable.
-30000.00 … Speed ramp balancing reference. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
156 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
23.28 Variable slope enable Activates the variable slope function, which controls the Off
slope of the speed ramp during a speed reference change.
This allows for a constantly variable ramp rate to be
generated, instead of just the standard two ramps
normally available.
If the update interval of the signal from an external
control system and the variable slope rate (23.29 Variable
slope rate) are equal, the resulting speed reference (23.02
Speed ref ramp output) is a straight line.

Speed reference

Speed
reference

23.02 Speed ref ramp

Time

t = update interval of signal from external control system

A = speed reference change during t

This function is only active in remote control.

Off Variable slope disabled. 0
On Variable slope enabled (not available in local control). 1
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
23.29 Variable slope rate Defines the rate of the speed reference change when 50 ms
variable slope is enabled by parameter 23.28 Variable
slope enable.
For the best result, enter the reference update interval
into this parameter.
2…30000 ms Variable slope rate. 1 = 1 ms
23.39 Follower speed Displays the speed correction term for the load share -
correction out function with a speed-controlled follower drive.
See section Load share function with a speed-controlled
follower (page 32).
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.00 … Speed correction term. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
23.40 Follower speed With a speed-controlled follower, selects the source for Not
correction enable enabling/disabling the load share function. selected
See section Load share function with a speed-controlled
follower (page 32).
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Not selected 0. 0
 Parameters 157

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
23.41 Follower speed Adjusts the gain of the speed correction term in a speed- 1.00%
correction gain controlled follower. In effect, defines how accurately the
follower follows the master torque. A greater value results
in a more accurate performance.
See section Load share function with a speed-controlled
follower (page 32).
0.00 … 100.00% Speed correction term adjustment. 1 = 1%
23.42 Follower speed corr Selects the source of the torque reference for the load MF ref 2
torq source share function. See section Load share function with a
speed-controlled follower (page 32).
NULL None. 0
MF ref 2 03.14 M/F or D2D ref2 (page 63). 1
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
24
24 Speed reference Speed error calculation; speed error window control
conditioning configuration; speed error step.

24.01 Used speed Displays the ramped and corrected speed reference -
reference (before speed error calculation).
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.00 … Speed reference used for speed error calculation. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
24.02 Used speed feedback Displays the speed feedback used for speed error -
calculation.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.00 … Speed feedback used for speed error calculation. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
24.03 Speed error filtered Displays the filtered speed error. -
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.0 … 30000.0 Filtered speed error. See par.
rpm 46.01
24.04 Speed error inverted Displays the inverted (unfiltered) speed error. -
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.0 … 30000.0 Inverted speed error. See par.
rpm 46.01
158 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
24.11 Speed correction Defines a speed reference correction, ie. a value added to 0.00 rpm
the existing reference between ramping and limitation.
This is useful to trim the speed if necessary, for example
to adjust draw between sections of a paper machine.
Note: For safety reasons, the correction is not applied
when an emergency stop is active.
WARNING! If the speed reference correction
exceeds 21.06 Zero speed limit, a ramp stop may
be impossible. Make sure the correction is reduced
or removed when a ramp stop is required.
-10000.00 … Speed reference correction. See par.
10000.00 rpm 46.01
24.12 Speed error filter time Defines the time constant of the speed error low-pass 0 ms
filter.
If the used speed reference changes rapidly, the possible
interferences in the speed measurement can be filtered
with the speed error filter. Reducing the ripple with this
filter may cause speed controller tuning problems. A long
filter time constant and fast acceleration time contradict
one another. A very long filter time results in unstable
control.
0…10000 ms Speed error filtering time constant. 0 = filtering disabled. 1 = 1 ms
24.13 RFE speed filter Enables/disables resonance frequency filtering. The Off
filtering is configured by parameters 24.13…24.17.
The speed error value coming to the speed controller is
filtered by a common 2nd order band-elimination filter to
eliminate the amplification of mechanical resonance
frequencies.
Note: Tuning the resonance frequency filter requires a
basic understanding of frequency filters. Incorrect tuning
can amplify mechanical oscillations and damage the drive
hardware. To ensure the stability of the speed controller,
stop the drive or disable the filtering before changing the
parameter settings.
0 = Resonance frequency filtering disabled.
1 = Resonance frequency filtering enabled.
Off 0. 0
On 1. 1
 Parameters 159

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
24.14 Frequency of zero Defines the zero frequency of the resonance frequency 45.00 Hz
filter. The value must be set near the resonance
frequency, which is filtered out before the speed
controller.
The drawing shows the frequency response.

20log10|H()|

20

-20

-40

-60
0 50 100 150
f (Hz)

0.50 … 500.00 Hz Zero frequency. 1 = 1 Hz

24.15 Damping of zero Defines the damping coefficient for parameter 24.14. The 0.000
value of 0 corresponds to the maximum elimination of the
resonance frequency.

20log10|H()|

20
fzero = 45 Hz
zero = 0.250
pole = 1
0

-20
fzero = 45 Hz
zero = 0
-40
pole = 1

-60
0 50 100 150
f (Hz)
Note: To ensure that the resonance frequency band is
filtered (rather than amplified), the value of 24.15 must be
smaller than 24.17.
-1.000 … 1.000 Damping coefficient. 100 = 1
160 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
24.16 Frequency of pole Defines the frequency of pole of the resonance frequency 40.00 Hz
filter.

20log10|H()|

40
fzero = 45 Hz
fpole = 50 Hz
20 zero = 0
pole = 0.250
0

-20
fzero = 45 Hz fzero = 45 Hz
fpole = 30 Hz fpole = 40 Hz
-40 zero = 0 zero = 0
pole = 0.250 pole = 0.250
-60
0 50 100
f (Hz)
Note: If this value is very different from the value of 24.14,
the frequencies near the frequency of pole are amplified,
which can damage the driven machine.
0.50 … 500.00 Hz Frequency of pole. 1 = 1 Hz
24.17 Damping of pole Defines the damping coefficient for parameter 24.16. The 0.250
coefficient shapes the frequency response of the
resonance frequency filter. A narrower bandwidth results
in better dynamic properties. By setting this parameter to
1, the effect of the pole is eliminated.

20log10|H()|

40
fzero = 45 Hz
fpole = 40 Hz
20 zero = 0
pole = 0.050
0

-20
fzero = 45 Hz fzero = 45 Hz
fpole = 40 Hz fpole = 40 Hz
-40 zero = 0 zero = 0
pole = 0.750 pole = 0.250
-60
0 50 100
f (Hz)
Note: To ensure that the resonance frequency band is
filtered (rather than amplified), the value of 24.15 must be
smaller than 24.17.
-1.000 … 1.000 Damping coefficient. 100 = 1
 Parameters 161

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
24.41 Speed error window Enables/disables (or selects a source that Disable
control enable enables/disables) speed error window control,
sometimes also referred to as deadband control or strip
break protection. It forms a speed supervision function
for a torque-controlled drive, preventing the motor from
running away if the material that is being held under
tension breaks.
Note: Speed error window control is only effective when
the Add operating mode is active (see parameters 19.12
and 19.14), or when the drive is a speed-controlled
follower (see page 32).
In normal operation, window control keeps the speed
controller input at zero so the drive stays in torque
control.
If the motor load is lost, then the motor speed will rise as
the torque controller tries to maintain torque. The speed
error (speed reference - actual speed) will increase until it
exits the speed error window. When this is detected, the
exceeding part of the error value is connected to the
speed controller. The speed controller produces a
reference term relative to the input and gain (25.02 Speed
proportional gain) which the torque selector adds to the
torque reference. The result is used as the internal torque
reference for the drive.
The activation of speed error window control is indicated
by bit 3 of 06.19 Speed control status word.
The window boundaries are defined by 24.43 Speed error
window high and 24.44 Speed error window low as
follows:

Speed (rpm)

Reference + [24.44] rpm

Speed error Reference
window
Reference - [24.43] rpm

Forward
0 rpm
Reverse

Reference + [24.43] rpm

Speed error Reference
window
Reference - [24.44] rpm

Note that it is parameter 24.44 (rather than 24.43) that

defines the overspeed limit in both directions of rotation.
This is because the function monitors speed error (which
is negative in case of overspeed, positive in case of
underspeed).
0 = Speed error window control disabled
1 = Speed error window control enabled
Disable 0. 0
162 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Enable 1. 1
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
24.42 Speed window When speed error window control (see parameter 24.41 Normal
control mode Speed error window control enable) is enabled, this speed
parameter determines whether the speed controller only control
observes the proportional term instead of all three (P, I
and D) terms.
Normal speed All three terms (parameters 25.02, 25.03 and 25.04) are 0
control observed by the speed controller.
P-control Only the proportional term (25.02) is observed by the 1
speed controller. The integral and derivative terms are
internally forced to zero.
24.43 Speed error window Defines the upper boundary of the speed error window. 0.00 rpm
high See parameter 24.41 Speed error window control enable.
0.00 … 3000.00 rpm Upper boundary of speed error window. See par.
46.01
24.44 Speed error window Defines the lower boundary of the speed error window. 0.00 rpm
low See parameter 24.41 Speed error window control enable.
0.00 … 3000.00 rpm Lower boundary of speed error window. See par.
46.01
24.46 Speed error step Defines an additional speed error step given to the input 0.00 rpm
of the speed controller (and added to the speed error
value). This can be used in large drive systems for
dynamic speed normalizing.
WARNING! Make sure the error step value is
removed when a stop command is given.
-3000.00 … 3000.00 Speed error step. See par.
rpm 46.01
25 Speed control Speed controller settings.
25.01 Torque reference Displays the speed controller output that is transferred to -
speed control the torque controller.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0 … 1600.0% Limited speed controller output torque. See par.
46.03
 Parameters 163

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
25.02 Speed proportional Defines the proportional gain (Kp) of the speed controller. 10.00;
gain Too high a gain may cause speed oscillation. The figure 5.00
below shows the speed controller output after an error (95.21 b1/
step when the error remains constant. b2)

%
Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time = 0
TD= Derivation time = 0

E
Controller output
Controller e = Error value
output =
Kp × e

Time

If gain is set to 1.00, a 10% error (reference - actual value)

in the motor synchronous speed produces a proportional
term of 10%.
Note: This parameter is automatically set by the speed
controller autotune function.
0.00 …250.00 Proportional gain for speed controller. 100 = 1
164 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
25.03 Speed integration Defines the integration time of the speed controller. The 2.50 s;
time integration time defines the rate at which the controller 5.00
output changes when the error value is constant and the (95.21 b1/
proportional gain of the speed controller is 1. The shorter b2)
the integration time, the faster the continuous error value
is corrected.
Setting the integration time to zero disables the I-part of
the controller. This is useful to do when tuning the
proportional gain; adjust the proportional gain first, then
return the integration time.
The integrator has anti-windup control for operation at a
torque or current limit.
The figure below shows the speed controller output after
an error step when the error remains constant.

Controller output
Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time > 0
TD= Derivation time = 0
Kp × e

Kp × e e = Error value

Time
TI

Note: This parameter is automatically set by the speed

controller autotune function.
0.00 … 1000.00 s Integration time for speed controller. 10 = 1 s
 Parameters 165

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
25.04 Speed derivation time Defines the derivation time of the speed controller. 0.000 s
Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error
value changes. The longer the derivation time, the more
the speed controller output is boosted during the change.
If the derivation time is set to zero, the controller works
as a PI controller, otherwise as a PID controller. The
derivation makes the control more responsive for
disturbances. For simple applications (especially those
without an encoder), derivative time is not normally
required and should be left at zero.
The figure below shows the speed controller output after
an error step when the error remains constant. The speed
error derivative must be filtered with a low pass filter to
eliminate external disturbances.

Controller output

e
K p × TD ×
Ts Kp × e

Error value

Kp × e e = Error value

TI Time

Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time > 0
TD= Derivation time > 0
Ts= Sample time period = 500 µs
e = Error value change between two samples

0.000 … 10.000 s Derivation time for speed controller. 1000 = 1 s

25.05 Derivation filter time Defines the derivation filter time constant. See parameter 8 ms
25.04 Speed derivation time.
0…10000 ms Derivation filter time constant. 1 = 1 ms
166 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
25.06 Acc comp derivation Defines the derivation time for 0.00 s
time acceleration(/deceleration) compensation. In order to
compensate for a high inertia load during acceleration, a
derivative of the reference is added to the output of the
speed controller. The principle of a derivative action is
described under parameter 25.04 Speed derivation time.
Note: As a general rule, set this parameter to the value
between 50 and 100% of the sum of the mechanical time
constants of the motor and the driven machine.
The figure below shows the speed responses when a high
inertia load is accelerated along a ramp.
No acceleration compensation:

Speed reference

Actual speed

Time

Acceleration compensation:

Speed reference

Actual speed

Time

0.00 … 1000.00 s Acceleration compensation derivation time. 10 = 1 s

25.07 Acc comp filter time Defines the acceleration (or deceleration) compensation 8.0 ms
filter time constant.. See parameters 25.04 Speed
derivation time and 25.06 Acc comp derivation time.
0.0 … 1000.0 ms Acceleration/deceleration compensation filter time. 1 = 1 ms
 Parameters 167

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
25.08 Drooping rate Defines the droop rate in percent of the nominal motor 0.00%
speed. Drooping decreases the drive speed slightly as the
drive load increases. The actual speed decrease at a
certain operating point depends on the droop rate
setting and the drive load (= torque reference / speed
controller output). At 100% speed controller output,
drooping is at its nominal level, i.e. equal to the value of
this parameter. The drooping effect decreases linearly to
zero along with the decreasing load.
The droop rate can be used e.g. to adjust the load sharing
in a Master/Follower application run by several drives. In a
Master/Follower application the motor shafts are
coupled to each other.
The correct droop rate for a process must be found out
case by case in practice.

Speed decrease = Speed controller output × Drooping × Nominal speed

Example: Speed controller output is 50%, droop rate is 1%, nominal speed of the drive
is 1500 rpm.
Speed decrease = 0.50 × 0.01 × 1500 rpm = 7.5 rpm.

Motor speed in
% of nominal

No drooping
100%
25.08 Drooping rate
Drooping

Speed controller Drive load

output / %
100%

0.00 … 100.00% Droop rate. 100 = 1%

25.09 Speed ctrl balancing Selects the source for enabling/disabling speed Not
enable controller output balancing. selected
This function is used to generate a smooth, “bumpless”
transfer from a torque- or tension-controlled motor back
to being speed-controlled. When balancing is enabled, the
output of the speed controller is forced to the value of
25.10 Speed ctrl balancing ref.
Balancing is also possible in the ramp generator (see
parameter 23.26 Ramp out balancing enable).
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Not selected 0. 1
Selected 1. 2
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
168 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
25.10 Speed ctrl balancing Defines the reference used in speed controller output 0.0%
ref balancing. The output of the speed controller is forced to
this value when balancing is enabled by parameter 25.09
Speed ctrl balancing enable.
-300.0 … 300.0% Speed control output balancing reference. See par.
46.03
25.11 Speed control min Defines the minimum speed controller output torque. -300.0%
torque
-1600.0 … 0.0% Minimum speed controller output torque. See par.
46.03
25.12 Speed control max Defines the maximum speed controller output torque. 300.0%
torque
0.0 … 1600.0% Maximum speed controller output torque. See par.
46.03
25.13 Min torq sp ctrl em Defines the minimum speed controller output torque -400.0%
stop during a ramped emergency stop (Off1 or Off3).
-1600.0 … 0.0% Minimum speed controller output torque for ramped See par.
emergency stop. 46.03
25.14 Max torq sp ctrl em Defines the maximum speed controller output torque 400.0%
stop during a ramped emergency stop (Off1 or Off3).
0.0 … 1600.0% Maximum speed controller output torque for ramped See par.
emergency stop. 46.03
25.15 Proportional gain em Defines the proportional gain for the speed controller 10.00;
stop when an emergency stop is active. See parameter 25.02 5.00
Speed proportional gain. (95.21 b1/
b2)
1.00 … 250.00 Proportional gain upon an emergency stop. 100 = 1
 Parameters 169

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
25.18 Speed adapt min limit Minimum actual speed for speed controller adaptation. 0 rpm
Speed controller gain and integration time can be
adapted according to actual speed (90.01 Motor speed
for control). This is done by multiplying the gain (25.02
Speed proportional gain) and integration time (25.03
Speed integration time) by coefficients at certain speeds.
The coefficients are defined individually for both gain and
integration time.
When actual speed is below or equal to 25.18 Speed adapt
min limit, the gain and integration time are multiplied by
25.21 Kp adapt coef at min speed and 25.22 Ti adapt coef
at min speed respectively.
When actual speed is equal to or above 25.19 Speed adapt
max limit, no adaptation takes place (the coefficient is 1).
When actual speed is between 25.18 Speed adapt min
limit and 25.19 Speed adapt max limit, the coefficients for
the gain and integration time are calculated linearly on
the basis of the breakpoints.

Coefficient for Kp or TI Kp = Proportional gain

TI = Integration time

1.000

25.21 Kp adapt coef at min

speed or 25.22 Ti adapt coef at Actual speed
min speed (90.01) (rpm)

0 25.18 Speed 25.19 Speed

adapt min limit adapt max
limit
0…30000 rpm Minimum actual speed for speed controller adaptation. 1 = 1 rpm
25.19 Speed adapt max Maximum actual speed for speed controller adaptation. 0 rpm
limit See parameter 25.18 Speed adapt min limit.
0…30000 rpm Maximum actual speed for speed controller adaptation. 1 = 1 rpm
25.21 Kp adapt coef at min Proportional gain coefficient at minimum actual speed. 1.000
speed See parameter 25.18 Speed adapt min limit.
0.000 … 10.000 Proportional gain coefficient at minimum actual speed. 1000 = 1
25.22 Ti adapt coef at min Integration time coefficient at minimum actual speed. 1.000
speed See parameter 25.18 Speed adapt min limit.
0.000 … 10.000 Integration time coefficient at minimum actual speed. 1000 = 1
170 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
25.25 Torque adapt max Maximum torque reference for speed controller 0.0%
limit adaptation.
Speed controller gain can be adapted according to the
final unlimited torque reference (26.01 Torque reference
to TC). This can be used to smooth out disturbances
caused by a small load and backlashes.
The functionality involves multiplying the gain (25.02
Speed proportional gain) by a coefficient within a certain
torque range.
When the torque reference is 0%, the gain is multiplied by
the value of parameter 25.27 Kp adapt coef at min torque.
When the torque reference is equal to or above 25.25
Torque adapt max limit, no adaptation takes place (the
coefficient is 1).
Between 0% and 25.25 Torque adapt max limit, the
coefficient for the gain is calculated linearly on the basis
of the breakpoints.
Filtering can be applied on the torque reference using
parameter 25.26 Torque adapt filt time.

Coefficient for Kp (proportional gain)

1.000

25.27 Kp adapt coef at min

torque Final torque reference
(26.01) (rpm)

0 25.25 Torque
adapt max limit

0.0 … 1600.0% Maximum torque reference for speed controller See par.
adaptation. 46.03
25.26 Torque adapt filt time Defines a filter time constant for the adaptation, in effect 0.000 s
adjusting the rate of change of the gain.
See parameter 25.25 Torque adapt max limit.
0.000 … 100.000 s Filter time for adaptation. 100 = 1 s
25.27 Kp adapt coef at min Proportional gain coefficient at 0% torque reference. 1.000
torque See parameter 25.25 Torque adapt max limit.
0.000 … 10.000 Proportional gain coefficient at 0% torque reference. 1000 = 1
 Parameters 171

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
25.30 Flux adaption enable Enables/disables speed controller adaptation based on Enable
motor flux reference (01.24 Flux actual %).
The proportional gain of the speed controller is multiplied
by a coefficient of 0…1 between 0…100% flux reference
respectively.

Coefficient for Kp (proportional gain)

1.000

Flux reference
(01.24) (%)
0.000
0 100

Disable Speed controller adaptation based on flux reference 0

disabled.
Enable Speed controller adaptation based on flux reference 1
enabled.
25.37 Mechanical time Mechanical time constant of the drive and the machinery -
constant as determined by the speed controller autotune function.
The value can be adjusted manually.
0.00 … 1000.00 s Mechanical time constant. 10 = 1 s
25.42 Integral term enable Selects a source that enables/disables the integral (I) part Selected
of the speed controller.
0 = I-part disabled
1 = I-part enabled
Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
25.53 Torque prop Displays the output of the proportional (P) part of the -
reference speed controller.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.0 … P-part output of speed controller. See par.
30000.0% 46.03
172 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
25.54 Torque integral Displays the output of the integral (I) part of the speed -
reference controller.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.0 … I-part output of speed controller. See par.
30000.0% 46.03
25.55 Torque deriv Displays the output of the derivative (D) part of the speed -
reference controller.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.0 … D-part output of speed controller. See par.
30000.0% 46.03
25.56 Torque acc Displays the output of the acceleration compensation -
compensation function.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.0 … Output of acceleration compensation function. See par.
30000.0% 46.03
25.57 Torque reference Displays the acceleration-compensated output of the -
unbalanced speed controller.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.0 … Acceleration-compensated output of speed controller. See par.
30000.0% 46.03
26
26 Torque reference Settings for the torque reference chain.
chain
26.01 Torque reference to Displays the final torque reference given to the torque -
TC controller in percent. This reference is then acted upon by
various final limiters, like power, torque, load etc.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0 … 1600.0% Torque reference for torque control. See par.
46.03
26.02 Torque reference Displays the final torque reference (in percent of motor -
used nominal torque) given to the vector core, and comes after
frequency, voltage and torque limitation.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0 … 1600.0% Torque reference for torque control. See par.
46.03
26.08 Minimum torque ref Defines the minimum torque reference. Allows for local -300.0%
limiting of the torque reference before it is passed on to
the torque ramp controller. For absolute torque limiting,
refer to parameter 30.19 Minimum torque 1.
-1000.0 … 0.0% Minimum torque reference. See par.
46.03
26.09 Maximum torque ref Defines the maximum torque reference. Allows for local 300.0%
limiting of the torque reference before it is passed on to
the torque ramp controller. For absolute torque limiting,
refer to parameter 30.20 Maximum torque 1.
0.0 … 1000.0% Maximum torque reference. See par.
46.03
 Parameters 173

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
26.11 Torque ref1 source Selects torque reference source 1. Zero
Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and
26.12 Torque ref2 source. A digital source selected by
26.14 Torque ref1/2 selection can be used to switch
between the two sources, or a mathematical function
(26.13 Torque ref1 function) applied to the two signals to
create the reference.

26.11
26.13
0
AI Ref1
FB
26.70
…… ADD 26.14
Other SUB 0
MUL 26.72
26.12 MIN 1
MAX
0
AI 26.71
FB
……
Other

Zero None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 89). 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 91). 2
FB A ref1 03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 64). 4
FB A ref2 03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 64). 5
EFB ref1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 8
EFB ref2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 9
DDCS ctrl ref1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DDCS ctrl ref2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
M/F reference1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 12
M/F reference2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 13
Motor Not applicable for ACS580MV. 15
potentiometer
PID Not applicable for ACS580MV. 16
Control panel (ref Control panel reference, with initial value from last-used 18
saved) panel reference. See section Using the control panel as an
external control source (page 21).
Control panel (ref Control panel reference, with initial value from previous 19
copied) source or actual value. See section Using the control panel
as an external control source (page 21).
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
26.12 Torque ref2 source Selects torque reference source 2. Zero
For the selections, and a diagram of reference source
selection, see parameter 26.11 Torque ref1 source.
174 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
26.13 Torque ref1 function Selects a mathematical function between the reference Ref1
sources selected by parameters 26.11 Torque ref1 source
and 26.12 Torque ref2 source. See diagram at 26.11 Torque
ref1 source.
Ref1 Signal selected by 26.11 Torque ref1 source is used as 0
torque reference 1 as such (no function applied).
Add (ref1 + ref2) The sum of the reference sources is used as torque 1
reference 1.
Sub (ref1 - ref2) The subtraction ([26.11 Torque ref1 source] - [26.12 Torque 2
ref2 source]) of the reference sources is used as torque
reference 1.
Mul (ref1 × ref2) The multiplication of the reference sources is used as 3
torque reference 1.
Min (ref1, ref2) The smaller of the reference sources is used as torque 4
reference 1.
Max (ref1, ref2) The greater of the reference sources is used as torque 5
reference 1.
26.14 Torque ref1/2 Configures the selection between torque references 1 and Torque
selection 2. See diagram at 26.11 Torque ref1 source. reference
0 = Torque reference 1 1
1 = Torque reference 2
Torque reference 1 0. 0
Torque reference 2 1. 1
Follow Ext1/Ext2 Torque reference 1 is used when external control location 2
selection EXT1 is active. Torque reference 2 is used when external
control location EXT2 is active.
See also parameter 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection.
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 3
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 4
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 5
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 6
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 7
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 8
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
26.15 Load share Defines the scaling factor for the torque reference (the 1.000
torque reference is multiplied by the value).
This allows drives sharing the load between two motors
on the same mechanical plant to be tailored to share the
correct amount each, yet use the same master torque
reference.
-8.000 … 8.000 Torque reference scaling factor. 1000 = 1
26.16 Torque additive 1 Selects the source of torque reference additive 1. Zero
source Note: For safety reasons, the additive is not applied when
an emergency stop is active.
For the selections, see parameter 26.11 Torque ref1
source.
 Parameters 175

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
26.17 Torque ref filter time Defines a low-pass filter time constant for the torque 0.000 s
reference.
0.000 … 30.000 s Filter time constant for torque reference. 1000 = 1 s
26.18 Torque ramp up time Defines the torque reference ramp-up time, ie. the time 0.000 s
for the reference to increase from zero to nominal motor
torque.
0.000 … 60.000 s Torque reference ramp-up time. 100 = 1 s
26.19 Torque ramp down Defines the torque reference ramp-down time, ie. the 0.000 s
time time for the reference to decrease from nominal motor
torque to zero.
0.000 … 60.000 s Torque reference ramp-down time. 100 = 1 s
26.25 Torque additive 2 Selects the source of torque reference additive 2. Zero
source The value received from the selected source is added to
the torque reference after operating mode selection.
Because of this, the additive can be used in speed and
torque modes.
Note: For safety reasons, the additive is not applied when
an emergency stop is active.
WARNING! If the additive exceeds the limits set by
parameters 25.11 Speed control min torque and
25.12 Speed control max torque, a ramp stop may
be impossible. Make sure the additive is reduced or
removed when a ramp stop is required eg. by using
parameter 26.26 Force torque ref add 2 zero.
For the selections, see parameter 26.11 Torque ref1
source.
26.26 Force torque ref add Selects a source that forces torque reference additive 2 Not
2 zero (see parameter 26.25 Torque additive 2 source) to zero. selected
0 = Normal operation
1 = Force torque reference additive 2 to zero.
Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
176 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
26.41 Torque step When enabled by parameter 26.42 Torque step enable, 0.0%
adds an additional step to the torque reference.
A second torque step can be added using pointer
parameters 26.43 Torque step pointer enable and 26.44
Torque step source.
The two torque steps work independently of each other,
and are summed up to calculate the total torque step.
Note: For safety reasons, the torque step is not applied
when an emergency stop is active.
WARNING! If the torque step exceeds the limits set
by parameters 25.11 Speed control min torque and
25.12 Speed control max torque, a ramp stop may
be impossible. Make sure the torque step is reduced or
removed when a ramp stop is required eg. by using
parameter 26.42 Torque step enable.
-300.0 … 300.0% Torque step. See par.
46.03
26.42 Torque step enable Enables/disables a torque step (defined by parameter Disable
26.41 Torque step).
Disable Torque step disabled. 0
Enable Torque step enabled. 1
26.43 Torque step pointer Selects a source that enables/disables the torque step Selected
enable defined by parameter 26.44 Torque step source.
See also parameter 26.41 Torque step.
1 = Torque step enabled.
Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
26.44 Torque step source Selects the source of the torque step enabled by 26.43 Zero
Torque step pointer enable.
Zero None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 89). 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 91). 2
FB A ref1 03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 64). 4
FB A ref2 03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 64). 5
EFB ref1 03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 122). 8
M/F reference 1 03.13 M/F or D2D ref1 (see page 122). 12
M/F reference 2 03.14 M/F or D2D ref2 (see page 122). 13
 Parameters 177

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Motor 22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor 15
potentiometer potentiometer).
PID 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process 16
PID controller).
Control panel (ref Control panel reference, with initial value from last-used 18
saved) panel reference. See section Using the control panel as an
external control source (page 21).
Control panel (ref Control panel reference, with initial value from previous 19
copied) source or actual value. See section Using the control panel
as an external control source (page 21).
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
26.51 Oscillation damping Parameters 26.51…26.58 configure the oscillation Not
damping function. selected
This parameter enables (or selects a source that enables)
the oscillation damping algorithm.
1 = Oscillation damping algorithm enabled
Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
26.52 Oscillation damping Determines (or selects a source that determines) whether Not
out enable the output of the oscillation damping function is applied selected
to the torque reference or not.
Note: Before enabling the oscillation damping output,
adjust parameters 26.53…26.57. Then monitor the input
signal (selected by 26.53) and the output (26.58) to make
sure that the correction is safe to apply.
1 = Apply oscillation damping output to torque reference
Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
178 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
26.53 Oscillation Selects the input signal for the oscillation damping Speed
compensation input function. error
Note: Before changing this parameter run-time, disable
the oscillation damping output using parameter 26.52.
Monitor the behavior of 26.58 before re-enabling the
output.
Speed error 24.01 Used speed reference - unfiltered motor speed. 0
Note: This setting is not supported in scalar motor
control mode.
DC voltage 01.11 DC voltage. (The value is internally filtered.) 1
26.55 Oscillation damping Defines the center frequency of the oscillation damping 31.0 Hz
frequency filter.
Set the value according to the number of oscillation peaks
in the monitored signal (selected by 26.53) per second.
Note: Before changing this parameter run-time, disable
the oscillation damping output using parameter 26.52.
Monitor the behavior of 26.58 before re-enabling the
output.
0.1 … 60.0 Hz Center frequency for oscillation damping. 10 = 1 Hz
26.56 Oscillation damping Defines a phase shift for the output of the filter. 180 deg
phase Note: Before changing this parameter run-time, disable
the oscillation damping output using parameter 26.52.
Monitor the behavior of 26.58 before re-enabling the
output.
0…360 deg Phase shift for oscillation damping function output. 10 = 1 deg
26.57 Oscillation damping Defines a gain for the output of the oscillation damping 1.0%
gain function, ie. how much the output of the filter is amplified
before it is added to the torque reference.
Oscillation gain is scaled according to the speed
controller gain so that changing the gain will not disturb
oscillation damping.
Note: Before changing this parameter run-time, disable
the oscillation damping output using parameter 26.52.
Monitor the behavior of 26.58 before re-enabling the
output.
0.0 … 100.0% Gain setting for oscillation damping output. 10 = 1%
26.58 Oscillation damping Displays the output of the oscillation damping function. -
output This value is added to the torque reference (as allowed by
parameter 26.52 Oscillation damping out enable).
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.000 … Output of the oscillation damping function. 10 = 1%
1600.000%
26.70 Torque reference act Displays the value of torque reference source 1 (selected -
1 by parameter 26.11 Torque ref1 source).
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0 … 1600.0% Value of torque reference source 1. See par.
46.03
 Parameters 179

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
26.71 Torque reference act Displays the value of torque reference source 2 (selected -
2 by parameter 26.12 Torque ref2 source).
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0 … 1600.0% Value of torque reference source 2. See par.
46.03
26.72 Torque reference act Displays the torque reference after the function applied -
3 by parameter 26.13 Torque ref1 function (if any), and after
selection (26.14 Torque ref1/2 selection).
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0 … 1600.0% Torque reference after selection. See par.
46.03
26.73 Torque reference act Displays the torque reference after application of -
4 reference additive 1.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0 … 1600.0% Torque reference after application of reference additive 1. See par.
46.03
26.74 Torque ref ramp out Displays the torque reference after limiting and ramping. -
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0 … 1600.0% Torque reference after limiting and ramping. See par.
46.03
26.75 Torque reference act Displays the torque reference after control mode -
5 selection.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0 … 1600.0% Torque reference after control mode selection. See par.
46.03
26.76 Torque reference act Displays the torque reference after application of -
6 reference additive 2.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0 … 1600.0% Torque reference after application of reference additive 2. See par.
46.03
26.77 Torque ref add A Displays the value of the source of torque reference -
actual additive 2.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0 … 1600.0% Torque reference additive 2. See par.
46.03
26.78 Torque ref add B Displays the value of torque reference additive 2 before it -
actual is added to torque reference.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0 … 1600.0% Torque reference additive 2. See par.
46.03
26.81 Rush control gain Rush controller gain term. 10.0
0.0 …10000.0 Rush controller gain (0.0 = disabled). 1=1
26.82 Rush control Rush controller integration time term. 2.0 s
integration time
0.0 … 10.0 s Rush controller integration time (0.0 = disabled). 1=1s
180 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
28 Frequency reference Settings for the frequency reference chain.
chain See the control chain diagrams on pages 452 and 453.
28.01 Frequency ref ramp Displays the used frequency reference before ramping. -
input See the control chain diagram on page 453.
This parameter is read-only.
-500.00 … 500.00 Frequency reference before ramping. See par.
Hz 46.02
28.02 Frequency ref ramp Displays the final frequency reference (after selection, -
output limitation and ramping). See the control chain diagram on
page 453.
This parameter is read-only.
-500.00 … 500.00 Final frequency reference. See par.
Hz 46.02
28.11 Frequency ref1 Selects frequency reference source 1. Zero
source Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and
28.12 Frequency ref2 source. A digital source selected by
28.14 Frequency ref1/2 selection can be used to switch
between the two sources, or a mathematical function
(28.13 Frequency ref1 function) applied to the two signals
to create the reference.

28.11
28.13
0
AI Ref1
FB
28.90
…… ADD 28.14
Other SUB 0
MUL 28.92
28.12 MIN 1
MAX
0
AI 28.91
FB
……
Other

Zero None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 89). 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 91). 2
FB A ref1 03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 64). 4
FB A ref2 03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 64). 5
EFB ref1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 8
EFB ref2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 9
DDCS ctrl ref1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DDCS ctrl ref2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
M/F reference 1 Not supported. 12
M/F reference 2 Not supported. 13
Motor 15
potentiometer Not supported.
 Parameters 181

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
PID Not applicable for ACS580MV. 16
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
28.12 Frequency ref2 Selects frequency reference source 2. Zero
source For the selections, and a diagram of reference source
selection, see parameter 28.11 Frequency ref1 source.
28.13 Frequency ref1 Selects a mathematical function between the reference Ref1
function sources selected by parameters 28.11 Frequency ref1
source and 28.12 Frequency ref2 source. See diagram at
28.11 Frequency ref1 source.
Ref1 Signal selected by 28.11 Frequency ref1 source is used as 0
frequency reference 1 as such (no function applied).
Add (ref1 + ref2) The sum of the reference sources is used as frequency 1
reference 1.
Sub (ref1 - ref2) The subtraction ([28.11 Frequency ref1 source] - [28.12 2
Frequency ref2 source]) of the reference sources is used
as frequency reference 1.
Mul (ref1 × ref2) The multiplication of the reference sources is used as 3
frequency reference 1.
Min (ref1, ref2) The smaller of the reference sources is used as frequency 4
reference 1.
Max (ref1, ref2) The greater of the reference sources is used as frequency 5
reference 1.
28.14 Frequency ref1/2 Configures the selection between frequency references 1 Follow
selection and 2. See diagram at 28.11 Frequency ref1 source. Ext1/Ext2
0 = Frequency reference 1 selection
1 = Frequency reference 2
Frequency reference 0. 0
1
Frequency reference 1. 1
2
Follow Ext1/Ext2 Frequency reference 1 is used when external control 2
selection location EXT1 is active. Frequency reference 2 is used
when external control location EXT2 is active.
See also parameter 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection.
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 3
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 4
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 5
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 6
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 7
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 8
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
182 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
28.21 Constant frequency Determines how constant frequencies are selected, and 00b
function whether the rotation direction signal is considered or not
when applying a constant frequency.

Bit Name Information

0 Constant freq 1 = Packed: 7 constant frequencies are selectable using the three
mode sources defined by parameters 28.22, 28.23 and 28.24.
0 = Separate: Constant frequencies 1, 2 and 3 are separately
activated by the sources defined by parameters 28.22, 28.23 and
28.24 respectively. In case of conflict, the constant frequency with
the smaller number takes priority.
1 Direction 1 = Start dir: To determine running direction for a constant
enable frequency, the sign of the constant frequency setting (parameters
28.26…28.32) is multiplied by the direction signal (forward: +1,
reverse: -1). This effectively allows the drive to have 14 (7 forward, 7
reverse) constant frequencies if all values in 28.26…28.32 are
positive.
WARNING: If the direction signal is reverse and the active
constant frequency is negative, the drive will run in the
forward direction.
0 = According to Par: The running direction for the constant
frequency is determined by the sign of the constant speed setting
(parameters 28.26…28.32).

00b…11b Constant frequency configuration word. 1=1

28.22 Constant frequency When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency Not
sel1 function is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates selected
constant frequency 1.
When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency
function is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters
28.23 Constant frequency sel2 and 28.24 Constant
frequency sel3 select three sources whose states activate
constant frequencies as follows:

Source defined Source defined Source defined Constant frequency

by par. 28.22 by par. 28.23 by par. 28.24 active
0 0 0 None
1 0 0 Constant frequency 1
0 1 0 Constant frequency 2
1 1 0 Constant frequency 3
0 0 1 Constant frequency 4
1 0 1 Constant frequency 5
0 1 1 Constant frequency 6
1 1 1 Constant frequency 7

Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
 Parameters 183

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
28.23 Constant frequency When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency Not
sel2 function is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates selected
constant frequency 2.
When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency
function is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters
28.22 Constant frequency sel1 and 28.24 Constant
frequency sel3 select three sources that are used to
activate constant frequencies. See table at parameter
28.22 Constant frequency sel1.
For the selections, see parameter 28.22 Constant
frequency sel1.
28.24 Constant frequency When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency Not
sel3 function is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates selected
constant frequency 3.
When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency
function is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters
28.22 Constant frequency sel1 and 28.23 Constant
frequency sel2 select three sources that are used to
activate constant frequencies. See table at parameter
28.22 Constant frequency sel1.
For the selections, see parameter 28.22 Constant
frequency sel1.
28.26 Constant frequency 1 Defines constant frequency 1 (the frequency the motor 0.00 Hz
will turn when constant frequency 1 is selected).
-500.00 … 500.00 Constant frequency 1. See par.
Hz 46.02
28.27 Constant frequency 2 Defines constant frequency 2. 0.00 Hz
-500.00 … 500.00 Constant frequency 2. See par.
Hz 46.02
28.28 Constant frequency 3 Defines constant frequency 3. 0.00 Hz
-500.00 … 500.00 Constant frequency 3. See par.
Hz 46.02
28.29 Constant frequency 4 Defines constant frequency 4. 0.00 Hz
-500.00 … 500.00 Constant frequency 4. See par.
Hz 46.02
28.30 Constant frequency 5 Defines constant frequency 5. 0.00 Hz
-500.00 … 500.00 Constant frequency 5. See par.
Hz 46.02
28.31 Constant frequency 6 Defines constant frequency 6. 0.00 Hz
-500.00 … 500.00 Constant frequency 6. See par.
Hz 46.02
28.32 Constant frequency 7 Defines constant frequency 7. 0.00 Hz
-500.00 … 500.00 Constant frequency 7. See par.
Hz 46.02
184 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
28.41 Frequency ref safe Defines a safe frequency reference value that is used with 0.00 Hz
supervision functions such as
• 12.03 AI supervision function
• 49.05 Communication loss action
• 50.02 comm loss func
• 50.32 FBA B comm loss func.
-500.00 … 500.00 Safe frequency reference. See par.
Hz 46.02
28.51 Critical frequency Enables/disables the critical frequencies function. Also 00b
function determines whether the specified ranges are effective in
both rotating directions or not.
See also section Critical speeds/frequencies (page 36).

Bit Name Information

0 Enable 1 = Enable: Critical frequencies enabled.
0 = Disable: Critical frequencies disabled.
1 Sign mode 1 = According to par: The signs of parameters 28.52…28.57 are
taken into account.
0 = Absolute: Parameters 28.52…28.57 are handled as absolute
values. Each range is effective in both directions of rotation.

00b…11b Critical frequencies configuration word. 1=1

28.52 Critical frequency 1 Defines the low limit for critical frequency 1. 0.00 Hz
low Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of
28.53 Critical frequency 1 high.
-500.00 … 500.00 Low limit for critical frequency 1. See par.
Hz 46.02
28.53 Critical frequency 1 Defines the high limit for critical frequency 1. 0.00 Hz
high Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the
value of 28.52 Critical frequency 1 low.
-500.00 … 500.00 High limit for critical frequency 1. See par.
Hz 46.02
28.54 Critical frequency 2 Defines the low limit for critical frequency 2. 0.00 Hz
low Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of
28.55 Critical frequency 2 high.
-500.00 … 500.00 Low limit for critical frequency 2. See par.
Hz 46.02
28.55 Critical frequency 2 Defines the high limit for critical frequency 2. 0.00 Hz
high Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the
value of 28.54 Critical frequency 2 low.
-500.00 … 500.00 High limit for critical frequency 2. See par.
Hz 46.02
28.56 Critical frequency 3 Defines the low limit for critical frequency 3. 0.00 Hz
low Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of
28.57 Critical frequency 3 high.
-500.00 … 500.00 Low limit for critical frequency 3. See par.
Hz 46.02
 Parameters 185

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
28.57 Critical frequency 3 Defines the high limit for critical frequency 3. 0.00 Hz
high Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the
value of 28.56 Critical frequency 3 low.
-500.00 … 500.00 High limit for critical frequency 3. See par.
Hz 46.02
28.71 Freq ramp set Selects a source that switches between the two sets of Acc/Dec
selection acceleration/deceleration times defined by parameters time 1
28.72…28.75.
0 = Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are in
force
1 = Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are in
force
Acc/Dec time 1 0. 0
Acc/Dec time 2 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 12
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
28.72 Freq acceleration Defines acceleration time 1 as the time required for the 20.000 s
time 1 frequency to change from zero to the frequency defined
by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling (not to parameter
30.14 Maximum frequency)
If the reference increases faster than the set acceleration
rate, the motor will follow the acceleration rate.
If the reference increases slower than the set acceleration
rate, the motor frequency will follow the reference.
If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will
automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to
exceed the drive torque limits.
0.000 … 1800.000 s Acceleration time 1. 10 = 1 s
28.73 Freq deceleration Defines deceleration time 1 as the time required for the 20.000 s
time 1 frequency to change from the frequency defined by
parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling (not from parameter
30.14 Maximum frequency) to zero.
0.000 … 1800.000 s Deceleration time 1. 10 = 1 s
28.74 Freq acceleration Defines acceleration time 2. See parameter 28.72 Freq 60.000 s
time 2 acceleration time 1.
0.000 … 1800.000 s Acceleration time 2. 10 = 1 s
28.75 Freq deceleration Defines deceleration time 2. See parameter 28.73 Freq 60.000 s
time 2 deceleration time 1.
0.000 … 1800.000 s Deceleration time 2. 10 = 1 s
186 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
28.76 Freq ramp in zero Selects a source that forces the frequency reference to Inactive
source zero.
0 = Force frequency reference to zero
1 = Normal operation
Active 0. 0
Inactive 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 12
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
28.77 Freq ramp hold Selects a source that forces the output of the frequency Inactive
ramp generator to actual frequency value.
0 = Force ramp output to actual frequency
1 = Normal operation
Active 0. 0
Inactive 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 12
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
28.78 Freq ramp output Defines a reference for frequency ramp balancing. The 0.00 Hz
balancing output of the ramp generator is forced to this value when
balancing is enabled by parameter 28.79 Freq ramp out
balancing enable.
-500.00 … 500.00 Frequency ramp balancing reference. See par.
Hz 46.02
28.79 Freq ramp out Selects the source for enabling/disabling frequency ramp Not
balancing enable balancing. See parameter 28.78 Freq ramp output selected
balancing.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Not selected 0.
Selected 1.
 Parameters 187

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
28.90 Frequency ref act 1 Displays the value of frequency reference source 1 -
(selected by parameter 28.11 Frequency ref1 source). See
the control chain diagram on page 452.
This parameter is read-only.
-500.00 … 500.00 Value of frequency reference source 1. See par.
Hz 46.02
28.91 Frequency ref act 2 Displays the value of frequency reference source 2 -
(selected by parameter 28.12 Frequency ref2 source). See
the control chain diagram on page 452.
This parameter is read-only.
-500.00 … 500.00 Value of frequency reference source 2. See par.
Hz 46.02
28.92 Frequency ref act 3 Displays the frequency reference after the function -
applied by parameter 28.13 Frequency ref1 function (if
any), and after selection (28.14 Frequency ref1/2
selection). See the control chain diagram on page 452.
This parameter is read-only.
-500.00 … 500.00 Frequency reference after selection. See par.
Hz 46.02
28.96 Frequency ref act 7 Displays the frequency reference after application of -
constant frequencies, control panel reference, etc. See
the control chain diagram on page 452.
This parameter is read-only.
-500.00 … 500.00 Frequency reference 7. See par.
Hz 46.02
28.97 Frequency ref Displays the frequency reference after application of -
unlimited critical frequencies, but before ramping and limiting. See
the control chain diagram on page 453.
This parameter is read-only.
-500.00 … 500.00 Frequency reference before ramping and limiting. See par.
Hz 46.02
188 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
30
30 Limits Drive operation limits.
30.01 Limit word 1 Displays limit word 1. -
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 Torq lim 1 = Drive torque is being limited by the motor control
(undervoltage
control, current control, load angle control or pull-out control), or
by the
torque limits defined by parameters.
1 Spd ctl tlim min 1 = Speed controller output is being limited by 25.11 Speed control
min torque
2 Spd ctl tlim max 1 = Speed controller output is being limited by 25.12 Speed control
max torque
3 Torq ref max 1 = Torque reference ramp input is being limited by26.09
Minimum torque ref, source of 30.25 Minimum torque sel. See
diagram on page 193.
4 Torq ref min 1 = Torque reference ramp input is being limited by 26.08
Minimum torque ref, source of 30.18 Minimum torque sel. See
diagram on page 193.
5 Tlim max speed 1 = Torque reference is being limited by the rush control because
of
maximum speed limit (30.12 Maximum speed)
6 Tlim min speed 1 = Torque reference is being limited by the rush control because
of
minimum speed limit (30.11 Minimum speed)
7 Max speed ref 1 = Speed reference is being limited by 30.12 Maximum speed
lim
8 Min speed ref 1 = Speed reference is being limited by 30.11 Minimum speed
lim
9 Max freq ref lim 1 = Frequency reference is being limited by 30.14 Maximum
frequency
10 Min freq ref lim 1 = Frequency reference is being limited by 30.13 Minimum
frequency

0000h…FFFFh Limit word 1. 1=1

 Parameters 189

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
30.02 Torque limit status Displays the torque controller limitation status word. -
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 Undervoltage *1 = Intermediate DC circuit undervoltage
1 Overvoltage *1 = Intermediate DC circuit overvoltage
2 Minimum torque *1 = Torque is being limited by 30.26 Power motoring limit, 30.27
Power generating limit or the source of 30.18 Minimum torque sel.
See diagram on page 191.
3 Maximum torque *1 = Torque is being limited by 30.26 Power motoring limit, 30.27
Power generating limit or the source of 30.25 Maximum torque
sel. See diagram on page 191.
4 Internal current 1 = An inverter current limit (identified by bits 8...11) is active
5 Load angle Not applicable for ACS580MV.
6 Motor pullout (With asynchronous motors only)
1 = Motor pull-out limit is active, ie. the motor cannot produce any
more torque
7 Reserved
8 Trafo current 1 = Trafo current overload limiter is active
9 Inv/mot current *1 = Inverter/motor current overload limiter is active
10 User current *1 = Output current is being limited by 30.17 Maximum current
11 Thermal IGBT Not applicable for ACS580MV.
12 IGBT Not applicable for ACS580MV.
overtemperature
13 IGBT overload Not applicable for ACS580MV.
14…15 Reserved
*Usually only one bit from 0...3, and one bit from 9...13 are on at the same time. The enabled
bit is typically the bit exceeds the limit first. An Exception is that in vector control mode,
when average PEBB input voltage is less than the value defined by Par30.56 (default is 600V),
bit 0 Undervoltage = 1. In this case, bit 1 = 1 means overvoltage control is active. Thus, it is
possible that bit 0 and bit 1 are both 1 at same time (e.g grid ride through while motor is in
running in generating mode).

0000h…FFFFh Torque limitation status word. 1=1

30.11 Minimum speed Defines the minimum allowed speed. -1500.00
WARNING! This value must not be higher than rpm
30.12 Maximum speed.
WARNING! In frequency control mode, this limit is
not effective. Make sure the frequency limits (30.13
and 30.14) are set appropriately if frequency
control is used.
-30000.00 … Minimum allowed speed. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
190 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
30.12 Maximum speed Defines the maximum allowed speed. 1500.00
WARNING! This value must not be lower than 30.11 rpm
Minimum speed.
WARNING! In frequency control mode, this limit is
not effective. Make sure the frequency limits (30.13
and 30.14) are set appropriately if frequency
control is used.
-30000.00 … Maximum speed. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
30.13 Minimum frequency Defines the minimum allowed frequency. -50.00 Hz
WARNING! This value must not be higher than
30.14 Maximum frequency.
WARNING! This limit is effective in frequency
control mode only.
-500.00 … 500.00 Minimum frequency. See par.
Hz 46.02
30.14 Maximum frequency Defines the maximum allowed frequency. 50.00 Hz
WARNING! This value must not be lower than 30.13
Minimum frequency.
WARNING! This limit is effective in frequency
control mode only.
-500.00 … 500.00 Maximum frequency. See par.
Hz 46.02
30.17 Maximum current Defines the maximum allowed motor current. Motor 0.00 A
current will be limited to the smaller value between this
parameter and 34.50 Motor max overload current. See
also the description of the overloading functionality in 34
Protections.
0.00 … 30000.00 A Maximum motor current. 1=1A
 Parameters 191

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
30.18 Minimum torque sel Selects a source that switches between two different Minimum
predefined minimum torque limits. torque 1
0 = Minimum torque limit defined by 30.19 is active
1 = Minimum torque limit selected by 30.21 is active
The user can define two sets of torque limits, and switch
between the sets using a binary source such as a digital
input. The minimum limit selection (30.18) is independent
of the maximum limit selection (30.25).
The first set of limits is defined by parameters 30.19 and
30.20. The second set has selector parameters for both
the minimum (30.21) and maximum (30.22) limits that
allows the use of a selectable analog source (such as an
analog input).

30.21
0
AI1 30.18
AI2 1
PID
User-defined
30.23 0
minimum
torque limit
30.19

30.22
0
AI1 30.25
AI2 1
PID
30.24 User-defined
0
maximum
torque limit
30.20

The limit selection parameters are updated on a 10 ms

time level.
Note: In addition to the user-defined limits, torque may
be limited for other reasons (such as power limitation).
Refer to the block diagram on page 450.
Minimum torque 1 0 (minimum torque limit defined by 30.19 is active). 0
Minimum torque 2 1 (minimum torque limit selected by 30.21 is active). 1
source
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
192 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
30.19 Minimum torque 1 Defines a minimum torque limit for the drive (in percent -300.0%
of nominal motor torque). See diagram at parameter
30.18 Minimum torque sel.
The limit is effective when
• the source selected by 30.18 Minimum torque sel is 0, or
• 30.18 is set to Minimum torque 1.
Note: Do not set this parameter to 0% in an attempt to
prevent reverse rotation. In an open-loop application, that
is likely to prevent the motor from stopping altogether.
To prevent reverse rotation, use the speed/frequency
limits in this parameter group, or parameters
20.23/20.24.
-1600.0 … 0.0% Minimum torque limit 1. See par.
46.03
30.20 Maximum torque 1 Defines a maximum torque limit for the drive (in percent 300.0%
of nominal motor torque). See diagram at parameter
30.18 Minimum torque sel.
The limit is effective when
• the source selected by 30.25 Maximum torque sel is 0, or
• 30.25 is set to Maximum torque 1.
0.0 … 1600.0% Maximum torque 1. See par.
46.03
30.21 Minimum torque 2 Defines the source of the minimum torque limit for the Minimum
source drive (in percent of nominal motor torque) when torque 2
• the source selected by parameter 30.18 Minimum torque
sel is 1, or
• 30.18 is set to Minimum torque 2 source.
See diagram at 30.18 Minimum torque sel.
Note: Any positive values received from the selected
source are inverted.
Zero None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 89). 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 91). 2
PID Not applicable for ACS580MV. 5
Minimum torque 2 30.23 Minimum torque 2. 6
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
30.22 Maximum torque 2 Defines the source of the maximum torque limit for the Maximum
source drive (in percent of nominal motor torque) when torque 2
• the source selected by parameter 30.25 Maximum torque
sel is 1, or
• 30.25 is set to Maximum torque 2 source.
See diagram at 30.18 Minimum torque sel.
Note: Any negative values received from the selected
source are inverted.
Zero None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 89). 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 91). 2
PID Not applicable for ACS580MV. 5
Maximum torque 2 30.24 Maximum torque 2. 6
 Parameters 193

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
30.23 Minimum torque 2 Defines the minimum torque limit for the drive (in percent -300.0%
of nominal motor torque) when
• the source selected by parameter 30.18 Minimum torque
sel is 1, and
• 30.21 is set to Minimum torque 2.
Note: Do not set this parameter to 0% in an attempt to
prevent reverse rotation. In an open-loop application, that
is likely to prevent the motor from stopping altogether.
To prevent reverse rotation, use the speed/frequency
limits in this parameter group, or parameters
20.23/20.24.
See diagram at 30.18 Minimum torque sel.
-1600.0 … 0.0% Minimum torque limit 2. See par.
46.03
30.24 Maximum torque 2 Defines the maximum torque limit for the drive (in 300.0%
percent of nominal motor torque) when
• the source selected by parameter 30.25 Maximum torque
sel is 1, and
• 30.22 is set to Maximum torque 2.
See diagram at 30.18 Minimum torque sel.
0.0 … 1600.0% Maximum torque limit 2. See par.
46.03
30.25 Maximum torque sel Selects a source that switches between two different Maximum
maximum torque limits. torque 1
0 = Maximum torque limit 1 defined by 30.20 is active
1 = Maximum torque limit selected by 30.22 is active
See also parameter 30.18 Minimum torque sel.
Maximum torque 1 0. 0
Maximum torque 2 1. 1
source
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
30.26 Power motoring limit Defines the maximum shaft power in motoring mode, ie. 300.00%
when power is being transferred from the motor to the
machinery. The value is given in percent of nominal motor
power.
0.00 … 600.00% Maximum shaft power in motoring mode. 1 = 1%
194 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
30.27 Power generating Not applicable for ACS580MV. -
limit
-600.00 … 0.00% Maximum shaft power in generating mode. 1 = 1%
30.40 Rated output current Rated converter output current derived from license key. 0A
This parameter is read-only.
0 … 511 A Rated converter output current. 1=1A
30.41 Rated input current Rated converter input current derived from license key. 0A
This parameter is read-only.
0 … 511 A Rated converter input current. 1=1A
30.60 PMSM maximum Maximum speed can be reached for PMSM motor due to -
speed limit drive output capability or motor limit.
0 … 511 A PM motor speed limit 1=1 rpm
30.61 Maximum static Maximum torque can be allowed for PMSM or AM during -
torque limit steady operation.
0 … 511 A Motor torque limit 1=1%
30.62 Minimum static torque Minimum torque can be allowed for PMSM or AM during -
limit steady operation.
0 … 511 A Motor torque limit 1=1%
31
31 Fault functions Configuration of external events; selection of behavior of the
drive upon fault situations.
31.01 External event 1 Defines the source of external event 1. Inactive
source See also parameter 31.02 External event 1 type. (true)
0 = Trigger event
1 = Normal operation
Active (false) 0. 0
Inactive (true) 1. 1
DIIL DIIL input (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 15). 2
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 3
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 4
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 5
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 6
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 7
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 8
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 12
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
31.02 External event 1 type Selects the type of external event 1. Fault
Fault The external event generates a fault. 0
Warning The external event generates a warning. 1
Warning/Fault If the drive is modulating, the external event generates a 3
fault. Otherwise, the event generates a warning.
 Parameters 195

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
31.03 External event 2 Defines the source of external event 2. See also parameter Inactive
source 31.04 External event 2 type. (true)
For the selections, see parameter 31.01 External event 1
source.
31.04 External event 2 type Selects the type of external event 2. Fault
Fault The external event generates a fault. 0
Warning The external event generates a warning. 1
Warning/Fault If the drive is modulating, the external event generates a 3
fault. Otherwise, the event generates a warning.
31.05 External event 3 Defines the source of external event 3. See also parameter Inactive
source 31.06 External event 3 type. (true)
For the selections, see parameter 31.01 External event 1
source.
31.06 External event 3 type Selects the type of external event 3. Fault
Fault The external event generates a fault. 0
Warning The external event generates a warning. 1
Warning/Fault If the drive is modulating, the external event generates a 3
fault. Otherwise, the event generates a warning.
31.07 External event 4 Defines the source of external event 4. See also parameter Inactive
source 31.08 External event 4 type. (true)
For the selections, see parameter 31.01 External event 1
source.
31.08 External event 4 type Selects the type of external event 4. Fault
Fault The external event generates a fault. 0
Warning The external event generates a warning. 1
Warning/Fault If the drive is modulating, the external event generates a 3
fault. Otherwise, the event generates a warning.
31.09 External event 5 Defines the source of external event 5. See also parameter Inactive
source 31.10 External event 5 type. (true)
For the selections, see parameter 31.01 External event 1
source.
31.10 External event 5 type Selects the type of external event 5. Fault
Fault The external event generates a fault. 0
Warning The external event generates a warning. 1
Warning/Fault If the drive is modulating, the external event generates a 3
fault. Otherwise, the event generates a warning.
31.11 Fault reset selection Selects the source of an external fault reset signal. This signal DI3
will be observed even if it is not the active source in the
current control location (EXT1/EXT2/Local).
(A reset from the active source will be observed regardless of
this parameter.)
0 –> 1 = Reset
Not selected 0 0
Selected 1 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
196 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
FBA A MCW bit7 Control word bit 7 received through fieldbus interface A. 30
EFB MCW bit 7 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 32
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55 ).
31.12 Autoreset selection Selects faults that are automatically reset. The parameter 0000h
is a 16-bit word with each bit corresponding to a fault
type. Whenever a bit is set to 1, the corresponding fault is
automatically reset.
The number and interval of reset attempts are defined by
parameters 31.14…31.16.
Note: The autoreset function is only available in external
control; see section Local control vs. external control
(page 16 ).
The bits of this binary number correspond to the
following faults:

Bit Fault
0 Overcurrent, Not applicable for ACS580MV.
1 Overvoltage, Not applicable for ACS580MV.
2 Undervoltage, Not applicable for ACS580MV.
3 AI supervision fault
4 Supply unit, Not applicable for ACS580MV.
5…7 Reserved
8 Application fault 1 (defined in the application program)
9 Application fault 2 (defined in the application program)
10 Selectable fault (see parameter 31.13 User selectable fault)
11 External fault 1 (from source selected by parameter 31.01 External event 1 source)
12 External fault 2 (from source selected by parameter 31.03 External event 2 source)
13 External fault 3 (from source selected by parameter 31.05 External event 3 source)
14 External fault 4 (from source selected by parameter 31.07 External event 4 source)
15 External fault 5 (from source selected by parameter 31.09 External event 5 source)

0000h…FFFFh Automatic reset configuration word. 1=1

31.13 User selectable fault Defines the fault that can be automatically reset using 0000h
parameter 31.12 Autoreset selection, bit 10.
The faults are listed in chapter Fault tracing (page 391).
0000h…FFFFh Fault code. 10 = 1
 Parameters 197

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
31.14 Number of trials Defines the maximum number of automatic resets that 0
the drive is allowed to attempt within the time specified
by 31.15 Total trials time.
If the fault persists, subsequent reset attempts will be
made at intervals defined by 31.16 Delay time.
The faults to be automatically reset are defined by 31.12
Autoreset selection.
0…5 Number of automatic resets. 10 = 1
31.15 Total trials time Defines a time window for automatic fault resets. The 30.0 s
maximum number of attempts made during any period of
this length is defined by 31.14 Number of trials.
Note: If the fault condition remains and cannot be reset,
each reset attempt will generate an event and start a new
time window. In practice, if the specified number of
resets (31.14) at specified intervals (31.16) take longer
than the value of 31.15, the drive will continue to attempt
resetting the fault until the cause is eventually removed.
1.0 … 600.0 s Time for automatic resets. 10 = 1 s
31.16 Delay time Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault (or a 0.0 s
previous reset attempt) before attempting an automatic
reset. See parameter 31.12 Autoreset selection.
0.0 … 120.0 s Autoreset delay. 10 = 1 s
31.24 Stall function Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition. Warning
A stall condition is defined as follows: and stop
• The drive exceeds the stall current limit (31.25 Stall current modulatio
limit), or actual current reaches internal current limit (bit 4 n
of Par 30.02 Torque limit status), and
• the output frequency is below the level set by parameter
31.27 Stall frequency limit or the motor speed is below the
level set by parameter 31.26 Stall speed limit, and
• the conditions above have been true longer than the time
set by parameter 31.28 Stall time.
No action None (stall supervision disabled). 0
Warning and stop The drive generates an A780 Motor stall warning and stop 1
modulation modulation, The warning will be kept active for the time
defined by Par31.28. When the warning is active, starting
is inhibited (bit 5 of Par6.25 Drive inhibit status word 2).
Fault The drive trips on fault 7121 Motor stall. 2
31.25 Stall current limit Stall current limit in percent of the nominal current of the 150.0%
motor (parameter 99.06 Motor nominal current). See
parameter 31.24 Stall function.
0.0 … 1600.0% Stall current limit. -
31.26 Stall speed limit Stall speed limit in rpm. See parameter 31.24 Stall 40.00
function. rpm
0.00 … 10000.00 Stall speed limit. See par.
rpm 46.01
31.27 Stall frequency limit Stall frequency limit. See parameter 31.24 Stall function. 1.00 Hz
Note: Setting the limit below 10 Hz is not recommended.
0.00 … 500.00 Hz Stall frequency limit. See par.
46.02
198 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
31.28 Stall time Stall time. See parameter 31.24 Stall function. 20 s
0 … 3600 s Stall time. -
31.30 Overspeed trip Defines, together with 30.11 Minimum speed and 30.12 500.00
margin Maximum speed, the maximum allowed speed of the rpm
motor (overspeed protection). If actual speed (90.01
Motor speed for control) exceeds the speed limit defined
by parameter 30.11 or 30.12 by more than the value of this
parameter, the drive trips on the 7310 Overspeed fault.

Example: If the maximum speed is 1420 rpm and speed

trip margin is 300 rpm, the drive trips at 1720 rpm.

Speed (90.01)
Overspeed trip level

31.30

30.12

0
Time

30.11

31.30

Overspeed trip level

0.00 … 10000.0 rpm Overspeed trip margin. See par.

46.01
31.40 Disable warning Selects warnings to be suppressed. The parameter is a 16- 0000b
messages bit word with each bit corresponding to a warning.
Whenever a bit is set to 1, the corresponding warning is
suppressed.
The bits of this binary number correspond to the
following warnings:

Bit Fault
0 Overvoltage
1...3 Reserved
4 CU (Control unit) battery
5…15 Reserved

31.55 Ext I/O comm loss Selects how the drive reacts when the communication to Fault
event an I/O extension module fails.
No action No action taken. 0
Warning The drive generates a warning, A799 Ext I/O comm loss. 1
Fault The drive trips on a fault, 7082 Ext I/O comm loss. 2
 Parameters 199

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
32
32 Supervision Configuration of signal supervision functions 1…3.
Three values can be chosen to be monitored; a warning or
fault is generated whenever predefined limits are
exceeded.
See also section Signal supervision (page 50).
32.01 Supervision status Signal supervision status word. 000b
Indicates whether the values monitored by the signal
supervision functions are within or outside their
respective limits.
Note: This word is independent of the drive actions
defined by parameters 32.06, 32.16 and 32.26.

Bit Name Description

0 Supervision 1 active 1 = Signal selected by 32.07 is outside its limits.
1 Supervision 2 active 1 = Signal selected by 32.17 is outside its limits.
2 Supervision 3 active 1 = Signal selected by 32.27 is outside its limits.
3…15 Reserved

000…111b Signal supervision status word. 1=1

32.05 Supervision 1 Selects the mode of signal supervision function 1. Disabled
function Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter
32.07) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.09
and 32.10 respectively). The action to be taken when the
condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.06.
Disabled Signal supervision 1 not in use. 0
Low Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower 1
limit.
High Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper 2
limit.
Abs low Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 3
falls below its (absolute) lower limit.
Abs high Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 4
rises above its (absolute) upper limit.
Both Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low 5
limit or rises above its high limit.
Abs both Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 6
falls below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its
(absolute) high limit.
32.06 Supervision 1 action Selects the action the drive takes when the value No action
monitored by signal supervision 1 exceeds its limits.
Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated
by 32.01 Supervision status.
No action No action taken. 0
Warning A warning (A8B0 Signal supervision 1) is generated. 1
Fault The drive trips on 80B0 Signal supervision. 2
Fault if running If running,the drive trips on 80B0 Signal supervision. 3
32.07 Supervision 1 signal Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision Zero
function 1.
Zero None. 0
200 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Speed 01.01 Motor speed used (page 59). 1
Frequency 01.06 Output frequency (page 59). 3
Current 01.07 Motor current (page 59). 4
Torque 01.10 Motor torque (page 59). 6
DC voltage 01.11 DC voltage (page 59). 7
Output power 01.14 Output power (page 60). 8
AI1 12.11 AI1 actual value (page 89). 9
AI2 12.21 AI2 actual value (page 91). 10
Speed ref ramp in 23.01 Speed ref ramp input (page 151). 18
Speed ref ramp out 23.02 Speed ref ramp output (page 151). 19
Speed ref used 24.01 Used speed reference (page 157). 20
Torque ref used 26.02 Torque reference used (page 172). 21
Freq ref used 28.02 Frequency ref ramp output (page 180). 22
Process PID output Not applicable for ACS580MV. 24
Process PID Not applicable for ACS580MV. 25
feedback
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
32.08 Supervision 1 filter Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by 0.000 s
time signal supervision 1.
0.000 … 30.000 s Signal filter time. 1000 = 1 s
32.09 Supervision 1 low Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 1. 0.00
-21474830.00 … Low limit. -
21474830.00
32.10 Supervision 1 high Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 1. 0.00
-21474830.00 … Upper limit. -
21474830.00
32.15 Supervision 2 Selects the mode of signal supervision function 2. Disabled
function Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter
32.17) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.19 and
32.20 respectively). The action to be taken when the
condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.16.
Disabled Signal supervision 2 not in use. 0
Low Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower 1
limit.
High Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper 2
limit.
Abs low Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 3
falls below its (absolute) lower limit.
Abs high Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 4
rises above its (absolute) upper limit.
Both Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low 5
limit or rises above its high limit.
Abs both Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 6
falls below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its
(absolute) high limit.
 Parameters 201

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
32.16 Supervision 2 action Selects the action the drive takes when the value No action
monitored by signal supervision 2 exceeds its limits.
Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated
by 32.01 Supervision status.
No action No action taken. 0
Warning A warning (A8B1 Signal supervision 2) is generated. 1
Fault The drive trips on 80B1 Signal supervision 2. 2
Fault if running If running,the drive trips on 80B0 Signal supervision. 3
32.17 Supervision 2 signal Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision Zero
function 2.
For the available selections, see parameter 32.07
Supervision 1 signal.
32.18 Supervision 2 filter Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by 0.000 s
time signal supervision 2.
0.000 … 30.000 s Signal filter time. 1000 = 1 s
32.19 Supervision 2 low Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 2. 0.00
-21474830.00 … Low limit. -
21474830.00
32.20 Supervision 2 high Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 2. 0.00
-21474830.00 … Upper limit. -
21474830.00
32.25 Supervision 3 Selects the mode of signal supervision function 3. Disabled
function Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter
32.27) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.29 and
32.30 respectively). The action to be taken when the
condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.26.
Disabled Signal supervision 3 not in use. 0
Low Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower 1
limit.
High Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper 2
limit.
Abs low Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 3
falls below its (absolute) lower limit.
Abs high Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 4
rises above its (absolute) upper limit.
Both Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low 5
limit or rises above its high limit.
Abs both Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 6
falls below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its
(absolute) high limit.
32.26 Supervision 3 action Selects the action the drive takes when the value No action
monitored by signal supervision 3 exceeds its limits.
Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated
by 32.01 Supervision status.
No action No action taken. 0
Warning A warning (A8B2 Signal supervision 3) is generated. 1
Fault The drive trips on 80B2 Signal supervision 3. 2
Fault if running If running,the drive trips on 80B0 Signal supervision. 3
202 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
32.27 Supervision 3 signal Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision Zero
function 3.
For the available selections, see parameter 32.07
Supervision 1 signal.
32.28 Supervision 3 filter Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by 0.000 s
time signal supervision 3.
0.000 … 30.000 s Signal filter time. 1000 = 1 s
32.29 Supervision 3 low Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 3. 0.00
-21474830.00 … Low limit. -
21474830.00
32.30 Supervision 3 high Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 3. 0.00
-21474830.00 … Upper limit. -
21474830.00
33
33 Generic timer & counter Configuration of Generic timers/counters.
See also section Maintenance timers and counters (page
50).
33.01 Counter status Displays the maintenance timer/counter status word, -
indicating which maintenance timers/counters have
exceeded their limits.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 On-time1 1 = On-time timer 1 has reached its preset limit.
1 On-time2 1 = On-time timer 2 has reached its preset limit.
2 Edge 1 1 = Signal edge counter 1 has reached its preset limit.
3 Edge 2 1 = Signal edge counter 2 has reached its preset limit.
4 Value 1 1 = Value counter 1 has reached its preset limit.
5 Value 2 1 = Value counter 2 has reached its preset limit.
6…15 Reserved

000000b…111111b Maintenance time/counter status word. 1=1

33.10 On-time 1 actual Displays the actual present value of on-time timer 1. -
The timer runs whenever the signal selected by parameter
33.13 On-time 1 source is on.
When the timer exceeds the limit set by 33.11 On-time 1
warn limit, bit 0 of 33.01 Counter status is set to 1. The
warning specified by 33.14 On-time 1 warn message is
also given if enabled by 33.12 On-time 1 function.
The timer can be reset from the Drive composer PC tool
(by entering 0 for this parameter) or from the control
panel by keeping Reset depressed for over 3 seconds.
0…4294967295 s Actual present value of on-time timer 1. -
33.11 On-time 1 warn limit Sets the warning limit for on-time timer 1. 0s
0…4294967295 s Warning limit for on-time timer 1. -
 Parameters 203

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
33.12 On-time 1 function Configures on-time timer 1. 00b

Bit Function
0 Counter mode
0 = Loop: When the limit is reached, the counter is reset. The counter status (bit 0
of 33.01) switches to 1 for one second. The warning (if enabled) stays active for at
least 10 seconds.
1 = Saturate: When the limit is reached, the counter status (bit 0 of 33.01) switches
to 1, and remains so until 33.10 is reset. The warning (if enabled) also stays active
until 33.10 is reset.
1 Warning enable
0 = Disable: No warning is given when the limit is reached
1 = Enable: A warning (see 33.14) is given when the limit is reached
2…15 Reserved

00b…11b On-time timer 1 configuration word. 1=1

33.13 On-time 1 source Selects the signal to be monitored by on-time timer 1. False
False Constant 0 (timer disabled). 0
True Constant 1. 1
RO1 Bit 0 of 10.21 RO status (page 84). 2
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
33.14 On-time 1 warn Selects the optional warning message for on-time timer 1. On-time 1
message exceeded
On-time 1 exceeded A886 On-time 1. The message text can be edited on the 0
control panel by choosing Menu – Settings – Edit texts.
Clean device A88C Device clean. 6
Maintain additional A890 Additional cooling fan. 7
cooling fan
Maintain cabinet fan A88E Cabinet fan. 8
Maintain DC A88D DC capacitor. 9
capacitors
Maintain motor A880 Motor bearing. 10
bearing
33.20 On-time 2 actual Displays the actual present value of on-time timer 2. -
The timer runs whenever the signal selected by parameter
33.23 On-time 2 source is on.
When the timer exceeds the limit set by 33.21 On-time 2
warn limit, bit 1 of 33.01 Counter status is set to 1. The
warning specified by 33.24 On-time 2 warn message is
also given if enabled by 33.22 On-time 2 function.
The timer can be reset from the Drive composer PC tool
(by entering 0 for this parameter) or from the control
panel by keeping Reset depressed for over 3 seconds.
0…4294967295 s Actual present value of on-time timer 2. -
33.21 On-time 2 warn limit Sets the warning limit for on-time timer 2. 0s
0…4294967295 s Warning limit for on-time timer 2. -
204 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
33.22 On-time 2 function Configures on-time timer 2. 00b

Bit Function
0 Counter mode
0 = Loop: When the limit is reached, the counter is reset. The counter status (bit 1 of
33.01) switches to 1 for one second. The warning (if enabled) stays active for at
least 10 seconds.
1 = Saturate: When the limit is reached, the counter status (bit 1 of 33.01) switches
to 1, and remains so until 33.20 is reset. The warning (if enabled) also stays active
until 33.20 is reset.
1 Warning enable
0 = Disable: No warning is given when the limit is reached
1 = Enable: A warning (see 33.24) is given when the limit is reached
2…15 Reserved

00b…11b On-time timer 2 configuration word. 1=1

33.23 On-time 2 source Selects the signal to be monitored by on-time timer 2. False
False Constant 0 (timer disabled). 0
True Constant 1. 1
RO1 Bit 0 of 10.21 RO status (page 84). 2
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
33.24 On-time 2 warn Selects the optional warning message for on-time timer 2. On-time 2
message exceeded
On-time 2 exceeded A887 On-time 2. The message text can be edited on the 1
control panel by choosing Menu – Settings – Edit texts.
Clean device A88C Device clean. 6
Maintain additional A890 Additional cooling fan. 7
cool fan
Maintain cabinet fan A88E Cabinet fan. 8
Maintain DC A88D DC capacitor. 9
capacitors
Maintain motor A880 Motor bearing. 10
bearing
33.30 Edge counter 1 actual Actual present value of signal edge counter 1. -
The counter is incremented every time the signal selected
by parameter 33.33 Edge counter 1 source switches on or
off (or either, depending on the setting of 33.32 Edge
counter 1 function). A divisor may be applied to the count
(see 33.34 Edge counter 1 divider).
When the counter exceeds the limit set by 33.31 Edge
counter 1 warn limit, bit 2 of 33.01 Counter status is set to
1. The warning specified by 33.35 Edge counter 1 warn
message is also given if enabled by 33.32 Edge counter 1
function.
The counter can be reset from the Drive composer PC tool
(by entering 0 for this parameter) or from the control
panel by keeping Reset depressed for over 3 seconds.
0…4294967295 Actual present value of signal edge counter 1. -
 Parameters 205

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
33.31 Edge counter 1 warn Sets the warning limit for signal edge counter 1. 0
limit
0…4294967295 Warning limit for signal edge counter 1. -
33.32 Edge counter 1 Configures signal edge counter 1. 0000b
function

Bit Function
0 Counter mode
0 = Loop: When the limit is reached, the counter is reset. The counter status (bit 2
of 33.01) switches to 1 and remains so until the counter is again incremented. The
warning (if enabled) stays active for at least 10 seconds.
1 = Saturate: When the limit is reached, the counter status (bit 2 of 33.01) switches
to 1, and remains so until 33.30 is reset. The warning (if enabled) also stays active
until 33.30 is reset.
1 Warning enable
0 = Disable: No warning is given when the limit is reached
1 = Enable: A warning (see 33.35) is given when the limit is reached
2 Count rising edges
0 = Disable: Rising edges are not counted
1 = Enable: Rising edges are counted
3 Count falling edges
0 = Disable: Falling edges are not counted
1 = Enable: Falling edges are counted
4…15 Reserved

0000b…1111b Edge counter 1 configuration word. 1=1

33.33 Edge counter 1 Selects the signal to be monitored by signal edge counter False
source 1.
False Constant 0. 0
True Constant 1. 1
RO1 Bit 0 of 10.21 RO status (page 84). 2
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
33.34 Edge counter 1 Defines a divisor for signal edge counter 1. Determines 1
divider how many signal edges increment the counter by 1.
1…4294967295 Divisor for signal edge counter 1. -
33.35 Edge counter 1 warn Selects the optional warning message for signal edge Edge
message counter 1. counter 1
exceeded
Edge counter 1 A888 Edge counter 1. The message text can be edited on 2
exceeded the control panel by choosing Menu – Settings – Edit
texts.
Counted main A884 Main contactor. 11
contactor
Counted output A881 Output relay. 12
relay
Counted motor A882 Motor starts. 13
starts
Counted power ups A883 Power ups. 14
206 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Counted DC charges A885 DC charge. 15
33.40 Edge counter 2 actual Displays the actual present value of signal edge counter 2. -
The counter is incremented every time the signal selected
by parameter 33.43 Edge counter 2 source switches on or
off (or either, depending on the setting of 33.42 Edge
counter 2 function). A divisor may be applied to the count
(see 33.44 Edge counter 2 divider).
When the counter exceeds the limit set by 33.41 Edge
counter 2 warn limit, bit 3 of 33.01 Counter status is set to
1. The warning specified by 33.45 Edge counter 2 warn
message is also given if enabled by 33.42 Edge counter 2
function.
The counter can be reset from the Drive composer PC tool
(by entering 0 for this parameter) or from the control
panel by keeping Reset depressed for over 3 seconds.
0…4294967295 Actual present value of signal edge counter 2. -
33.41 Edge counter 2 warn Sets the warning limit for signal edge counter 2. 0
limit
0…4294967295 Warning limit for signal edge counter 2. -
33.42 Edge counter 2 Configures signal edge counter 2. 0000b
function

Bit Function
0 Counter mode
0 = Loop: When the limit is reached, the counter is reset. The counter status (bit 3
of 33.01) remains 1 until the counter is again incremented. The warning (if enabled)
stays active for at least 10 seconds.
1 = Saturate: After the limit is reached, the counter status (bit 3 of 33.01) remains 1
until 33.40 is reset. The warning (if enabled) also stays active until 33.40 is reset.
1 Warning enable
0 = Disable: No warning is given when the limit is reached
1 = Enable: A warning (see 33.45) is given when the limit is reached
2 Count rising edges
0 = Disable: Rising edges are not counted
1 = Enable: Rising edges are counted
3 Count falling edges
0 = Disable: Falling edges are not counted
1 = Enable: Falling edges are counted
4…15 Reserved

0000b…1111b Edge counter 2 configuration word. 1=1

33.43 Edge counter 2 Selects the signal to be monitored by signal edge counter False
source 2.
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
RO1 Bit 0 of 10.21 RO status (page 84). 2
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
33.44 Edge counter 2 Defines a divisor for signal edge counter 2. Determines 1
divider how many signal edges increment the counter by 1.
1…4294967295 Divisor for signal edge counter 2. -
 Parameters 207

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
33.45 Edge counter 2 warn Selects the optional warning message for signal edge Edge
message counter 2. counter 2
exceeded
Edge counter 2 A889 Edge counter 2. The message text can be edited on 3
exceeded the control panel by choosing Menu – Settings – Edit
texts.
Counted main A884 Main contactor. 11
contactor
Counted output A881 Output relay. 12
relay
Counted motor A882 Motor starts. 13
starts
Counted power ups A883 Power ups. 14
Counted DC charges A885 DC charge. 15
33.50 Value counter 1 Displays the actual present value of value counter 1. -
actual The value of the source selected by parameter 33.53 Value
counter 1 source is read at one-second intervals and
added to the counter. A divisor can be applied to the
count (see 33.54 Value counter 1 divider).
When the counter exceeds the limit set by 33.51 Value
counter 1 warn limit, bit 4 of 33.01 Counter status is set to
1. The warning specified by 33.55 Value counter 1 warn
message is also given if enabled by 33.52 Value counter 1
function.
The counter can be reset from the Drive composer PC tool
(by entering 0 for this parameter) or from the control
panel by keeping Reset depressed for over 3 seconds.
-2147483008 … Actual present value of value counter 1. -
2147483008
33.51 Value counter 1 warn Sets the limit for value counter 1. 0
limit With a positive limit, bit 4 of 33.01 Counter status is set to
1 (and a warning optionally generated) when the counter
is equal or greater than the limit.
With a negative limit, bit 4 of 33.01 Counter status is set
to 1 (and a warning optionally generated) when the
counter is equal or smaller than the limit.
0 = Counter disabled.
-2147483008 … Limit for value counter 1. -
2147483008
208 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
33.52 Value counter 1 Configures value counter 1. 00b
function

Bit Function
0 Counter mode
0 = Loop: When the limit is reached, the counter is reset. The counter status (bit 4
of 33.01) switches to 1 for one second. The warning (if enabled) stays active for at
least 10 seconds.
1 = Saturate: When the limit is reached, the counter status (bit 4 of 33.01) switches
to 1, and remains so until 33.50 is reset. The warning (if enabled) also stays active
until 33.50 is reset.
1 Warning enable
0 = Disable: No warning is given when the limit is reached
1 = Enable: A warning (see 33.55) is given when the limit is reached
2…15 Reserved

00b…11b Value counter 1 configuration word. 1=1

33.53 Value counter 1 Selects the signal to be monitored by value counter 1. Not
source selected
Not selected None (counter disabled). 0
Motor speed 01.01 Motor speed used (see page 59). 1
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
33.54 Value counter 1 Defines a divisor for value counter 1. The value of the 1.000
divider monitored signal is divided by this value before
integration.
0.001 … Divisor for value counter 1. -
2147483.000
33.55 Value counter 1 warn Selects the optional warning message for value counter 1. Value
message counter 1
exceeded
Value counter 1 A88A Value integrator 1. The message text can be edited 4
exceeded on the control panel by choosing Menu – Settings – Edit
texts.
Maintain motor A880 Motor bearing. 10
bearing
33.60 Value counter 2 Displays the actual present value of value counter 2. -
actual The value of the source selected by parameter 33.63 Value
counter 2 source is read at one-second intervals and
added to the counter. A divisor can be applied to the
count (see 33.64 Value counter 2 divider).
When the counter exceeds the limit set by 33.61 Value
counter 2 warn limit, bit 5 of 33.01 Counter status is set to
1. The warning specified by 33.65 Value counter 2 warn
message is also given if enabled by 33.62 Value counter 2
function.
The counter can be reset from the Drive composer PC tool
(by entering 0 for this parameter) or from the control
panel by keeping Reset depressed for over 3 seconds.
-2147483008 … Actual present value of value counter 2. -
2147483008
 Parameters 209

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
33.61 Value counter 2 warn Sets the limit for value counter 2. 0
limit With a positive limit, bit 5 of 33.01 Counter status is set to
1 (and a warning optionally generated) when the counter
is equal or greater than the limit.
With a negative limit, bit 5 of 33.01 Counter status is set
to 1 (and a warning optionally generated) when the
counter is equal or smaller than the limit.
0 = Counter disabled.
-2147483008 … Limit for value counter 2. -
2147483008
33.62 Value counter 2 Configures value counter 2. 00b
function

Bit Function
0 Counter mode
0 = Loop: When the limit is reached, the counter is reset. The counter status (bit 5
of 33.01) switches to 1 for one second. The warning (if enabled) stays active for at
least 10 seconds.
1 = Saturate: When the limit is reached, the counter status (bit 5 of 33.01) switches
to 1, and remains so until 33.60 is reset. The warning (if enabled) also stays active
until 33.60 is reset.
1 Warning enable
0 = Disable: No warning is given when the limit is reached
1 = Enable: A warning (see 33.65) is given when the limit is reached
2…15 Reserved

00b…11b Value counter 2 configuration word. 1=1

33.63 Value counter 2 Selects the signal to be monitored by value counter 2. Not
source selected
Not selected None (counter disabled). 0
Motor speed 01.01 Motor speed used (see page 59). 1
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
33.64 Value counter 2 Defines a divisor for value counter 2. The value of the 1.000
divider monitored signal is divided by this value before
integration.
0.001 … Divisor for value counter 2. -
2147483.000
33.65 Value counter 2 warn Selects the optional warning message for value counter 2. Value
message counter 2
exceeded
Value counter 2 A88B Value integrator 2. The message text can be edited 5
exceeded on the control panel by choosing Menu – Settings – Edit
texts.
Maintain motor A880 Motor bearing. 10
bearing
35
34 Protections Motor protection functions
Note: All currents defined in this group are given in per
unit (p.u.). Base value for motor currents is defined in
parameter 99.06 Motor nominal current.
210 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
34.49 Motor max cont Maximum motor current (rms) for continuous operation. 1.100 p.u.
current At this current motor can be operated continuously
without risk of overheating.
0.000 … 1.500 p.u. Maximum motor current for continuous operation. 1 = 1 p.u.
34.50 Motor max overload Maximum motor current (rms) that can be allowed for a 1.200 p.u.
current short period of time during overload operation. Motor
can be operated at this current only for the time less or
equal then defined in parameter 34.51 Motor overload
duration. After such an overload operation motor current
will be limited to value defined in parameter 34.49 Motor
max cont current for 34.52 Motor overload recovery time
to allow for motor cooling. After cooling time has elapsed,
short term overloading can be allowed again so motor
current limit will cycle between two values (34.49 Motor
max cont current and 34.50 Motor max overload current)
with periods 34.51 Motor overload duration and 34.52
Motor overload recovery time.
Note: If motor maximum continuous or overload current
exceeds overloading ability of the converter, motor
current will be limited to lower value to avoid damage of
the converter. Make sure that converter rating and
overload ability match those of the motor.
0.000 … 3.000 p.u. Maximum motor current for short term overload 1 = 1 p.u.
operation.
34.51 Motor overload Maximum time during which motor can be overloaded. 60 s.
duration See the explanation for parameter 34.50 Motor max
overload current.
0 … 10000 s Maximum motor overload duration. 1=1s
34.52 Motor overload Minimum cooling time for motor after overloading. See 60 s.
recovery time the explanation for parameter 34.50 Motor max overload
current.
0 … 10000 s Minimum motor cooling time after overload operation. 1=1s
35
35 Motor thermal Motor thermal protection settings such as temperature
protection measurement configuration and motor fan control
configuration.
See also section Motor thermal protection (page 46).
35.02 Measured Displays the temperature received through the source -
temperature 1 defined by parameter 35.11 Temperature 1 source. The
unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is Ωs.
This parameter is read-only.
-60 … 1000 °C, Measured temperature 1. 1 = 1 unit
0 Ω or [35.12] Ω
35.03 Measured Displays the temperature received through the source -
temperature 2 defined by parameter 35.21 Temperature 2 source.
Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is Ωs.
This parameter is read-only.
-60 … 1000 °C, Measured temperature 2. 1 = 1 unit
0 Ω or [35.22] Ω
 Parameters 211

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
35.04 FPTC status word Displays the status of optional FPTC-xx thermistor -
protection modules. The word can be used as the source
of eg. external events.
Note: The “module found” bits are updated regardless of
whether the corresponding module is activated. However,
the “fault active” and “warning active” bits are not
updated if the module is not activated. Modules are
activated by parameter 35.30 FPTC configuration word.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 Module found in slot 1 1 = Yes: An FPTC-xx module has been detected in slot 1.
1 Fault active in slot 1 1 = Yes: The module in slot 1 has an active fault (4991).
2 Warning active in slot 1 = Yes: The module in slot 1 has an active warning (A497).
1
3 Module found in slot 2 1 = Yes: An FPTC-xx module has been detected in slot 2.
4 Fault active in slot 2 1 = Yes: The module in slot 2 has an active fault (4992).
5 Warning active in slot 1 = Yes: The module in slot 2 has an active warning (A498).
2
6 Module found in slot 3 1 = Yes: An FPTC-xx module has been detected in slot 3.
7 Fault active in slot 3 1 = Yes: The module in slot 3 has an active fault (4993).
8 Warning active in slot 1 = Yes: The module in slot 3 has an active warning (A499).
3
9…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh FPTC-xx status word. 1=1

35.11 Temperature 1 source Selects the source from which measured temperature 1 is Estimate
read. d
Usually this source is from a sensor connected to the temperat
motor controlled by the drive, but it could be used to ure
measure and monitor a temperature from other parts of
the process as long as a suitable sensor is used as per the
selection list.
Disabled None. Temperature monitoring function 1 is disabled. 0
Estimated Estimated motor temperature. The temperature is 1
temperature estimated from an internal drive calculation.
212 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
KTY84 StdIO / KTY84 sensor connected to the analog input selected by 2
Extension I/O parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog
module output. The analog input can be from the standard I/O or
from an extension module.
The following settings are required:
• Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog
input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a
control unit reboot.
• Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
• In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to “Force KTY84
excitation”.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along
with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor
increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and
converted into degrees.
KTY84 encoder KTY84 sensor connected to encoder interface 1. 3
module 1 Not applicable for ACS580MV.
KTY84 encoder KTY84 sensor connected to encoder interface 2. 4
module 2 Not applicable for ACS580MV.
1 x Pt100 analog I/O Pt100 sensor connected to a standard analog input 5
selected by parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and
an analog output.The input and output can be on the
drive control unit or
on an extension module.
The required settings are the same as with selection
KTY84 analog I/O,except that the source selection
parameter of the analog output must be set to Force
Pt100 excitation.
2 x Pt100 analog I/O As selection 1 x Pt100 analog I/O, but with two sensors 6
connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
3 x Pt100 analog I/O As selection 1 x Pt100 analog I/O, but with three sensors 7
connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
PTC DI6 PTC sensor connected to digital input DI6 (see the 8
connection diagram on page 46).
Note: Either 0 Ω (normal temperature) or 4000 chm
(excessive temperature) wil be shown by 35.02 Measured
temperature 1. By default, an excessive temperature will
generate a warning as per parameter 35.13 Temperature 1
warning limit. If you want a fault instead, set 35.12
Temperature 1 fault limit to 4000 Ω.
PTC analog I/O PTC sensor connected to a standard analog input 20
selected by parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and
an analog output. The input and output can be on the
drive control unit or on an extension module.
The required settings are the same as with selection
KTY84 analog I/O,except that the source selection
parameter of the analog output must be set to Force PTC
excitation.
 Parameters 213

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
PTC encoder module PTC sensor connected to encoder interface 1. 9
1 See also parameters 91.21 Module 1 temp sensor type and
91.22 Module 1 temp filter time.
PTC encoder module PTC sensor connected to encoder interface 2. 10
2 See also parameters 91.24 Module 2 temp sensor type and
91.25 Module 2 temp filter time.
Direct temperature The temperature is taken from the source selected by 11
parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source.
1 x Pt1000 analog Pt1000 sensor connected to a standard analog input 13
I/O selected by parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and
an analog output. The input and output can be on the
drive control unit or on an extension module.
The required settings are the same as with selection
KTY84 analog 1O, except that the source selection
parameter of the analog output must be set to Force
Pt1000 excitation.
2 x Pt1000 analog As selection 1 x Pt1000 analog I/O, but with two sensors 14
I/O connected in senies. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
3 x Pt1000 analog As selection 1 x Pt1000 analog I/O, but with two sensors 15
I/O connected in senies. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
35.12 Temperature 1 fault Defines the fault limit for temperature monitoring 130 °C or
limit function 1. When measured temperature 1 exceeds the 266 °F
limit, the drive trips on fault 4981 External temperature 1.
Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is Ωs.
-60 … 1000 °C or Ω Fault limit for temperature monitoring function 1. 1 = 1 unit
35.13 Temperature 1 Defines the warning limit for temperature monitoring 110 °C or
warning limit function 1. When measured temperature 1 exceeds this 230 °F
limit, a warning (A491 External temperature 1) is
generated.
Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is Ωs.
-60 … 1000 °C or Ω Warning limit for temperature monitoring function 1. 1 = 1 unit
35.14 Temperature 1 AI Selects the input for parameter 35.11 Temperature 1 Not
source source, selections KTY84 StdIO / Extension I/O module, 1 selected
x Pt100 analog I/O, 2 x Pt100 analog I/O, 3 x Pt100 analog
I/O and Direct temperature.
Not selected None. 0
AI1 actual value Analog input AI1 on the control unit. 1
AI2 actual value Analog input AI2 on the control unit. 2
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
35.21 Temperature 2 source Selects the source from which measured temperature 2 is Disabled
read.
Usually this source is from a sensor connected to the
motor controlled by the drive, but it could be used to
measure and monitor a temperature from other parts of
the process as long as a suitable sensor is used as per the
selection list.
Disabled None. Temperature monitoring function 2 is disabled. 0
214 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Estimated Estimated motor temperature. The temperature is 1
temperature estimated from an internal drive calculation.
KTY84 StdIO / KTY84 sensor connected to the analog input selected by 2
Extension I/O parameter 35.24 Temperature 2 AI source and an analog
module output. The analog input can be from the standard I/O or
from an extension module.
The following settings are required:
• Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog
input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a
control unit reboot.
• Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
• In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to “Force KTY84
excitation”.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along
with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor
increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and
converted into degrees.
KTY84 encoder KTY84 sensor connected to encoder interface 1. 3
module 1
KTY84 encoder KTY84 sensor connected to encoder interface 2. 4
module 2
PT100 x1 StdIO Pt100 sensor connected to a standard analog input 5
selected by parameter 35.24 Temperature 2 AI source and
an analog output.
The following settings are required:
• Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog
input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a
control unit reboot.
• Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
• In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to “Force Pt100
excitation”.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along
with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor
increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and
converted into degrees.
PT100 x2 StdIO As selection 1 x Pt100 analog I/O, but with two sensors 6
connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
PT100 x3 StdIO As selection 1 x Pt100 analog I/O, but with three sensors 7
connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
PTC DI6 PTC sensor connected to digital input DI6 (see the 8
connection diagram on page 46).
Note: Either 0 Ω (normal temperature) or the value of
parameter 35.22 Temperature 2 fault limit (excessive
temperature) is shown.
PTC encoder module PTC sensor connected to encoder interface 1. 9
1
 Parameters 215

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
PTC encoder module PTC sensor connected to encoder interface 2. 10
2
Direct AI The temperature is taken from the source selected by 11
temperature parameter 35.24 Temperature 2 AI source.
35.22 Temperature 2 fault Defines the fault limit for temperature monitoring 130 °C
limit function 2. See parameter 35.20 Temperature 2 action.
Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is Ωs.
-60 … 1000 °C Fault limit for temperature monitoring function 2. 1 = 1 unit
35.23 Temperature 2 Defines the warning limit for temperature monitoring 110 °C
warning limit function 2. See parameter 35.20 Temperature 2 action.
Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is Ωs.
-60 … 1000 °C Warning limit for temperature monitoring function 2. 1 = 1 unit
35.24 Temperature 2 AI Selects the input for parameter 35.21 Temperature 2 Not
source source, selections KTY84 StdIO / Extension I/O module, selected
PT100 x1 StdIO, PT100 x2 StdIO, PT100 x3 StdIO and
Direct AI temperature.
Not selected None. 0
AI1 actual value Analog input AI1 on the control unit. 1
AI2 actual value Analog input AI2 on the control unit. 2
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
35.30 FPTC configuration Activates FPTC-xx thermistor protection modules 0010
word installed on the control unit of the drive. Using this word, 1010b
it is also possible to suppress the warnings (but not
faults) from each module.

Bit Name Description

0 Module in slot 1 1 = Yes: Module installed in slot 1.
1 Disable slot 1 warning 1 = Yes: Warnings from the module in slot 1 suppressed.
2 Module in slot 2 1 = Yes: Module installed in slot 2.
3 Disable slot 2 warning 1 = Yes: Warnings from the module in slot 2 suppressed.
4 Module in slot 3 1 = Yes: Module installed in slot 3.
5 Disable slot 3 warning 1 = Yes: Warnings from the module in slot 3 suppressed.
6…15 Reserved

0000 0000b … 0011 FPTC-xx module configuration word. 1=1

1111b
216 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
35.100 DOL starter control Parameters 35.100…35.106 configure a monitored Off
source start/stop control logic for external equipment such as a
contactor-controlled motor cooling fan.
This parameter selects the signal that starts and stops
the fan.
0 = Stop
1 = Start
The output controlling the fan contactor is to be
connected to parameter 35.105, bit 1. On and off delays
can be set for the fan by 35.101 and 35.102 respectively. A
feedback signal from the fan can be connected to an
input selected by 35.103; the loss of the feedback will
optionally trigger a warning or fault (see 35.104 and
35.106).
Off 0 (function disabled). 0
On 1. 1
Running Bit 6 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 69). 2
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
35.101 DOL starter on delay Defines a start delay for the motor fan. 0s
The delay timer starts when the control source selected
by parameter 35.100 switches on. After the delay, bit 1 of
35.105 switches on.
0…42949673 s Motor fan start delay. 1=1s
35.102 DOL starter off delay Defines a stop delay for the motor fan. 20 min
The delay timer starts when the control source selected
by parameter 35.100 switches off. After the delay, bit 1 of
35.105 switches off.
0…715828 min Motor fan stop delay. 1 = 1 min
35.103 DOL starter feedback Selects the input for motor fan feedback signal. Not
source 0 = Stopped selected
1 = Running
After the fan is started (bit 1 of 35.105 switches on),
feedback is expected within the time set by 35.104.
Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
 Parameters 217

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
35.104 DOL starter feedback Defines a feedback delay for the motor fan. 0s
delay The delay timer starts when bit 1 of 35.105 switches on. If
no feedback is received from the fan until the delay
elapses, the action selected by 35.106 is taken.
Note: This delay is only applied at start. If the feedback
signal is lost during run, the action selected by 35.106 is
taken immediately.
0…42949673 s Motor fan start delay. 1=1s
35.105 DOL starter status Status of the motor fan control logic. -
word Bit 1 is the control output for the fan, to be selected as the
source of, for example, a digital or relay output.
The other bits indicate the statuses of the selected
control and feedback sources, and the fault status.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 Start command Status of fan control source selected by 35.100.
0 = Stop requested
1 = Start requested
1 Delayed start Fan control bit (delays observed). Select this bit as the source of
command the output controlling the fan.
0 = Stopped
1 = Started
2 DOL feedback Status of fan feedback (source selected by 35.103).
0 = Stopped
1 = Running
3 DOL fault (-1) Fault status.
0 = Fault (fan feedback missing). The action taken is selected by
35.106.
1 = No fault
4…15 Reserved

0000b…1111b Status of motor fan control logic. 1=1

35.106 DOL starter event Selects the action taken when missing fan feedback is Fault
type detected by the motor fan control logic.
No action No action taken. 0
Warning The drive generates a warning (A781 Motor fan). 1
Fault Drive trips on 71B1 Motor fan. 2
36
36 Load analyzer Peak value and amplitude logger settings.
See also section Load analyzer (page 51).
36.01 PVL signal source Selects the signal to be monitored by the peak value Power inu
logger. out
The signal is filtered using the filtering time specified by
parameter 36.02 PVL filter time.
The peak value is stored, along with other pre-selected
signals at the time, into parameters 36.10…36.15.
The peak value logger can be reset using parameter 36.09
Reset loggers. The date and time of the last reset are
stored into parameters 36.16 and 36.17 respectively.
Zero None (peak value logger disabled). 0
218 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Motor speed used 01.01 Motor speed used (page 59). 1
Output frequency 01.06 Output frequency (page 59). 3
Motor current 01.07 Motor current (page 59). 4
Motor torque 01.10 Motor torque (page 59). 6
Dc-voltage 01.11 DC voltage (page 59). 7
Power inu out 01.14 Output power (page 60). 8
Speed ref ramp in 23.01 Speed ref ramp input (page 151). 10
Speed ref ramped 23.02 Speed ref ramp output (page 151). 11
Speed ref used 24.01 Used speed reference (page 145). 12
Torq ref used 26.02 Torque reference used (page 161). 13
Freq ref used 28.02 Frequency ref ramp output (page 180). 14
Process PID out 40.01 Process PID output actual (page 221). 16
Process PID fbk 40.02 Process PID feedback actual (page 222). 17
Process PID act 40.03 Process PID setpoint actual (page 222). 18
Process PID dev 40.04 Process PID deviation actual (page 222). 19
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
36.02 PVL filter time Defines a filtering time for the peak value logger. See 2.00 s
parameter 36.01 PVL signal source.
0.00 … 120.00 s Peak value logger filtering time. 100 = 1 s
36.06 AL2 signal source Selects the signal to be monitored by amplitude logger 2. Ambient
The signal is sampled at 200 ms intervals, and can be temperat
scaled using parameter 36.08 Logger function. ure
The results are displayed by parameters 36.40…36.49.
Each parameter represents an amplitude range, and
shows what portion of the samples fall within that range.
Amplitude logger 2 can be reset using parameter 36.09
Reset loggers. The logger is also reset whenever the
signal source or scaling is changed. The date and time of
the last reset are stored into parameters 36.50 and 36.51
respectively.
Zero None (amplitude logger 2 disabled). 0
Motor speed used 01.01 Motor speed used (page 59). 1
Output frequency 01.06 Output frequency (page 59). 3
Motor current 01.07 Motor current (page 59). 4
Motor torque 01.10 Motor torque (page 59). 6
DC voltage 01.11 DC voltage (page 59). 7
Power inu out 01.14 Output power (page 60). 8
Speed ref ramp in 23.01 Speed ref ramp input (page 151). 10
Speed ref ramped 23.02 Speed ref ramp output (page 151). 11
Speed ref used 24.01 Used speed reference (page 157). 12
Torq ref used 26.02 Torque reference used (page 172). 13
Freq ref used 28.02 Frequency ref ramp output (page 180). 14
Process PID out 40.01 Process PID output actual (page 221). 16
 Parameters 219

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Process PID fbk 40.02 Process PID feedback actual (page 222). 17
Process PID act 40.03 Process PID setpoint actual (page 222). 18
Process PID dev 40.04 Process PID deviation actual (page 222). 19
Ambient 01.70 Ambient temperature % (page 120). 20
temperature The amplitude range of 0…100% corresponds to 0…60 °C
or 32…140 °F.
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
36.08 Logger function Defines the signal value that corresponds to 100% 100.00
amplitude.
0.00 … 32767.00 Signal value corresponding to 100%. 1=1
36.08 Logger function Determines whether amplitude loggers 1 and 2 are active -
continuously or only when the drive is modulating.

Bit Name Description

0 AL1 0 = Amplitude logger 1 active continuously
1 = Amplitude logger 1 active only when the drive is modulating
1 AL2 0 = Amplitude logger 2 active continuously
1 = Amplitude logger 2 active only when the drive is modulating
2…15 Reserved

0000b…0011b Amplitude logger activity selection. 1=1

36.09 Reset loggers Resets the peak value logger and/or amplitude logger 2. Done
(Amplitude logger 1 cannot be reset.)
Done Reset completed or not requested (normal operation). 0
All Reset both the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2. 1
PVL Reset the peak value logger. 2
AL2 Reset amplitude logger 2. 3
36.10 PVL peak value Displays the peak value recorded by the peak value 0.00
logger.
-32768.00 … Peak value. 1=1
32767.00
36.11 PVL peak date Displays the date on which the peak value was recorded. -
- Peak occurrence date. -
36.12 PVL peak time Displays the time at which the peak value was recorded. -
- Peak occurrence time. -
36.13 PVL current at peak Displays the motor current at the moment the peak value 0.00 A
was recorded.
-32768.00 … Motor current at peak. 1=1A
32767.00 A
36.14 PVL DC voltage at Displays the voltage in the intermediate DC circuit of the 0.00 V
peak drive at the moment the peak value was recorded.
0.00 … 2000.00 V DC voltage at peak. 10 = 1 V
220 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
36.15 PVL speed at peak Displays the motor speed at the moment the peak value 0.00 rpm
was recorded.
-32768.00 … Motor speed at peak. See par.
32767.00 rpm 46.01
36.16 PVL reset date Displays the date on which the peak value logger was last -
reset.
- Last reset date of the peak value logger. -
36.17 PVL reset time Displays the time at which the peak value logger was last -
reset.
- Last reset time of the peak value logger. -
36.20 AL1 below 10% Displays the percentage of samples recorded by 0.00%
amplitude logger 1 that fall between 0 and 10%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 0 and 10%. 1 = 1%
36.21 AL1 10 to 20% Displays the percentage of samples recorded by 0.00%
amplitude logger 1 that fall between 10 and 20%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 10 and 20%. 1 = 1%
36.22 AL1 20 to 30% Displays the percentage of samples recorded by 0.00%
amplitude logger 1 that fall between 20 and 30%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 20 and 30%. 1 = 1%
36.23 AL1 30 to 40% Displays the percentage of samples recorded by 0.00%
amplitude logger 1 that fall between 30 and 40%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 30 and 40%. 1 = 1%
36.24 AL1 40 to 50% Displays the percentage of samples recorded by 0.00%
amplitude logger 1 that fall between 40 and 50%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 40 and 50%. 1 = 1%
36.25 AL1 50 to 60% Displays the percentage of samples recorded by 0.00%
amplitude logger 1 that fall between 50 and 60%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 50 and 60%. 1 = 1%
36.26 AL1 60 to 70% Displays the percentage of samples recorded by 0.00%
amplitude logger 1 that fall between 60 and 70%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 60 and 70%. 1 = 1%
36.27 AL1 70 to 80% Displays the percentage of samples recorded by 0.00%
amplitude logger 1 that fall between 70 and 80%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 70 and 80%. 1 = 1%
36.28 AL1 80 to 90% Displays the percentage of samples recorded by 0.00%
amplitude logger 1 that fall between 80 and 90%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 80 and 90%. 1 = 1%
36.29 AL1 over 90% Displays the percentage of samples recorded by 0.00%
amplitude logger 1 that exceed 90%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples over 90%. 1 = 1%
36.40 AL2 below 10% Displays the percentage of samples recorded by 0.00%
amplitude logger 2 that fall between 0 and 10%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 0 and 10%. 1 = 1%
36.41 AL2 10 to 20% Displays the percentage of samples recorded by 0.00%
amplitude logger 2 that fall between 10 and 20%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 10 and 20%. 1 = 1%
 Parameters 221

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
36.42 AL2 20 to 30% Displays the percentage of samples recorded by 0.00%
amplitude logger 2 that fall between 20 and 30%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 20 and 30%. 1 = 1%
36.43 AL2 30 to 40% Displays the percentage of samples recorded by 0.00%
amplitude logger 2 that fall between 30 and 40%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 30 and 40%. 1 = 1%
36.44 AL2 40 to 50% Displays the percentage of samples recorded by 0.00%
amplitude logger 2 that fall between 40 and 50%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 40 and 50%. 1 = 1%
36.45 AL2 50 to 60% Displays the percentage of samples recorded by 0.00%
amplitude logger 2 that fall between 50 and 60%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 50 and 60%. 1 = 1%
36.46 AL2 60 to 70% Displays the percentage of samples recorded by 0.00%
amplitude logger 2 that fall between 60 and 70%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 60 and 70%. 1 = 1%
36.47 AL2 70 to 80% Displays the percentage of samples recorded by 0.00%
amplitude logger 2 that fall between 70 and 80%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 70 and 80%. 1 = 1%
36.48 AL2 80 to 90% Displays the percentage of samples recorded by 0.00%
amplitude logger 2 that fall between 80 and 90%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 80 and 90%. 1 = 1%
36.49 AL2 over 90% Displays the percentage of samples recorded by 0.00%
amplitude logger 2 that exceed 90%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples over 90%. 1 = 1%
36.50 AL2 reset date Displays the date on which amplitude logger 2 was last -
reset.
- Last reset date of amplitude logger 2. -
36.51 AL2 reset time Displays the time at which amplitude logger 2 was last -
reset.
- Last reset time of amplitude logger 2. -
40 Process PID set 1 Parameter values for process PID control.
The drive contains a single active PID controller for
process use, however two separate complete set-ups can
be programmed and stored.
The first set is made up of parameters 40.07…40.56*, the
second set is defined by the parameters in group 41
Process PID set 2. The binary source that defines which
set is used is selected by parameter 40.57 PID set1/set2
selection.
See also the control chain diagrams on pages456 and 457.
*The remaining parameters in this group are common for
both sets.
40.01 Process PID output Displays the output of the process PID controller. See the -
actual control chain diagram on page 457.
This parameter is read-only. The unit is selected by
parameter 40.12 Set 1 unit selection.
-32768.00 … Process PID controller output. 1 = 1 unit
32767.00
222 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
40.02 Process PID Displays the value of process feedback after source -
feedback actual selection, mathematical function (parameter 40.10 Set 1
feedback function), and filtering. See the control chain
diagram on page 456.
This parameter is read-only. The unit is selected by
parameter 40.12 Set 1 unit selection.
-32768.00 … Process feedback. 1 = 1 unit
32767.00
40.03 Process PID setpoint Displays the value of process PID setpoint after source -
actual selection, mathematical function (40.18 Set 1 setpoint
function), limitation and ramping. See the control chain
diagram on page 457.
This parameter is read-only. The unit is selected by
parameter 40.12 Set 1 unit selection.
-32768.00 … Setpoint for process PID controller. 1 = 1 unit
32767.00
40.04 Process PID Displays the process PID deviation. By default, this value -
deviation actual equals setpoint - feedback, but deviation can be inverted
by parameter 40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion. See the
control chain diagram on page 457.
This parameter is read-only. The unit is selected by
parameter 40.12 Set 1 unit selection.
-32768.00 … PID deviation. 1 = 1 unit
32767.00
40.05 Process PID trim Displays the trimmed reference output. See the control -
output act chain diagram on page 457.
This parameter is read-only. The unit is selected by
parameter 40.12 Set 1 unit selection.
-32768.00 … Trimmed reference. 1 = 1 unit
32767.00
 Parameters 223

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
40.06 Process PID status Displays status information on process PID control. -
word This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Value

0 PID active 1 = Process PID control active.
1 Setpoint frozen 1 = Process PID setpoint frozen.
2 Output frozen 1 = Process PID controller output frozen.
3 PID sleep mode 1 = Sleep mode active.
4 Sleep boost 1 = Sleep boost active.
5 Trim mode 1 = Trim function active.
6 Tracking mode 1 = Tracking function active.
7 Output limit high 1 = PID output is being limited by par. 40.37.
8 Output limit low 1 = PID output is being limited by par. 40.36.
9 Deadband active 1 = Deadband active (see par. 40.39)
10 PID set 0 = Parameter set 1 in use. 1 = Parameter set 2 in use.
11 Reserved
12 Internal setpoint 1 = Internal setpoint active (see par. 40.16…40.24)
active
13…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Process PID control status word. 1=1

40.07 Set 1 PID operation Activates/deactivates process PID control. See also Off
mode parameter 40.60 Set 1 PID activation source.
Note: Process PID control is only available in external
control; see section Local control vs. external control
(page 20).
Off Process PID control inactive. 0
On Process PID control active. 1
On when drive Process PID control is active when the drive is running. 2
running
40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 Selects the first source of process feedback. See the AI1 scaled
source control chain diagram on page 456.
Not selected None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 89). 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 91). 2
Freq in scaled 11.39 Freq in 1 scaled (see page 156). 3
Motor current 01.07 Motor current (see page 59). 5
Power inu out 01.14 Output power (see page 60). 6
Motor torque 01.10 Motor torque (see page 59). 7
Feedback data 40.91 Feedback data storage (see page 235). 10
storage
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 Selects the second source of process feedback. Not
source For the selections, see parameter 40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 selected
source.
224 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
40.10 Set 1 feedback Defines how process feedback is calculated from the two In1
function feedback sources selected by parameters 40.08 Set 1
feedback 1 source and 40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source.
In1 Source 1. 0
In1+In2 Sum of sources 1 and 2. 1
In1-In2 Source 2 subtracted from source 1. 2
In1*In2 Source 1 multiplied by source 2. 3
In1/In2 Source 1 divided by source 2. 4
MIN(In1,In2) Smaller of the two sources. 5
MAX(In1,In2) Greater of the two sources. 6
AVE(In1,In2) Average of the two sources. 7
sqrt(In1) Square root of source 1. 8
sqrt(In1-In2) Square root of (source 1 - source 2). 9
sqrt(In1+In2) Square root of (source 1 + source 2). 10
sqrt(In1)+sqrt(In2) Square root of source 1 + square root of source 2. 11
40.11 Set 1 feedback filter Defines the filter time constant for process feedback. 0.000 s
time
0.000 … 30.000 s Feedback filter time. 1=1s
40.12 Set 1 unit selection Defines the unit for parameters 40.01…40.05, %
40.21…40.24 and 40.47.
rpm rpm. 7
% %. 4
Hz Hz. 3
PID user unit 1 User-definable unit 1. The name of the unit can be edited 250
on the control panel by choosing Menu – Settings – Edit
texts.
40.14 Set 1 setpoint scaling Defines, together with parameter 40.15 Set 1 output 100.00
scaling, a general scaling factor for the process PID
control chain.
The scaling can be utilized when, for example, the process
setpoint is input in Hz, and the output of the PID
controller is used as an rpm value in speed control. In this
case, this parameter might be set to 50, and parameter
40.15 to the nominal motor speed at 50 Hz.
In effect, the output of the PID controller = [40.15] when
deviation (setpoint - feedback) = [40.14] and [40.32] = 1.
Note: The scaling is based on the ratio between 40.14 and
40.15. For example, the values 50 and 1500 would produce
the same scaling as 1 and 30.
-32768.00 … Process setpoint base. 1=1
32767.00
40.15 Set 1 output scaling See parameter 40.14 Set 1 setpoint scaling. 1500.00;
1800.00
(95.20 b0)
-32768.00 … Process PID controller output base. 1=1
32767.00
 Parameters 225

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 Selects the first source of process PID setpoint. This Internal
source setpoint is available in parameter 40.25 Set 1 setpoint setpoint
selection as setpoint 1. See the control chain diagram on
page 456.
Not selected None. 0
Control panel 03.01 Panel reference (see page 63). See section Using the 1
control panel as an external control source (page 21).
Internal setpoint Internal setpoint. See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal 2
setpoint sel1.
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 89). 3
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 91). 4
Motor 22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor 8
potentiometer potentiometer).
Freq in scaled 11.39 Freq in 1 scaled (see page 156). 10
Setpoint data 40.92 Setpoint data storage (see page 235). 24
storage
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 Selects the second source of process setpoint. This Not
source setpoint is available in parameter 40.25 Set 1 setpoint selected
selection as setpoint 2.
For the selections, see parameter 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1
source.
40.18 Set 1 setpoint Selects a mathematical function between the setpoint In1 or In2
function sources selected by parameters 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1
source and 40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source.
In1 or In2 No mathematical function applied. The source selected by 0
parameter 40.25 Set 1 setpoint selection is used.
In1+In2 Sum of sources 1 and 2. 1
In1-In2 Source 2 subtracted from source 1. 2
In1*In2 Source 1 multiplied by source 2. 3
In1/In2 Source 1 divided by source 2. 4
MIN(In1,In2) Smaller of the two sources. 5
MAX(In1,In2) Greater of the two sources. 6
AVE(In1,In2) Average of the two sources. 7
sqrt(In1) Square root of source 1. 8
sqrt(In1-In2) Square root of (source 1 - source 2). 9
sqrt(In1+In2) Square root of (source 1 + source 2). 10
sqrt(In1)+sqrt(In2) Square root of source 1 + square root of source 2. 11
226 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint Selects, together with 40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2, Not
sel1 the internal setpoint out of the presets defined by selected
parameters 40.21…40.24.

Source defined Source defined Setpoint preset active

by par. 40.19 by par. 40.20
0 0 1 (par. 40.21)
1 0 2 (par. 40.22)
0 1 3 (par. 40.23)
1 1 4 (par. 40.24)

Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint Selects, together with 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1, Not
sel2 the internal setpoint out of the presets defined by selected
parameters 40.21…40.24. See table at 40.19 Set 1 internal
setpoint sel1.
Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
40.21 Set 1 internal setpoint Defines process setpoint preset 1. See parameter 40.19 0.00
1 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1.
The unit is selected by parameter 40.12 Set 1 unit
selection.
-32768.00 … Process setpoint preset 1. 1 = 1 unit
32767.00
 Parameters 227

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
40.22 Set 1 internal setpoint Defines process setpoint preset 2. See parameter 40.19 0.00
2 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1.
The unit is selected by parameter 40.12 Set 1 unit
selection.
-32768.00 … Process setpoint preset 2. 1 = 1 unit
32767.00
40.23 Set 1 internal setpoint Defines process setpoint preset 3. See parameter 40.19 0.00
3 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1.
The unit is selected by parameter 40.12 Set 1 unit
selection.
-32768.00 … Process setpoint preset 3. 1 = 1 unit
32767.00
40.24 Set 1 internal setpoint Defines process setpoint preset 4. See parameter 40.19 0.00
4 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1.
The unit is selected by parameter 40.12 Set 1 unit
selection.
-32768.00 … Process setpoint preset 4. 1 = 1 unit
32767.00
40.25 Set 1 setpoint Configures the selection between setpoint sources 1 Setpoint
selection (40.16) and 2 (40.17). source 1
This parameter is only effective when parameter 40.18
Set 1 setpoint function is set to In1 or In2.
0 = Setpoint source 1
1 = Setpoint source 2
Setpoint source 1 0. 0
Setpoint source 2 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
40.26 Set 1 setpoint min Defines a minimum limit for the process PID controller 0.00
setpoint.
-32768.00 … Minimum limit for process PID controller setpoint. 1=1
32767.00
40.27 Set 1 setpoint max Defines a maximum limit for the process PID controller 32767.00
setpoint.
-32768.00 … Maximum limit for process PID controller setpoint. 1=1
32767.00
40.28 Set 1 setpoint Defines the minimum time it takes for the setpoint to 0.0 s
increase time increase from 0% to 100%.
0.0 … 1800.0 s Setpoint increase time. 1=1
228 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
40.29 Set 1 setpoint Defines the minimum time it takes for the setpoint to 0.0 s
decrease time decrease from 100% to 0%.
0.0 … 1800.0 s Setpoint decrease time. 1=1
40.30 Set 1 setpoint freeze Freezes, or defines a source that can be used to freeze, Not
enable the setpoint of the process PID controller. This feature is selected
useful when the reference is based on a process feedback
connected to an analog input, and the sensor must be
serviced without stopping the process.
1 = Process PID controller setpoint frozen
See also parameter 40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable.
Not selected Process PID controller setpoint not frozen. 0
Selected Process PID controller setpoint frozen. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
40.31 Set 1 deviation Inverts the input of the process PID controller. Not
inversion 0 = Deviation not inverted (Deviation = Setpoint - inverted
Feedback) (Ref - Fbk
1 = Deviation inverted (Deviation = Feedback - Setpoint) )
See also section Sleep function for process PID control
(page 67).
Not inverted 0. 0
(Ref - Fbk)
Inverted (Fbk - Ref) 1. 1
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
40.32 Set 1 gain Defines the gain for the process PID controller. See 1.00
parameter 40.33 Set 1 integration time.
0.10 … 100.00 Gain for PID controller. 100 = 1
 Parameters 229

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
40.33 Set 1 integration time Defines the integration time for the process PID 60.0 s
controller. This time needs to be set to the same order of
magnitude as the reaction time of the process being
controlled, otherwise instability will result.

Error/Controller output

O
I

G×I

G×I

Time
Ti

I = controller input (error)

O = controller output
G = gain
Ti = integration time

Note: Setting this value to 0 disables the “I” part, turning

the PID controller into a PD controller.
0.0 … 32767.0 s Integration time. 1=1s
40.34 Set 1 derivation time Defines the derivation time of the process PID controller. 0.000 s
The derivative component at the controller output is
calculated on basis of two consecutive error values (EK-
1 and EK) according to the following formula:
PID DERIV TIME × (EK - EK-1)/TS, in which
TS = 2 ms sample time
E = Error = Process reference - process feedback.
0.000 … 10.000 s Derivation time. 1000 = 1 s
230 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
40.35 Set 1 derivation filter Defines the time constant of the 1-pole filter used to 0.0 s
time smooth the derivative component of the process PID
controller.

%
Unfiltered signal
100

63 Filtered signal

t
T

O = I × (1 - e-t/T)

I = filter input (step)

O = filter output
t = time
T = filter time constant

0.0 … 10.0 s Filter time constant. 10 = 1 s

40.36 Set 1 output min Defines the minimum limit for the process PID controller 0.0
output. Using the minimum and maximum limits, it is
possible to restrict the operation range.
-32768.0 … 32767.0 Minimum limit for process PID controller output. 1=1
40.37 Set 1 output max Defines the maximum limit for the process PID controller 1500.0;
output. See parameter 40.36 Set 1 output min. 1800.0
(95.20 b0)
-32768.0 … 32767.0 Maximum limit for process PID controller output. 1=1
40.38 Set 1 output freeze Freezes (or defines a source that can be used to freeze) Not
enable the output of the process PID controller, keeping the selected
output at the value it was before freeze was enabled. This
feature can be used when, for example, a sensor
providing process feedback must to be serviced without
stopping the process.
1 = Process PID controller output frozen
See also parameter 40.30 Set 1 setpoint freeze enable.
Not selected Process PID controller output not frozen. 0
Selected Process PID controller output frozen. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
 Parameters 231

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
40.39 Set 1 deadband Defines a deadband around the setpoint. Whenever 0.0
range process feedback enters the deadband, a delay timer
starts. If the feedback remains within the deadband
longer than the delay (40.40 Set 1 deadband delay), the
PID controller output is frozen. Normal operation resumes
after the feedback value leaves the deadband.

40.39 Set 1
deadband range
Setpoint

Feedback

PID controller
output
PID controller
output frozen

40.40 Set 1 deadband delay

Time

0.0 … 32767.0 Deadband range. 1=1

40.40 Set 1 deadband delay Delay for the deadband. See parameter 40.39 Set 1 0.0 s
deadband range.
0.0 … 3600.0 s Delay for deadband area. 1=1s
40.41 Set 1 sleep mode Selects the mode of the sleep function. Not
See also section Sleep function for process PID control selected
(page 67).
Not selected Sleep function disabled. 0
Internal The output of the PID controller is compared to the value 1
of 40.43 Set 1 sleep level.
If the PID controller output remains below the sleep level
longer than the sleep delay (40.44 Set 1 sleep delay), the
drive enters sleep mode.
Parameters 40.44…40.48 are in force.
External The sleep function is activated by the source selected by 2
parameter 40.42 Set 1 sleep enable.
Parameters 40.44…40.46 and 40.48 are in force.
40.42 Set 1 sleep enable Defines a source that is used to activate the PID sleep Not
function when parameter 40.41 Set 1 sleep mode is set to selected
External.
0 = Sleep function disabled
1 = Sleep function activated
Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
232 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
40.43 Set 1 sleep level Defines the start limit for the sleep function when 0.0
parameter 40.41 Set 1 sleep mode is set to Internal.
0.0 … 32767.0 Sleep start level. 1=1
40.44 Set 1 sleep delay Defines a delay before the sleep function actually 60.0 s
becomes enabled, to prevent nuisance sleeping.
The delay timer starts when the sleep condition selected
by parameter 40.41 Set 1 sleep mode becomes true, and
resets if the condition becomes false.
0.0 … 3600.0 s Sleep start delay. 1=1s
40.45 Set 1 sleep boost Defines a boost time for the sleep boost step. See 0.0 s
time parameter 40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step.
0.0 … 3600.0 s Sleep boost time. 1=1s
40.46 Set 1 sleep boost When the drive is entering sleep mode, the process 0.0
step setpoint is increased by this value for the time defined by
parameter 40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time.
If active, sleep boost is aborted when the drive wakes up.
0.0 … 32767.0 Sleep boost step. 1=1
40.47 Set 1 wake-up When 40.41 Set 1 sleep mode is set to Internal, this 0.00 rpm,
deviation parameter defines the wake-up level as deviation % or Hz
between process setpoint and feedback. The unit is
selected by parameter 40.12 Set 1 unit selection.
When the deviation exceeds the value of this parameter,
and remains there for the duration of the wake-up delay
(40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay), the drive wakes up.
See also parameter 40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion.
-32768.00 … Wake-up level (as deviation between process setpoint 1 = 1 unit
32767.00 rpm, % or and feedback).
Hz
40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay Defines a wake-up delay for the sleep function to prevent 5.0 s
nuisance wake-ups. See parameter 40.47 Set 1 wake-up
deviation.
The delay timer starts when the deviation exceeds the
wake-up level (40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation), and resets
if the deviation falls below the wake-up level.
Note: The adjustment of this parameter should not cause
the time interval between motor start and last stop less
than 5s.
0.00 … 60.00 s Wake-up delay. 1=1s
 Parameters 233

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
40.49 Set 1 tracking mode Activates (or selects a source that activates) tracking Not
mode. In tracking mode, the value selected by parameter selected
40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection is substituted for the
PID controller output. See also section Tracking (page 68).
1 = Tracking mode enabled
Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
40.50 Set 1 tracking ref Selects the value source for tracking mode. See Not
selection parameter 40.49 Set 1 tracking mode. selected
Not selected None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 89). 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 91). 2
FB A ref1 03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 64). 3
FB A ref2 03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 64). 4
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
40.51 Set 1 trim mode Activates the trim function and selects between direct Off
and proportional trimming (or a combination of both).
With trimming, it is possible to apply a corrective factor
to the drive reference (setpoint). The output after
trimming is available as parameter 40.05 Process PID trim
output act.
See the control chain diagram on page 421.
Off The trim function is inactive. 0
Direct The trim function is active. The trimming factor is relative 1
to the maximum speed, torque or frequency; the selection
between these is made by parameter 40.52 Set 1 trim
selection.
Proportional The trim function is active. The trimming factor is relative 2
to the reference selected by parameter 40.53 Set 1
trimmed ref pointer.
Combined The trim function is active. The trimming factor is a 3
combination of both Direct and Proportional modes; the
proportions of each are defined by parameter 40.54 Set 1
trim mix.
40.52 Set 1 trim selection Selects whether trimming is used for correcting the Torque
speed, torque or frequency reference.
Torque Torque reference trimming. 1
234 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Speed Speed reference trimming. 2
Frequency Frequency reference trimming. 3
40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref Selects the signal source for the trim reference. Not
pointer selected
Not selected None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 89). 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 91). 2
FB A ref1 03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 64). 3
FB A ref2 03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 64). 4
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
40.54 Set 1 trim mix When parameter 40.51 Set 1 trim mode is set to 0.000
Combined, defines the effect of direct and proportional
trim sources in the final trimming factor.
0.000 = 100% proportional
0.500 = 50% proportional, 50% direct
1.000 = 100% direct
0.000 … 1.000 Trim mix. 1=1
40.55 Set 1 trim adjust Defines a multiplier for the trimming factor. This value is 1.000
multiplied by the result of parameter 40.51 Set 1 trim
mode. Consequently, the result of the multiplication is
used to multiply the result of parameter 40.56 Set 1 trim
source.
-100.000 … 100.000 Multiplier for trimming factor. 1=1
40.56 Set 1 trim source Selects the reference to be trimmed. PID ref
PID ref PID setpoint. 1
PID output PID controller output. 2
40.57 PID set1/set2 Selects the source that determines whether process PID Not
selection parameter set 1 (parameters 40.07…40.56) or set 2 selected
(group 41 Process PID set 2) is used.
0 = Process PID parameter set 1 in use
1 = Process PID parameter set 2 in use
Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 10
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
 Parameters 235

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
40.60 Set 1 PID activation Selects a source that enables/disables process PID On
source control.
See also parameter 40.07 Set 1 PID operation mode.
0 = Process PID control disabled.
1 = Process PID control enabled.
Off 0. 0
On 1. 1
Follow Ext1/Ext2 Process PID control is disabled when external control 2
selection location EXT1 is active, and enabled when external control
location EXT2 is active.
See also parameter 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection.
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 3
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 4
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 5
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 6
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 7
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 8
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 12
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
40.91 Feedback data Storage parameter for receiving a process feedback value -
storage eg. through the embedded fieldbus interface.
The value can be sent to the drive as Modbus I/O data. Set
the target selection parameter of that particular data
(58.101…58.124) to Feedback data storage. In 40.08 Set 1
feedback 1 source (or 40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source),
select Feedback data storage.
-327.68 … 327.67 Storage parameter for process feedback. 100 = 1
40.92 Setpoint data storage Storage parameter for receiving a process setpoint value -
eg. through the embedded fieldbus interface.
The value can be sent to the drive as Modbus I/O data. Set
the target selection parameter of that particular data
(58.101…58.124) to Setpoint data storage. In 40.16 Set 1
setpoint 1 source (or 40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source), select
Setpoint data storage.
-327.68 … 327.67 Storage parameter for process setpoint. 100 = 1
41
41 Process PID set 2 A second set of parameter values for process PID control.
The selection between this set and first set (parameter
group 40 Process PID set 1) is made by parameter 40.57
PID set1/set2 selection.
See also parameters 40.01…40.06, 40.91, 40.92, and the
control chain diagrams on pages 596 and 597.
41.07 Set 2 PID operation See parameter 40.07 Set 1 PID operation mode. Off
mode
41.08 Set 2 feedback 1 See parameter 40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source. AI1 scaled
source
41.09 Set 2 feedback 2 See parameter 40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source. Not
source selected
236 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
41.10 Set 2 feedback See parameter 40.10 Set 1 feedback function. In1
function
41.11 Set 2 feedback filter See parameter 40.11 Set 1 feedback filter time. 0.000 s
time
41.12 Set 2 unit selection Defines the unit for parameters 41.21…41.24 and 41.47. %
rpm rpm. 7
% %. 4
Hz Hz. 3
PID user unit 2 User-definable unit 2. The name of the unit can be edited 249
on the control panel by choosing Menu – Settings – Edit
texts.
41.14 Set 2 setpoint scaling See parameter 40.14 Set 1 setpoint scaling. 100.00
41.15 Set 2 output scaling See parameter 40.15 Set 1 output scaling. 1500.00;
1800.00
(95.20 b0)
41.16 Set 2 setpoint 1 See parameter 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source. Internal
source setpoint
41.17 Set 2 setpoint 2 See parameter 40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source. Not
source selected
41.18 Set 2 setpoint See parameter 40.18 Set 1 setpoint function. In1 or In2
function
41.19 Set 2 internal setpoint See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1. Not
sel1 selected
41.20 Set 2 internal setpoint See parameter 40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2. Not
sel2 selected
41.21 Set 2 internal setpoint See parameter 40.21 Set 1 internal setpoint 1. 0.00
1
41.22 Set 2 internal setpoint See parameter 40.22 Set 1 internal setpoint 2. 0.00
2
41.23 Set 2 internal setpoint See parameter 40.23 Set 1 internal setpoint 3. 0.00
3
41.24 Set 2 internal setpoint See parameter 40.24 Set 1 internal setpoint 4. 0.00
4
41.25 Set 2 setpoint See parameter 40.25 Set 1 setpoint selection. Setpoint
selection source 1
41.26 Set 2 setpoint min See parameter 40.26 Set 1 setpoint min. 0.00
41.27 Set 2 setpoint max See parameter 40.27 Set 1 setpoint max. 32767.00
41.28 Set 2 setpoint See parameter 40.28 Set 1 setpoint increase time. 0.0 s
increase time
41.29 Set 2 setpoint See parameter 40.29 Set 1 setpoint decrease time. 0.0 s
decrease time
41.30 Set 2 setpoint freeze See parameter 40.30 Set 1 setpoint freeze enable. Not
enable selected
41.31 Set 2 deviation See parameter 40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion. Not
inversion inverted
(Ref - Fbk
)
41.32 Set 2 gain See parameter 40.32 Set 1 gain. 1.00
 Parameters 237

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
41.33 Set 2 integration time See parameter 40.33 Set 1 integration time. 60.0 s
41.34 Set 2 derivation time See parameter 40.34 Set 1 derivation time. 0.000 s
41.35 Set 2 derivation filter See parameter 40.35 Set 1 derivation filter time. 0.0 s
time
41.36 Set 2 output min See parameter 40.36 Set 1 output min. 0.0
41.37 Set 2 output max See parameter 40.37 Set 1 output max. 1500.0;
1800.0
(95.20 b0)
41.38 Set 2 output freeze See parameter 40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable. Not
enable selected
41.39 Set 2 deadband See parameter 40.39 Set 1 deadband range. 0.0
range
41.40 Set 2 deadband delay See parameter 40.40 Set 1 deadband delay. 0.0 s
41.41 Set 2 sleep mode See parameter 40.41 Set 1 sleep mode. Not
selected
41.42 Set 2 sleep enable See parameter 40.42 Set 1 sleep enable. Not
selected
41.43 Set 2 sleep level See parameter 40.43 Set 1 sleep level. 0.0
41.44 Set 2 sleep delay See parameter 40.44 Set 1 sleep delay. 60.0 s
41.45 Set 2 sleep boost See parameter 40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time. 0.0 s
time
41.46 Set 2 sleep boost See parameter 40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step. 0.0
step
41.47 Set 2 wake-up See parameter 40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation. 0.00 rpm,
deviation % or Hz
41.48 Set 2 wake-up delay See parameter 40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay. 5.0 s
41.49 Set 2 tracking mode See parameter 40.49 Set 1 tracking mode. Not
selected
41.50 Set 2 tracking ref See parameter 40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection. Not
selection selected
41.51 Set 2 trim mode See parameter 40.51 Set 1 trim mode. Off
41.52 Set 2 trim selection See parameter 40.52 Set 1 trim selection. Torque
41.53 Set 2 trimmed ref See parameter 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer. Not
pointer selected
41.54 Set 2 trim mix See parameter 40.54 Set 1 trim mix. 0.000
41.55 Set 2 trim adjust See parameter 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust. 1.000
41.56 Set 2 trim source See parameter 40.56 Set 1 trim source. PID ref
41.60 Set 2 PID activation See parameter 40.60 Set 1 PID activation source. On
source
238 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
43
45 Energy efficiency Settings for the energy saving calculators.
See also section Energy saving calculators (page 50).
45.01 Saved GW hours Displays the energy saved in GWh compared to direct-on- -
line motor connection. This parameter is incremented
when 45.02 Saved MW hours rolls over.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
0…65535 GWh Energy savings in GWh. 1 = 1 GWh
45.02 Saved MW hours Displays the energy saved in MWh compared to direct-on- -
line motor connection. This parameter is incremented
when 45.03 Saved kW hours rolls over.
When this parameter rolls over, parameter 45.01 Saved
GW hours is incremented.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
0…999 MWh Energy savings in MWh. 1 = 1 MWh
45.03 Saved kW hours Displays the energy saved in kWh compared to direct-on- -
line motor connection.
When this parameter rolls over, parameter 45.02 Saved
MW hours is incremented.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
0.0 … 999.9 kWh Energy savings in kWh. 10 = 1 kWh
45.05 Saved money x1000 Displays the monetary savings in thousands compared to -
direct-on-line motor connection. This parameter is
incremented when 45.06 Saved money rolls over.
The currency is defined by parameter 45.17 Tariff currency
unit.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
0…4294967295 Monetary savings in thousands of units. -
thousands
45.06 Saved money Displays the monetary savings compared to direct-on-line -
motor connection. This value is a calculated by
multiplying the saved energy in kWh by the currently
active energy tariff (45.14 Tariff selection).
When this parameter rolls over, parameter 45.05 Saved
money x1000 is incremented.
The currency is defined by parameter 45.17 Tariff currency
unit.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
0.00 … 999.99 units Monetary savings. 1 = 1 unit
45.08 CO2 reduction in Displays the reduction in CO2 emissions in metric kilotons -
kilotons compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This value
is incremented when parameter 45.09 CO2 reduction in
tons rolls over.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
0…65535 metric Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric kilotons. 1=1
kilotons metric
kiloton
 Parameters 239

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
45.09 CO2 reduction in tons Displays the reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons -
compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This value
is calculated by multiplying the saved energy in MWh by
the value of parameter 45.18 CO2 conversion factor (by
default, 0.5 metric tons/MWh).
When this parameter rolls over, parameter 45.08 CO2
reduction in kilotons is incremented.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
0.0 … 999.9 metric Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons. 1=1
tons metric
ton
45.12 Energy tariff 1 Defines energy tariff 1 (price of energy per kWh). 1.000
Depending on the setting of parameter 45.14 Tariff units
selection, either this value or 45.13 Energy tariff 2 is used
for reference when monetary savings are calculated.
The currency is defined by parameter 45.17 Tariff currency
unit.
Note: Tariffs are read only at the instant of selection, and
are not applied retroactively.
0.000 … Energy tariff 1. -
4294967.295 units
45.13 Energy tariff 2 Defines energy tariff 2 (price of energy per kWh). 2.000
See parameter 45.12 Energy tariff 1. units
0.000 … Energy tariff 2. -
4294967.295 units
45.14 Tariff selection Selects (or defines a source that selects) which pre- Energy
defined energy tariff is used. tariff 1
0 = 45.12 Energy tariff 1
1 = 45.13 Energy tariff 2
Energy tariff 1 0. 0
Energy tariff 2 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
DIO1 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 11
DIO2 Not applicable for ACS580MV. 12
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
45.17 Tariff currency unit Specifies the currency used for the savings calculations. EUR
Local currency Local currency. 100
EUR Euro. 101
USD US dollar. 102
240 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
45.18 CO2 conversion Defines a factor for conversion of saved energy into CO2 0.500
factor emissions (kg/kWh or tn/MWh). tn/MWh
0.000 … 65.535 Factor for conversion of saved energy into CO2 emissions. 1 = 1
tn/MWh tn/MWh
45.19 Comparison power Actual power that the motor absorbs when connected 0.00 kW
direct-on-line and operating the application. The value is or hp
used for reference when energy savings are calculated.
Note: The accuracy of the energy savings calculation is
directly dependent on the accuracy of this value. If
nothing is entered here, then the nominal motor power is
used by the calculation, but that may inflate the energy
savings reported as many motors do not absorb
nameplate power.
0.00 … 100000.00 Motor power. 1 = 1 unit
kW or
0.00 … 100000.00
hp
45.21 Energy calculations Resets the savings counter parameters 45.01…45.09 Done
reset
Done Reset not requested (normal operation), or reset 0
complete.
Reset Reset the savings counter parameters. The value reverts 1
automatically to Done.
46
46 Monitoring/scaling Speed supervision settings; actual signal filtering; general
settings scaling settings.

46.01 Speed scaling Defines the maximum speed value used to define the 1500.00
acceleration ramp rate and the initial speed value used to rpm
define the deceleration ramp rate (see parameter group
23 Speed reference ramp). The speed acceleration and
deceleration ramp times are therefore related to this
value (not to parameter 30.12 Maximum speed).
Also defines the 16-bit scaling of speed-related
parameters. The value of this parameter corresponds to
20000 in fieldbus communication.
0.10 … 30000.00 Acceleration/deceleration terminal/initial speed. 1 = 1 rpm
rpm
46.02 Frequency scaling Defines the maximum frequency value used to define the 50.00 Hz
acceleration ramp rate and the initial frequency value
used to define deceleration ramp rate (see parameter
group 28 Frequency reference chain). The frequency
acceleration and deceleration ramp times are therefore
related to this value (not to parameter 30.14 Maximum
frequency).
Also defines the 16-bit scaling of frequency-related
parameters. The value of this parameter corresponds to
20000 in fieldbus communication.
0.10 … 1000.00 Hz Acceleration/deceleration terminal/initial frequency. 10 = 1 Hz
46.03 Torque scaling Defines the 16-bit scaling of torque parameters. The value 100.0%
of this parameter (in percent of nominal motor torque)
corresponds to 10000 in fieldbus communication.
0.1 … 1000.0% Torque corresponding to 10000 on fieldbus. 10 = 1%
 Parameters 241

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
46.04 Power scaling Defines the output power value that corresponds to 10000 in 1000.00
fieldbus communication. The unit is selected by parameter kW or hp
96.16 Unit selection.
0.10 … 30000.00 kW Power corresponding to 10000 on fieldbus. 1 = 1 unit
or hp
46.05 Current scaling Defines the 16-bit scaling of current parameters. The 10000 A
value of this parameter corresponds to 10000 in fieldbus
communication.
0…30000 A Current corresponding to 10000 on fieldbus. -
46.06 Speed ref zero Defines a speed corresponding to a zero reference 0.00 rpm
scaling received from fieldbus (either the embedded fieldbus
interface, or interface or FBA B). For example, with a
setting of 500, the fieldbus reference range of 0…20000
would correspond to a speed of 500…[46.01] rpm.
Note: This parameter is effective only with the ABB Drives
communication profile.
0.00 … 30000.00 Speed corresponding to minimum fieldbus reference. 1 = 1 rpm
rpm
46.07 Frequency ref zero Defines a frequency corresponding to a zero reference 0.00 Hz
scaling received from fieldbus (either the embedded fieldbus
interface, or interface or FBA B). For example, with a
setting of 30, the fieldbus reference range of 0…20000
would correspond to a speed of 30…[46.02] Hz.
Note: This parameter is effective only with the ABB Drives
communication profile.
0.00 … 1000.00 Hz Frequency corresponding to minimum fieldbus reference. 10 = 1 Hz
46.11 Filter time motor Defines a filter time for signals 01.01 Motor speed used, 500 ms
speed 01.02 Motor speed estimated.
0…20000 ms Motor speed signal filter time. 1 = 1 ms
46.12 Filter time output Defines a filter time for signal 01.06 Output frequency. 500 ms
frequency
0…20000 ms Output frequency signal filter time. 1 = 1 ms
46.13 Filter time motor Defines a filter time for signal 01.10 Motor torque. 100 ms
torque
0…20000 ms Motor torque signal filter time. 1 = 1 ms
46.14 Filter time power out Defines a filter time for signal 01.14 Output power. 100 ms
0…20000 ms Output power signal filter time. 1 = 1 ms
242 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
46.21 At speed hysteresis Defines the “at setpoint” limits for speed control of the 100.00
drive. rpm
When the absolute difference between reference (22.87
Speed reference act 7) and actual speed (90.01 Motor
speed for control) is smaller than 46.21 At speed
hysteresis, the drive is considered to be “at setpoint”.
This is indicated by bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word.

90.01 (rpm)

22.87 + 46.21 (rpm)

Drive at setpoint 22.87 (rpm)
(06.11 bit 8 = 1)
22.87 - 46.21 (rpm)

0 rpm

0.00 … 30000.00 Limit for “at setpoint” indication in speed control. See par.
rpm 46.01
46.22 At frequency Defines the “at setpoint” limits for frequency control of 10.00 Hz
hysteresis the drive. When the absolute difference between
reference (28.96 Frequency ref ramp input) and actual
frequency (01.06 Output frequency) is smaller than 46.22
At frequency hysteresis, the drive is considered to be “at
setpoint”. This is indicated by bit 8 of 06.11 Main status
word.

01.06 (Hz)

28.96 + 46.22 (Hz)

Drive at setpoint 28.96 (Hz)
(06.11 bit 8 = 1)
28.96 - 46.22 (Hz)

0 Hz

0.00 … 1000.00 Hz Limit for “at setpoint” indication in frequency control. See par.
46.02
46.23 At torque hysteresis Defines the “at setpoint” limits for torque control of the 10.0%
drive.
Not applicable for ACS580MV.

0.0 … 300.0% Limit for “at setpoint” indication in torque control. See par.
46.03
46.31 Above speed limit Defines the trigger level for “above limit” indication in 0.00 rpm
speed control. When actual speed exceeds the limit, bit 10
of 06.17 Drive status word 2 is set.
0.00 … 30000.00 “Above limit” indication trigger level for speed control. See par.
rpm 46.01
 Parameters 243

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
46.32 Above frequency limit Defines the trigger level for “above limit” indication in 0.00 Hz
frequency control. When actual frequency exceeds the
limit, bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 is set.
0.00 … 1000.00 Hz “Above limit” indication trigger level for frequency See par.
control. 46.02
46.33 Above torque limit Defines the trigger level for “above limit” indication in 0.0%
torque control. When actual torque exceeds the limit, bit
10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 is set.
0.0 … 1600.0% “Above limit” indication trigger level for torque control. See par.
46.03
46.42 Torque decimals Defines the number of decimal places of torque-related 1
parameters.
0…2 Number of decimal places of torque parameters. 1=1
47
47 Data storage Data storage parameters that can be written to and read from
using other parameters’ source and target settings.
Note that there are different storage parameters for
different data types.
See also section Data storage parameters (page 54).
47.01 Data storage 1 real32 Data storage parameter 1. 0.000
-2147483.008 … 32-bit data. -
2147483.008
47.02 Data storage 2 real32 Data storage parameter 2. 0.000
-2147483.008 … 32-bit data. -
2147483.008
47.03 Data storage 3 real32 Data storage parameter 3. 0.000
-2147483.008 … 32-bit data. -
2147483.008
47.04 Data storage 4 real32 Data storage parameter 4. 0.000
-2147483.008 … 32-bit data. -
2147483.008
47.05 Data storage 5 real32 Data storage parameter 5. 0.000
-2147483.008 … 32-bit data. -
2147483.008
47.06 Data storage 6 real32 Data storage parameter 6. 0.000
-2147483.008 … 32-bit data. -
2147483.008
47.07 Data storage 7 real32 Data storage parameter 7. 0.000
-2147483.008 … 32-bit data. -
2147483.008
47.08 Data storage 8 real32 Data storage parameter 8. 0.000
-2147483.008 … 32-bit data. -
2147483.008
47.11 Data storage 1 int32 Data storage parameter 9. 0
-2147483648 … 32-bit data. -
2147483647
244 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
47.12 Data storage 2 int32 Data storage parameter 10. 0
-2147483648 … 32-bit data. -
2147483647
47.13 Data storage 3 int32 Data storage parameter 11. 0
-2147483648 … 32-bit data. -
2147483647
47.14 Data storage 4 int32 Data storage parameter 12. 0
-2147483648 … 32-bit data. -
2147483647
47.15 Data storage 5 int32 Data storage parameter 13. 0
-2147483648 … 32-bit data. -
2147483647
47.16 Data storage 6 int32 Data storage parameter 14. 0
-2147483648 … 32-bit data. -
2147483647
47.17 Data storage 7 int32 Data storage parameter 15. 0
-2147483648 … 32-bit data. -
2147483647
47.18 Data storage 8 int32 Data storage parameter 16. 0
-2147483648 … 32-bit data. -
2147483647
47.21 Data storage 1 int16 Data storage parameter 17. 0
-32768 … 32767 16-bit data. 1=1
47.22 Data storage 2 int16 Data storage parameter 18. 0
-32768 … 32767 16-bit data. 1=1
47.23 Data storage 3 int16 Data storage parameter 19. 0
-32768 … 32767 16-bit data. 1=1
47.24 Data storage 4 int16 Data storage parameter 20. 0
-32768 … 32767 16-bit data. 1=1
47.25 Data storage 5 int16 Data storage parameter 21. 0
-32768 … 32767 16-bit data. 1=1
47.26 Data storage 6 int16 Data storage parameter 22. 0
-32768 … 32767 16-bit data. 1=1
47.27 Data storage 7 int16 Data storage parameter 23. 0
-32768 … 32767 16-bit data. 1=1
47.28 Data storage 8 int16 Data storage parameter 24. 0
-32768 … 32767 16-bit data. 1=1
 Parameters 245

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
47.31 Data storage 1 real32 Defines the scaling of parameter 47.01 Data storage 1 Unscaled
type real32 to and from 16-bit integer format. This scaling is
used when the data storage parameter is the target of
received 16-bit data (defined in parameter group 62 D2D
and DDCS receive data), or when the data storage
parameter is the source of transmitted 16-bit data
(defined in parameter group 61 D2D and DDCS transmit
data).
The setting also defines the visible range of the storage
parameter.
Unscaled Data storage only. Range: -2147483.264 … 2147473.264. 0
Transparent Scaling: 1 = 1. Range: -32768 … 32767. 1
General Scaling: 1 = 100. Range: -327.68 … 327.67. 2
Torque The scaling is defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling. 3
Range: -1600.0 … 1600.0.
Speed The scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling. 4
Range: -30000.00 … 30000.00.
Frequency The scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency 5
scaling. Range: -500.00 … 500.00.
47.32 Data storage 2 real32 Defines the 16-bit scaling of parameter 47.02 Data Unscaled
type storage 2 real32.
See parameter 47.31 Data storage 1 real32 type.
47.33 Data storage 3 real32 Defines the 16-bit scaling of parameter 47.03 Data Unscaled
type storage 3 real32.
See parameter 47.31 Data storage 1 real32 type.
47.34 Data storage 4 real32 Defines the 16-bit scaling of parameter 47.04 Data Unscaled
type storage 4 real32.
See parameter 47.31 Data storage 1 real32 type.
47.35 Data storage 5 real32 Defines the 16-bit scaling of parameter 47.05 Data Unscaled
type storage 5 real32.
See parameter 47.31 Data storage 1 real32 type.
47.36 Data storage 6 real32 Defines the 16-bit scaling of parameter 47.06 Data Unscaled
type storage 6 real32.
See parameter 47.31 Data storage 1 real32 type.
47.37 Data storage 7 real32 Defines the 16-bit scaling of parameter 47.07 Data Unscaled
type storage 7 real32.
See parameter 47.31 Data storage 1 real32 type.
47.38 Data storage 8 real32 Defines the 16-bit scaling of parameter 47.08 Data Unscaled
type storage 8 real32.
See parameter 47.31 Data storage 1 real32 type.
49
49 Panel port Communication settings for the control panel port on the
communication drive.

49.01 Node ID number Defines the node ID of the drive. All devices connected to 1
the network must have a unique node ID.
Note: For networked drives, it is advisable to reserve ID 1
for spare/replacement drives.
1…32 Node ID. 1=1
246 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
49.03 Baud rate Defines the transfer rate of the link. 230.4
kbps
38.4 kbps 38.4 kbit/s. 1
57.6 kbps 57.6 kbit/s. 2
86.4 kbps 86.4 kbit/s. 3
115.2 kbps 115.2 kbit/s. 4
230.4 kbps 230.4 kbit/s. 5
49.04 Communication loss Sets a timeout for control panel (or Drive composer PC 10.0 s
time tool) communication. If a communication break lasts
longer than the timeout, the action specified by
parameter 49.05 Communication loss action is taken.
0.1 … 3000.0 s Panel/Drive composer PC tool communication timeout. 10 = 1 s
49.05 Communication loss Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel (or Drive No action
action composer PC tool) communication break.
No action No action taken. 0
Fault Drive trips on 7081 Panel loss. This only occurs if control is 1
expected from the control panel, or if supervision is
forced using parameter 49.07 Panel comm supervision
force.
Last speed Drive generates an A7EE Panel loss warning and freezes 2
the speed to the level the drive was operating at. The
speed is determined on the basis of actual speed using
850 ms low-pass filtering. This only occurs if control is
expected from the control panel, or if supervision is
forced using parameter 49.07 Panel comm supervision
force.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
Speed ref safe Drive generates an A7EE Panel loss warning and sets the 3
speed to the speed defined by parameter 22.41 Speed ref
safe (or 28.41 Frequency ref safe when frequency
reference is being used). This only occurs if control is
expected from the control panel, or if supervision is
forced using parameter 49.07 Panel comm supervision
force.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
Warning Drive generates an A7EE Panel loss warning. This only 5
occurs if control is expected from the control panel, or if
supervision is forced using parameter 49.07 Panel comm
supervision force.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.

49.06 Refresh settings Applies the settings of parameters 49.01…49.05. Done

Note: Refreshing may cause a communication break, so
reconnecting the drive may be required.
Done Refresh done or not requested. 0
Refresh Refresh parameters 49.01…49.05. The value reverts 1
automatically to Done.
 Parameters 247

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
49.07 Panel comm Activates control panel communication monitoring 0000b
supervision force separately for each control location (see section Local
control vs. external control on page 20).
The parameter is primarily intended for monitoring the
communication with the panel when it is connected to the
application program and not selected as a control source
by drive parameters.

Bit Name Value

0 Ext 1 1 = Communication monitoring active when Ext 1 is being used.
1 Ext 2 1 = Communication monitoring active when Ext 2 is being used.
2 Local 1 = Communication monitoring active when local control is
being used.
3…15 Reserved

0000b…0111b Panel communication monitoring selection. 1=1

49.08 Secondary comm. Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel (or Drive No action
loss action composer PC tool) communication break. This action is
taken when
• the panel is parametrized as an alternative control or
reference source but is not currently the active source, and
• communication supervision for the active control location is
not forced by parameter 49.07 Panel comm supervision
force.
No action No action taken. 0
Warning Drive generates an A7EE Control panel loss warning. 5
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.

49.14 Panel speed Defines the unit for speed reference when given from the rpm
reference unit control panel.
rpm rpm. 0
% Percent of parameter 46.01 Speed scaling. 1
49.15 Minimum ext speed Defines a minimum limit for control panel speed -30000.0
ref panel reference in external control. 0 rpm
In local control, the limits in parameter group 30 Limits
are in force. See section Local control vs. external control
(page 20).
-30000.00 … Minimum speed reference. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
49.16 Maximum ext speed Defines a maximum limit for control panel speed 30000.00
ref panel reference in external control. rpm
In local control, the limits in parameter group 30 Limits
are in force. See section Local control vs. external control
(page 20).
-30000.00 … Maximum speed reference. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
248 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
49.17 Minimum ext Defines a minimum limit for control panel frequency -500.00
frequency ref panel reference in external control. Hz
In local control, the limits in parameter group 30 Limits
are in force. See section Local control vs. external control
(page 20).
-500.00 … 500.00 Minimum frequency reference. See par.
Hz 46.02
49.18 Maximum ext Defines a maximum limit for control panel frequency 500.00 Hz
frequency ref panel reference in external control.
In local control, the limits in parameter group 30 Limits
are in force. See section Local control vs. external control
(page 20).
-500.00 … 500.00 Maximum frequency reference. See par.
Hz 46.02
50
50 Fieldbus adapter Fieldbus communication configuration.
(FBA) See also chapter Fieldbus control through a fieldbus
adapter (page 415).
50.01 enable Enables/disables communication between the drive and Disable
fieldbus adapter A, and specifies the slot the adapter is
installed into.
Disable Communication between drive and fieldbus adapter A 0
disabled.
Option slot 1 Communication between drive and fieldbus adapter A 1
enabled. The adapter is in slot 1.
Option slot 2 Communication between drive and fieldbus adapter A 2
enabled. The adapter is in slot 2.
Option slot 3 Communication between drive and fieldbus adapter A 3
enabled. The adapter is in slot 3.
50.02 comm loss func Selects how the drive reacts upon a fieldbus No action
communication break. The time delay is defined by
parameter 50.03 comm loss t out.
No action No action taken. 0
Fault Communication break detection active. Upon a 1
communication break, the drive trips on a 7510 FBA A
communication fault and coasts to a stop.
Last speed Communication break detection active. Upon a 2
communication break, the drive generates a warning
(A7C1 FBA A communication) and freezes the speed to the
level the drive was operating at. The speed is determined
on the basis of actual speed using 850 ms low-pass
filtering.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
Speed ref safe Communication break detection active. Upon a 3
communication break, the drive generates a warning
(A7C1 FBA A communication) and sets the speed to the
value defined by parameter 22.41 Speed ref safe (when
speed reference is being used) or 28.41 Frequency ref safe
(when frequency reference is being used).
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
 Parameters 249

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Fault always Drive trips on 7510 FBA A communication. This occurs 4
even though no control is expected from the fieldbus.
Warning Drive generates an A7C1 FBA A communication warning. 5
This occurs even though no control is expected from the
fieldbus.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.

50.03 comm loss t out Defines the time delay before the action defined by 0.3 s
parameter 50.02 comm loss func is taken. Time count
starts when the communication link fails to update the
message.
As a rule of thumb, this parameter should be set to at
least 3 times the transmit interval of the master.
0.3 … 6553.5 s Time delay. 1=1s
50.04 ref1 type Selects the type and scaling of reference 1 received from Auto
fieldbus adapter A.
Note: Fieldbus-specific communication profiles may use
different scalings. For more information, see the manual
of the fieldbus adapter.
Auto Type and scaling are chosen automatically according to 0
which reference chain (see settings Torque, Speed,
Frequency) the incoming reference is connected to. If the
reference is not connected to any chain, no scaling is
applied (as with setting Transparent).
Transparent No scaling is applied (the 16-bit scaling is 1 = 1 unit). 1
General Generic reference with a scaling of 100 = 1 (ie. integer and 2
two decimals).
Torque The scaling is defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling. 3
Speed The scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling. 4
Frequency The scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency 5
scaling.
Voltage Not supported 8
Load position Not supported 11
50.05 ref2 type Selects the type and scaling of reference 2 received from Auto
fieldbus adapter A.
See parameter 50.04 ref1 type.
50.07 actual 1 type Selects the type/source and scaling of actual value 1 Auto
transmitted to fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter
A.
Note: Fieldbus-specific communication profiles may use
different scalings. For more information, see the manual
of the fieldbus adapter.
Auto Type/source and scaling follow the type of reference 1 0
selected by parameter 50.04 ref1 type. See the individual
settings below for the sources and scalings.
Transparent The value selected by parameter 50.10 act1 transparent 1
source is sent as actual value 1. No scaling is applied (the
16-bit scaling is 1 = 1 unit).
General The value selected by parameter 50.10 act1 transparent 2
source is sent as actual value 1 with a 16-bit scaling of 100
= 1 unit (ie. integer and two decimals).
250 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Torque 01.10 Motor torque is sent as actual value 1. The scaling is 3
defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling.
Speed 01.01 Motor speed used is sent as actual value 1. The 4
scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
Frequency 01.06 Output frequency is sent as actual value 1. The 5
scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling.
Position Not supported 6
Voltage Not supported 8
Load position Not supported 11
50.08 actual 2 type Selects the type/source and scaling of actual value 2 Auto
transmitted to fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter
A.
See parameter 50.07 actual 1 type.
50.09 SW transparent Selects the source of the fieldbus status word when Not
source parameter 50.06 FBA A SW sel is set to Transparent selected
mode.
Not selected No source selected. -
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
50.10 act1 transparent When parameter 50.07 actual 1 type is set to Transparent, Not
source this parameter selects the source of actual value 1 selected
transmitted to the fieldbus network through fieldbus
adapter A.
Not selected No source selected. -
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
50.11 act2 transparent When parameter 50.08 actual 2 type is set to Transparent, Not
source this parameter selects the source of actual value 2 selected
transmitted to the fieldbus network through fieldbus
adapter A.
Not selected No source selected. -
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
50.12 debug mode Enables the display of raw (unmodified) data received Disable
from and sent to fieldbus adapter A in parameters
50.13…50.18.
This functionality should only be used for debugging.
Disable Display of raw data from fieldbus adapter A disabled. 0
Fast Display of raw data from fieldbus adapter A enabled. 1
50.13 control word Displays the raw (unmodified) control word sent by the -
master (PLC) to fieldbus adapter A if debugging is
enabled by parameter 50.12 debug mode.
This parameter is read-only.
00000000h … Control word sent by master to fieldbus adapter A. -
FFFFFFFFh
 Parameters 251

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
50.14 reference 1 Displays raw (unmodified) reference REF1 sent by the -
master (PLC) to fieldbus adapter A if debugging is
enabled by parameter 50.12 debug mode.
This parameter is read-only.
-2147483648 … Raw REF1 sent by master to fieldbus adapter A. -
2147483647
50.15 reference 2 Displays raw (unmodified) reference REF2 sent by the -
master (PLC) to fieldbus adapter A if debugging is
enabled by parameter 50.12 debug mode.
This parameter is read-only.
-2147483648 … Raw REF2 sent by master to fieldbus adapter A. -
2147483647
50.16 status word Displays the raw (unmodified) status word sent by -
fieldbus adapter A to the master (PLC) if debugging is
enabled by parameter 50.12 debug mode.
This parameter is read-only.
00000000h … Status word sent by fieldbus adapter A to master. -
FFFFFFFFh
50.17 actual value 1 Displays raw (unmodified) actual value ACT1 sent by -
fieldbus adapter A to the master (PLC) if debugging is
enabled by parameter 50.12 debug mode.
This parameter is read-only.
-2147483648 … Raw ACT1 sent by fieldbus adapter A to master. -
2147483647
50.18 actual value 2 Displays raw (unmodified) actual value ACT2 sent by -
fieldbus adapter A to the master (PLC) if debugging is
enabled by parameter 50.12 debug mode.
This parameter is read-only.
-2147483648 … Raw ACT2 sent by fieldbus adapter A to master. -
2147483647
252 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
50.26 comm supervision Activates fieldbus communication monitoring separately 0000b
force for each control location (see section Local control vs.
external control on page 20).
The parameter is primarily intended for monitoring the
communication with when it is connected to the
application program and not selected as a control source
by drive parameters.

Bit Name Value

0 Ext 1 1 = Communication monitoring active when Ext 1 is being used.
1 Ext 2 1 = Communication monitoring active when Ext 2 is being used.
2 Local 1 = Communication monitoring active when local control is
being used.
3…15 Reserved

50.31 FBA B enable Enables/disables communication between the drive and Option
fieldbus adapter B, and specifies the slot the adapter is slot 2
installed into.
WARNING! The FBA B is used for the internal IO
controller. The parameters related to FBA B
should be changed by authorized personnel only.
This parameter is read-only.
Option slot 2 Communication between drive and fieldbus adapter B 2
enabled. The adapter is in slot 2.
50.32 FBA B comm loss Selects how the drive reacts upon a fieldbus Fault
func communication break. The time delay is defined by
parameter 50.33 FBA B comm loss timeout.
WARNING! A communication loss on FBA B (IO
controller) is always causing a fault. This
parameter is read-only.
Fault Communication break detection active. Upon a 1
communication break, the drive trips on a E108 AC500
communication timeout fault and coasts to a stop.
50.33 FBA B comm loss Defines the time delay before the action defined by 0.3 s
timeout parameter 50.32 FBA B comm loss func is taken. Time
count starts when the communication link fails to update
the message.
As a rule of thumb, this parameter should be set to at
least 3 times the transmit interval of the master.
0.3 … 6553.5 s Time delay. 1=1s
50.34 FBA B ref1 type Selects the type and scaling of reference 1 received from Speed or
fieldbus adapter B. The scaling of the reference is defined frequency
by parameters 46.01…46.04, depending on which
reference type is selected by this parameter.
For the selections, see parameter 50.04 ref1 type.
50.35 FBA B ref2 type Selects the type and scaling of reference 2 received from Speed or
fieldbus adapter B. The scaling of the reference is defined frequency
by parameters 46.01…46.04, depending on which
reference type is selected by this parameter.
For the selections, see parameter 50.04 ref1 type.
 Parameters 253

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
50.37 FBA B actual 1 type Selects the type and scaling of actual value 1 transmitted Auto
to the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter B. The
scaling of the value is defined by parameters
46.01…46.04, depending on which actual value type is
selected by this parameter.
For the selections, see parameter 50.07 actual 1 type.
50.38 FBA B actual 2 type Selects the type and scaling of actual value 2 transmitted Auto
to the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter B. The
scaling of the value is defined by parameters
46.01…46.04, depending on which actual value type is
selected by this parameter.
For the selections, see parameter 50.07 actual 1 type.
50.39 FBA B SW Selects the source of the fieldbus status word when Not
transparent source parameter 50.36 FBA B SW sel is set to Transparent mode. selected
Not selected No source selected. -
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
50.40 FBA B act1 When parameter 50.37 FBA B actual 1 type is set to Not
transparent source Transparent, this parameter selects the source of actual selected
value 1 transmitted to the fieldbus network through
fieldbus adapter B.
Not selected No source selected. -
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
50.41 FBA B act2 When parameter 50.38 FBA B actual 2 type is set to Not
transparent source Transparent, this parameter selects the source of actual selected
value 2 transmitted to the fieldbus network through
fieldbus adapter B.
Not selected No source selected. -
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
50.42 FBA B debug enable Enables the display of raw (unmodified) data received Disable
from and sent to fieldbus adapter B in parameters
50.43…50.48.
This functionality should only be used for debugging.
Disable Display of raw data from fieldbus adapter B disabled. 0
Fast Display of raw data from fieldbus adapter B enabled. 1
50.43 FBA B control word Displays the raw (unmodified) control word sent by the -
master (PLC) to fieldbus adapter B if debugging is
enabled by parameter 50.42 FBA B debug enable.
This parameter is read-only.
00000000h … Control word sent by master to fieldbus adapter B. -
FFFFFFFFh
50.44 FBA B reference 1 Displays raw (unmodified) reference REF1 sent by the -
master (PLC) to fieldbus adapter B if debugging is
enabled by parameter 50.42 FBA B debug enable.
This parameter is read-only.
-2147483648 … Raw REF1 sent by master to fieldbus adapter B. -
2147483647
254 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
50.45 FBA B reference 2 Displays raw (unmodified) reference REF2 sent by the -
master (PLC) to fieldbus adapter B if debugging is
enabled by parameter 50.42 FBA B debug enable.
This parameter is read-only.
-2147483648 … Raw REF2 sent by master to fieldbus adapter B. -
2147483647
50.46 FBA B status word Displays the raw (unmodified) status word sent by -
fieldbus adapter B to the master (PLC) if debugging is
enabled by parameter 50.42 FBA B debug enable.
This parameter is read-only.
00000000h … Status word sent by fieldbus adapter B to master. -
FFFFFFFFh
50.47 FBA B actual value 1 Displays raw (unmodified) actual value ACT1 sent by -
fieldbus adapter B to the master (PLC) if debugging is
enabled by parameter 50.42 FBA B debug enable.
This parameter is read-only.
-2147483648 … Raw ACT1 sent by fieldbus adapter B to master. -
2147483647
50.48 FBA B actual value 2 Displays raw (unmodified) actual value ACT2 sent by -
fieldbus adapter B to the master (PLC) if debugging is
enabled by parameter 50.42 FBA B debug enable.
This parameter is read-only.
-2147483648 … Raw ACT2 sent by fieldbus adapter B to master. -
2147483647
50.56 FBA B comm Activates fieldbus communication monitoring separately 0000b
supervision force for each control location (see section Local control vs.
external control on page 20).
The parameter is primarily intended for monitoring the
communication with when it is connected to the
application program and not selected as a control source
by drive parameters.

Bit Name Value

0 Ext 1 1 = Communication monitoring active when Ext 1 is being used.
1 Ext 2 1 = Communication monitoring active when Ext 2 is being used.
2 Local 1 = Communication monitoring active when local control is
being used.
3…15 Reserved

51
51 FBA A settings Fieldbus adapter A configuration.
51.01 type Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter -
module.
0 = Module is not found or is not properly connected, or is
disabled by parameter 50.01 enable; 1 = FPBA; 32 = FCAN;
37 = FDNA; 128, 132 = FENA-11; 135 = FECA; 136 = FEPL;
485 = FSCA.
 Parameters 255

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
51.02 Par2 Parameters 51.02…51.26 are adapter module-specific. For -
more information, see the documentation of the fieldbus
adapter module. Note that not all of these parameters are
necessarily in use.
0…65535 Fieldbus adapter configuration parameter. 1=1
… … … …
51.26 Par26 See parameter 51.02 Par2. -
0…65535 Fieldbus adapter configuration parameter. 1=1
51.27 par refresh Validates any changed fieldbus adapter module Done
configuration settings. After refreshing, the value reverts
automatically to Done.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive
is running.
Done Refreshing done. 0
Refresh Refreshing. 1
51.28 par table ver Displays the parameter table revision of the fieldbus -
adapter module mapping file (stored in the memory of
the drive).
In format axyz, where ax = major table revision number; yz
= minor table revision number.
This parameter is read-only.
Parameter table revision of adapter module. -
51.29 drive type code Displays the drive type code in the fieldbus adapter -
module mapping file (stored in the memory of the drive).
This parameter is read-only.
0…65535 Drive type code stored in the mapping file. 1=1
51.30 mapping file ver Displays the fieldbus adapter module mapping file -
revision stored in the memory of the drive in decimal
format.
This parameter is read-only.
0…65535 Mapping file revision. 1=1
51.31 D2 comm status Displays the status of the fieldbus adapter module -
communication.
Not configured Adapter is not configured. 0
Initializing Adapter is initializing. 1
Time out A timeout has occurred in the communication between 2
the adapter and the drive.
Configuration error Adapter configuration error: mapping file not found in the 3
file system of the drive, or mapping file upload has failed
more than three times.
Off-line Fieldbus communication is off-line. 4
On-line Fieldbus communication is on-line, or fieldbus adapter 5
has been configured not to detect a communication
break. For more information, see the documentation of
the fieldbus adapter.
Reset Adapter is performing a hardware reset. 6
256 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
51.32 comm SW ver Displays the common program revision of the adapter
module in format axyz, where a = major revision number,
xy = minor revision number, z = correction number or
letter.
Example: 190A = revision 1.90A.
Common program revision of adapter module. -
51.33 appl SW ver Displays the application program revision of the adapter
module in format axyz, where a = major revision number,
xy = minor revision number, z = correction number or
letter.
Example: 190A = revision 1.90A.
Application program version of adapter module. -
52
52 FBA A data in Selection of data to be transferred from drive to fieldbus
controller through fieldbus adapter A.
Note: 32-bit values require two consecutive parameters.
Whenever a 32-bit value is selected in a data parameter,
the next parameter is automatically reserved.
52.01 data in1 Parameters 52.01…52.12 select data to be transferred None
from the drive to the fieldbus controller through fieldbus
adapter A.
None None. 0
CW 16bit Control Word (16 bits) 1
Ref1 16bit Reference REF1 (16 bits) 2
Ref2 16bit Reference REF2 (16 bits) 3
SW 16bit Status Word (16 bits) 4
Act1 16bit Actual value ACT1 (16 bits) 5
Act2 16bit Actual value ACT2 (16 bits) 6
CW 32bit Control Word (32 bits) 11
Ref1 32bit Reference REF1 (32 bits) 12
Ref2 32bit Reference REF2 (32 bits) 13
SW 32bit Status Word (32 bits) 14
Act1 32bit Actual value ACT1 (32 bits) 15
Act2 32bit Actual value ACT2 (32 bits) 16
SW2 16bit Status Word 2 (16 bits) 24
 Parameters 257

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
… … … …
52.12 data in12 See parameter 52.01 data in1. None
53
53 FBA A data out Selection of data to be transferred from fieldbus controller to
drive through fieldbus adapter A.
Note: 32-bit values require two consecutive parameters.
Whenever a 32-bit value is selected in a data parameter,
the next parameter is automatically reserved.
53.01 data out1 Parameters 53.01…53.12 select data to be transferred None
from the fieldbus controller to the drive through fieldbus
adapter A.
None None. 0
CW 16bit Control Word (16 bits) 1
Ref1 16bit Reference REF1 (16 bits) 2
Ref2 16bit Reference REF2 (16 bits) 3
CW 32bit Control Word (32 bits) 11
Ref1 32bit Reference REF1 (32 bits) 12
Ref2 32bit Reference REF2 (32 bits) 13
CW2 16bit Control Word 2 (16 bits) 21
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
… … … …
53.12 data out12 See parameter 53.01 data out1. None
54
54 FBA B settings Fieldbus adapter B configuration.
54.01 FBA B type Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter -
module.
0 = Module is not found or is not properly connected, or is
disabled by parameter 50.31 FBA B enable; 1 = FPBA;
32 = FCAN; 37 = FDNA; 128, 132 = FENA-11; 135 = FECA;
136 = FEPL; 485 = FSCA.
This parameter is read-only.
54.02 FBA B Par2 Parameters 54.02…54.26 are adapter module-specific. -
For more information, see the documentation of the
fieldbus adapter module. Note that not all of these
parameters are necessarily in use.
0…65535 Fieldbus adapter configuration parameter. 1=1
… … … …
54.26 Protocol sw ver See parameter 54.02 FBA B Par2. -
0…65535 Fieldbus adapter configuration parameter. 1=1
54.27 FBA B par refresh Validates any changed fieldbus adapter module Done
configuration settings. After refreshing, the value reverts
automatically to Done.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive
is running.
Done Refreshing done. 0
258 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Refresh Refreshing. 1
54.28 FBA B par table ver Displays the parameter table revision of the fieldbus -
adapter module mapping file (stored in the memory of
the drive).
In format axyz, where ax = major table revision number; yz
= minor table revision number.
This parameter is read-only.
Parameter table revision of adapter module. -
54.29 FBA B drive type Displays the drive type code in the fieldbus adapter -
code module mapping file (stored in the memory of the drive).
This parameter is read-only.
0…65535 Drive type code stored in the mapping file. 1=1
54.30 FBA B mapping file Displays the fieldbus adapter module mapping file -
ver revision stored in the memory of the drive in decimal
format.
This parameter is read-only.
0…65535 Mapping file revision. 1=1
54.31 D2FBA B comm Displays the status of the fieldbus adapter module -
status communication.
Not configured Adapter is not configured. 0
Initializing Adapter is initializing. 1
Time out A timeout has occurred in the communication between 2
the adapter and the drive.
Configuration error Adapter configuration error: mapping file not found in the 3
file system of the drive, or mapping file upload has failed
more than three times.
Off-line Fieldbus communication is off-line. 4
On-line Fieldbus communication is on-line, or fieldbus adapter 5
has been configured not to detect a communication
break. For more information, see the documentation of
the fieldbus adapter.
Reset Adapter is performing a hardware reset. 6
54.32 FBA B comm SW ver Displays the common program revision of the adapter
module in format axyz, where a = major revision number,
xy = minor revision number, z = correction number or
letter.
Example: 190A = revision 1.90A.
Common program revision of adapter module. -
54.33 FBA B appl SW ver Displays the application program revision of the adapter
module in format axyz, where a = major revision number,
xy = minor revision number, z = correction number or
letter.
Example: 190A = revision 1.90A.
Application program version of adapter module. -
 Parameters 259

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
55
55 FBA B data in Selection of data to be transferred from drive to fieldbus
controller through fieldbus adapter B.
WARNING! The FBA B is used for the internal IO
controller. The parameters related to FBA B
should be changed by authorized personnel only.
55.01 FBA B data in1 Parameters 55.01…55.12 select data to be transferred None
from the drive to the fieldbus controller through fieldbus
adapter B.
None None. 0
CW 16bit Control Word (16 bits) 1
Ref1 16bit Reference REF1 (16 bits) 2
Ref2 16bit Reference REF2 (16 bits) 3
SW 16bit Status Word (16 bits) 4
Act1 16bit Actual value ACT1 (16 bits) 5
Act2 16bit Actual value ACT2 (16 bits) 6
CW 32bit Control Word (32 bits) 11
Ref1 32bit Reference REF1 (32 bits) 12
Ref2 32bit Reference REF2 (32 bits) 13
SW 32bit Status Word (32 bits) 14
Act1 32bit Actual value ACT1 (32 bits) 15
Act2 32bit Actual value ACT2 (32 bits) 16
SW2 16bit Status Word 2 (16 bits) 24
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
… … … …
55.12 FBA B data in12 See parameter 55.01 FBA B data in1. None
56
56 FBA B data out Selection of data to be transferred from fieldbus controller to
drive through fieldbus adapter B.
WARNING! The FBA B is used for the internal IO
controller. The parameters related to FBA B
should be changed by authorized personnel only.
56.01 FBA B data out1 Parameters 56.01…56.12 select data to be transferred None
from the fieldbus controller to the drive through fieldbus
adapter B.
None None. 0
CW 16bit Control Word (16 bits) 1
Ref1 16bit Reference REF1 (16 bits) 2
Ref2 16bit Reference REF2 (16 bits) 3
CW 32bit Control Word (32 bits) 11
Ref1 32bit Reference REF1 (32 bits) 12
Ref2 32bit Reference REF2 (32 bits) 13
CW2 16bit Control Word 2 (16 bits) 21
260 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
… … … …
56.12 FBA B data out12 See parameter 56.01 FBA B data out1. None
60
59 Embedded Ethernet Ethernet interface (connector XETH) configuration.
WARNING!
To make enable operation, we must follow the steps
below:
1. Config 59.03~07
2. Enable 59.01
3. Enable 59.25
4. Refresh 59.08
To reconfigure Embedded Ethernet, we must follow the
steps below:
1. Disable 59.25
2. Disable 59.01
3. Reconfigure 59.03~07
4. Enable 59.01
5. Enable 59.25
6. Refresh 59.08
59.01 Emb Eth enable Enables communication through the Ethernet interface. Disable
Disable Communication disabled. 0
Enable Communication enabled. 1
59.02 Emb Eth status Displays the status of Ethernet communication. -
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 Bitrate 1 = 100 Mbit/s
0 = 10 Mbit/s
1 Connection 1 = Full duplex
type 0 = Half duplex
2 Link state 1 = Link up
0 = Link down
3 Addr 1 = Yes
configured 0 = No
IP address adopted from DHCP, Auto-IP or static configuration.
4 Only link-local 1 = Yes
address 0 = No
An automatic, self-configured link local address of the form
169.254.x.y is being used.
5 Addr conflict 1 = Conflict
error 0 = No conflict
A duplicate IP address has been detected. Interface disabled.
6 Connected 1 = Yes
0 = No
The interface is being used by an application.
7…15 Reserved.

0000h…FFFFh Embedded ethernet interface status word. 1=1

 Parameters 261

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
59.03 Emb Eth commrate Selects the bit rate of the communication and determines Auto-
if the communication can be simultaneously two-way (full negotiate
duplex) or only one way (half duplex).
Auto-negotiate Automatic transfer rate selection. 0
100 Mbps, Full Bit rate 100 megabits per second, full duplex. 1
duplex
100 Mbps, Half Bit rate 100 megabits per second, half duplex. 2
duplex
10 Mbps, Full duplex Bit rate 10 megabits per second, full duplex. 3
10 Mbps, Half duplex Bit rate 10 megabits per second, half duplex. 4
59.04 Emb Eth IP settings Determines the IP addressing mode of the Ethernet Dynamic
interface. IP
Static IP A static IP address is specified by the following 0
parameters.
Dynamic IP The IP address is obtained dynamically from a DHCP 1
server.
Dynamic IP LLA The IP address is obtained dynamically from a DHCP 2
server. If a DHCP server is not available (eg. in case of a
point-to-point connection between the control unit and a
PC), a link-local address in the range 169.254.xxx.xxx will
be used.
59.05 Emb Eth IP address Defines a static IP address for the Ethernet interface 000.000.
when parameter 59.04 Emb Eth IP settings is set to Static 000.000
IP.
000.000.000.000 … Static IP address. -
255.255.255.255
59.06 Emb Eth subnet mask Defines an optional subnet mask for the Ethernet 000.000.
interface when parameter 59.04 Emb Eth IP settings is 000.000
set to Static IP.
000.000.000.000 … Subnet mask. -
255.255.255.255
59.07 Emb Eth gateway Specifies the gateway for the Ethernet subnet (segment) 000.000.
if one is specified by parameter 59.06 Emb Eth subnet 000.000
mask.
000.000.000.000 … Gateway address. -
255.255.255.255
59.08 Emb Eth par refresh Validates any changes in the Ethernet settings. Done
List
Done Normal operation. 0
Configure Validates any changed Ethernet interface configuration 1
settings. Reverts automatically to Done.
59.25 Ethernet PC tools Enables tool access via Ethernet. Enable
Disable Communication disabled. 0

Enable Communication enabled. 1

262 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
90
60 DDCS communication DDCS communication configuration.
The DDCS protocol is used in the communication
between
• drives in a master/follower configuration (see page 31),
• the drive and an external controller such as the AC 800M
(see page 39).
• the drive (or more precisely, an inverter unit) and the
supply unit of the drive system (see page 41).
All of the above utilize a fiber optic link which also
requires an RDCO module (with BCU control units).
60.01 M/F communication Selects the connection used by the master/follower Not in use
port functionality.
Not in use None (communication disabled). 0
Slot 1A Channel A on FDCO module in slot 1 (with ZCU control unit 1
only).
Slot 2A Channel A on FDCO module in slot 2 (with ZCU control 2
unit only).
Slot 3A Channel A on FDCO module in slot 3 (with ZCU control 3
unit only).
Slot 1B Channel B on FDCO module in slot 1 (with ZCU control unit 4
only).
Slot 2B Channel B on FDCO module in slot 2 (with ZCU control 5
unit only).
Slot 3B Channel B on FDCO module in slot 3 (with ZCU control 6
unit only).
RDCO CH 2 Channel 2 on RDCO module (with BCU control unit only). 12
60.02 M/F node address Selects the node address of the drive for master/follower 1
communication. No two nodes on-line may have the same
address.
Note: The allowable addresses for the master are 0 and 1.
The allowable addresses for followers are 2…60.
1…254 Node address.
60.03 M/F mode Defines the role of the drive on the master/follower or Not in use
drive-to-drive link.
Not in use Master/follower functionality not active. 0
DDCS master The drive is the master on the master/follower (DDCS) 1
link.
DDCS follower The drive is a follower on the master/follower (DDCS) link. 2
DDCS forcing The role of the drive on the master/follower (DDCS) link is 5
defined by parameters 60.15 Force master and 60.16
Force follower.
60.05 M/F HW connection Selects the topology of the master/follower link. Ring
Ring The devices are connected in a ring topology. Forwarding 0
of messages is enabled.
Star The devices are connected in a star topology (for 1
example, through a branching unit). Forwarding of
messages is disabled.
 Parameters 263

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
60.07 M/F link control Defines the light intensity of the transmission LED of 10
RDCO module channel CH2. (This parameter is effective
only when parameter 60.01 M/F communication port is
set to RDCO CH 2. FDCO modules have a hardware
transmitter current selector.)
In general, use higher values with longer fiber optic
cables. The maximum setting is applicable to the
maximum length of the fiber optic link. See Specifications
of the fiber optic master/follower link (page 38).
1…15 Light intensity.
60.08 M/F comm loss Sets a timeout for master/follower (DDCS) 100 ms
timeout communication. If a communication break lasts longer
than the timeout, the action specified by parameter 60.09
M/F comm loss function is taken.
As a rule of thumb, this parameter should be set to at
least 3 times the transmit interval of the master.
0…65535 ms Master/follower communication timeout.
60.09 M/F comm loss Selects how the drive reacts to a master/follower Fault
function communication break.
No action No action taken. 0
Warning The drive generates an A7CB MF comm loss warning. This 1
only occurs if control is expected from the
master/follower link, or if supervision is forced using
parameter 60.32 M/F comm supervision force.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.

Fault Drive trips on 7582 MF comm loss. This only occurs if 2

control is expected from the master/follower link, or if
supervision is forced using parameter 60.32 M/F comm
supervision force.
Fault always Drive trips on 7582 MF comm loss. This occurs even 3
though no control is expected from the master/follower
link.
60.10 M/F ref1 type Selects the type and scaling of reference 1 received from Auto
the master/follower link. The resulting value is shown by
03.13 M/F or D2D ref1.
Auto Type and scaling are chosen automatically according to 0
which reference chain (see settings Torque, Speed,
Frequency) the incoming reference is connected to. If the
reference is not connected to any chain, no scaling is
applied (as with setting Transparent).
Transparent Reserved. 1
General Reserved. 2
Torque The scaling is defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling. 3
Speed The scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling. 4
Frequency The scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency 5
scaling.
60.11 M/F ref2 type Selects the type and scaling of reference 2 received from Torque
the master/follower link. The resulting value is shown by
03.14 M/F or D2D ref2.
For the selections, see parameter 60.10 M/F ref1 type.
264 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
60.12 M/F act1 type Selects the type/source and scaling of actual value ACT1 Auto
transmitted to the master/follower link.
Auto Type/source and scaling follow the type of reference 1 0
selected by parameter 60.10 M/F ref1 type. See the
individual settings below for the sources and scalings.
Transparent Reserved. 1
General Reserved. 2
Torque 01.10 Motor torque is sent as actual value 1. The scaling is 3
defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling.
Speed 01.01 Motor speed used is sent as actual value 1. The 4
scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
Frequency 01.06 Output frequency is sent as actual value 1. The 5
scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling.
60.13 M/F act2 type Selects the type/source and scaling of actual value ACT2 Auto
transmitted to the master/follower link.
Auto Type/source and scaling follow the type of reference 2 0
selected by parameter 60.11 M/F ref2 type. See the
individual settings below for the sources and scalings.
Transparent Reserved. 1
General Reserved. 2
Torque 01.10 Motor torque is sent as actual value 2. The scaling is 3
defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling.
Speed 01.01 Motor speed used is sent as actual value 2. The 4
scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
Frequency 01.06 Output frequency is sent as actual value 2. The 5
scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling.
60.14 M/F follower selection (Effective in the master only.) Defines the followers from None
which data is read. See also parameters 62.28…62.33.
Follower node 2 Data is read from the follower with node address 2. 2
Follower node 3 Data is read from the follower with node address 3. 4
Follower node 4 Data is read from the follower with node address 4. 8
Follower nodes 2+3 Data is read from the followers with node addresses 2 6
and 3.
Follower nodes 2+4 Data is read from the followers with node addresses 2 10
and 4.
Follower nodes 3+4 Data is read from the followers with node addresses 3 12
and 4.
Follower nodes Data is read from the followers with node addresses 2, 3 14
2+3+4 and 4.
None None. 0
60.15 Force master When parameter 60.03 M/F mode is set to DDCS forcing, FALSE
this parameter selects a source that forces the drive to be
the master on the master/follower link.
1 = Drive is master on the master/follower link
FALSE 0. 0
TRUE 1. 1
 Parameters 265

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
60.16 Force follower When parameter 60.03 M/F mode is set to DDCS forcing, FALSE
this parameter selects a source that forces the drive to be
a follower on the master/follower link.
1 = Drive is follower on the master/follower link
FALSE 0. 0
TRUE 1. 1
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
60.17 Follower fault action (Effective in the master only.) Selects how the drive reacts Fault
to a fault in a follower.
See also parameter 60.23 M/F status supervision sel 1.
Note: Each follower must be configured to transmit its
status word as one of the three data words in parameters
61.01…61.03. In the master, the corresponding target
parameter (62.04…62.12) must be set to Follower SW.
No action No action taken. Unaffected drives on the 0
master/follower link will continue running.
Warning The drive generates a warning (AFE7 Follower). 1
Fault Drive trips on FF7E Follower. All followers will be stopped. 2
60.18 Follower enable Interlocks the starting of the master to the status of the Always
followers.
See also parameter 60.23 M/F status supervision sel 1.
Note: Each follower must be configured to transmit its
status word as one of the three data words in parameters
61.01…61.03. In the master, the corresponding target
parameter (62.04…62.12) must be set to Follower SW.
MSW bit 0 The master can only be started if all followers are ready to 0
switch on (bit 0 of 06.11 Main status word in each follower
is on).
MSW bit 1 The master can only be started if all followers are ready to 1
operate (bit 1 of 06.11 Main status word in each follower is
on).
MSW bits 0 + 1 The master can only be started if all followers are ready to 2
switch on and ready to operate (bits 0 and 1 of 06.11 Main
status word in each follower are on).
Always The starting of the master is not interlocked to the status 3
of the followers.
MSW bit 12 The master can only be started if user-definable bit 12 of 4
06.11 Main status word in each follower is on. See
parameter 06.31 MSW bit 12 sel.
MSW bits 0 + 12 The master can only be started if both bit 0 and bit 12 of 5
06.11 Main status word in each follower are on.
MSW bits 1 + 12 The master can only be started if both bit 1 and bit 12 of 6
06.11 Main status word in each follower are on.
266 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
60.31 M/F wake up delay Defines a wake-up delay during which no master/follower 60.0 s
communication faults or warnings are generated. This is
to allow all drives on the master/follower link to power
up.
The master cannot be started until the delay elapses or all
monitored followers are found to be ready.
0.0 … 180.0 s Master/follower wake-up delay. 10 = 1 s
60.32 M/F comm Activates master/follower communication monitoring 0000b
supervision force separately for each control location (see section Local
control vs. external control on page 20).
The parameter is primarily intended for monitoring the
communication with master or follower when it is
connected to the application program and not selected as
a control source by drive parameters.

Bit Name Value

0 Ext 1 1 = Communication monitoring active when Ext 1 is being used.
1 Ext 2 1 = Communication monitoring active when Ext 2 is being used.
2 Local 1 = Communication monitoring active when local control is
being used.
3…15 Reserved

0000b…0111b Master/follower communication monitoring selection. 1=1

61
61 D2D and DDCS Defines the data sent to the DDCS link.
transmit data See also parameter group 60 DDCS communication.
61.01 M/F data 1 selection Preselects the data to be sent as word 1 onto the Follower
master/follower link. CW
See also parameter 61.25 M/F data 1 value, and section
Master/follower functionality (page 31).
None None. 0
CW 16bit Control Word (16 bits) 1
SW 16bit Status Word (16 bits) 4
Act1 16bit Actual value ACT1 (16 bits) 5
Note: Using this setting to send a reference to the
follower is not recommended as the source signal is
filtered. Use the “reference” selections instead.
Act2 16bit Actual value ACT2 (16 bits) 6
Note: Using this setting to send a reference to the
follower is not recommended as the source signal is
filtered. Use the “reference” selections instead.
Follower CW A word consisting of bits 0…11 of 06.01 Main control 27
word and the bits selected by parameters 06.45…06.48.
Note: Bit 3 of the follower control word is kept on as long
as the master is modulating, and when it switches to 0,
the follower coasts to a stop.
Used speed 24.01 Used speed reference (page 226). 6145
reference
Torque reference 26.75 Torque reference act 5 (page 179). 6731
act 5
 Parameters 267

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Torque reference 26.02 Torque reference used (page 172). 6658
used
ACS800 System ctrl A follower status word compatible with an ACS800 28
SW (System Control Program) master. With this setting,
status word bit 0 is cleared whenever the run enable
signal is missing.
Follower CW B6 high Otherwise identical to selection Follower CW, but bit 6 of 29
the follower control word is also kept on as long as the
master is modulating. This will allow the follower to stop
along the stop ramp of the master.
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
61.02 M/F data 2 selection Preselects the data to be sent as word 2 onto the Used
master/follower link. speed
See also parameter 61.26 M/F data 2 value. reference
For the selections, see parameter 61.01 M/F data 1
selection.
61.03 M/F data 3 selection Preselects the data to be sent as word 3 onto the Torque
master/follower link. reference
See also parameter 61.27 M/F data 3 value. act 5
For the selections, see parameter 61.01 M/F data 1
selection.
61.25 M/F data 1 value Displays the data to be sent onto the master/follower link 0
as word 1 as an integer.
If no data has been preselected by 61.01 M/F data 1
selection, the value to be sent can be written directly into
this parameter.
0…65535 Data to be sent as word 1 in master/follower
communication.
61.26 M/F data 2 value Displays the data to be sent onto the master/follower link 0
as word 2 as an integer.
If no data has been preselected by 61.02 M/F data 2
selection, the value to be sent can be written directly into
this parameter.
0…65535 Data to be sent as word 2 in master/follower
communication.
61.27 M/F data 3 value Displays the data to be sent onto the master/follower link 0
as word 3 as an integer.
If no data has been preselected by 61.03 M/F data 3
selection, the value to be sent can be written directly into
this parameter.
0…65535 Data to be sent as word 3 in master/follower
communication.
62
62 D2D and DDCS Mapping of data received through the DDCS link.
receive data See also parameter group 60 DDCS communication.
62.01 M/F data 1 selection (Follower only) Defines a target for the data received as None
word 1 from the master through the master/follower link.
See also parameter 62.25 MF data 1 value.
None None. 0
CW 16bit Control Word (16 bits) 1
268 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Ref1 16bit Reference REF1 (16 bits) 2
Ref2 16bit Reference REF2 (16 bits) 3
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
62.02 M/F data 2 selection (Follower only) Defines a target for the data received as None
word 2 from the master through the master/follower link.
See also parameter 62.26 MF data 2 value.
For the selections, see parameter 62.01 M/F data 1
selection.
62.03 M/F data 3 selection (Follower only) Defines a target for the data received as None
word 3 from the master through the master/follower link.
See also parameter 62.27 MF data 3 value.
For the selections, see parameter 62.01 M/F data 1
selection.
62.04 Follower node 2 data Defines a target for the data received as word 1 from the Follower
1 sel first follower (ie. the follower with node address 2) SW
through the master/follower link.
See also parameter 62.28 Follower node 2 data 1 value.
None None. 0
Follower SW Status word of the follower. See also parameter 60.18 26
Follower enable.
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
62.05 Follower node 2 data Defines a target for the data received as word 2 from the None
2 sel first follower (ie. the follower with node address 2)
through the master/follower link.
See also parameter 62.29 Follower node 2 data 2 value.
For the selections, see parameter 62.04 Follower node 2
data 1 sel.
62.06 Follower node 2 data Defines a target for the data received as word 3 from the None
3 sel first follower (ie. the follower with node address 2)
through the master/follower link.
See also parameter 62.30 Follower node 2 data 3 value.
For the selections, see parameter 62.04 Follower node 2
data 1 sel.
62.07 Follower node 3 data Defines a target for the data received as word 1 from the Follower
1 sel second follower (ie. the follower with node address 3) SW
through the master/follower link.
See also parameter 62.31 Follower node 3 data 1 value.
For the selections, see parameter 62.04 Follower node 2
data 1 sel.
62.08 Follower node 3 data Defines a target for the data received as word 2 from the None
2 sel second follower (ie. the follower with node address 3)
through the master/follower link.
See also parameter 62.32 Follower node 3 data 2 value.
For the selections, see parameter 62.04 Follower node 2
data 1 sel.
 Parameters 269

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
62.09 Follower node 3 data Defines a target for the data received as word 3 from the None
3 sel second follower (ie. the follower with node address 3)
through the master/follower link.
See also parameter 62.33 Follower node 3 data 3 value.
For the selections, see parameter 62.04 Follower node 2
data 1 sel.
62.10 Follower node 4 data Defines a target for the data received as word 1 from the Follower
1 sel third follower (ie. the follower with node address 4) SW
through the master/follower link.
See also parameter 62.34 Follower node 4 data 1 value.
For the selections, see parameter 62.04 Follower node 2
data 1 sel.
62.11 Follower node 4 data Defines a target for the data received as word 2 from the None
2 sel third follower (ie. the follower with node address 4)
through the master/follower link.
See also parameter 62.35 Follower node 4 data 2 value.
For the selections, see parameter 62.04 Follower node 2
data 1 sel.
62.12 Follower node 4 data Defines a target for the data received as word 3 from the None
3 sel third follower (ie. the follower with node address 4)
through the master/follower link.
See also parameter 62.36 Follower node 4 data 3 value.
For the selections, see parameter 62.04 Follower node 2
data 1 sel.
62.25 MF data 1 value (Follower only) Displays, in integer format, the data 0
received from the master as word 1.
Parameter 62.01 M/F data 1 selection can be used to
select a target for the received data. This parameter can
also be used as a signal source by other parameters.
0…65535 Data received as word 1 in master/follower
communication.
62.26 MF data 2 value (Follower only) Displays, in integer format, the data 0
received from the master as word 2.
Parameter 62.02 M/F data 2 selection can be used to
select a target for the received data. This parameter can
also be used as a signal source by other parameters.
0…65535 Data received as word 2 in master/follower
communication.
62.27 MF data 3 value (Follower only) Displays, in integer format, the data 0
received from the master as word 3.
Parameter 62.03 M/F data 3 selection can be used to
select a target for the received data. This parameter can
also be used as a signal source by other parameters.
0…65535 Data received as word 3 in master/follower
communication.
62.28 Follower node 2 data Displays, in integer format, the data received from the 0
1 value first follower (ie. follower with node address 2) as word 1.
Parameter 62.04 Follower node 2 data 1 sel can be used to
select a target for the received data. This parameter can
also be used as a signal source by other parameters.
0…65535 Data received as word 1 from follower with node address
2.
270 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
62.29 Follower node 2 data Displays, in integer format, the data received from the 0
2 value first follower (ie. follower with node address 2) as word 2.
Parameter 62.05 Follower node 2 data 2 sel can be used to
select a target for the received data. This parameter can
also be used as a signal source by other parameters.
0…65535 Data received as word 2 from follower with node address
2.
62.30 Follower node 2 data Displays, in integer format, the data received from the 0
3 value first follower (ie. follower with node address 2) as word 3.
Parameter 62.06 Follower node 2 data 3 sel can be used to
select a target for the received data. This parameter can
also be used as a signal source by other parameters.
0…65535 Data received as word 3 from follower with node address
2.
62.31 Follower node 3 data Displays, in integer format, the data received from the 0
1 value second follower (ie. follower with node address 3) as
word 1.
Parameter 62.07 Follower node 3 data 1 sel can be used to
select a target for the received data. This parameter can
also be used as a signal source by other parameters.
0…65535 Data received as word 1 from follower with node address
3.
62.32 Follower node 3 data Displays, in integer format, the data received from the 0
2 value second follower (ie. follower with node address 3) as
word 2.
Parameter 62.08 Follower node 3 data 2 sel can be used to
select a target for the received data. This parameter can
also be used as a signal source by other parameters.
0…65535 Data received as word 2 from follower with node address
3.
62.33 Follower node 3 data Displays, in integer format, the data received from the 0
3 value second follower (ie. follower with node address 3) as
word 3.
Parameter 62.09 Follower node 3 data 3 sel can be used to
select a target for the received data. This parameter can
also be used as a signal source by other parameters.
0…65535 Data received as word 3 from follower with node address
3.
62.34 Follower node 4 data Displays, in integer format, the data received from the 0
1 value third follower (ie. follower with node address 4) as word 1.
Parameter 62.10 Follower node 4 data 1 sel can be used to
select a target for the received data. This parameter can
also be used as a signal source by other parameters.
0…65535 Data received as word 1 from follower with node address
4.
62.35 Follower node 4 data Displays, in integer format, the data received from the 0
2 value third follower (ie. follower with node address 4) as word 2.
Parameter 62.11 Follower node 4 data 2 sel can be used to
select a target for the received data. This parameter can
also be used as a signal source by other parameters.
0…65535 Data received as word 2 from follower with node address
4.
 Parameters 271

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
62.36 Follower node 4 data Displays, in integer format, the data received from the 0
3 value third follower (ie. follower with node address 4) as word 3.
Parameter 62.12 Follower node 4 data 3 sel can be used to
select a target for the received data. This parameter can
also be used as a signal source by other parameters.
0…65535 Data received as word 3 from follower with node address
4.
70 Power module values Measured values from all power modules in phase A.
phase A Allows monitoring of measurements from power modules
with the overriding system or Drive composer PC tools.
Note: Parameters in this group have correct values only
when the drive is charged. With a discharged drive all
parameters have default values.
All parameters in this group are read only.
70.01 DSP temperature A1 Measured temperature of the DSP in power module 1 of -
phase A.
0.0 … 141.0 °C Power module A1 DSP temperature. 10 = 1 °C
70.02 IGBT1 temperature Measured temperature of the IGBT1 in power module 1 of -
A1 phase A.
0.0 … 141.0 °C Power module A1 IGBT1 temperature. 10 = 1 °C
70.03 IGBT2 temperature Measured temperature of the IGBT2 in power module 1 of -
A1 phase A.
0.0 … 141.0 °C Power module A1 IGBT1 temperature. 10 = 1 °C
70.04 IGBT3 temperature Measured temperature of the IGBT3 in power module 1 of -
A1 phase A.
0.0 … 141.0 °C Power module A1 IGBT1 temperature. 10 = 1 °C
70.05 PM RX comm err Total (cumulative) number of communication errors from -
count A1 control hub to power module 1 of phase A. This counter is
set to zero if the drive is discharged and charged again.
The counter is not saturated - when it reaches the
maximum value, it wraps around and starts counting
from 0.
0… Number of communication errors from control hub to 1 = 1 unit
power module A1.
70.06 Operating hours A1 Number of hours the power module 1 of phase A has been -
in operation (charged).
0.00… 4294967296 Power module A1 operation hours. 100 = 1 h
70.07 1/3 DC link voltage Measured voltage across 1/3 of DC link in power module 1 -
A1 of phase A.
0.0…1323.0 V Power module A1 1/3 DC link. 10 = 1 V
70.08 2/3 DC link voltage Measured voltage across 2/3 of DC link in power module 1 -
A1 of phase A.
0.0…1323.0 V Power module A1 2/3 DC link. 10 = 1 V
70.09 5 volt power supply Actual measured voltage of the 5V power supply in power -
A1 module 1 of phase A.
0.0…30.0 V Power module A1 5V power supply. 10 = 1 V
70.10 Charging relay Measured temperature of the charging relay in power -
temperature A1 module 1 of phase A.
0.0 … 141.0 °C Power module A1 charging relay temperature. 10 = 1 °C
272 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
70.11 3/3 DC link voltage Measured voltage across full DC link in power module 1 of -
A1 phase A.
0.0…1323.0 V Power module A1 3/3 DC link. 10 = 1 V
70.12 Hub RX comm err Total (cumulative) number of communication errors from -
count A1 power module 1 of phase A to control hub. This counter is
set to zero if the drive is discharged and charged again.
The counter is not saturated - when it reaches the
maximum value, it wraps around and starts counting
from 0.
0… Number of communication errors from power module A1 1 = 1 unit
to control hub.
70.15 Software version A1 Software version on the power module 1 of phase A. 0.0.0.0
Format: major.minor[.patch[.build]].
0.0.0.0 … Power module A1 SW version. 1=1
255.255.255.255
70.16 Hardware type A1 Hardware type on the power module 1 of phase A. 0
0… Power module A1 HW type. 1=1
70.17 Hardware rating A1 Hardware rating of the power module 1 of phase A. 0
0… Power module A1 HW rating. 1=1
70.18 PM SN part 1 A1 Part 1 of A1 PM SN -
PMDIE: no communication with PM
_N/A_: this module is not configured in license.
70.19 PM SN part 2 A1 Part 2 of A1 PM SN -
PMDIE: no communication with PM
_N/A_: this module is not configured in license.
70.20 PM SN part 3 A1 Part31 of A1 PM SN -
PMDIE: no communication with PM
_N/A_: this module is not configured in license.
70.21 DSP temperature A2 Parameters 70.21…70.180 display measured values from -
power modules 2 to 9 of phase A. There are 15 parameters
per power module. For their description see parameters
70.01…70.17.

Note: Not all parameters in this group are necessarily in

use. Depending on the drive configuration there can be
different number of power modules per phase.
0.0 … 141.0 °C Power module A2 DSP temperature. 10 = 1 °C
… … … …
70.180 PM SN part 3 A9 See explanation in parameter 70.20 PM SN part 3 A1. -
90
71 Power module values Measured values from all power modules in phase B.
phase B Allows monitoring of measurements from power modules
with the overriding system or PC tools.
Note: Parameters in this group have correct values only
when the drive is charged. With a discharged drive all
parameters have default values.
All parameters in this group are read only.
 Parameters 273

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
71.01 DSP temperature B1 Parameters 71.01…71.180 display measured values from -
all power modules of phase B. There are 15 parameters
per power module. For their description see parameters
70.01…70.17.

Note: Not all parameters in this group are necessarily in

use. Depending on the drive configuration there can be
different number of power modules per phase.
0.0 … 141.0 °C Power module B1 DSP temperature. 10 = 1 °C
… … … …
71.180 PM SN part 3 B9 See explanation in parameter 70.20 PM SN part 3 A1. -
90
72 Power module values Measured values from all power modules in phase C.
phase C Allows monitoring of measurements from power modules
with the overriding system or PC tools.
Note: Parameters in this group have correct values only
when the drive is charged. With a discharged drive all
parameters have default values.
All parameters in this group are read only.
72.01 PM CB humidity A1 Parameters 71.01…72.180 display measured values from -
all power modules of phase C. There are 15 parameters
per power module. For their description see parameters
70.01…70.17.
Note: Not all parameters in this group are necessarily in
use. Depending on the drive configuration there can be
different number of power modules per phase.
0.0 … 141.0 °C Power module C1 DSP temperature. 10 = 1 °C
… … … …
72.180 PM SN part 3 C9 See explanation in parameter 70.20 PM SN part 3 A1. -
73 PEBB CB temperature Measured temperature and humidity values from all power
and humidity modules. Allow monitoring of measurement from power
measurements modules with the overriding system or PC tools.
Note: Temperature and humidity measurements come from
sensor assembled on control board. If the control board is the
old type without sensor, no values will be shown. Parameters
in this group have correct values only when the drive is
charged.
All parameters in this group are read only.
73.01 PM CB humidity A1 Measured humidity of the control board in power module 0.0
1 of phase A.
Power module A1 CB humidity 1 = 1%
73.02 PM CB temperature Measured temperature of the control board in power 0.0
A1 module 1 of phase A
Power module A1 CB temperature 1 = 1°C
73.06 PM CB humidity A2 Measured humidity of the control board in power module 0.0
2 of phase A.
Power module A2 CB humidity 1 = 1%
73.07 PM CB temperature Measured temperature of the control board in power 0.0
A2 module 2 of phase A
Power module A2 CB temperature 1 = 1°C
274 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
… … … …
73.131 PM CB humidity C9 Measured humidity of the control board in power module 0.0
9 of phase C.
Power module C9 CB humidity 1 = 1%
73.132 PM CB temperature Measured temperature of the control board in power 0.0
C9 module 9 of phase C
Power module C9 CB temperature 1 = 1°C
73.136 PM CB average Measured average humidity of all PM CB
humidity
0.0…100.0 1=1%
73.137 PM CB average Measured average temperature of all PM CB
temperature
-40.0…125.0 1 = 1°C
73.138 PM CB real maximum Measured maximum humidity of all PM CB
humidity
0.0…100.0 1=1%
73.139 PM CB real maximum Measured maximum temperature of all PM CB
temperature
-40.0…125.0 1=1°C
73.140 PM CB maximum Historical maximum humidity of PM CB
humidity
0.0…100.0 1=1%
73.141 PM CB maximum Historical maximum temperature of PM CB
temperature
-40.0…125.0 1=1°C
77 PMSM start mode Starting parameters used for PMSM
77.01 Start mode Selects the motor start mode for PMSM when 99.03 is set Automati
to PM motor. c
Automatic Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most 0
cases. It includes the flash start function (very fast
starting into a rotating motor) and standstill starting
method selected by 77.02 Standstill mode.
Standstill The drive will only apply standstill starting method 1
selected by 77.02 Standstill mode, not including flash
start. Starting into a rotating motor is not possible.
77.02 Standstill mode Selects the motor start mode for PMSM at standstill when Current
99.03 is set to PM motor. rampup
Note:
For scalar mode, this parameter is has no effect. Scalar
mod always use current rampup as standstill start
method.
Current rampup Current and frequency is ramped up to target value in 1
defined time to rotate motor from standstill. The starting
torque which can be guaranteed by this method is
limited.
 Parameters 275

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
High frequency Inject a high frequency current to identify rotor position 2
injection and start after rotor position is obtained. This method
can produce a bigger starting torque than current
rampup.
Direct start Direct start from a defined rotor position. 4
Note:
Only for testing purpose. Not suggested to use in
practical applications.
78 PMSM TC Control Torque control parameters used for PMSM
78.01 PM motor type Displays PM motor type. -
Non-salient pole A type of PM motor with similar value of direct axis 0
inductance (Ld) and quadrature axis inductance (Lq).
Salient pole A type of PM motor with different value of direct axis 1
inductance (Ld) and quadrature axis inductance (Lq).
81 System control and Application software parameters used for system control
monitoring and monitoring.

81.01 System control and System control and monitoring control word. Shows the 0000h
monitor CW control signals as received from fieldbus interface. If the
converter is to be controlled by overriding system via
fieldbus using cyclic communication, system control word
from fieldbus should be linked to this parameter (should
be set up in the parameter group 53 FBA A data out).
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Function
0 1 = Local control disable
1…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh System control and monitoring control word. 1=1

81.02 System control and System control and monitoring status word. Shows the 0000h
monitor SW system status signals from application program that can be
read by overriding system via fieldbus interface. If the
converter status is to be read by overriding system via
fieldbus interface using cyclic communication, this parameter
should be linked to the fieldbus system status word (should
be set up in the parameter group 52 FBA A data in).
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Function
0 1 = Lamp test active
1 1 = Off1 control
2 1 = Converter space heater off
3…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh System control and monitoring status word. 1=1

276 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
81.03 System control and System control and alarm word 1 monitoring. It displays 0x0000
monitor AW1 system level active alarm signals from application program
that can be read by overriding system via fieldbus interface. If
converter alarms are to be read by overriding system via
fieldbus interface using cyclic communication, this parameter
should be linked to the fieldbus system alarm word 1 (should
be set up in the parameter group 52 FBA A data in).
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Function

0 Trafo phase U1 temperature high 1 = Trafo phase U1 temperature high
1 Trafo phase V1 temperature high 1 = Trafo phase V1 temperature high
2 Trafo phase W1 temperature high 1 = Trafo phase W1 temperature high
3 Ambient temperature high 1 = Ambient temperature high
4 Ambient temperature sensor failure 1 = Ambient temperature sensor failure
5 Motor phase U1 temperature high 1 = Motor phase U1 temperature high
6 Motor phase V1 temperature high 1 = Motor phase V1 temperature high
7 Motor phase W1 temperature high 1 = Motor phase W1 temperature high
8 Motor phase U2 temperature high 1 = Motor phase U2 temperature high
9 Motor phase V2 temperature high 1 = Motor phase V2 temperature high
10 Motor phase W2 temperature high 1 = Motor phase W2 temperature high
11 Motor DE bearing temperature high 1 = Motor DE bearing temperature high
12 Motor NDE bearing temperature 1 = Motor NDE bearing temperature high
high
13 Converter space heater overload 1 = Converter space heater overload
14 Motor space heater overload 1 = Motor space heater overload
15 Ambient temperature low 1 = Ambient temperature low

0000h…FFFFh System control and monitoring alarm word 1. 1=1

81.04 System control and System control and monitoring alarm word 2. Shows 0000h
monitor AW2 system level active alarm signals from application
program.
For the description how to read this parameter by
overriding system via fieldbus interface see parameter
81.03 System control and monitor AW1.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Function
0 1 = AC500 communication alarm
1 1 = AC500 communication error alarm
2 1 = Control supply failure alarm
3 1 = Control backup supply failure alarm
4 1 = IO controller version incompatible
5…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh System control and monitoring alarm word 2. 1=1

 Parameters 277

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
81.05 System control and System control and monitoring fault word 1. Shows 0000h
monitor FW1 system level active fault signals from application program
that can be read by overriding system via fieldbus
interface. If converter faults are to be read by overriding
system via fieldbus interface using cyclic communication,
this parameter should be linked to the fieldbus system
fault word 1 (should be set up in the parameter group 52
FBA A data in).
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Function
0 1 = Trafo phase U1 overtemperature
1 1 = Trafo phase V1 overtemperature
2 1 = Trafo phase W1 overtemperature
3 1 = Ambient overtemperature
4 1 = Ambient temperature sensor failure
5 1 = Motor phase U1 overtemperature
6 1 = Motor phase V1 overtemperature
7 1 = Motor phase W1 overtemperature
8 1 = Motor phase U2 overtemperature
9 1 = Motor phase V2 overtemperature
10 1 = Motor phase W2 overtemperature
11 1 = Motor DE bearing overtemperature
12 1 = Motor NDE bearing overtemperature
13 1 = Converter space heater overload
14 1 = Motor space heater overload
15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh System control and monitoring fault word 1. 1=1

81.06 System control and System control and monitoring fault word 2. Shows 0000h
monitor FW2 system level active fault signals from application
program.
For the description how to read this parameter by
overriding system via fieldbus interface see parameter
81.05 System control and monitor FW1.
This parameter is read-only.
278 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16

Bit Function
0 1 = AC500 communication fault
1 1 = AC500 communication error
2 1 = Control supply failure
3 1 = Motor phase U1 temperature sensor failure
4 1 = Motor phase V1 temperature sensor failure
5 1 = Motor phase W1 temperature sensor failure
6 1 = Motor phase U2 temperature sensor failure
7 1 = Motor phase V2 temperature sensor failure
8 1 = Motor phase W2 temperature sensor failure
9 1 = Motor DE bearing temperature sensor failure
10 1 = Motor NDE bearing temperature sensor failure
11...15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh System control and monitoring fault word 2. 1=1

81.07 IO Controller version IO controller SW version. If this value is not accordant 0.0.0.0
with value in parameter 81.08 IO Controller version
required, the IO controller SW version is not compatible
with current drive SW. In this case a fault will be
generated.
This parameter is read-only.
0.0.0.0 … IO controller SW version. 1=1
255.255.255.255
81.08 IO Controller version Defines required IO controller SW version. 0.0.0.0
required This parameter is read-only.
0.0.0.0 … Required IO controller SW version. 1=1
255.255.255.255
81.09 IO Controller In case Drive reports E104 IO Controller hardware Done
configuration refresh configuration error, refresh IO Controller configuration to
match actual IO modules. After refreshing, the value
reverts automatically to Done and IO Controller reboot
and configure correct hardware.
Done Refreshing done. 0
Refresh Refreshing. 1
81.10 Control supply Enables/disables monitoring of the control power supply. Disabled
monitoring
Disabled Control supply monitoring is disabled. 0
Alarm low active An alarm will be generated if control supply failure 1
feedback signal (EMB2 DI0) is FALSE.
Alarm high active An alarm will be generated if control supply failure 2
feedback signal (EMB2 DI0) is TRUE.
Fault low active A fault will be generated if control supply failure feedback 3
signal (EMB2 DI0) is FALSE.
Fault high active A fault will be generated if control supply failure feedback 4
signal (EMB2 DI0) is TRUE.
81.11 Control backup Enables/disables monitoring of the backup control power Disabled
supply monitoring supply.
 Parameters 279

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Disabled Backup control supply monitoring is disabled. 0
Low active An alarm will be generated if backup control supply failure 1
feedback signal (EMB2 DI1) is FALSE.
High active An alarm will be generated if backup control supply failure 2
feedback signal (EMB2 DI1) is TRUE.
81.12 Lamp test selection Enables testing of the cabinet front door lamps. Disabled
Disabled Lamp test is disabled. 0
DI lamp test Lamp test is activated by digital input that is defined by 1
parameters 81.13 Lamp test Grp+Indx and 81.14 Lamp test
BitNum.
Example: If parameter 81.12 Lamp test selection is set to
DI lamp test, parameter 81.13 Lamp test Grp+Indx to 1001
and parameter 81.14 Lamp test BitNum to 0 lamp test will
be activated by the signal defined in 10.01 DI status bit 0
which is BCON standard digital input DI1.
Parameter Lamp test is activated for 10s after which parameter 2
automatically changes back to Disabled.
81.13 Lamp test Grp+Indx Defines the parameter to be used as signal source for 0
lamp test. This parameter is used if 81.12 Lamp test
selection is set to DI lamp test.
0…32767 Lamp test source parameter. 1=1
81.14 Lamp test BitNum Specifies the bit number of parameter 81.13 Lamp test 0
Grp+Indx to be used as signal source for lamp test.
0…15 Lamp test source bit. 1=1
81.15 Local control disable Enables/disables local control (open and close MCB, start Paramete
source and stop buttons on the control panel, and the local controls r
on the Drive composer PC tool).
Works in combination with parameter 19.17 Local control
disable.
Parameter Local control disable is selected by parameter 19.17 Local 0
control disable.
Par.81.01-b00 Local control disable is selected by overriding system 1
through system control and monitoring control word (bit
0 of the parameter 81.01 System control and monitor
CW).
DI local control Local control disable is selected by a digital input which is 2
disable defined by parameters 81.16 Local control disable
Grp+Indx and 81.17 Local control disable BitNum.
81.16 Local control disable Defines the parameter to be used as signal source for 0
Grp+Indx local control disable.
This parameter is used if 81.15 Local control disable
source is set to DI local control disable.
0…32767 Local control disable source parameter. 1=1
81.17 Local control disable Specifies the bit number of parameter 81.16 Local control 0
BitNum disable Grp+Indx to be used as signal source for local
control disable.
0…15 Local control disable source bit. 1=1
81.20 Space heater control Selects the source of control signal for Space Heater OFF Not
Command (connected to EMB2 - DO6). selected
280 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Overview of space heater control:
Space heater control
SW
Not selected 1
Space heater OFF command
6.11 MSW – Ready RUN 2
EMB2 – DO6
6.11 MSW – Ready REF 3 SpcHeatOīOrd
BCON

Not selected No converter space heater is installed. 0

Ready run Space Heater OFF Command is set (heater deactivated) 1
as soon as the drive enters “Ready run” state.
Space Heater OFF Command is reset (heater activated) as
soon as the drive leaves “Ready run” state.
Ready ref Space Heater OFF Command is set (heater deactivated) 2
as soon as the drive enters “Ready ref” state.
Space Heater OFF Command is reset (heater activated) as
soon as the drive leaves “Ready ref” state.
81.21 Converter space Selects the action the drive takes when the value Disable
heater monitoring monitored by digital signal.
Disable No action taken. 0
Alarm active A warning (E227 Converter space heater overload 1
warning) is generated.
Fault active The drive trips on E106 Converter space heater overload 2
fault.
81.22 Motor space heater Selects the action the drive takes when the value Disable
monitoring monitored by digital signal.
Disable No action taken. 0
Alarm active A warning (E228 Motor space heater overload warning) is 1
generated.
Fault active The drive trips on E107 Motor space heater overload fault. 2
System control and monitoring alarm word 1. Shows 0x0000
system level active alarm signals from application
program that can be read by overriding system via
fieldbus interface. If converter alarms are to be read by
overriding system via fieldbus interface using
cyclic communication, this parameter should be linked to
the fieldbus system alarm word 1 (should be set up in the
parameter group 52 FBA A data in).
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

15 Ambient temperature 1 = Ambient temperature low
low

81.42 Ambient Define the delay time to detect ambient overtemperature 2 min
temperature detect fault after MCB is closed.
delay time
0...20 Delay time. 1 = 1 min
90
82 Charging, MCB MCB control (drive charging control).
control
 Parameters 281

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
82.01 MCB/Charging CW MCB/Charging control word of the drive. Shows the MCB 0000h
control signals as received from fieldbus interface.
If MCB is to be controlled by overriding system via
fieldbus, MCB control word from fieldbus should be linked
to this parameter (should be set up in the parameter
group 53 FBA A data out).
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Function
0 1 = MCB ON command
1…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh MCB/Charging control word. 1=1

82.02 MCB/Charging SW MCB/Charging status word. Shows MCB status signals 0000h
from application program that can be read by overriding
system via fieldbus interface. If MCB status is to be read
by overriding system via fieldbus interface, this
parameter should be linked to the fieldbus MCB status
word (should be set up in the parameter group 52 FBA A
data in).
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Function
0 1 = MCB close command
1 1 = MCB open feedback
2 1 = MCB closed feedback
3 1 = MCB/Charging SW-bit 03
4 1 = MCB not available
5 1 = MCB ON inhibition
6 1 = MCB external protection
7 1 = MCB/Charging SW-bit 07
8 0 = MCB open command N
9 1 = MCB/Charging SW-bit 09
10 1 = MCB/Charging SW-bit 10
11 1 = Charging command
12 1 = Discharging command
13 1 =DC link charged
14...15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh MCB/charging status word. 1=1

82.03 MCB/Charging AW1 MCB/Charging alarm word. Shows MCB related alarm 0000h
signals from application program that can be read by
overriding system via fieldbus interface. If MCB alarms
are to be read by overriding system via fieldbus interface,
this parameter should be linked to the fieldbus MCB alarm
word (should be set up in the parameter group 52 FBA A
data in).
This parameter is read-only.
282 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16

Bit Function
0 1 = DC link not discharged
1 1 = INU door not closed
2…10 Reserved
11 1 = Charging count alarm
12 1 = MCB not available alarm
13 1 = MCB ON inhibited alarm
14 1 = MCB external protection alarm
15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh MCB/charging alarm word. 1=1

82.05 MCB/Charging FW1 MCB/Charging fault word. Shows MCB related fault 0000h
signals from application program that can be read by
overriding system via fieldbus interface. If MCB faults are
to be read by overriding system via fieldbus interface, this
parameter should be linked to the fieldbus MCB fault
word (should be set up in the parameter group 52 FBA A
data in).
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Function
0 1 = MCB control fault
1 1 = MCB discrepancy
2 1 = DC link charging timeout
3 1 = INU door not closed
4 1 = INU door not locked
5...10 Reserved
11 1 = Charging count fault
12 1 = MCB not available fault
13 Reserved
14 1 = MCB external protection fault
15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh MCB/charging fault word. 1=1

82.20 MCB Ext1 commands Defines the type of connection and source of MCB Open Control
and MCB Close commands for external control location 1 type 1
(Ext1).
Front door External MCB control location is not selected. For MCB 0
control the MCB ONLINE and OFFLINE push-buttons on
the converter front door are used.
Control type 1 AC500 CPU – DI0 (two wire connection to open and close 1
the MCB).
MCB Open and Close command are connected to the
same digital Input:
0V DC on AC500 CPU – DI0 = command to open the MCB.
24V DC on AC500 CPU – DI0 = command to close the MCB.
 Parameters 283

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Control type 2 AC500 CPU – DI0P / DI1P (three-wire connection to open 2
and close the MCB).
MCB Open and Close commands are given by means of
push-buttons (P stands for pulse).
The close push-button is normally open and connected to
digital input AC500 CPU – DI1.
The open push-button is normally open and connected to
digital input AC500 CPU – DI0.
Comm. module MCB Open and Close commands are received from 3
master device (overriding system) via fieldbus interface
The source of the MCB Open and Close commands is the
parameter 82.01 MCB/Charging CW.
82.21 MCB Ext2 commands Defines the type of connection and source of MCB Open Front
and MCB Close commands for external control location 2 door
(Ext2).
Front door External MCB control location is not selected. For MCB 0
control the MCB ONLINE and OFFLINE push-buttons on
the converter front door are used.
Control type 1 AC500 CPU – DI0 (two wire connection to open and close the 1
MCB).

MCB Open and Close command are connected to the

same digital Input:
0V DC on AC500 CPU – DI0 = command to open the MCB
24V DC on AC500 CPU – DI0 = command to close the MCB.
Control type 2 AC500 CPU – DI0P / DI1P (three-wire connection to open 2
and close the MCB).

MCB Open and Close commands are given by means of

push-buttons (P stands for pulse).
The close push-button is normally open and connected to
digital input AC500 CPU – DI1.
The open push-button is normally open and connected to
digital input AC500 CPU – DI0.
Comm. module MCB Open and Close commands are received from 3
master device (overriding system) via fieldbus interface
The source of the MCB Open and Close commands is the
parameter 82.01 MCB/Charging CW.
82.26 MCB control signal Selection of MCB command signal. Steady
signal
Pulse signal Only a pulse signal is given to OPEN / CLOSE coils of the 0
MCB.
This setting should be used in case multiple coils are used
to close, open and trip the MCB.
Steady signal A steady signal is given to OPEN / CLOSE coil of the MCB. 1
This setting should be used in case only one high active
coil is used to open and close the MCB. It is possible to
have an additional tripping coil.
82.27 MCB control pulse Defines the pulse time (length) for MCB open / close 3s
time command if Pulse signal signal is selected as control
signal in parameter 82.26 MCB control signal.
1…10 MCB control pulse time. 1=1s
284 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
82.28 MCB closing time Maximum operating time for closing the MCB. If MCB has 3s
limit not reached the closed position within this time, a trip will
be initiated.
1…30 MCB maximum operating time for closing. 1=1s
82.29 MCB opening time Maximum operating time for opening the MCB. If the MCB 3s
limit has not reached the open position within this time, a trip
will be initiated.
1…10 MCB maximum operating time for opening. 1=1s
82.30 MCB feedback signal Defines the type of monitored feedback signals from Two
MCB. signals
One signal Only feedback signal CLOSED is monitored. 0
Two signals Both feedback signals, OPEN and CLOSED, are monitored. 1
82.40 MCB available Selects an option for monitoring the availability of MCB. Disabled
monitoring
By default, DI6 of DX571 is used for MCB available signal. In
such application, P85.21 Inductor bypass contactor control
should set as "Disabled".
If SBU bypass contactor function is activated, DI6 of DX571
should be connected to Inductor bypass contactor status
CLOSE. P82.40 MCB available monitoring function need to
set as "Disabled", or connect "MCB available signal" to other
DI sources and set corresponding values in P82.42 MCB
available Grp+indx and P82.43 MCB available BitNum.
Disabled Signal ‘MCB available’ is not monitored. 0
Alarm low active The function is active if the signal selected in parameter 82.42 1
MCB available Grp+Indx and 82.43 MCB available BitNum is
not set (FALSE).
If DC link is discharged the alarm message E209 MCB not
available is shown and the drive state changes to ‘Not Ready
on’.
If DC link is charged only the alarm message E209 MCB
not available is shown. The DC link remains charged.
Alarm high active The function is active if the signal selected in parameter 82.42 2
MCB available Grp+Indx and 82.43 MCB available BitNum is
set (TRUE).
The drive reaction is as described in option Alarm low
active.
Fault low active The function is active if the signal selected in parameter 82.42 3
MCB available Grp+Indx and 82.43 MCB available BitNum is
not set (FALSE).
The drive trips on E109 MCB not available fault.
Fault high active The function is active if the signal selected in parameter 82.42 4
MCB available Grp+Indx and 82.43 MCB available BitNum is
set (TRUE).
The drive trips on E109 MCB not available fault.
82.41 MCB available status Actual status of the signal ‘MCB available’. Disabled
Disabled Signal ‘MCB available’ is not monitored. 0
False Signal ‘MCB available’ is not active (low). 1
True Signal ‘MCB available’ is active (high). 2
 Parameters 285

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
82.42 MCB available Defines the parameter to be used as signal source for 8740
Grp+Indx MCB available monitoring.
This parameter is used if 82.40 MCB available monitoring
is not set to Parameter.
0…32767 MCB available monitoring source parameter. 1=1
82.43 MCB available Specifies the bit number of parameter 82.42 MCB 6
BitNum available Grp+Indx to be used as signal source for MCB
available monitoring.
0…15 MCB available monitoring source bit. 1=1
82.45 MCB ON inhibition Monitoring of ‘MCB ON inhibition’ signal which is used to Disabled
monitoring prevent an unexpected closing of MCB.
If the drive is in ‘Ready on’ state and signal ‘MCB ON
inhibition’ is active the drive state changes from ‘Ready
on’ to ‘Inhibit on’ and closing of MCB (charging) is not
possible. The alarm message E20B MCB ON inhibited is
active.
If the drive is in ‘Ready run’ or ‘Ready ref’ state and ‘MCB
ON Inhibition’ signal becomes active there is no reaction.
MCB will not be opened and the DC link stays charged.
Disabled MCB ON inhibition function is disabled. 0
Low active The function is active if the signal selected in parameter 82.47 1
MCB ON inhibition Grp+Indx and 82.48 MCB ON inhibition
BitNum is not set (FALSE).
High active The function is active if the signal selected in parameter 2
82.47 MCB ON inhibition Grp+Indx and 82.48 MCB ON
inhibition BitNum is set (TRUE).
82.46 MCB ON inhibition Actual status of the signal ‘MCB ON inhibition’ Disabled
status
Disabled Signal ‘MCB ON inhibition’ is not monitored. 0
Inactive Signal ‘MCB ON inhibition’ is not active (low). 1
Active Signal ‘MCB ON inhibition’ is active (high). 2
82.47 MCB ON inhibition Defines the parameter to be used as signal source for 0
Grp+Indx MCB ON inhibition monitoring.
This parameter is used if 82.45 MCB ON inhibition
monitoring is set to Low active or High active.
0…32767 MCB ON inhibition monitoring source parameter. 1=1
82.48 MCB ON inhibition Specifies the bit number of parameter 82.47 MCB ON 0
BitNum inhibition Grp+Indx to be used as signal source for MCB
ON inhibition monitoring.
0…15 MCB ON inhibition monitoring source bit. 1=1
82.50 MCB external Monitoring of an external MCB protection device. Disabled
protection monitoring
Disabled External MCB protection function is disabled. 0
Alarm low active The function is active if the signal selected in parameter 82.52 1
MCB external protection Grp+Indx and 82.53 MCB external
protection BitNum is not set (FALSE).
The alarm message E20A MCB external protection is active.
286 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Alarm high active The function is active if the signal selected in parameter 82.52 2
MCB external protection Grp+Indx and 82.53 MCB external
protection BitNum is set (TRUE).
The alarm message E20A MCB external protection is active.
Fault low active The function is active if the signal selected in parameter 82.52 3
MCB external protection Grp+Indx and 82.53 MCB external
protection BitNum is not set (FALSE).
The drive trips on E10A MCB external protection fault.
Fault high active The function is active if the signal selected in parameter 82.52 4
MCB external protection Grp+Indx and 82.53 MCB external
protection BitNum is set (TRUE).
The drive trips on E10A MCB external protection fault.
82.51 MCB external Actual status of the signal ‘MCB external protection’ Disabled
protection status
Disabled Signal ‘MCB external protection’ is not monitored. 0
False Signal ‘MCB external protection’ is not active (low). 1
True Signal ‘MCB external protection’ is active (high). 2
82.52 MCB external Defines the parameter to be used as signal source for 0
protection Grp+Indx MCB external protection monitoring.
This parameter is used if 82.50 MCB external protection
monitoring is set to other selection than Disabled.
0…32767 MCB external protection monitoring source parameter. 1=1
82.53 MCB external Specifies the bit number of parameter 82.52 MCB external 0
protection BitNum protection Grp+Indx to be used as signal source for MCB
external protection monitoring.
0…15 MCB external protection monitoring source bit. 1=1
82.93 Charging overload Selects the event type for charging overload event.? Fault
event sel
Fault The drive trips on fault D101 Charging count.
Warning? The drive generates a warning D240 Charging count.
No action No action taken.
90
83 Cooling system Control of the converter cooling system.
83.01 Cooling system CW Converter cooling system control word. Shows the 0000h
cooling control signals as received from fieldbus
interface. If the converter cooling is to be controlled by
overriding system via fieldbus, cooling system control
word from fieldbus should be linked to this parameter
(should be set up in the parameter group 53 FBA A data
out).
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Function
0…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Converter cooling system control word. 1=1

 Parameters 287

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
83.02 Cooling system SW Converter cooling system status word. Shows cooling 0000h
system status signals from application program that can
be read by overriding system via fieldbus interface. If
converter cooling system status is to be read by
overriding system via fieldbus interface, this parameter
should be linked to the fieldbus cooling system status
word (should be set up in the parameter group 52 FBA A
data in).
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Function
0…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Converter cooling system status word. 1=1

83.03 Cooling system AW1 Converter cooling system alarm word 1. Shows cooling 0000h
system related alarm signals from application program
that can be read by overriding system via fieldbus
interface. If cooling system alarms are to be read by
overriding system via fieldbus interface, this parameter
should be linked to the fieldbus cooling system alarm
word 1 (should be set up in the parameter group 52 FBA A
data in).
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Function
0 1 = TRU cooling fan 1 overload alarm
1 1 = TRU cooling fan 2 overload alarm
2 1 = TRU cooling fan 3 overload alarm
3 1 = TRU cooling fan 4 overload alarm
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 1 = Cooling fans test run
7 Reserved
8 1 = INU cooling fan 1 overload alarm
9 1 = INU cooling fan 2 overload alarm
10 1 = INU cooling fan 3 overload alarm
11 1 = INU cooling fan 4 overload alarm
12 1 = TRU air filter dirty
13 1 = INU air pressure sensor failure
14 1 = INU air pressure low
15 1 = INU air pressure high

0000h…FFFFh Cooling system alarm word 1. 1=1

83.04 Cooling system AW2 Converter cooling system alarm word 2. Shows cooling 0000h
system related active alarm signals from application
program.
For the description how to read this parameter by
overriding system via fieldbus interface see parameter
83.03 Cooling system AW1.
This parameter is read-only.
288 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16

Bit Function
0…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Cooling system alarm word 2. 1=1

83.05 Cooling system FW1 Converter cooling system fault word 1. Shows cooling 0000h
system related active fault signals from application
program that can be read by overriding system via
fieldbus interface. If cooling system faults are to be read
by overriding system via fieldbus interface, this
parameter should be linked to the fieldbus cooling
system fault word 1 (should be set up in the parameter
group 52 FBA A data in).
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Function
0 1 = TRU cooling fan 1 fault
1 1 = TRU cooling fan 2 fault
2 1 = TRU cooling fan 3 fault
3 1 = TRU cooling fan 4 fault
4...7 Reserved
8 1 = INU cooling fan 1 fault
9 1 = INU cooling fan 2 fault
10 1 = INU cooling fan 3 fault
11 1 = INU cooling fan 4 fault
12...13 Reserved
14 INU air pressure low
15 Inu air pressure sensor failure

0000h…FFFFh Cooling system fault word 1. 1=1

83.06 Cooling system FW2 Converter cooling system fault word 2. Shows cooling 0000h
system related active fault signals from application
program.
For the description how to read this parameter by
overriding system via fieldbus interface see parameter
83.05 Cooling system FW2.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Function
0…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Cooling system fault word 2. 1=1

83.12 Fan control Selects operation mode for transformer and inverter unit Auto run
cooling fans.
Auto run Inverter and transformer unit cooling fans running 0
continuously as soon as the drive is charged. If redundant
fans are selected the continuous operation of the drive is
guaranteed in case one standard fan fails. Switching to
the redundant fan takes place automatically.
 Parameters 289

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Test run Inverter and transformer unit standard and redundant cooling 1
fans run for test purpose continuously. This option can be
used to check direction of rotation, pressure etc.
83.13 Fan OFF delay Time delay after INU and TRU cooling fans are switched off 10 min
after DC link is discharged.
Note: The delay time is set to zero when:
1. Parameter 83.14 Fan EOFF stop is enabled and the EM
OFF2 is active, see 06.11 Main status word and Contents
of the fieldbus Control word.
2. Parameter 83.16 Fan power supply is selected to internal
(see ACS580MV primary control program troubleshooting
manual).
0 … 30 min Switch off delay for INU and TRU cooling fans 1 = 1 min
83.14 Fan EOFF stop Selects the operation of INU and TRU cooling fans in case an Enabled
Emergency Off is detected.
Disabled Cooling fans are not stopped in case of Emergency Off. 0
Enabled Cooling fans are stopped in case of Emergency Off. 1
83.15 Fan alarm reset Reset command for active fan alarm. The signal resets the Disabled
faulted cooling fans (redundant selection). Only the standard
fans are running.
Disabled Fan alarm reset command is not active. 0
Enabled Fan alarm reset command is active. 1
83.26 Redundant fan cycle Cycle time of redundant cooling fan group maintenance 360.0 h
time run.
Redundant fans will be activated for maintenance
purpose once every time interval specified in this
parameter even if there is no failure of the standard fan
group.
2.0 … 720.0 h Redundant fan cycle time. 1=1h
83.27 Redundant fan run Run time of redundant cooling fan group during one cycle 1.0 h
time time of maintenance run.
1.0 … 720.0 h Redundant fan run time. 1=1h
84 Motor temperature Measured values from IO controller extension AI modules.
monitoring
Note: Parameters in this group are available only if
extension AI temperature monitoring modules are
installed on the IO Controller (option, not standard drive
feature).
84.01 Motor temperature Measured motor winding phase U1 temperature. -
monitor enable
selection
290 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16

Bit Function
0 1 = Motor winding phase U1
1 1 = Motor winding phase V1
2 1 = Motor winding phase W1
3 1 = Motor winding phase U2
4 1 = Motor winding phase V2
5 1 = Motor winding phase W2
6 1 = Motor DE bearing
7 1 = Motor NDE bearing
8...15 Reserved

84.02 Motor winding phase Measured motor winding phase U1 temperature. -

U1 temperature
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor winding phase U1 temperature. 1 = 1 °C
84.03 Motor winding phase Defines the fault limit of the U1 temperature. 120 °C
U1 fault limit Fault monitoring is enabled by 84.01 Motor temperature
monitor enable selection
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor winding phase U1 temperature fault limit. 1 = 1 °C
84.04 Motor winding phase Defines the warning limit of the U1 temperature. 110 °C
U1 warning limit Warning monitoring is enabled by 84.01 Motor
temperature monitor enable selection
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor winding phase U1 temperature warning limit. 1 = 1 °C
84.05 Motor winding phase Measured motor winding phase V1 temperature. -
V1 temperature
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor winding phase V1 temperature. 1 = 1 °C
84.06 Motor winding phase Defines the fault limit of the V1 temperature. 120 °C
V1 fault limit Fault monitoring is enabled by 84.01 Motor temperature
monitor enable selection
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor winding phase V1 temperature fault limit. 1 = 1 °C
84.07 Motor winding phase Defines the warning limit of the V1 temperature. 110 °C
V1 warning limit Warning monitoring is enabled by 84.01 Motor
temperature monitor enable selection
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor winding phase V1 temperature warning limit. 1 = 1 °C
84.08 Motor winding phase Measured motor winding phase W1 temperature. -
W1 temperature
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor winding phase W1 temperature. 1 = 1 °C
84.09 Motor winding phase Defines the fault limit of the W1 temperature. 120 °C
W1 fault limit Fault monitoring is enabled by 84.01 Motor temperature
monitor enable selection
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor winding phase W1 temperature fault limit. 1 = 1 °C
84.10 Motor winding phase Defines the warning limit of the W1 temperature. 110 °C
W1 warning limit Warning monitoring is enabled by 84.01 Motor
temperature monitor enable selection
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor winding phase W1 temperature warning limit. 1 = 1 °C
 Parameters 291

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
84.11 Motor winding phase Measured motor winding phase U2 temperature. -
U2 temperature
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor winding phase U2 temperature. 1 = 1 °C
84.12 Motor winding phase Defines the fault limit of the U2 temperature. 120 °C
U2 fault limit Fault monitoring is enabled by 84.01 Motor temperature
monitor enable selection
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor winding phase U2 temperature fault limit. 1 = 1 °C
84.13 Motor winding phase Defines the warning limit of the U2 temperature. 110 °C
U2 warning limit Warning monitoring is enabled by 84.01 Motor
temperature monitor enable selection
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor winding phase U2 temperature warning limit. 1 = 1 °C
84.14 Motor winding phase Measured motor winding phase V2 temperature. -
V2 temperature
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor winding phase V2 temperature. 1 = 1 °C
84.15 Motor winding phase Defines the fault limit of the V2 temperature. 120 °C
V2 fault limit Fault monitoring is enabled by 84.01 Motor temperature
monitor enable selection
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor winding phase V2 temperature fault limit. 1 = 1 °C
84.16 Motor winding phase Defines the warning limit of the V2 temperature. 110 °C
V2 warning limit Warning monitoring is enabled by 84.01 Motor
temperature monitor enable selection
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor winding phase V2 temperature warning limit. 1 = 1 °C
84.17 Motor winding phase Measured motor winding phase W2 temperature. -
W2 temperature
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor winding phase W2 temperature. 1 = 1 °C
84.18 Motor winding phase Defines the fault limit of the W2 temperature. 120 °C
W2 fault limit Fault monitoring is enabled by 84.01 Motor temperature
monitor enable selection
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor winding phase W2 temperature fault limit. 1 = 1 °C
84.19 Motor winding phase Defines the warning limit of the W2 temperature. 110 °C
W2 warning limit Warning monitoring is enabled by 84.01 Motor
temperature monitor enable selection
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor winding phase W2 temperature warning limit. 1 = 1 °C
84.20 Motor DE bearing Measured motor DE bearing temperature. -
temperature
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor DE bearing temperature. 1 = 1 °C
84.21 Motor DE bearing Defines the fault limit of the DE temperature. 120 °C
temperature fault limit Fault monitoring is enabled by 84.01 Motor temperature
monitor enable selection
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor DE bearing temperature fault limit. 1 = 1 °C
84.22 Motor DE bearing Defines the warning limit of the DE temperature. 110 °C
temperature warning Warning monitoring is enabled by 84.01 Motor
limit temperature monitor enable selection
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor DE bearing temperature warning limit. 1 = 1 °C
84.23 Motor NDE bearing Measured motor NDE bearing temperature. -
temperature
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor NDE bearing temperature. 1 = 1 °C
292 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
84.24 Motor NDE bearing Defines the fault limit of the NDE temperature. 120 °C
temperature fault limit Fault monitoring is enabled by 84.01 Motor temperature
monitor enable selection
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor NDE bearing temperature fault limit. 1 = 1 °C
84.25 Motor NDE bearing Defines the warning limit of the NDE temperature. 110 °C
temperature warning Warning monitoring is enabled by 84.01 Motor
limit temperature monitor enable selection
-100.0… 500.0 °C Motor NDE bearing temperature warning limit. 1 = 1 °C
85 SBU control and Synchronized bypass unit(SBU) configuration.
monitoring
85.01 SBU control and The SBU control & monitoring - control word of the SBU 0000h
monitoring CW application. This parameter shows the control signals
received from fieldbus interface.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Function
0 1 = Sync to mains mode
1 1 = Sync to VSD mode
2 1 = DOL command
3…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh SBU control & monitoring - Control word. 1=1

85.02 SBU control and The SBU control & monitoring - status word of the SBU 0000h
monitoring SW application. This parameter shows the status signals
from application program.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Function
0 1 = SBU ready on
1 1 = SBU running
2 1 = SBU finished
3 1 = Voltage fre. & pha. matching
4 1 = Voltage RMS matching
5 1 = Sync permission
6 1 = Sync to mains mode
7 1 = Sync to VSD mode
8 1 = VSD mode
9 1 = Reserved
10 1 = Fieldbus control
11 1 = Bypass contactor closed
12 1 = MSS close command
13 1 = MB close command
14 1= MSS open/Inductor bypass contactor close command
15 1= MB open/Inductor bypass contactor open command

0000h…FFFFh SBU Control & Monitoring - Status word 1=1

 Parameters 293

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
85.03 SBU control and The SBU control & monitoring - alarm word of the SBU 0000h
monitoring AW application. This parameter shows the SBU related alarm
signals from application program.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Function
0 1 = Inductor temperature high
1 1 = Inductor temperature rising high
2 1 = Incorrect operation
3 1 = Inductor bypassed
4 1 = Sync to mains not finished
5 1 = MB not closed
6 1 = Sync to VSD not support
7 1 = Reserved
8 1 = Phase angle sync overtime
9 1 = RMS sync overtime
10... 15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh SBU Control & Monitoring - Alarm word 1=1

85.04 SBU control and The SBU control & monitoring - falut word of the SBU 0000h
monitoring FW application. This parameter shows the SBU related fault
signals from application program.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Function
0 1 = MB control fault
1 1 = MSS control fault
2 1 = Reserved
3 1 = Bypass contactor control fault
4 1 = Inductor overtemperature
5 1 = Inductor temperature rising overhigh
6 1 = Voltage RMS sensor failure
7 1 = Inductor temperature sensor failure
8...15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh SBU Control & Monitoring - Fault word 1=1

85.05 Ratio of grid voltage Parameter defines the ratio of grid voltage transducer. 100.0
transformer
0.0… 32767.0 Ratio of grid voltage transducer 1=1
85.06 Ratio of converter Parameter defines the ratio of converter output voltage 0.0
voltage transformer transducer.
0.0… 32767.0 Ratio of converter output voltage transducer 1=1
85.07 Voltage RMS Parameter defines the limitation of voltage RMS between 1.0
deviation limit grid and converter output. If the deviation is in this value,
SBU application regards voltage RMS is matching for
synchronized bypass, else not.
0.0… 10.0 Limitation of voltage RMS values deviation. 1 = 1%
294 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
85.08 Voltage RMS Parameter defines the maximum limitation of voltage 5.0
maximum deviation RMS between grid and converter output. After 20 seconds
limit from RMS start off adjusting, system monitors this value
instead of 85.07 Voltage RMS deviation limit to regard
voltage RMS is matching for synchronized bypass or not.
0.0… 10.0 Maximum limitation of voltage RMS values deviation. 1 = 1%
85.09 Frequency deviation Parameter defines the limitation of frequency between 3.0
limit grid and motor voltage. If the actual deviation is within
this value, SBU application regards grid and motor
voltage frequency are synchronized, else not.
0.0…10.0 Limitation of grid and motor voltage frequency deviation. 1=1%
85.10 Angle deviation limit Parameter defines the limitation of phase angle between 5.0
grid and motor voltage. If the deviation is within this
value, SBU application regards grid and motor voltage
phase angle are synchronized, else not.
0.0…20.0 Limitation of grid and motor voltage phase angle 1=1
deviation. degree
85.11 SBU function enable This parameter enables the SBU function. Disabled
Disabled SBU function control and monitoring are disabled. 0
Enabled SBU function control and monitoring are enabled. 1
85.12 Motor control mode This parameter selects the single motor mode or multiple Single
motors mode. motor
Single motor Single motor mode is active. On BCU side, 0
• MB, MSS control and monitor are active.
• DOL mode can be selected.
Multiple motors Multiple motors mode is active. On BCU side, 1
• MB, MSS control and monitor are not active.
• DOL mode cannot be selected.
Functions are moved to marshalling PLC.
85.13 SBU control source Parameter defines the source of SBU control. IOs
control
IOs control SBU is controlled by IO command. 0
Bus control SBU is controlled by fieldbus. 1
85.14 MB control signal Selection of MB command signal. Pulse
signal
Pulse signal Only a pulse signal will be given to OPEN / CLOSE coil of 0
the MB.
It’s used in case that multiple coils are used to close and
open the MB.
Steady signal A steady signal will be given to OPEN / CLOSE coil of the 1
MB.
It’s used in case that only one high active coil is used to
close and open the MB.
Note: If there are two coins to control MB and choose
customer signal instead of DOL to control MB then MB
can’t be opened.
 Parameters 295

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
85.15 MSS control signal Selection of MSS command signal. Pulse
signal
Pulse signal Only a pulse signal will be given to OPEN / CLOSE coil of 0
the MSS.
It’s used in case that multiple coils are used to close and
open the MSS.
Steady signal A steady signal will be given to OPEN / CLOSE coil of the 1
MSS.
It’s used in case that only one high active coil is used to
close and open the MSS.
85.16 MB MSS MB, MSS, Bypass contact control time limit. If device 3s
BypassContact doesn't reach expected position in time limit, there will be
control time limit a trip.
1…30 MB/MSS/Bypass contact maximum action time. 1=1s
85.20 MB open control by This parameter enables the MB breaker open control Disabled
direct online source from customer directly.
Disabled MB open control directly is disabled. 0
Enabled MB open control directly is enabled. 1
85.21 Inductor bypass This parameter enable the inductor bypass contactor Disabled
contactor control control.
If SBU bypass contactor function is activated,?DI6 of
DX571 should be connected to Inductor bypass contactor
status CLOSE. P82.40?MCB available monitoring function
need to set as "Disabled", or connect?"MCB available
signal" to?other DI sources and set corresponding values
in?P82.42 MCB available Grp+indx and?P82.43 MCB
available BitNum.
Disabled Inductor bypass contactor control is disabled. 0
Enabled Inductor bypass contactor control is enabled. 1
85.22 Inductor bypass Selection of inductor bypass contactor command signal. Pulse
contactor control signal
signal
Pulse signal Only a pulse signal will be given to OPEN / CLOSE coil of 0
the contactor.
It’s used in case that multiple coils are used to close and
open the contactor.
Steady signal A steady signal will be given to OPEN / CLOSE coil of the 1
contactor.
It’s used in case that only one high active coil is used to
close and open the contactor.
85.30 Inductor temperature Measured inductor temperature. -
-100.0… 500.0 °C Inductor temperature. 1 = 1 °C
85.30 Inductor temperature This parameter enables an extra CVMI2B board to No
measure grid voltage.
No SBU disable CVMI2B measurement (for RSYC board 0
solution)
Yes SBU enable CVMI2B measurement (for CVMI2B solution) 1
85.37 Grid configuration Selection of grid configuration (valid for SBU feature) Single
grid
296 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Single grid Motor will be connected to same grid as drive input gird. 0
Measure grid voltage with HVRB if this selection is
selected.
Multi grid Motor will be connected to different grid than drive input 1
grid. Measure grid voltage with PT if this selection is
selected.
87 AC500 I/O interface Configuration of AC500 digital inputs, relay / transistor
outputs and analog inputs.
87.10 AC500 CPU DI status Electrical status of AC500 CPU digital inputs DI7…DI0. 0000h
Bits 0…7 reflect the status of DI0…DI7.
Example: 0000000000001001b = DI3 and DI0 are on, all
others are off.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Function
0 1 = External ON/OFF Command1
1 1 = External ON/OFF Command2
2 1 = Local OFF command (push button)
3 1 = Local ON command (push button)
4 1 = MCB feedback status OPEN
5 1 = Converter space heater tripped
6 1 = Motor space heater tripped
7 1 = INU door locked
8…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh AC500 CPU digital inputs. 1=1

87.13 AC500 CPU DO Electrical status of AC500 CPU digital outputs 0000h
status DO5…DO0.
Bits 0…5 reflect the status of DO0…DO5.
Example: 0000000000001001b = DO3 and DO0 are on, all
others are off.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Function
0 1 = MCB CLOSE command
1 0 = MCB OPEN commandvN
2 1 = ON - LED activation (Main supply ON indication)
3 1 = OFF - LED activation (Main supply OFF indication)
4 1 = System alarm
5…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh AC500 CPU digital outputs. 1=1

87.40 AC500 E P2 DI status Electrical status of AC500 extension module P2 digital 0000h
inputs DI7…DI0.
Bits 0…7 reflect the status of DI0…DI7.
Example: 0000000000001001b = DI3 and DI0 are on, all
others are off.
This parameter is read-only.
 Parameters 297

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16

Bit Function
0 1 = control supply failure
1 1 = control backup supply failure
2 1 = TRU fan1 status OK
3 1 = TRU fan2 status OK
4 1 = TRU fan3 status OK
5 1 = TRU fan4 status OK
6 1 = Bypass contactor status CLOSE
7 1 = INU door closed
8…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh AC500 extension module P2 digital inputs. 1=1

87.43 AC500 E P2 DO Electrical status of AC500 extension module P2 digital 0000h
status outputs DO7…DO0.
Bits 0…7 reflect the status of DO0…DO7.
Example: 0000000000001001b = DO3 and DO0 are on, all
others are off.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Function
0 1 = fan group 1 ON
1 1 = fan group 2 ON
2 1 = fan group 3 ON
3 1 = fan group 4 ON
4 Reserved
5 1 = converter space heater OFF
6 1 = INU door unlock
7 1 = alarm fault LED
8…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh AC500 extension module P2 digital outputs. 1=1

90 Feedback selection Motor and load feedback configuration.
See also section Jogging (page 38), and the diagram on
page 443.
90.01 Motor speed for Displays the estimated motor speed that is used for -
control motor control, ie. final motor speed feedback selected by
parameter 90.41 Motor speed for control and filtered by
90.42 Motor speed filter time.
-32768.00 … Motor speed used for control. See par.
32767.00 rpm 46.01
90.41 Motor feedback Selects the motor speed feedback value used during
selection motor
control.
Estimate A calculated speed estimate is used. 0
90.42 Motor speed filter Defines a filter time for motor speed feedback used for 3ms
time control
(90.01 Motor speed for control).
0 … 10000 ms Motor speed filter time. 1 = 1 ms
298 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
95 HW configuration Various hardware-related settings
95.88 Capacitor reforming Enable/disable capacitor reforming test Disabled
test
Disabled Disable capacitor reforming test.
Enabled Enable capacitor reforming test.
95.89 Capacitor The parameter defines how long the capacitor reforming 15 Min
Reforming time test will last.
period
1Min ~ 120Min 1 = 1 Min
96 System Language selection; access levels; parameter save and
restore; control unit reboot; user parameter sets; unit
selection.
96.01 Language Selects the language of the parameter interface and other -
displayed information when viewed on the control panel.
Notes:
• Not all languages listed below are necessarily supported.
• This parameter does not affect the languages visible in the
Drive composer PC tool. (Those are specified under View
– Settings.)
Not selected None. 0
English English. 1033
Deutsch German. 1031
Español Spanish. 3082
Português Portuguese. 2070
Français French. 1036
Pусский Russian (Russia). 1049
Polski Polish. 1045
Česky Czech 1029
Chinese (Simplified, Simplified Chinese. 2052
PRC)
Türkçe Turkish 1055
 Parameters 299

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
96.02 Pass code Pass codes can be entered into this parameter to activate 0
further access levels (see parameter 96.03 Access levels
active) or to configure the user lock.
Entering “358” toggles the parameter lock, which
prevents the changing of all other parameters through
the control panel or the Drive composer PC tool.
Entering the user pass code (by default, “10000000”)
enables parameters 96.100…96.102, which can be used to
define a new user pass code and to select the actions that
are to be prevented.

Note: User pass code must be exactly 8 characters long.

Entering an invalid pass code will close the user lock if

open, ie. hide parameters 96.100…96.102. After entering
the code, check that the parameters are in fact hidden.

Note: You must change the default user pass code to

maintain a high level of cyber security. Store the code in a
safe place – the protection cannot be disabled even by
ABB if the code is lost.
See also section User lock (page 53).

0…99999999 Pass code. -

96.03 Access levels active Shows which access levels have been activated by pass 001b
codes entered into parameter 96.02 Pass code.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name
0 End user
1 Service
2 Advanced programmer
3…10 Reserved
11 OEM access level 1
12 OEM access level 2
13 OEM access level 3
14 Parameter lock
15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Active access levels. -

96.06 Parameter restore Restores the original settings of the control program, ie. Done
parameter default values.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive
is running.
Done Restoring is completed. 0
Restore defaults All editable parameter values are restored to default 8
values, except
• motor data
• control panel/PC communication settings
• I/O extension module settings
• fieldbus adapter settings
300 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Clear all All editable parameter values are restored to default 62
values, except
• control panel/PC communication settings
Drive composer PC tool communication is interrupted
during the restoring.
Reset all fieldbus Fieldbus adapter and embedded fieldbus interface 32
settings settings (parameter groups 50…59) are restored to
default values. This will also restore the default settings
of the fieldbus adapter if one is connected, potentially
including settings that
cannot be accessed through drive parameters.
96.07 Parameter save Saves the valid parameter values to permanent memory. Done
manually This parameter should be used to store values sent from
a fieldbus, or when using an external power supply to the
control board as the supply might have a very short hold-
up time when powered off.
Note: A new parameter value is saved automatically when
changed from the Drive composer PC tool or control
panel but not when altered through a fieldbus adapter
connection.
Done Save completed. 0
Save Save in progress. 1
96.08 Control board boot Changing the value of this parameter to 1 reboots the 0
control unit (without requiring a power off/on cycle of
the complete drive module).
The value reverts to 0 automatically.
0…1 1 = Reboot the control unit. 1=1
96.10 User set status Shows the status of the user parameter sets. -
This parameter is read-only.
See also section User parameter sets (page 53).
n/a No user parameter sets have been saved. 0
Loading A user set is being loaded. 1
Saving A user set is being saved. 2
Faulted Invalid or empty parameter set. 3
User set 1 User set 1 has been loaded. 4
User set 2 User set 2 has been loaded. 5
User set 3 User set 3 has been loaded. 6
User set 4 User set 4 has been loaded. 7
 Parameters 301

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
96.11 User set save/load Enables the saving and restoring of up to four custom
sets of parameter settings. See section User parameter
sets (page 53).
The set that was in use before powering down the drive is
in use after the next power-up.
Notes:
• Hardware configuration settings such as I/O extension
module, fieldbus and encoder configuration parameters
(groups 14…16, 47, 51…56) are not included in user
parameter sets.
• Parameter changes made after loading a set are not
automatically stored – they must be saved using this
parameter.
No action Load or save operation complete; normal operation. 0
User set I/O mode Load user parameter set using parameters 96.12 User set 1
I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
Load set 1 Load user parameter set 1. 2
Load set 2 Load user parameter set 2. 3
Load set 3 Load user parameter set 3. 4
Load set 4 Load user parameter set 4. 5
Save to set 1 Save user parameter set 1. 18
Save to set 2 Save user parameter set 2. 19
Save to set 3 Save user parameter set 3. 20
Save to set 4 Save user parameter set 4. 21
96.12 User set I/O mode in1 When parameter 96.11 User set save/load is set to User Not
set I/O mode, selects the user parameter set together selected
with parameter 96.13 User set I/O mode in2 as follows:

Status of source Status of source User parameter

defined by par. defined by par. set selected
96.12 96.13
0 0 Set 1
1 0 Set 2
0 1 Set 3
1 1 Set 4

Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
DI6 Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5). 7
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
302 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
96.13 User set I/O mode in2 See parameter 96.12 User set I/O mode in1. Not
selected
96.16 Unit selection Selects the unit of parameter power. 00000b

Bit Name Information

0 Power unit 0 = kW
1 = hp
1...15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Unit selection word. 1=1

96.20 Time synchronization Defines the 1st priority external source for Panel link
source synchronization of the drive’s time and date.
Internal No external source selected. 0
Fieldbus A Fieldbus interface A. 3
M/F The master station on a master/follower link. 5
Panel link Control panel, or Drive composer PC tool connected to 8
the control panel.
Ethernet tool link Drive composer PC tool through an FENA module. 9
96.24 Full days since 1st Number of full days passed since beginning of the year -
Jan 1980 1980.
This parameter, together with 96.25 Time in minutes
within 24 h and 96.26 Time in ms within one minute
makes it possible to set the date and time in the drive via
the parameter interface from a fieldbus or application
program. This may be necessary if the fieldbus protocol
does not support time synchronization.
1…59999 Days since beginning of 1980. 1=1
96.25 Time in minutes Number of full minutes passed since midnight. For 0 min
within 24 h example, the value 860 corresponds to 2:20 pm.
See parameter 96.24 Full days since 1st Jan 1980.
1…1439 Minutes since midnight. 1=1
96.26 Time in ms within one Number of milliseconds passed since last minute. 0 ms
minute See parameter 96.24 Full days since 1st Jan 1980.
0…59999 Number of milliseconds since last minute. 1=1
 Parameters 303

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
96.29 Time sync source Time source status word. -
status This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 Time tick 1 = 1st priority tick received: Tick has been received from 1st priority
received source.
1 Aux Time 1 = 2nd priority tick received: Tick has been received from 2nd priority
tick source.
received
2 Tick interval 1 = Yes: Tick interval too long (accuracy compromised).
is too long
3 DDCS 1 = Tick received: Tick has been received from an external controller.
controller
4 Master/Foll 1 = Tick received: Tick has been received through the master/follower
ower link.
Not applicable for ACS580MV.
5 Reserved
6 D2D 1 = Tick received: Tick has been received through the drive-to-drive
link.
Not applicable for ACS580MV.
7 FbusA 1 = Tick received: Tick has been received through fieldbus interface A.
8 FbusB 1 = Tick received: Tick has been received through fieldbus interface B.
9 EFB 1 = Tick received: Tick has been received through the embedded
fieldbus interface.
Not applicable for ACS580MV.
10 Ethernet 1 = Tick received: Tick has been received through the Ethernet port on
type BCU control unit.
11 Panel link 1 = Tick received: Tick has been received from the control panel, or
Drive composer PC tool connected to the control panel.
12 Ethernet 1 = Tick received: Tick has been received from Drive composer PC tool
tool link through an FENA module.
13 Parameter 1 = Tick received: Tick has been set by parameters 96.24…96.26.
setting
14 RTC 1 = RTC time in use: Time and date have been read from the real-time
clock.
15 Drive On- 1 = Drive on-time in use: Time and date are displaying drive on-time.
Time

0000h…FFFFh Time source status word 1. 1=1

96.31 Drive ID number Specifies an ID number for the drive. The ID can be read by 0
an external controller through DDCS, for example, for
comparison with an ID contained by the controller’s
application.
0…32767 ID number. 1=1
96.39 Power up event Enables/disables power-up logging. When enabled, an Enable
logging event (B5A2 Power up) is logged by the drive upon each
power-up.

Disable Power-up event logging disabled. 0

Enable Power-up event logging enabled. 1
304 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
96.51 Clear fault and event Clears the contents of the event logs. See section Event 00000
logger log (page 364).
00001 Clear the event logs. (The value will automatically revert to 1
00000.)
96.53 Actual checksum Displays the actual parameter configuration checksum. 0h
The checksum is generated and updated whenever an
action is selected in 96.54 Checksum action.
The parameters included in the calculation have been pre-
selected, but the selection can be edited using the Drive
composer PC tool.
See also section Parameter checksum calculation (page
54).
00000000h… Actual checksum. -
FFFFFFFFh
96.54 Checksum action Selects how the drive reacts if the parameter checksum No action
(96.53 Actual checksum) does not match any of the active
approved checksums (96.56…96.59). The active
checksums are selected by 96.55 Checksum control word.
No action No action taken. (The checksum feature is not in use.) 0
Pure event The drive generates an event log entry (B686 Checksum 1
mismatch).
Warning The drive generates a warning (A686 Checksum 2
mismatch).
Warning and The drive generates a warning (A686 Checksum 3
prevent start mismatch)). Starting the drive is prevented.
Fault The drive trips on 6200 Checksum mismatch). 4
96.55 Checksum control Bits 0…3 select to which approved checksums (out of 0000000
word 96.56…96.59) the actual checksum (96.53) is compared. 0b
Bits 4…7 select an approved (reference) checksum
parameter (96.56…96.59) into which the actual checksum
from parameter 96.53 is copied.

Bit Name Description

0 Approved checksum 1 1 = Enabled: Checksum 1 (96.56) is observed.
1 Approved checksum 1 1 = Enabled: Checksum 2 (96.57) is observed.
2 Approved checksum 1 1 = Enabled: Checksum 3 (96.58) is observed.
3 Approved checksum 1 1 = Enabled: Checksum 4 (96.59) is observed.
4 Set approved checksum 1 1 = Set: Copy value of 96.53 into 96.56.
5 Set approved checksum 1 1 = Set: Copy value of 96.53 into 96.57.
6 Set approved checksum 1 1 = Set: Copy value of 96.53 into 96.58.
7 Set approved checksum 1 1 = Set: Copy value of 96.53 into 96.59.
8…15 Reserved

00000000b… Checksum control word. 1=1

11111111b
96.56 Approved checksum Approved (reference) checksum 1. 0h
1
00000000h… Approved checksum 1. -
FFFFFFFFh
 Parameters 305

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
96.57 Approved checksum Approved (reference) checksum 2. 0h
2
00000000h… Approved checksum 2. -
FFFFFFFFh
96.58 Approved checksum Approved (reference) checksum 3. 0h
3
00000000h… Approved checksum 3. -
FFFFFFFFh
96.59 Approved checksum Approved (reference) checksum 4. 0h
4
00000000h… Approved checksum 4. -
FFFFFFFFh
96.61 User data logger Provides status information on the user data logger (see 0000b
status word page 475).

Bit Name Description

0 Running 1 = The user data logger is running. The bit is cleared after the post-
trigger time has passed.
1 Triggered 1 = The user data logger has been triggered. The bit is cleared when
the logger is restarted.
2 Data 1 = The user data logger contains data that can be read. Note that the
available bit is not cleared because the data is saved to the memory unit.
3 Configured 1 = The user data logger has been configured. Note that the bit is not
cleared because the configuration data is saved to the memory unit.
4…15 Reserved

0000b…1111b User data logger status word. 1=1

96.63 User data logger Triggers, or selects a source that triggers, the user data Off
trigger logger.
Off 0. 0
On 1. 1
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
96.64 User data logger start Starts, or selects a source that starts, the user data Off
logger.
Off 0. 0
On 1. 1
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
96.70 License state Shows the currently active license for converter. Not
initialized
Not initialized No license has been entered for the converter. 0
Time limited A time limited license is active. 1
The time limited license is used for the routine test.
306 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
Trial A trial license is active. 2
The trial license is active, if:
- the time limited license has expired and no time
unlimited license has been entered
or
- the BCU was exchanged and the currently entered
license does not match the BCON SN.

Note: In case BCU had to be exchanged contact your local

ABB representative to obtain new license.
Time unlimited A time unlimited license is active. 3
Expired The trial license has expired. 4
Operation of the converter is not possible until valid time
unlimited license is entered.
96.71 License key part 1 First part of the license key. 0000000
First 8 characters of the license key (counting from right 0h
to left) should be entered here.
00000000h…FFFFF First part of the license key. 1=1
FFFh
96.72 License key part 2 Second part of the license key. 0000000
Characters 9-16 of the license key (counting from right to 0h
left) should be entered here.
00000000h…FFFFF Second part of the license key. 1=1
FFFh
96.73 License key part 3 Third part of the license key. 0000000
Characters 17-24 of the license key (counting from right 0h
to left) should be entered here.
00000000h…FFFFF Third part of the license key. 1=1
FFFh
96.74 License key part 4 Fourth part of the license key. 0000000
Characters 25-32 of the license key (counting from right 0h
to left) should be entered here.
00000000h…FFFFF First part of the license key. 1=1
FFFh
96.75 License key refresh After entering a new license key, "Refresh" should be Done
selected to refresh the license.
Done License has been refreshed. 0
Refresh Refresh the license. 1
96.85 This parameter defines the period, if factory data logger 24 h
is triggered periodically, which is enabled by parameter
96.88.
0 means to disable this function.
0…1000 h 1=1
96.86 Factory data logger if factory data logger is triggered periodically, which is 10.0 %
current % enabled by parameter 96.88, drive tries to record a
factory data logger in one period.
It’s checked every hour. If motor current is higher than
this value, a factory data logger will be recorded and in
the remaining time of this period converter will not check
again.
 Parameters 307

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
0.0…1000.0 % 1=1
96.87 Factory data logger Manually trigger factory data logger. Off
manual trigger Pure event B673 Factory data logger triggered will be
triggered and a factory data logger will be attached to it.
The factory data logger is written to SD card and can be
plot in ACS580MV Data Analyzer.
After factory data logger recording is finished, this
parameter will change back to off.
Other… Source selection. -
Off 0. 0
On 1. 1
96.88 Factory data logger Factory data logger is triggered automatically, which Off
auto trigger means:
1. Periodically, which is defined by parameter 96.85, 96.86.
2. In SBU mode, MB is closed or synchronization overtime
happens.
3. Warning “Grid ride-through” becomes inactive and
warning “LF current limit effective” becomes active
regardless of the status of 96.88.
4. Parameter 96.88 is configured as certain bit and this bit
turns to 1 from 0.
Other… Source selection. -
Off 0. 0
Periodic 1. 1
308 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
96.100 Change user pass (Visible when user lock is open) 10000000
code To change the current user pass code, enter a new code
into this parameter as well as 96.101 Confirm user pass
code. A warning will be active until the new pass code is
confirmed. To cancel changing the pass code, close the
user lock without confirming. To close the lock, enter an
invalid pass code in parameter 96.02 Pass code, activate
parameter 96.08 Control board boot, or cycle the power.
Only 8 digits can be used as user pass code.
See also section User lock (page 53).
10000000… New user pass code. -
99999999
96.101 Confirm user pass (Visible when user lock is open)
code Confirms the new user pass code entered in 96.100
Change user pass code.
Only 8 digits can be used as user pass code.
10000000… Confirmation of new user pass code. -
99999999
 Parameters 309

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
96.102 User lock functionality (Visible when user lock is open) 0000h
Selects the actions or functionalities to be prevented by
the user lock. Note that the changes made take effect
only when the user lock is closed. See parameter 96.02
Pass code.
Note: We recommend you select all the actions and
functionalities unless otherwise required by the
application.

Bit Name Information

0 Disable ABB access 1 = ABB access levels (service, advanced programmer, etc.; see
levels 96.03) disabled
1 Freeze parameter 1 = Changing the parameter lock state prevented, ie. pass code
lock state 358 has no effect
2 Disable file 1 = Loading of files to drive prevented. This applies to
download • firmware upgrades
• safety functions module (FSO-xx) configuration
• parameter restore
• loading an adaptive program
• loading and debugging an application program
• changing home view of control panel
• editing drive texts
• editing the favorite parameters list on control panel
• configuration settings made through control panel such as
time/date formats and enabling/disabling clock display.
3…10 Reserved
11 Disable OEM access 1 = OEM access level 1 disabled
level 1
12 Disable OEM access 1 = OEM access level 2 disabled
level 2
13 Disable OEM access 1 = OEM access level 3 disabled
level 3
14…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Selection of actions to be prevented by user lock. -

96.201 Disable adaptive Enables/disables the adaptive program (if present). No
program See also section Adaptive programming (page 25).
No Adaptive program enabled. 0
Yes Adaptive program disabled. 1
310 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
96
97 Motor control Motor model settings.
97.04 Voltage reserve Defines the minimum allowed voltage reserve. When the -2%
voltage reserve has decreased to the set value, the drive
enters the field weakening area.
Note: This is an expert level parameter and should not be
adjusted without appropriate skill.
If the intermediate circuit DC voltage Udc = 550 V and the
voltage reserve is 5%, the RMS value of the maximum
output voltage in steady-state operation is
0.95 × 550 V / sqrt(2) = 369 V
The dynamic performance of the motor control in the
field weakening area can be improved by increasing the
voltage reserve value, but the drive enters the field
weakening area earlier.
-4 … 50% Voltage reserve. 1 = 1%
97.06 Flux reference select Defines the source of flux reference. User flux
Note: This is an expert level parameter and should not be reference
adjusted without appropriate skill.
Zero None. 0
User flux reference Parameter 97.07 User flux reference. 1
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
55).
97.07 User flux reference Defines the flux reference when parameter 97.06 Flux 100.00%
reference select is set to User flux reference.
0.00 … 200.00% User-defined flux reference. 100 = 1%
 Parameters 311

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
97.13 IR compensation Defines the relative output voltage boost at zero speed 0.25%
(IR compensation). The function is useful in applications
with a high break-away torque in scalar mode.

U / UN
(%)

Relative output voltage. IR

compensation set to 15%.

100%

15% Relative output voltage.

No IR compensation.
f (Hz)
Field weakening point

50% of nominal frequency

See also section IR compensation for scalar motor control

on page 34.
Note: This is an expert level parameter and should not be
adjusted without appropriate skill.
0.00 … 50.00% Voltage boost at zero speed in percent of nominal motor 1 = 1%
voltage.
97.51 SBU motor voltage SBU motor voltage RMS value filter time 10
RMS filter time
0.125…500.000 ms Filter time constant. 1 = 1ms
98 User motor Motor values supplied by the user that are used in the
parameters motor model.
Note: Motor model is not applicable for scalar control
mode. PM control is not applicable.
98.02 Rs user Defines the stator resistance RS of the motor model. 0.00000
With a star-connected motor, RS is the resistance of one p.u.
winding. With a delta-connected motor, RS is one-third of
the resistance of one winding.
0.00000 … 0.50000 Stator resistance in per unit. -
p.u.
98.03 Rr user Defines the rotor resistance RR of the motor model. 0.00000
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous p.u.
motors.
0.00000 … 0.50000 Rotor resistance in per unit. -
p.u.
98.04 Lm user Defines the main inductance LM of the motor model. 0.00000
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous p.u.
motors.
0.00000 … Main inductance in per unit. -
10.00000 p.u.
312 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
98.05 SigmaL user Defines the leakage inductance LS. 0.00000
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous p.u.
motors.
0.00000 … 1.00000 Leakage inductance in per unit. -
p.u.
98.06 Ld user Defines the direct axis inductance of PM motor. 0.00000
Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet p.u.
motors.
0.00000 … Direct axis inductance in per unit. -
10.00000 p.u
98.07 Lq user Defines the quadrature axis inductance of PM motor. 0.00000
Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet p.u.
motors.
0.00000 … Quadrature axis inductance in per unit. -
10.00000 p.u
98.08 PM flux user Defines the permanent magnet flux. 0.00000
Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet p.u.
motors.
0.00000 … 2.00000 Permanent magnet flux in per unit. -
p.u
98.09 Rs user SI Defines the stator resistance RS of the motor model. 0.00000
Ω
0.00000 … Stator resistance. -
100.00000 Ω
98.10 Rr user SI Defines the rotor resistance RR of the motor model. 0.00000
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous Ω
motors.
0.00000 … Rotor resistance. -
100.00000 Ω
98.11 Lm user SI Defines the main inductance LM of the motor model. 0.00 mH
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous
motors.
0.00 …100000.00 Main inductance. 1 = 10 mH
mH
98.12 SigmaL user SI Defines the leakage inductance LS. 0.00 mH
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous
motors.
0.00 …100000.00 Leakage inductance. 1 = 10 mH
mH
98.13 Ld user SI Defines the direct axis inductance of PM motor. 0.00mH
Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet
motors.
0.00 … 100000.00 Direct axis inductance.
mH
98.14 Lq user SI Defines the quadrature axis inductance of PM motor. 0.00mH
Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet
motors.
0.00 … 100000.00 Quadrature axis inductance. 1 = 10mH
mH
 Parameters 313

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
98.16 Lss user SI Defines the stray inductance of PM motor. 0.00mH
Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet
motors.
0.00 … 100000.00 Stray inductance of PM motor. 1 = 10mH
mH
99 Motor data Motor configuration settings.
99.03 Motor type Selects the motor type. Asynchro
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive nous
is running. motor
Asynchronous Standard squirrel cage AC induction motor 0
motor (asynchronous induction motor).
PM motor Permanent magnet synchronous motor. Three-phase AC 1
synchronous motor with permanent magnet rotor and
sinusoidal BackEMF voltage.
99.06 Motor nominal Defines the nominal motor current. Must be equal to the 10 A
current value on the motor rating plate.
Notes:
• Correct motor operation requires that the magnetizing
current of the motor does not exceed 90% of the
nominal current of the drive.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
0.0 … 6400.0 A Nominal current of the motor. 1=1A
99.07 Motor nominal Defines the nominal motor voltage supplied to the motor. 100 V
voltage This setting must match the value on the rating plate of
the motor.
Notes:
• The stress on the motor insulation is always dependent on
the drive supply voltage. This also applies to the case
where the motor voltage rating is lower than that of the
drive and the supply.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
0.0 … 20000.0 Nominal voltage of the motor. 10 = 1 V
99.08 Motor nominal Defines the nominal motor frequency. This setting must 50.00 Hz
frequency match the value on the rating plate of the motor.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive
is running.
0.00 … 500.00 Hz Nominal frequency of the motor. 10 = 1 Hz
99.09 Motor nominal speed Defines the nominal motor speed. The setting must 100 rpm
match the value on the rating plate of the motor.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive
is running.
0 … 30000 rpm Nominal speed of the motor. 1 = 1 rpm
314 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
99.10 Motor nominal Defines the nominal motor power. The setting must 0.00 kW
power match the value on the rating plate of the motor. If or hp
nominal power is not shown on the rating plate, nominal
torque can be entered instead in parameter 99.12.
If multiple motors are connected to the drive, enter the
total power of the motors.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive
is running.
0.00 … 10000.00 Nominal power of the motor. 1 = 1 unit
kW or
0.00 … 10000.00
hp
99.11 Motor nominal cosϕ Defines the cosphi of the motor for a more accurate 0.00
motor model. The setting should match the value on the
rating plate of the motor.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive
is running.
0.00 … 1.00 Cosphi of the motor. 100 = 1
99.12 Motor nominal torque Defines the nominal motor shaft torque. This value can be 0.000
given instead of nominal power (99.10) if shown on the N·m
rating plate of the motor.
Notes:
• This setting is an alternative to the nominal power value
(99.10). If both are entered, 99.12 takes priority.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
0.000…4000000.00 Nominal motor torque. 1 = 1 unit
0
N·m
99.13 ID run requested Selects the type of the motor identification. During the -
identification, the drive will identify the characteristics of
the motor for optimum motor control. After the ID run,
the drive is stopped.
Once the ID run is activated, it can be canceled by
stopping the drive: If ID run has already been performed
once, parameter is automatically set to None.
Notes:
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
• ID run cannot be performed if Motor control mode is
set to Scalar.
None No motor ID run is requested. 0
Normal Normal ID run will not rotate motor, the whole process is 1
at standstill.
Advanced Advance ID run will rotate motor up to nominal speed. 2
99.14 Last ID run performed Shows the mode of the ID run that was performed last. No
For more information of the different modes, see the
selections of parameter 99.13 ID run requested.
None No ID run has been performed. 0
Normal Normal ID run. 1
Advanced Advance ID run. 2
 Parameters 315

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq

16
99.15 Motor polepairs Calculated number of pole pairs in the motor. 0
calculated
0…1000 Number of pole pairs. 1=1
99.16 Motor phase order Switches the rotation direction of motor. This parameter can UVW
be used if the motor turns in the wrong direction (for example,
because of the wrong phase order in the motor cable), and
correcting the cabling is considered impractical.
Notes:
• Changing this parameter does not affect speed reference
polarities, so positive speed reference will rotate the motor
forward. The phase order selection just ensures that
“forward” is in fact the correct direction.
UVW Normal. 0
UWV Reversed rotation direction. 1
200
316 Parameters
 Additional parameter data 317

6
Additional parameter data
What this chapter contains
This chapter lists the parameters with some additional data such as their
ranges and 32-bit fieldbus scaling. For parameter descriptions, see chapter
Parameters (page 55).

Terms and abbreviations

Term Definition

Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Usually can only be monitored but
not adjusted; some counter-type signals can however be reset.

Analog src Analog source: the parameter can be set to the value of another parameter by
choosing “Other”, and selecting the source parameter from a list.
In addition to the “Other” selection, the parameter may offer other pre-selected
settings.

Binary src Binary source: the value of the parameter can be taken from a specific bit in
another parameter value (“Other”). Sometimes the value can be fixed to 0 (false)
or 1 (true). In addition, the parameter may offer other pre-selected settings.

Data Data parameter.

FbEq32 32-bit fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel
and the integer used in communication when a 32-bit value is selected for
transmission to an external system.
The corresponding 16-bit scalings are listed in chapter Parameters (page 55).

List Selection list.

No. Parameter number.

PB Packed Boolean (bit list).

 318 Additional parameter data

Term Definition

Real Real number.

Type Parameter type. See Analog src, Binary src, List, PB, Real.

Fieldbus addresses
Refer to the User’s manual of the fieldbus adapter.
 Additional parameter data 319

Parameter groups 1…9

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
01 Actual values
01.01 Motor speed used Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
01.02 Motor speed estimated Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
01.03 Motor speed % Real -1000.00 … 1000.00 % 100 = 1%
01.06 Output frequency Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
01.07 Motor current Real 0.00 … 30000.00 A 100 = 1 A
01.08 Grid current Real 0.00 … 585.00 A 100 = 1 A
01.10 Motor torque Real -1600.0 … 1600.0 % 10 = 1%
01.11 DC voltage Real 0.00 … 2000.00 V 100 = 1 V
01.13 Output voltage Real 0…20000 V 1=1V
01.14 Output power Real -32768.00 … 32767.00 kW or hp 100 = 1 unit
01.15 Output power % of motor Real -300.00 … 300.00 % 10 = 1%
nom
01.17 Motor shaft power Real -32768.00 … 32767.00 kW or hp 100 = 1 unit
01.18 Inverter GWh motoring Real 0…32767 GWh 1 = 1 GWh
01.19 Inverter MWh motoring Real 0…1000 MWh 1 = 1 MWh
01.20 Inverter kWh motoring Real 0…1000 kWh 1 = 1 kWh
01.24 Flux actual % Real 0…200 % 1 = 1%
01.29 Speed change rate Real -15000 … 15000 rpm/s 1 = 1 rpm/s
01.30 Nominal torque scale Real 0.000…4000000.000 N·m 1000 = 1 unit
01.31 Ambient temperature Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
01.32 Trafo winding U1 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
temperature
01.33 Trafo winding V1 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
temperature
01.34 Trafo winding W1 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
temperature
01.35 INU air pressure Real -1000.0 … 1000.0 Pa 1 = 1 Pa
01.40 Phase U2 motor current Real -825 … 825 A 1=1A
01.41 Phase V2 motor current Real -825 … 825 A 1=1A
01.42 Phase W2 motor current Real -825 … 825 A 1=1A
01.43 Phase U2 motor voltage Real -20500 … 20500 V 1=1V
01.44 Phase V2 motor voltage Real -20500 … 20500 V 1=1V
01.45 Phase W2 motor voltage Real -20500 … 20500 V 1=1V
01.46 Phase A average DC voltage Real 0 … 1400 V 1=1V
01.47 Phase B average DC voltage Real 0 … 1400 V 1=1V
01.48 Phase C average DC voltage Real 0 … 1400 V 1=1V
01.49 Phase U1 grid current Real -825 … 825 A 1=1A
01.50 Phase V1 grid current Real -825 … 825 A 1=1A
01.51 Phase W1 grid current Real -825 … 825 A 1=1A
 320 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

01.52 Phase A average secondary Real 0 … 1500 V 1=1V
voltage
01.53 Phase B average secondary Real 0 … 1500 V 1=1V
voltage
01.54 Phase C average secondary Real 0 … 1500 V 1=1V
voltage
01.55 Motor common mode Real 0…2000.000 V 1=1V
voltage
01.61 Abs motor speed used Real 0.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
01.62 Abs motor speed% Real 0.00 … 1000.00 % 100 = 1 rpm
01.63 Abs output frequency Real 0.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
01.64 Abs motor torque Real 0.0 … 1600.0 % 10 = 1%
01.65 Abs output power Real 0.00 … 32767.00 kW or hp 100 = 1 unit
01.66 Abs output power % motor Real 0.00 … 300.00 % 10 = 1%
nom
01.68 Abs motor shaft power Real 0.00 … 32767.00 kW or hp 100 = 1 unit
01.70 Ambient temperature % real32 -200.00 … 200.00 % 100 = 1%
01.167 Phase U1 grid voltage Real -20500.00…20500.00 V V 1=1V
01.168 Phase V1 grid voltage Real -20500.00…20500.00 V V 1=1V
01.169 Phase W1 grid voltage Real -20500.00…20500.00 V V 1=1V
01.170 SBU grid voltage Real 0 … 20000 V 1=1V
01.171 SBU motor voltage Real 0 … 20000 V 1=1V
01.173 PMSM rotor position Real -180…180 deg 1=1
01.174 PMSM last ramp stop Real -180…180 deg 1=1
position
01.185 Phase U2 motor RMS voltage Real 0 … 20500 V 1=1V
01.186 Phase V2 motor RMS voltage Real 0 … 20500 V 1=1V
01.187 Phase W2 motor RMS Real 0 … 20500 V 1=1V
voltage
01.188 Phase U1 grid RMS voltage Real 0 … 20500 V 1=1V
01.189 Phase V1 grid RMS voltage Real 0 … 20500 V 1=1V
01.190 Phase W1 grid RMS voltage Real 0 … 20500 V 1=1V
01.201 Motor current % of motor Real 0.00 … 1000.00 % 10 = 1%
nom
03 Input references
03.01 Panel reference Real -100000.00 … 100000.00 - 100 = 1
03.02 Panel reference 2 Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 - 100 = 1
03.05 FB A reference 1 Real -100000.00 … 100000.00 - 100 = 1
03.06 FB A reference 2 Real -100000.00 … 100000.00 - 100 = 1
03.07 FB B reference 1 Real -100000.00 … 100000.00 - 100 = 1
03.08 FB B reference 2 Real -100000.00 … 100000.00 - 100 = 1
03.13 M/F or D2D ref1 real32 -30000.00 … 30000.00 - 100 = 1
03.14 M/F or D2D ref2 real32 -30000.00 … 30000.00 - 100 = 1
 Additional parameter data 321

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

03.30 FB A reference 1 int32 real32 -2147483648 … - 1=1
2147483647
03.31 FB A reference 2 int32 real32 -2147483648 … - 1=1
2147483647
04 Warnings and faults
04.01 Tripping fault Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.02 Active fault 2 Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.03 Active fault 3 Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.04 Active fault 4 Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.05 Active fault 5 Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.06 Active warning 1 Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.07 Active warning 2 Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.08 Active warning 3 Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.09 Active warning 4 Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.10 Active warning 5 Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.11 Latest fault Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.12 2nd latest fault Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.13 3rd latest fault Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.14 4th latest fault Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.15 5th latest fault Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.16 Latest warning Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.17 2nd latest warning Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.18 3rd latest warning Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.19 4th latest warning Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.20 5th latest warning Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.23 Tripping fault Aux code Data 0000 0000h…FFFF FFFFh - 1=1
04.24 Active fault 2 Aux code Data 0000 0000h…FFFF FFFFh - 1=1
04.25 Active fault 3 Aux code Data 0000 0000h…FFFF FFFFh - 1=1
04.26 Active fault 4 Aux code Data 0000 0000h…FFFF FFFFh - 1=1
04.27 Active fault 5 Aux code Data 0000 0000h…FFFF FFFFh - 1=1
04.40 Event word1 Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.41 Event word1 bit0 code Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.42 Event word1 bit0 aux code Data 0000 0000h…FFFF FFFFh - 1=1
04.43 Event word1 bit1 code Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.44 Event word1 bit1 aux code Data 0000 0000h…FFFF FFFFh - 1=1
… … … … …
04.71 Event word1 bit15 code Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.72 Event word1 bit15 aux code Data 0000 0000h…FFFF FFFFh - 1=1
05 Diagnostics
05.01 On-time counter Real 0…65535 days 1=1d
05.02 Run-time counter Real 0…65535 days 1=1d
05.09 Time from power-up uint32 0…4294967295 - 1=1
 322 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

05.41 Main fan service counter Real 0…150 % 1 = 1%
05.42 Aux. fan service counter Real 0…150 % 1 = 1%
05.112 Maximum IGBT temperature Real 0…141 °C 10 = 1°C
05.121 MCB closing counter Integer 0...65535 - 1=1
06 Control and status words
06.01 Main control word PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.02 Application control word PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.03 transparent control word PB 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
06.04 FBA B transparent control PB 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh -
word
06.11 Main status word PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.16 Drive status word 1 PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.17 Drive status word 2 PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.18 Start inhibit status word PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.19 Speed control status word PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.20 Constant speed status word PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.25 Drive inhibit status word 2 PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.29 MSW bit 10 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
06.30 MSW bit 11 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
06.31 MSW bit 12 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
06.32 MSW bit 13 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
06.33 MSW bit 14 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
06.45 Follower CW user bit 0 uint32 - - 1=1
selection
06.46 Follower CW user bit 1 uint32 - - 1=1
selection
06.47 Follower CW user bit 2 uint32 - - 1=1
selection
06.48 Follower CW user bit 3 uint32 - - 1=1
selection
06.50 User status word 1 PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.60 User status word 1 bit 0 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
06.61 User status word 1 bit 1 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
06.62 User status word 1 bit 2 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
06.63 User status word 1 bit 3 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
06.64 User status word 1 bit 4 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
 Additional parameter data 323

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

06.65 User status word 1 bit 5 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
06.66 User status word 1 bit 6 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
06.67 User status word 1 bit 7 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
06.68 User status word 1 bit 8 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
06.69 User status word 1 bit 9 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
06.70 User status word 1 bit 10 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
06.71 User status word 1 bit 11 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
06.72 User status word 1 bit 12 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
06.73 User status word 1 bit 13 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
06.74 User status word 1 bit 14 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
06.75 User status word 1 bit 15 sel Binary - - 1=1
src
06.100 User control word 1 PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.101 User control word 2 PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.110 Aux CW PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.111 Aux SW PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
07 System info
07.04 Firmware name Data - - 1=1
07.05 Firmware version Data 0.0.0.0…255.255.255.255 - 1=1
07.06 Loading package name Data - - 1=1
07.07 Loading package version Data 0.0.0.0…255.255.255.255 - 1=1
07.08 Bootloader version Data 0.0.0.0…255.255.255.255 - 1=1
07.11 Cpu usage Real 0…100 % 1 = 1%
07.14 PM number per phase from Data 0…9 - 1=1
license
07.15 Power module SW version Data 0.0.0.0…255.255.255.255 - 1=1
07.16 Control hub FW version Data 0.0.0.0…255.255.255.255 - 1=1
07.17 CVMI2 FW version Data 0.0.0.0…255.255.255.255 - 1=1
07.18 Control Hub FW version Data 0.0.0.0…255.255.255.255 - 1=1
required
07.19 Power module rating Data 0-9 - 1=1
07.20 Power module type Data - - 1=1
07.23 Application name Data - - 1=1
07.24 Application version Data - - 1=1
07.25 Customization package Data - - 1=1
name
 324 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

07.26 Customization package Data - - 1=1
version
07.30 Adaptive program status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
07.40 IEC application Cpu usage Real 0.0 … 100.0 % 10 = 1%
peak
07.41 IEC application Cpu load Real 0.0 … 100.0 % 10 = 1%
average
07.118 SBU CVMI version Data 0.0.0.0…255.255.255.255 - 1=1
07.119 CVMI2 FW version required Data - - 1=1
07.199 SBU CVMI version Data 0.0.0.0…255.255.255.255 - 1=1
 Additional parameter data 325

Parameter groups 10…99

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
10 Standard DI, RO
10.01 DI status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
10.02 DI delayed status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
10.03 DI force selection PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
10.04 DI force data PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
10.05 DI1 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.06 DI1 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.07 DI2 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.08 DI2 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.09 DI3 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.10 DI3 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.11 DI4 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.12 DI4 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.13 DI5 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.14 DI5 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.15 DI6 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.16 DI6 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.21 RO status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
10.24 RO1 source Binary - - 1=1
src
10.25 RO1 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.26 RO1 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.27 RO2 source Binary - - 1=1
src
10.28 RO2 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.29 RO2 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.30 RO3 source Binary - - 1=1
src
10.31 RO3 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.32 RO3 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.51 DI filter time Real 0.3 … 100.0 ms 10 = 1 ms
10.99 RO/DIO control word PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
11 Standard DIO
11.01 DIO status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
12 Standard AI
12.01 AI tune enum 0…4 -
12.03 AI supervision function List 0…4 - 1=1
12.04 AI supervision selection PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
12.05 AI supervision force PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
12.11 AI1 actual value Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
 326 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

12.12 AI1 scaled value Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
12.15 AI1 unit selection List - - 1=1
12.16 AI1 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
12.17 AI1 min Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
12.18 AI1 max Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
12.21 AI2 actual value Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
12.22 AI2 scaled value Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
12.25 AI2 unit selection List - - 1=1
12.26 AI2 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
12.27 AI2 min Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
12.28 AI2 max Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
12.29 AI2 scaled at AI2 min Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
12.30 AI2 scaled at AI2 max Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
13 Standard AO
13.11 AO1 actual value Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
13.12 AO1 source Analog - - 1=1
src
13.16 AO1 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
13.17 AO1 source min Real -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
13.18 AO1 source max Real -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
13.19 AO1 out at AO1 src min Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
13.20 AO1 out at AO1 src max Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
13.21 AO2 actual value Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
13.22 AO2 source Analog - - 1=1
src
13.26 AO2 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
13.27 AO2 source min Real -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
13.28 AO2 source max Real -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
13.29 AO2 out at AO2 src min Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
13.30 AO2 out at AO2 src max Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
13.91 AO1 data storage Real -327.68 … 327.67 - 100 = 1
13.92 AO2 data storage Real -327.68 … 327.67 - 100 = 1
14 I/O extension module 1
14.01 Module 1 type List 0…4 - 1=1
14.02 Module 1 location Real 1…254 - 1=1
14.03 Module 1 status List 0…24 - 1=1
 Additional parameter data 327

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

Common parameters for DIOx (14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11)
14.05 DIO status PB 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
14.06 DIO delayed status PB 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
DIO1/DIO2 (14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11)
14.08 DIO filter time Real 0.8...100.0 ms 10 =1 ms
14.09 DIO1 function List 0…1 - 1=1
14.10 DIO1 filter gain List 0…3 - 1=1
(Not visible when 14.01
Module 1 type = FIO-01)
14.11 DIO1 output source Binary - - 1=1
src
14.12 DIO1 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
14.13 DIO1 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
14.14 DIO2 function List 0…1 - 1=1
14.15 DIO2 filter gain List 0…3 - 1=1
(Not visible when 14.01
Module 1 type = FIO-01)
14.16 DIO2 output source Binary - - 1=1
src
14.17 DIO2 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
14.18 DIO2 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
DIO3/DIO4 (14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01)
14.19 DIO3 function List 0…1 - 1=1
14.21 DIO3 output source Binary - - 1=1
src
14.21 Al tune
14.22 DIO3 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
14.23 DIO3 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
14.24 DIO4 function List 0…1 - 1=1
14.26 DIO4 output source Binary - - 1=1
src
14.27 DIO4 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
14.28 DIO4 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
RO1/RO2 (14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01)
14.31 RO status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
14.34 RO1 source Binary - - 1=1
src
14.35 RO1 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
14.36 RO1 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
14.37 RO2 source Binary - - 1=1
src
14.38 RO2 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
14.39 RO2 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
 328 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

Common parameters for AIx (14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01)
14.19 AI supervision function List 0…4 - 1=1
14.20 AI supervision selection PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
14.22 AI force selection PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
AI1/AI2 (14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01)
14.26 AI1 actual value Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
14.27 AI1 scaled value Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
14.28 AI1 force data Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
14.29 AI1 HW switch position List - - 1=1
14.30 AI1 unit selection List - - 1=1
14.31 AI1 filter gain List 0…7 - 1=1
14.32 AI1 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
14.33 AI1 min Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
14.34 AI1 max Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
14.35 AI1 scaled at AI1 min Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
14.36 AI1 scaled at AI1 max Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
14.41 AI2 actual value Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
14.42 AI2 scaled value Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
14.43 AI2 force data Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
14.44 AI2 HW switch position List - - 1=1
14.45 AI2 unit selection List - - 1=1
14.46 AI2 filter gain List 0…7 - 1=1
14.47 AI2 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
14.48 AI2 min Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
14.49 AI2 max Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
14.50 AI2 scaled at AI2 min Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
14.51 AI2 scaled at AI2 max Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
AI3 (14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11)
14.56 AI3 actual value Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
14.57 AI3 scaled value Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
14.58 AI3 force data Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
14.59 AI3 HW switch position List - - 1=1
14.60 AI3 unit selection List - - 1=1
14.61 AI3 filter gain List 0…7 - 1=1
14.62 AI3 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
14.63 AI3 min Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
14.64 AI3 max Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
 Additional parameter data 329

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

14.65 AI3 scaled at AI3 min Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
14.66 AI3 scaled at AI3 max Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
Common parameters for AOx (14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01)
14.71 AO force selection PB 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
AO1 (14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01)
14.76 AO1 actual value Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
14.77 AO1 source Analog - - 1=1
src
14.78 AO1 force data Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
14.79 AO1 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
14.80 AO1 source min Real -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
14.81 AO1 source max Real -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
14.82 AO1 out at AO1 src min Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
14.83 AO1 out at AO1 src max Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
AO2 (14.01 Module 1 type = FAIO-01)
14.86 AO2 actual value Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
14.87 AO2 source Analog - - 1=1
src
14.88 AO2 force data Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
14.89 AO2 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
14.90 AO2 source min Real -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
14.91 AO2 source max Real -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
14.92 AO2 out at AO2 src min Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
14.93 AO2 out at AO2 src max Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
15 I/O extension module 2
15.01 Module 2 type List 0…3 - 1=1
15.02 Module 2 location Real 1…254 - 1=1
15.03 Module 2 status List 0…2 - 1=1
Common parameters for DIOx (15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11)
15.05 DIO status PB 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
15.06 DIO delayed status PB 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
DIO1/DIO2 (15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11)
15.08 DIO filter time Real 0.8...100.0 ms 10 =1 ms
15.09 DIO1 function List 0…1 - 1=1
15.10 DIO1 filter gain List 0…3 - 1=1
(Not visible when 15.01
Module 2 type = FIO-01)
15.11 DIO1 output source Binary - - 1=1
src
15.12 DIO1 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
15.13 DIO1 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
15.14 DIO2 function List 0…1 - 1=1
 330 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

15.15 DIO2 filter gain List 0…3 - 1=1
(Not visible when 15.01
Module 2 type = FIO-01)
15.16 DIO2 output source Binary - - 1=1
src
15.17 DIO2 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
15.18 DIO2 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
DIO3/DIO4 (15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01)
15.19 DIO3 function List 0…1 - 1=1
15.21 DIO3 output source Binary - - 1=1
src
15.22 DIO3 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
15.23 DIO3 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
15.24 DIO4 function List 0…1 - 1=1
15.26 DIO4 output source Binary - - 1=1
src
15.27 DIO4 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
15.28 DIO4 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
RO1/RO2 (15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-01)
15.31 RO status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
15.34 RO1 source Binary - - 1=1
src
15.35 RO1 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
15.36 RO1 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
15.37 RO2 source Binary - - 1=1
src
15.38 RO2 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
15.39 RO2 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
Common parameters for AIx (15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01)
15.19 AI supervision function List 0…4 - 1=1
15.20 AI supervision selection PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
15.22 AI force selection PB 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
AI1/AI2 (15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01)
15.26 AI1 actual value Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
15.27 AI1 scaled value Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
15.28 AI1 force data Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
15.29 AI1 HW switch position List - - 1=1
15.30 AI1 unit selection List - - 1=1
15.31 AI1 filter gain List 0…7 - 1=1
15.32 AI1 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
15.33 AI1 min Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
15.34 AI1 max Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
 Additional parameter data 331

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

15.35 AI1 scaled at AI1 min Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
15.36 AI1 scaled at AI1 max Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
15.41 AI2 actual value Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
15.42 AI2 scaled value Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
15.43 AI2 force data Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
15.44 AI2 HW switch position List - - 1=1
15.45 AI2 unit selection List - - 1=1
15.46 AI2 filter gain List 0…7 - 1=1
15.47 AI2 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
15.48 AI2 min Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
15.49 AI2 max Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
15.50 AI2 scaled at AI2 min Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
15.51 AI2 scaled at AI2 max Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
AI3 (15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11)
15.56 AI3 actual value Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
15.57 AI3 scaled value Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
15.58 AI3 force data Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
15.59 AI3 HW switch position List - - 1=1
15.60 AI3 unit selection List - - 1=1
15.61 AI3 filter gain List 0…7 - 1=1
15.62 AI3 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
15.63 AI3 min Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
15.64 AI3 max Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
15.65 AI3 scaled at AI3 min Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
15.66 AI3 scaled at AI3 max Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
Common parameters for AOx (15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01)
15.71 AO force selection PB 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
AO1 (15.01 Module 2 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01)
15.76 AO1 actual value Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
15.77 AO1 source Analog - - 1=1
src
15.78 AO1 force data Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
15.79 AO1 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
15.80 AO1 source min Real -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
15.81 AO1 source max Real -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
15.82 AO1 out at AO1 src min Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
15.83 AO1 out at AO1 src max Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
AO2 (15.01 Module 2 type = FAIO-01)
15.86 AO2 actual value Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
 332 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

15.87 AO2 source Analog - - 1=1
src
15.88 AO2 force data Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
15.89 AO2 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
15.90 AO2 source min Real -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
15.91 AO2 source max Real -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
15.92 AO2 out at AO2 src min Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
15.93 AO2 out at AO2 src max Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
16 I/O extension module 3
16.01 Module 3 type List 0…3 - 1=1
16.02 Module 3 location Real 1…254 - 1=1
16.03 Module 3 status List 0…2 - 1=1
Common parameters for DIOx (16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11)
16.05 DIO status PB 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
16.06 DIO delayed status PB 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
DIO1/DIO2 (16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11)
16.08 DIO filter time Real 0.8...100.0 ms 10 =1 ms
16.09 DIO1 function List 0…1 - 1=1
16.10 DIO1 filter gain List 0…3 - 1=1
(Not visible when 16.01
Module 3 type = FIO-01)
16.11 DIO1 output source Binary - - 1=1
src
16.12 DIO1 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
16.13 DIO1 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
16.14 DIO2 function List 0…1 - 1=1
16.15 DIO2 filter gain List 0…3 - 1=1
(Not visible when 16.01
Module 3 type = FIO-01)
16.16 DIO2 output source Binary - - 1=1
src
16.17 DIO2 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
16.18 DIO2 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
DIO3/DIO4 (16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01)
16.19 DIO3 function List 0…1 - 1=1
16.21 DIO3 output source Binary - - 1=1
src
16.22 DIO3 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
16.23 DIO3 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
16.24 DIO4 function List 0…1 - 1=1
16.26 DIO4 output source Binary - - 1=1
src
16.27 DIO4 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
16.28 DIO4 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
 Additional parameter data 333

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

RO1/RO2 (16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-01)
16.31 RO status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
16.34 RO1 source Binary - - 1=1
src
16.35 RO1 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
16.36 RO1 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
16.37 RO2 source Binary - - 1=1
src
16.38 RO2 ON delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
16.39 RO2 OFF delay Real 0.0 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
Common parameters for AIx (16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01)
16.19 AI supervision function List 0…4 - 1=1
16.20 AI supervision selection PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
16.22 AI force selection PB 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
AI1/AI2 (16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01)
16.26 AI1 actual value Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
16.27 AI1 scaled value Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
16.28 AI1 force data Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
16.29 AI1 HW switch position List - - 1=1
16.30 AI1 unit selection List - - 1=1
16.31 AI1 filter gain List 0…7 - 1=1
16.32 AI1 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
16.33 AI1 min Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
16.34 AI1 max Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
16.35 AI1 scaled at AI1 min Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
16.36 AI1 scaled at AI1 max Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
16.41 AI2 actual value Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
16.42 AI2 scaled value Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
16.43 AI2 force data Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
16.44 AI2 HW switch position List - - 1=1
16.45 AI2 unit selection List - - 1=1
16.46 AI2 filter gain List 0…7 - 1=1
16.47 AI2 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
16.48 AI2 min Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
16.49 AI2 max Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
16.50 AI2 scaled at AI2 min Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
16.51 AI2 scaled at AI2 max Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
AI3 (16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11)
16.56 AI3 actual value Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
 334 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

16.57 AI3 scaled value Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
16.58 AI3 force data Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
16.59 AI3 HW switch position List - - 1=1
16.60 AI3 unit selection List - - 1=1
16.61 AI3 filter gain List 0…7 - 1=1
16.62 AI3 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
16.63 AI3 min Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
16.64 AI3 max Real -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V 1000 = 1 mA
or V
16.65 AI3 scaled at AI3 min Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
16.66 AI3 scaled at AI3 max Real -32768.000 … 32767.000 - 1000 = 1
Common parameters for AOx (16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01)
16.71 AO force selection PB 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
AO1 (16.01 Module 3 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01)
16.76 AO1 actual value Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
16.77 AO1 source Analog - - 1=1
src
16.78 AO1 force data Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
16.79 AO1 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
16.80 AO1 source min Real -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
16.81 AO1 source max Real -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
16.82 AO1 out at AO1 src min Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
16.83 AO1 out at AO1 src max Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
AO2 (16.01 Module 3 type = FAIO-01)
16.86 AO2 actual value Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
16.87 AO2 source Analog - - 1=1
src
16.88 AO2 force data Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
16.89 AO2 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
16.90 AO2 source min Real -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
16.91 AO2 source max Real -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
16.92 AO2 out at AO2 src min Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
16.93 AO2 out at AO2 src max Real 0.000 … 22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
17 Control hub IO
17.01 Control hub DO status PB 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
17.02 Control hub DO source PB 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
17.05 Control hub DI status PB 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
19 Operation mode
19.01 Actual operation mode List - - 1=1
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection Binary - - 1=1
src
19.12 Ext1 control mode List 1…6 - 1=1
 Additional parameter data 335

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

19.14 Ext2 control mode List 1…6 - 1=1
19.16 Local control mode List 0…1 - 1=1
19.17 Local control disable List 0…1 - 1=1
19.20 Scalar control reference unit List 0…1 - 1=1
20 Start/stop/direction
20.01 Ext1 commands List - - 1=1
20.02 Ext1 start trigger type List 0…1 - 1=1
20.03 Ext1 in1 source Binary - - 1=1
src
20.04 Ext1 in2 source Binary - - 1=1
src
20.05 Ext1 in3 source Binary - - 1=1
src
20.06 Ext2 commands List - - 1=1
20.07 Ext2 start trigger type List 0…1 - 1=1
20.08 Ext2 in1 source Binary - - 1=1
src
20.09 Ext2 in2 source Binary - - 1=1
src
20.10 Ext2 in3 source Binary - - 1=1
src
20.11 Run enable stop mode List 0...2 - 1=1
20.12 Run enable 1 source Binary - - 1=1
src
20.19 Enable start command Binary - - 1=1
src
20.23 Positive speed enable Binary - - 1=1
src
20.24 Negative speed enable Binary - - 1=1
src
20.25 Jogging enable Binary - - 1=1
src
20.26 Jogging 1 start source Binary - - 1=1
src
20.27 Jogging 2 start source Binary - - 1=1
src
20.29 Local start trigger type uint16 0…1 - 1=1
20.30 Enable signals warning PB 00b…11b - 1=1
function
21 Start/stop mode
21.01 Vector Start mode List 0…2 - 1=1
21.02 Magnetization time Real 0…10000 ms 1 = 1 ms
21.03 Stop mode List 0…2 - 1=1
21.05 Emergency stop source Binary - - 1=1
src
21.06 Zero speed limit Real 0.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
 336 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

21.07 Zero speed delay Real 0…30000 ms 1 = 1 ms
21.10 DC current reference Real 0.0 … 100.0 % 10 = 1%
21.12 Continuous magnetization Binary - - 1=1
command src
21.19 Scalar start mode List 0…2 - 1=1
22 Speed reference selection
22.01 Speed ref unlimited Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.11 Speed ref1 source Analog - - 1=1
src
22.12 Speed ref2 source Analog - - 1=1
src
22.13 Speed ref1 function List 0…5 - 1=1
22.14 Speed ref1/2 selection Binary - - 1=1
src
22.15 Speed additive 1 source Analog - - 1=1
src
22.16 Speed share Real -8.000 … 8.000 - 1000 = 1
22.17 Speed additive 2 source Analog - - 1=1
src
22.21 Constant speed function PB 00b…11b - 1=1
22.22 Constant speed sel1 Binary - - 1=1
src
22.23 Constant speed sel2 Binary - - 1=1
src
22.24 Constant speed sel3 Binary - - 1=1
src
22.26 Constant speed 1 Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.27 Constant speed 2 Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.28 Constant speed 3 Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.29 Constant speed 4 Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.30 Constant speed 5 Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.31 Constant speed 6 Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.32 Constant speed 7 Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.41 Speed ref safe Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.42 Jogging 1 ref Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.43 Jogging 2 ref Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.51 Critical speed function PB 00b…11b - 1=1
22.52 Critical speed 1 low Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.53 Critical speed 1 high Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.54 Critical speed 2 low Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.55 Critical speed 2 high Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.56 Critical speed 3 low Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.57 Critical speed 3 high Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.81 Speed reference act 1 Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
 Additional parameter data 337

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

22.82 Speed reference act 2 Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.83 Speed reference act 3 Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.84 Speed reference act 4 Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.85 Speed reference act 5 Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.86 Speed reference act 6 Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.87 Speed reference act 7 Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
23 Speed reference ramp
23.01 Speed ref ramp input Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
23.02 Speed ref ramp output Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
23.11 Ramp set selection Binary - - 1=1
src
23.12 Acceleration time 1 Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
23.13 Deceleration time 1 Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
23.14 Acceleration time 2 Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
23.15 Deceleration time 2 Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
23.16 Shape time acc 1 Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
23.17 Shape time acc 2 Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
23.18 Shape time dec 1 Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
23.19 Shape time dec 2 Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
23.20 Acc time jogging Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
23.21 Dec time jogging Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
23.23 Emergency stop time Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
23.24 Speed ramp in zero source Binary - - 1=1
src
23.26 Ramp out balancing enable Binary - - 1=1
src
23.27 Ramp out balancing ref Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
23.28 Variable slope enable List 0…1 - 1=1
23.29 Variable slope rate Real 2…30000 ms 1 = 1 ms
23.39 Follower speed correction real32 -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
out
23.40 Follower speed correction uint32 - - 1=1
enable
23.41 Follower speed correction real32 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
gain
23.42 Follower speed corr torq uint32 - - 1=1
source
24 Speed reference conditioning
24.01 Used speed reference Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
24.02 Used speed feedback Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
24.03 Speed error filtered Real -30000.0 … 30000.0 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
24.04 Speed error inverted Real -30000.0 … 30000.0 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
24.11 Speed correction Real -10000.00 … 10000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
 338 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

24.12 Speed error filter time Real 0…10000 ms 1 = 1 ms
24.13 RFE speed filter List 0…1 - 1=1
24.14 Frequency of zero Real 0.50 … 500.00 Hz 10 = 1 Hz
24.15 Damping of zero Real -1.000 … 1.000 - 100 = 1
24.16 Frequency of pole Real 0.50 … 500.00 Hz 10 = 1 Hz
24.17 Damping of pole Real -1.000 … 1.000 - 100 = 1
24.41 Speed error window control Binary - - 1=1
enable src
24.42 Speed window control mode List 0…1 - 1=1
24.43 Speed error window high Real 0.00 … 3000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
24.44 Speed error window low Real 0.00 … 3000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
24.46 Speed error step Real -3000.00 … 3000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
25 Speed control
25.01 Torque reference speed Real -1600.0 … 1600.0 % 10 = 1%
control
25.02 Speed proportional gain Real 0.00 … 250.00 - 100 = 1
25.03 Speed integration time Real 0.00 … 1000.00 s 100 = 1 s
25.04 Speed derivation time Real 0.000 … 10.000 s 1000 = 1 s
25.05 Derivation filter time Real 0…10000 ms 1 = 1 ms
25.06 Acc comp derivation time Real 0.00 … 1000.00 s 100 = 1 s
25.07 Acc comp filter time Real 0.0 … 1000.0 ms 10 = 1 ms
25.08 Drooping rate Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
25.09 Speed ctrl balancing enable Binary - - 1=1
src
25.10 Speed ctrl balancing ref Real -300.0 … 300.0 % 10 = 1%
25.11 Speed control min torque Real -1600.0 … 0.0 % 10 = 1%
25.12 Speed control max torque Real 0.0 … 1600.0 % 10 = 1%
25.13 Min torq sp ctrl em stop Real -1600 … 0 % 10 = 1%
25.14 Max torq sp ctrl em stop Real 0…1600 % 10 = 1%
25.15 Proportional gain em stop Real 1.00 … 250.00 - 100 = 1
25.18 Speed adapt min limit Real 0…30000 rpm 1 = 1 rpm
25.19 Speed adapt max limit Real 0…30000 rpm 1 = 1 rpm
25.21 Kp adapt coef at min speed Real 0.000 … 10.000 - 1000 = 1
25.22 Ti adapt coef at min speed Real 0.000 … 10.000 - 1000 = 1
25.25 Torque adapt max limit Real 0.0 … 1600.0 % 10 = 1%
25.26 Torque adapt filt time Real 0.000 … 100.000 s 1000 = 1 s
25.27 Kp adapt coef at min torque Real 0.000 … 10.000 - 1000 = 1
25.30 Flux adaption enable List 0…1 - 1=1
25.37 Mechanical time constant Real 0.00 … 1000.00 s 100 = 1 s
25.42 Integral term enable uint32 - - 1=1
25.53 Torque prop reference Real -30000.0 … 30000.0 % 10 = 1%
25.54 Torque integral reference Real -30000.0 … 30000.0 % 10 = 1%
 Additional parameter data 339

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

25.55 Torque deriv reference Real -30000.0 … 30000.0 % 10 = 1%
25.56 Torque acc compensation Real -30000.0 … 30000.0 % 10 = 1%
25.57 Torque reference Real -30000.0 … 30000.0 % 10 = 1%
unbalanced
26 Torque reference chain
26.01 Torque reference to TC Real -1600.0 … 1600.0 % 10 = 1%
26.02 Torque reference used Real -1600.0 … 1600.0 % 10 = 1%
26.08 Minimum torque ref Real -1000.0 … 0.0 % 10 = 1%
26.09 Maximum torque ref Real 0.0 … 1000.0 % 10 = 1%
26.11 Torque ref1 source Analog - - 1=1
src
26.12 Torque ref2 source Analog - - 1=1
src
26.13 Torque ref1 function List 0…5 - 1=1
26.14 Torque ref1/2 selection Binary - - 1=1
src
26.15 Load share Real -8.000 … 8.000 - 1000 = 1
26.16 Torque additive 1 source Analog - - 1=1
src
26.17 Torque ref filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
26.18 Torque ramp up time Real 0.000 … 60.000 s 1000 = 1 s
26.19 Torque ramp down time Real 0.000 … 60.000 s 1000 = 1 s
26.25 Torque additive 2 source Analog - - 1=1
src
26.26 Force torque ref add 2 zero Binary - - 1=1
src
26.41 Torque step Real -300.0 … 300.0 % 10 = 1%
26.42 Torque step enable List 0…1 - 1=1
26.43 Torque step pointer enable uint32 - - 1=1
26.44 Torque step source uint32 - - 1=1
26.51 Oscillation damping Binary - - 1=1
src
26.52 Oscillation damping out Binary - - 1=1
enable src
26.53 Oscillation compensation List 0…1 - 1=1
input
26.55 Oscillation damping Real 0.1 … 60.0 Hz 10 = 1 Hz
frequency
26.56 Oscillation damping phase Real 0…360 deg 1 = 1 deg
26.57 Oscillation damping gain Real 0.0 … 100.0 % 10 = 1%
26.58 Oscillation damping output Real -1600.000 … 1600.000 % 1000 = 1%
26.70 Torque reference act 1 Real -1600.0 … 1600.0 % 10 = 1%
26.71 Torque reference act 2 Real -1600.0 … 1600.0 % 10 = 1%
26.72 Torque reference act 3 Real -1600.0 … 1600.0 % 10 = 1%
26.73 Torque reference act 4 Real -1600.0 … 1600.0 % 10 = 1%
 340 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

26.74 Torque ref ramp out Real -1600.0 … 1600.0 % 10 = 1%
26.75 Torque reference act 5 Real -1600.0 … 1600.0 % 10 = 1%
26.76 Torque reference act 6 Real -1600.0 … 1600.0 % 10 = 1%
26.77 Torque ref add A actual Real -1600.0 … 1600.0 % 10 = 1%
26.78 Torque ref add B actual Real -1600.0 … 1600.0 % 10 = 1%
26.81 Rush control gain Real 0.0 … 10000.0 - 10 = 1
26.82 Rush control integration Real 0.0 … 10.0 s 10 = 1 s
time
28 Frequency reference chain
28.01 Frequency ref ramp input Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.02 Frequency ref ramp output Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.11 Frequency ref1 source Analog - - 1=1
src
28.12 Frequency ref2 source Analog - - 1=1
src
28.13 Frequency ref1 function List 0…5 - 1=1
28.14 Frequency ref1/2 selection Binary - - 1=1
src
28.21 Constant frequency function PB 00b…11b - 1=1
28.22 Constant frequency sel1 Binary - - 1=1
src
28.23 Constant frequency sel2 Binary - - 1=1
src
28.24 Constant frequency sel3 Binary - - 1=1
src
28.26 Constant frequency 1 Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.27 Constant frequency 2 Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.28 Constant frequency 3 Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.29 Constant frequency 4 Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.30 Constant frequency 5 Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.31 Constant frequency 6 Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.32 Constant frequency 7 Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.41 Frequency ref safe Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.51 Critical frequency function PB 00b…11b - 1=1
28.52 Critical frequency 1 low Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.53 Critical frequency 1 high Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.54 Critical frequency 2 low Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.55 Critical frequency 2 high Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.56 Critical frequency 3 low Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.57 Critical frequency 3 high Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.71 Freq ramp set selection Binary - - 1=1
src
28.72 Freq acceleration time 1 Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
28.73 Freq deceleration time 1 Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
 Additional parameter data 341

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

28.74 Freq acceleration time 2 Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
28.75 Freq deceleration time 2 Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
28.76 Freq ramp in zero source Binary - - 1=1
src
28.77 Freq ramp hold Binary - - 1=1
src
28.78 Freq ramp output balancing Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.79 Freq ramp out balancing Binary - - 1=1
enable src
28.90 Frequency ref act 1 Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.91 Frequency ref act 2 Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.92 Frequency ref act 3 Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.96 Frequency ref act 7 Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.97 Frequency ref unlimited Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
30 Limits
30.01 Limit word 1 PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
30.02 Torque limit status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
30.11 Minimum speed Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
30.12 Maximum speed Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
30.13 Minimum frequency Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
30.14 Maximum frequency Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
30.17 Maximum current Real 0.00 … 30000.00 A 100 = 1 A
30.18 Minimum torque sel List 0…12 - 1=1
30.19 Minimum torque 1 Real -1600.0 … 0.0 % 10 = 1%
30.20 Maximum torque 1 Real 0.0 … 1600.0 % 10 = 1%
30.21 Minimum torque 2 source List - - 1=1
30.22 Maximum torque 2 source List - - 1=1
30.23 Minimum torque 2 Real -1600.0 … 0.0 % 10 = 1%
30.24 Maximum torque 2 Real 0.0 … 1600.0 % 10 = 1%
30.25 Maximum torque sel List - - 1=1
30.26 Power motoring limit Real 0.00 … 600.00 % 100 = 1%
30.27 Power generating limit Real -600.00 … 0.00 % 100 = 1 A
30.40 Rated output current Real 0 … 511 A 1=1A
30.41 Rated input current Real 0 … 511 A 1=1A
30.60 PMSM maximum speed limit Real 0.00…30000 rpm - 1=1 rpm
30.61 Maximum static torque limit Real -300…300% - 1=1%
30.62 Minimum static torque limit Real -300…300% - 1=1%
31 Fault functions
31.01 External event 1 source Binary - - 1=1
src
31.02 External event 1 type List 0…3 - 1=1
31.03 External event 2 source Binary - - 1=1
src
 342 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

31.04 External event 2 type List 0…3 - 1=1
31.05 External event 3 source Binary - - 1=1
src
31.06 External event 3 type List 0…3 - 1=1
31.07 External event 4 source Binary - - 1=1
src
31.08 External event 4 type List 0…3 - 1=1
31.09 External event 5 source Binary - - 1=1
src
31.10 External event 5 type List 0…3 - 1=1
31.11 Fault reset selection Binary - - 1=1
src
31.12 Autoreset selection PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
31.13 User selectable fault Real 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
31.14 Number of trials Real 0…5 - 1=1
31.15 Total trials time Real 1.0 … 600.0 s 10 = 1 s
31.16 Delay time Real 0.0 … 120.0 s 10 = 1 s
31.24 Stall function List 0…2 - 1=1
31.25 Stall current limit Real 0.0 … 1600.0 % 10 = 1%
31.26 Stall speed limit Real 0.00 … 10000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
31.27 Stall frequency limit Real 0.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
31.28 Stall time Real 0…3600 s 1=1s
31.30 Overspeed trip margin Real 0.00 … 10000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
31.40 Disable warning messages PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
31.55 Ext I/O comm loss event uint16 0…2 - 1=1
32 Supervision
32.01 Supervision status PB 000b…111b - 1=1
32.05 Supervision 1 function List 0…6 - 1=1
32.06 Supervision 1 action List 0…2 - 1=1
32.07 Supervision 1 signal Analog - - 1=1
src
32.08 Supervision 1 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
32.09 Supervision 1 low Real -21474830.00 … - 100 = 1
21474830.00
32.10 Supervision 1 high Real -21474830.00 … - 100 = 1
21474830.00
32.15 Supervision 2 function List 0…6 - 1=1
32.16 Supervision 2 action List 0…2 - 1=1
32.17 Supervision 2 signal Analog - - 1=1
src
32.18 Supervision 2 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
32.19 Supervision 2 low Real -21474830.00 … - 100 = 1
21474830.00
 Additional parameter data 343

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

32.20 Supervision 2 high Real -21474830.00 … - 100 = 1
21474830.00
32.25 Supervision 3 function List 0…6 - 1=1
32.26 Supervision 3 action List 0…2 - 1=1
32.27 Supervision 3 signal Analog - - 1=1
src
32.28 Supervision 3 filter time Real 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
32.29 Supervision 3 low Real -21474830.00 … - 100 = 1
21474830.00
32.30 Supervision 3 high Real -21474830.00 … - 100 = 1
21474830.00
33 Generic timer & counter
33.01 Counter status PB 000000b…111111b - 1=1
33.10 On-time 1 actual Real 0…4294967295 s 1=1s
33.11 On-time 1 warn limit Real 0…4294967295 s 1=1s
33.12 On-time 1 function PB 00b…11b - 1=1
33.13 On-time 1 source Binary - - 1=1
src
33.14 On-time 1 warn message List - - 1=1
33.20 On-time 2 actual Real 0…4294967295 s 1=1s
33.21 On-time 2 warn limit Real 0…4294967295 s 1=1s
33.22 On-time 2 function PB 00b…11b - 1=1
33.23 On-time 2 source Binary - - 1=1
src
33.24 On-time 2 warn message List - - 1=1
33.30 Edge counter 1 actual Real 0…4294967295 - 1=1
33.31 Edge counter 1 warn limit Real 0…4294967295 - 1=1
33.32 Edge counter 1 function PB 0000b…1111b - 1=1
33.33 Edge counter 1 source Binary - - 1=1
src
33.34 Edge counter 1 divider Real 1…4294967295 - 1=1
33.35 Edge counter 1 warn List - - 1=1
message
33.40 Edge counter 2 actual Real 0…4294967295 - 1=1
33.41 Edge counter 2 warn limit Real 0…4294967295 - 1=1
33.42 Edge counter 2 function PB 0000b…1111b - 1=1
33.43 Edge counter 2 source Binary - - 1=1
src
33.44 Edge counter 2 divider Real 1…4294967295 - 1=1
33.45 Edge counter 2 warn List - - 1=1
message
33.50 Value counter 1 actual Real -2147483008 … - 1=1
2147483008
33.51 Value counter 1 warn limit Real -2147483008 … - 1=1
2147483008
 344 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

33.52 Value counter 1 function PB 00b…11b - 1=1
33.53 Value counter 1 source Analog - - 1=1
src
33.54 Value counter 1 divider Real 0.001 … 2147483.000 - 1000 = 1
33.55 Value counter 1 warn List - - 1=1
message
33.60 Value counter 2 actual Real -2147483008 … - 1=1
2147483008
33.61 Value counter 2 warn limit Real -2147483008 … - 1=1
2147483008
33.62 Value counter 2 function PB 00b…11b - 1=1
33.63 Value counter 2 source Analog - - 1=1
src
33.64 Value counter 2 divider Real 0.001 … 2147483.000 - 1000 = 1
33.65 Value counter 2 warn List - - 1=1
message
34 Protections
34.49 Motor max cont current Real 0.000 … 10.000 p.u. 1 = 1 p.u.
34.50 Motor max overload current Real 0.000 … 10.000 p.u. 1 = 1 p.u.
34.51 Motor overload duration Real 0 … 10000 s 1=1s
34.52 Motor overload recovery Real 0 … 10000 s 1=1s
time
35 Motor thermal protection
35.02 Measured temperature 1 Real -60 … 1000 °C, °C or Ω 1 = 1 unit
0 Ω or [35.12] Ω
35.03 Measured temperature 2 Real -60 … 1000 °C, °C or Ω 1 = 1 unit
0 Ω or [35.22] Ω
35.04 FPTC status word PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
35.11 Temperature 1 source List 0…11 - 1=1
35.12 Temperature 1 fault limit Real -60 … 1000 °C or Ω °C or Ω 1 = 1 unit
35.13 Temperature 1 warning limit Real -60 … 1000 °C or Ω °C or Ω 1 = 1 unit
35.14 Temperature 1 AI source Analog - - 1=1
src
35.21 Temperature 2 source List 0…11 - 1=1
35.22 Temperature 2 fault limit Real -60 … 1000 °C or Ω °C or Ω 1 = 1 unit
35.23 Temperature 2 warning limit Real -60 … 1000 °C or Ω °C or Ω 1 = 1 unit
35.24 Temperature 2 AI source Analog - - 1=1
src
35.30 FPTC configuration word PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
35.100 DOL starter control source Binary - - 1=1
src
35.101 DOL starter on delay Real 0…42949673 s 1=1s
35.102 DOL starter off delay Real 0…715828 min 1 = 1 min
35.103 DOL starter feedback source Binary - - 1=1
src
 Additional parameter data 345

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

35.104 DOL starter feedback delay Real 0…42949673 s 1=1s
35.105 DOL starter status word PB 0000b…1111b - 1=1
35.106 DOL starter event type List 0…2 - 1=1
36 Load analyzer
36.01 PVL signal source Analog - - 1=1
src
36.02 PVL filter time Real 0.00 … 120.00 s 100 = 1 s
36.06 AL2 signal source Analog - - 1=1
src
36.07 AL2 signal scaling Real 0.00 … 32767.00 - 100 = 1
36.08 Logger function List 00b…11b - 1=1
36.09 Reset loggers List 0…3 - 1=1
36.10 PVL peak value Real -32768.00 … 32767.00 - 100 = 1
36.11 PVL peak date Data - - 1=1
36.12 PVL peak time Data - - 1=1
36.13 PVL current at peak Real -32768.00 … 32767.00 A 100 = 1 A
36.14 PVL DC voltage at peak Real 0.00 … 2000.00 V 100 = 1 V
36.15 PVL speed at peak Real -32768.00 … 32767.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
36.16 PVL reset date Data - - 1=1
36.17 PVL reset time Data - - 1=1
36.20 AL1 below 10% Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.21 AL1 10 to 20% Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.22 AL1 20 to 30% Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.23 AL1 30 to 40% Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.24 AL1 40 to 50% Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.25 AL1 50 to 60% Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.26 AL1 60 to 70% Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.27 AL1 70 to 80% Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.28 AL1 80 to 90% Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.29 AL1 over 90% Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.40 AL2 below 10% Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.41 AL2 10 to 20% Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.42 AL2 20 to 30% Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.43 AL2 30 to 40% Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.44 AL2 40 to 50% Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.45 AL2 50 to 60% Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.46 AL2 60 to 70% Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.47 AL2 70 to 80% Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.48 AL2 80 to 90% Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.49 AL2 over 90% Real 0.00 … 100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.50 AL2 reset date Data - - 1=1
36.51 AL2 reset time Data - - 1=1
 346 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

40 Process PID set 1
40.01 Process PID output actual real32 -32768.00 … 32767.00 rpm, % 100 = 1 rpm,
or Hz % or Hz
40.02 Process PID feedback actual real32 -32768.00 … 32767.00 rpm, % 100 = 1 rpm,
or Hz % or Hz
40.03 Process PID setpoint actual real32 -32768.00 … 32767.00 rpm, % 100 = 1 rpm,
or Hz % or Hz
40.04 Process PID deviation actual real32 -32768.00 … 32767.00 rpm, % 100 = 1 rpm,
or Hz % or Hz
40.05 Process PID trim output act real32 -32768.00 … 32767.00 rpm, % 100 = 1 rpm,
or Hz % or Hz
40.06 Process PID status word uint16 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
40.07 Set 1 PID operation mode uint16 0…2 - 1=1
40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source uint32 - - 1=1
40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source uint32 - - 1=1
40.10 Set 1 feedback function uint16 0…11 - 1=1
40.11 Set 1 feedback filter time real32 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
40.12 Set 1 unit selection uint16 0…2 - 1=1
40.14 Set 1 setpoint scaling real32 -32768.00 … 32767.00 - 100 = 1
40.15 Set 1 output scaling real32 -32768.00 … 32767.00 - 100 = 1
40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source uint32 - - 1=1
40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source uint32 - - 1=1
40.18 Set 1 setpoint function uint16 0…11 - 1=1
40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1 uint32 - - 1=1
40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2 uint32 - - 1=1
40.21 Set 1 internal setpoint 1 real32 -32768.00 … 32767.00 rpm, % 100 = 1 rpm,
or Hz % or Hz
40.22 Set 1 internal setpoint 2 real32 -32768.00 … 32767.00 rpm, % 100 = 1 rpm,
or Hz % or Hz
40.23 Set 1 internal setpoint 3 real32 -32768.00 … 32767.00 rpm, % 100 = 1 rpm,
or Hz % or Hz
40.24 Set 1 internal setpoint 4 real32 -32768.00 … 32767.00 rpm, % 100 = 1 rpm,
or Hz % or Hz
40.25 Set 1 setpoint selection uint32 - - 1=1
40.26 Set 1 setpoint min real32 -32768.00 … 32767.00 - 100 = 1
40.27 Set 1 setpoint max real32 -32768.00 … 32767.00 - 100 = 1
40.28 Set 1 setpoint increase time real32 0.0 … 1800.0 s 10 = 1 s
40.29 Set 1 setpoint decrease time real32 0.0 … 1800.0 s 10 = 1 s
40.30 Set 1 setpoint freeze enable uint32 - - 1=1
40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion uint32 - - 1=1
40.32 Set 1 gain real32 0.10 … 100.00 - 100 = 1
40.33 Set 1 integration time real32 0.0 … 32767.0 s 10 = 1 s
40.34 Set 1 derivation time real32 0.000 … 10.000 s 1000 = 1 s
40.35 Set 1 derivation filter time real32 0.0 … 10.0 s 10 = 1 s
 Additional parameter data 347

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

40.36 Set 1 output min real32 -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
40.37 Set 1 output max real32 -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable uint32 - - 1=1
40.39 Set 1 deadband range real32 0.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
40.40 Set 1 deadband delay real32 0.0 … 3600.0 s 10 = 1 s
40.41 Set 1 sleep mode uint16 0…2 - 1=1
40.42 Set 1 sleep enable uint32 - - 1=1
40.43 Set 1 sleep level real32 0.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
40.44 Set 1 sleep delay real32 0.0 … 3600.0 s 10 = 1 s
40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time real32 0.0 … 3600.0 s 10 = 1 s
40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step real32 0.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation real32 -32768.00 … 32767.00 rpm, % 100 = 1 rpm,
or Hz % or Hz
40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay real32 0.00 … 60.00 s 100 = 1 s
40.49 Set 1 tracking mode uint32 - - 1=1
40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection uint32 - - 1=1
40.51 Set 1 trim mode uint16 0…3 - 1=1
40.52 Set 1 trim selection uint16 1…3 - 1=1
40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer uint32 - - 1=1
40.54 Set 1 trim mix real32 0.000 … 1.000 - 1000 = 1
40.55 Set 1 trim adjust real32 -100.000 … 100.000 - 1000 = 1
40.56 Set 1 trim source uint16 1…2 - 1=1
40.57 PID set1/set2 selection uint32 - - 1=1
40.60 Set 1 PID activation source uint32 - - 1=1
40.91 Feedback data storage real32 -327.68 … 327.67 - 100 = 1
40.92 Setpoint data storage real32 -327.68 … 327.67 - 100 = 1
41 Process PID set 2
41.07 Set 2 PID operation mode uint16 0…2 - 1=1
41.08 Set 2 feedback 1 source uint32 - - 1=1
41.09 Set 2 feedback 2 source uint32 - - 1=1
41.10 Set 2 feedback function uint16 0…11 - 1=1
41.11 Set 2 feedback filter time real32 0.000 … 30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
41.12 Set 2 unit selection uint16 0…2 - 1=1
41.14 Set 2 setpoint scaling real32 -32768 … 32767 - 100 = 1
41.15 Set 2 output scaling real32 -32768 … 32767 - 100 = 1
41.16 Set 2 setpoint 1 source uint32 - - 1=1
41.17 Set 2 setpoint 2 source uint32 - - 1=1
41.18 Set 2 setpoint function uint16 0…11 - 1=1
41.19 Set 2 internal setpoint sel1 uint32 - - 1=1
41.20 Set 2 internal setpoint sel2 uint32 - - 1=1
41.21 Set 2 internal setpoint 1 real32 -32768.0 … 32767.0 rpm, % 100 = 1 rpm,
or Hz % or Hz
 348 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

41.22 Set 2 internal setpoint 2 real32 -32768.0 … 32767.0 rpm, % 100 = 1 rpm,
or Hz % or Hz
41.23 Set 2 internal setpoint 3 real32 -32768.0 … 32767.0 rpm, % 100 = 1 rpm,
or Hz % or Hz
41.24 Set 2 internal setpoint 4 real32 -32768.0 … 32767.0 rpm, % 100 = 1 rpm,
or Hz % or Hz
41.25 Set 2 setpoint selection uint32 - - 1=1
41.26 Set 2 setpoint min real32 -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 100 = 1
41.27 Set 2 setpoint max real32 -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 100 = 1
41.28 Set 2 setpoint increase time real32 0.0 … 1800.0 s 10 = 1 s
41.29 Set 2 setpoint decrease time real32 0.0 … 1800.0 s 10 = 1 s
41.30 Set 2 setpoint freeze enable uint32 - - 1=1
41.31 Set 2 deviation inversion uint32 - - 1=1
41.32 Set 2 gain real32 0.1 … 100.0 - 100 = 1
41.33 Set 2 integration time real32 0.0 … 3600.0 s 10 = 1 s
41.34 Set 2 derivation time real32 0.0 … 10.0 s 1000 = 1 s
41.35 Set 2 derivation filter time real32 0.0 … 10.0 s 10 = 1 s
41.36 Set 2 output min real32 -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
41.37 Set 2 output max real32 -32768.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
41.38 Set 2 output freeze enable uint32 - - 1=1
41.39 Set 2 deadband range real32 0.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
41.40 Set 2 deadband delay real32 0.0 … 3600.0 s 10 = 1 s
41.41 Set 2 sleep mode uint16 0…2 - 1=1
41.42 Set 2 sleep enable uint32 - - 1=1
41.43 Set 2 sleep level real32 0.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
41.44 Set 2 sleep delay real32 0.0 … 3600.0 s 10 = 1 s
41.45 Set 2 sleep boost time real32 0.0 … 3600.0 s 10 = 1 s
41.46 Set 2 sleep boost step real32 0.0 … 32767.0 - 10 = 1
41.47 Set 2 wake-up deviation real32 -32768.00 … 32767.00 rpm, % 100 = 1 rpm,
or Hz % or Hz
41.48 Set 2 wake-up delay real32 0.00 … 60.00 s 100 = 1 s
41.49 Set 2 tracking mode uint32 - - 1=1
41.50 Set 2 tracking ref selection uint32 - - 1=1
41.51 Set 2 trim mode uint16 0…3 - 1=1
41.52 Set 2 trim selection uint16 1…3 - 1=1
41.53 Set 2 trimmed ref pointer uint32 - - 1=1
41.54 Set 2 trim mix real32 0.000 … 1.000 - 1000 = 1
41.55 Set 2 trim adjust real32 -100.000 … 100.000 - 1000 = 1
41.56 Set 2 trim source uint16 1…2 - 1=1
41.60 Set 2 PID activation source uint32 - - 1=1
45 Energy efficiency
45.01 Saved GW hours Real 0…65535 GWh 1 = 1 GWh
 Additional parameter data 349

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

45.02 Saved MW hours Real 0…999 MWh 1 = 1 MWh
45.03 Saved kW hours Real 0.0 … 999.0 kWh 10 = 1 kWh
45.05 Saved money x1000 Real 0…4294967295 thousan 1 = 1 thousand
d
45.06 Saved money Real 0.00 … 999.99 (selecta 100 = 1 unit
ble)
45.08 CO2 reduction in kilotons Real 0…65535 metric 1 = 1 metric
kiloton kiloton
45.09 CO2 reduction in tons Real 0.0 … 999.9 metric 10 = 1 metric
ton ton
45.12 Energy tariff 1 Real 0.000 … 4294967.295 (selecta 1000 = 1 unit
ble)
45.13 Energy tariff 2 Real 0.000 … 4294967.295 (selecta 1000 = 1 unit
ble)
45.14 Tariff selection Binary - - 1=1
src
45.17 Tariff currency unit List 100…102 - 1=1
45.18 CO2 conversion factor Real 0.000 … 65.535 metric 1000 = 1
ton/ metric
MWh ton/MWh
45.19 Comparison power Real 0.00 … 100000.00 kW or kW or hp 1 = 1 unit
0.00 … 100000.00 hp
45.21 Energy calculations reset List 0…1 - 1=1
46 Monitoring/scaling settings
46.01 Speed scaling Real 0.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
46.02 Frequency scaling Real 0.10 … 1000.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
46.03 Torque scaling Real 0.1 … 1000.0 % 10 = 1%
46.04 Power scaling Real 0.10 … 30000.00 kW kW or hp 100 = 1 unit
46.05 Current scaling Real 0…30000 A 1=1A
46.06 Speed ref zero scaling Real 0.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
46.07 Frequency ref zero scaling Real 0.00 … 1000.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
46.11 Filter time motor speed Real 0…20000 ms 1 = 1 ms
46.12 Filter time output frequency Real 0…20000 ms 1 = 1 ms
46.13 Filter time motor torque Real 0…20000 ms 1 = 1 ms
46.14 Filter time power out Real 0…20000 ms 1 = 1 ms
46.21 At speed hysteresis Real 0.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
46.22 At frequency hysteresis Real 0.00 … 1000.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
46.23 At torque hysteresis Real 0.00 … 3000.00 % 1 = 1%
46.31 Above speed limit Real 0.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
46.32 Above frequency limit Real 0.00 … 1000.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
46.33 Above torque limit Real 0.0 … 1600.0 % 10 = 1%
46.42 Torque decimals List 0…2 - 1=1
47 Data storage
47.01 Data storage 1 real32 Real -2147483.008 … - 1000 = 1
2147483.008
 350 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

47.02 Data storage 2 real32 Real -2147483.008 … - 1000 = 1
2147483.008
47.03 Data storage 3 real32 Real -2147483.008 … - 1000 = 1
2147483.008
47.04 Data storage 4 real32 Real -2147483.008 … - 1000 = 1
2147483.008
47.05 Data storage 5 real32 Real -2147483.008 … - 1000 = 1
2147483.008
47.06 Data storage 6 real32 Real -2147483.008 … - 1000 = 1
2147483.008
47.07 Data storage 7 real32 Real -2147483.008 … - 1000 = 1
2147483.008
47.08 Data storage 8 real32 Real -2147483.008 … - 1000 = 1
2147483.008
47.11 Data storage 1 int32 Real -2147483648 … - 1=1
2147483647
47.12 Data storage 2 int32 Real -2147483648 … - 1=1
2147483647
47.13 Data storage 3 int32 Real -2147483648 … - 1=1
2147483647
47.14 Data storage 4 int32 Real -2147483648 … - 1=1
2147483647
47.15 Data storage 5 int32 Real -2147483648 … - 1=1
2147483647
47.16 Data storage 6 int32 Real -2147483648 … - 1=1
2147483647
47.17 Data storage 7 int32 Real -2147483648 … - 1=1
2147483647
47.18 Data storage 8 int32 Real -2147483648 … - 1=1
2147483647
47.21 Data storage 1 int16 Real -32768 … 32767 - 1=1
47.22 Data storage 2 int16 Real -32768 … 32767 - 1=1
47.23 Data storage 3 int16 Real -32768 … 32767 - 1=1
47.24 Data storage 4 int16 Real -32768 … 32767 - 1=1
47.25 Data storage 5 int16 Real -32768 … 32767 - 1=1
47.26 Data storage 6 int16 Real -32768 … 32767 - 1=1
47.27 Data storage 7 int16 Real -32768 … 32767 - 1=1
47.28 Data storage 8 int16 Real -32768 … 32767 - 1=1
47.31 Data storage 1 real32 type List 0…5 - 1=1
47.32 Data storage 2 real32 type List 0…5 - 1=1
47.33 Data storage 3 real32 type List 0…5 - 1=1
47.34 Data storage 4 real32 type List 0…5 - 1=1
47.35 Data storage 5 real32 type List 0…5 - 1=1
47.36 Data storage 6 real32 type List 0…5 - 1=1
47.37 Data storage 7 real32 type List 0…5 - 1=1
47.38 Data storage 8 real32 type List 0…5 - 1=1
 Additional parameter data 351

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

49 Panel port communication
49.01 Node ID number Real 1…32 - 1=1
49.03 Baud rate List 1…5 - 1=1
49.04 Communication loss time Real 0.1 … 3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
49.05 Communication loss action List 0…5 - 1=1
49.06 Refresh settings List 0…1 - 1=1
49.07 Panel comm supervision PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
force
49.08 Secondary comm. loss List 0…5 - 1=1
action
49.14 Panel speed reference unit List 0…1 - 1=1
49.15 Minimum ext speed ref panel Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
49.16 Maximum ext speed ref Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
panel
49.17 Minimum ext frequency ref Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
panel
49.18 Maximum ext frequency ref Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
panel
50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA)
50.01 enable List 0…3 - 1=1
50.02 comm loss func List 0…5 - 1=1
50.03 comm loss t out Real 0.3 … 6553.5 s 10 = 1 s
50.04 ref1 type List 0…11 - 1=1
50.05 ref2 type List 0…11 - 1=1
50.07 actual 1 type List 0…11 - 1=1
50.08 actual 2 type List 0…11 - 1=1
50.09 SW transparent source Analog - - 1=1
src
50.10 act1 transparent source Analog - - 1=1
src
50.11 act2 transparent source Analog - - 1=1
src
50.12 debug mode List 0…1 - 1=1
50.13 control word Data 00000000h … FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
50.14 reference 1 Real -2147483648 … - 1=1
2147483647
50.15 reference 2 Real -2147483648 … - 1=1
2147483647
50.16 status word Data 00000000h … FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
50.17 actual value 1 Real -2147483648 … - 1=1
2147483647
50.18 actual value 2 Real -2147483648 … - 1=1
2147483647
50.21 timelevel sel List 0…3 - 1=1
50.26 comm supervision force PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
 352 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

50.31 FBA B enable List 0…1 - 1=1
50.32 FBA B comm loss func Real 0…5 - 1=1
50.33 FBA B comm loss timeout List 0.3 … 6553.5 s 10 = 1 s
50.34 FBA B ref1 type List 0…5 - 1=1
50.35 FBA B ref2 type List 0…5 - 1=1
50.37 FBA B actual 1 type List 0…5 - 1=1
50.38 FBA B actual 2 type Analog 0…5 - 1=1
src
50.39 FBA B SW transparent Analog - - 1=1
source src
50.40 FBA B act1 transparent Analog - - 1=1
source src
50.41 FBA B act2 transparent List - - 1=1
source
50.42 FBA B debug enable Data 0…1 - 1=1
50.43 FBA B control word Real 00000000h … FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
50.44 FBA B reference 1 Real -2147483648 … - 1=1
2147483647
50.45 FBA B reference 2 Data -2147483648 … - 1=1
2147483647
50.46 FBA B status word Real 00000000h … FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
50.47 FBA B actual value 1 Real -2147483648 … - 1=1
2147483647
50.48 FBA B actual value 2 -2147483648 … - 1=1
2147483647
50.51 FBA B timelevel sel List 0…3 - 1=1
50.56 FBA B comm supervision PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
force
51 FBA A settings
51.01 type List - - 1=1
51.02 Par2 Real 0…65535 - 1=1
… … … … …
51.26 Par26 Real 0…65535 - 1=1
51.27 par refresh List 0…1 - 1=1
51.28 par table ver Data - - 1=1
51.29 drive type code Real 0…65535 - 1=1
51.30 mapping file ver Real 0…65535 - 1=1
51.31 D2 comm status List 0…6 - 1=1
51.32 comm SW ver Data - - 1=1
51.33 appl SW ver Data - - 1=1
52 FBA A data in
52.01 data in1 List - - 1=1
… … … … …
52.12 data in12 List - - 1=1
 Additional parameter data 353

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

53 FBA A data out
53.01 data out1 List - - 1=1
… … … … …
53.12 data out12 List - - 1=1
54 FBA B settings
54.01 FBA B type
54.02 FBA B Par2 UINT16 0…65535 -
… … … … …
54.26 Protocol sw ver UINT16 0…65535 -
54.27 FBA B par refresh List 0…1 -
54.28 FBA B par table ver UINT16 0…65535 -
54.29 FBA B drive type code UINT16 0…65535 -
54.30 FBA B mapping file ver UINT16 0…65535 -
54.31 D2FBA B comm status List 0…6 -
54.32 FBA B comm SW ver UINT16 0…65535 -
54.33 FBA B appl SW ver UINT16 0…65535 -
55 FBA B data in
55.01 FBA B data in1 List - - 1=1
… … … … …
55.12 FBA B data in12 List - - 1=1
56 FBA B data out
56.01 FBA B data out1 List - - 1=1
… … … … …
56.12 FBA B data out12 List - - 1=1
59 Embedded Ethernet
59.01 Emb Eth enable List 0…1 - 1=1
59.02 Emb Eth status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
59.03 Emb Eth commrate List 0…4 - 1=1
59.04 Emb Eth IP settings List 0…2 - 1=1
59.05 Emb Eth IP address Real 0.0.0.0 … 255.255.255.255 - -
59.06 Emb Eth subnet mask Real 0.0.0.0 … 255.255.255.255 - -
59.07 Emb Eth gateway Real 0.0.0.0 … 255.255.255.255 - -
59.08 Emb Eth par refresh List List 0…1 - 1=1
59.25 Ethernet PC tools List 0…1 - 1=1
60 DDCS communication
60.01 M/F communication port uint16 - - -
60.02 M/F node address uint16 1…254 - -
60.03 M/F mode uint16 0…6 - -
60.05 M/F HW connection uint16 0…1 - -
60.07 M/F link control uint16 1…15 - -
60.08 M/F comm loss timeout uint16 0…65535 ms -
 354 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

60.09 M/F comm loss function uint16 0…3 - -
60.10 M/F ref1 type uint16 0…5 - -
60.11 M/F ref2 type uint16 0…5 - -
60.12 M/F act1 type uint16 0…5 - -
60.13 M/F act2 type uint16 0…5 - -
60.14 M/F follower selection uint32 0…16 - -
60.15 Force master uint32 - - 1=1
60.16 Force follower uint32 - - 1=1
60.17 Follower fault action uint16 0…2 - -
60.18 Follower enable uint16 0…6 - -
60.31 M/F wake up delay uint16 0.0 … 180.0 s 10 = 1 s
60.32 M/F comm supervision force uint16 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
61 D2D and DDCS transmit data
61.01 M/F data 1 selection uint32 - - -
61.02 M/F data 2 selection uint32 - - -
61.03 M/F data 3 selection uint32 - - -
61.25 M/F data 1 value uint16 0…65535 - -
61.26 M/F data 2 value uint16 0…65535 - -
61.27 M/F data 3 value uint16 0…65535 - -
62 D2D and DDCS receive data
62.01 M/F data 1 selection uint32 - - -
62.02 M/F data 2 selection uint32 - - -
62.03 M/F data 3 selection uint32 - - -
62.04 Follower node 2 data 1 sel uint32 - - -
62.05 Follower node 2 data 2 sel uint32 - - -
62.06 Follower node 2 data 3 sel uint32 - - -
62.07 Follower node 3 data 1 sel uint32 - - -
62.08 Follower node 3 data 2 sel uint32 - - -
62.09 Follower node 3 data 3 sel uint32 - - -
62.10 Follower node 4 data 1 sel uint32 - - -
62.11 Follower node 4 data 2 sel uint32 - - -
62.12 Follower node 4 data 3 sel uint32 - - -
62.25 MF data 1 value uint16 0…65535 - -
62.26 MF data 2 value uint16 0…65535 - -
62.27 MF data 3 value uint16 0…65535 - -
62.28 Follower node 2 data 1 value uint16 0…65535 - -
62.29 Follower node 2 data 2 value uint16 0…65535 - -
62.30 Follower node 2 data 3 value uint16 0…65535 - -
62.31 Follower node 3 data 1 value uint16 0…65535 - -
62.32 Follower node 3 data 2 value uint16 0…65535 - -
62.33 Follower node 3 data 3 value uint16 0…65535 - -
 Additional parameter data 355

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

62.34 Follower node 4 data 1 value uint16 0…65535 - -
62.35 Follower node 4 data 2 value uint16 0…65535 - -
62.36 Follower node 4 data 3 value uint16 0…65535 - -
70 Power module values phase A
70.01 DSP temperature A1 Real 0.0 … 141.0 °C 10 = 1 °C
70.02 IGBT1 temperature A1 Real 0.0 … 141.0 °C 10 = 1 °C
70.03 IGBT2 temperature A1 Real 0.0 … 141.0 °C 10 = 1 °C
70.04 IGBT3 temperature A1 Real 0.0 … 141.0 °C 10 = 1 °C
70.05 PM RX comm err count A1 Real 0… - 1 = 1 unit
70.06 Operating hours A1 Real 0.00 … h 100 = 1 h
70.07 1/3 DC link voltage A1 Real 0.0…1323.0 V 10 = 1 V
70.08 2/3 DC link voltage A1 Real 0.0…1323.0 V 10 = 1 V
70.09 5 volt power supply A1 Real 0.0…30.0 V 10 = 1 V
70.10 Charging relay temperature Real 0.0 … 141.0 °C 10 = 1 °C
A1
70.11 3/3 DC link voltage A1 Real 0.0…1323.0 V 10 = 1 V
70.12 Hub RX comm err count A1 Real 0… - 1 = 1 unit
70.15 Software version A1 Data 0.0.0.0 … 255.255.255.255 - 1=1
70.16 Hardware type A1 Data 0… - 1=1
70.17 Hardware rating A1 Data 0… - 1=1
70.18 PM SN part 1 A1 Data - - 1=1
70.19 PM SN part 2 A1 Data - - 1=1
70.20 PM SN part 3 A1 Data - - 1=1
70.21 DSP temperature A2 Real 0.0 … 141.0 °C 10 = 1 °C
… … … … …
70.180 PM SN part 3 A9 Data - - 1=1
71 Power module values phase B
71.01 DSP temperature B1 Real 0.0 … 141.0 °C 10 = 1 °C
… … … … …
71.180 PM SN part 3 B9 Data - - 1=1
72 Power module values phase C
72.01 PM CB humidity A1 Real 0.0 … 141.0 °C 10 = 1 °C
… … … … …
72.180 PM SN part 3 C9 Data - - 1=1
73 PEBB CB temperature and humidity measurements
73.01 PM CB humidity A1 Real 0.0 … 100.0 % 1=1%
73.02 PM CB temperature A1 Real -40.0...125.0 °C 1=1°C
73.06 PM CB humidity A2 Real 0.0 … 100.0 % 1=1%
73.07 PM CB temperature A2 Real -40.0...125.0 °C 1=1°C
… … … … …
73.131 PM CB humidity C9 Real 0.0 … 100.0 % 1=1%
 356 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

73.132 PM CB temperature C9 Real -40.0...125.0 °C 1=1°C
73.136 PM CB average humidity Real 0.0 … 100.0 % 1=1%
73.137 PM CB average temperature Real -40.0...125.0 °C 1=1°C
73.138 PM CB real maximum Real 0.0 … 100.0 % 1=1%
humidity
73.139 PM CB real maximum Real -40.0...125.0 °C 1=1°C
temperature
73.140 PM CB maximum humidity Real 0.0 … 100.0 % 1=1%
73.141 PM CB maximum Real -40.0...125.0 °C 1=1°C
temperature
77 PMSM start mode
77.01 Start mode List 0…1 - 1=1
77.02 Standstill mode List 0…4 - 1=1
78 PMSM TC Control
78.01 PM motor type List 0…1 - 1=1
81 System control and monitoring
81.01 System control and monitor PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
CW
81.02 System control and monitor PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
SW
81.03 System control and monitor PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
AW1
81.04 System control and monitor PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
AW2
81.05 System control and monitor PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
FW1
81.06 System control and monitor PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
FW2
81.07 IO Controller version Data 0.0.0.0 … 255.255.255.255 - 1=1
81.08 IO Controller version Data 0.0.0.0 … 255.255.255.255 - 1=1
required
81.09 IO Controller configuration List 0…1 - 1=1
refresh
81.10 Control supply monitoring List 0…4 - 1=1
81.11 Control backup supply List 0…2 - 1=1
monitoring
81.12 Lamp test selection List - - 1=1
81.13 Lamp test Grp+Indx Real 0 … 32767 - 1=1
81.14 Lamp test BitNum Real 0 … 15 - 1=1
81.15 Local control disable source List - - 1=1
81.16 Local control disable Real 0 … 32767 - 1=1
Grp+Indx
81.17 Local control disable BitNum Real 0 … 15 - 1=1
81.20 Space heater control List - - 1=1
 Additional parameter data 357

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

81.21 Converter space heater List 0…2 - 1=1
monitoring
81.22 Motor space heater List 0…2 - 1=1
monitoring
81.42 Ambient temperature detect Real 0…2 min 1 = 1min
delay time

82 Charging, MCB control

82.01 MCB/Charging CW PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
82.02 MCB/Charging SW PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
82.03 MCB/Charging AW1 PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
82.05 MCB/Charging FW1 PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
82.20 MCB Ext1 commands List - - 1=1
82.21 MCB Ext2 commands List - - 1=1
82.26 MCB control signal List - - 1=1
82.27 MCB control pulse time Real 1 … 10 s 1=1
82.28 MCB closing time limit Real 1 … 30 s 1=1
82.29 MCB opening time limit Real 1 … 10 s 1=1
82.30 MCB feedback signal List - - 1=1
82.40 MCB available monitoring List - - 1=1
82.41 MCB available status List - - 1=1
82.42 MCB available Grp+Indx Real 0 … 32767 - 1=1
82.43 MCB available BitNum Real 0 … 15 - 1=1
82.45 MCB ON inhibition List - - 1=1
monitoring
82.46 MCB ON inhibition status List - - 1=1
82.47 MCB ON inhibition Grp+Indx Real 0 … 32767 - 1=1
82.48 MCB ON inhibition BitNum Real 0 … 15 - 1=1
82.50 MCB external protection List - - 1=1
monitoring
82.51 MCB external protection List - - 1=1
status
82.52 MCB external protection Real 0 … 32767 - 1=1
Grp+Indx
82.53 MCB external protection Real 0 … 15 - 1=1
BitNum
82.93 Charging overload event sel List - - 1=1
83 Cooling system
83.01 Cooling system CW PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
83.02 Cooling system SW PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
83.03 Cooling system AW1 PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
83.04 Cooling system AW2 PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
83.05 Cooling system FW1 PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
83.06 Cooling system FW2 PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
 358 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

83.12 Fan control List - - 1=1
83.13 Fan OFF delay Real 0 … 30 min 1 = 1 min
83.14 Fan EOFF stop List - - 1=1
83.15 Fan alarm reset List - - 1=1
83.26 Redundant fan cycle time Real 2.0 … 720.0 h 1=1h
83.27 Redundant fan run time Real 1.0 … 720.0 h 1=1h
84 Motor temperature monitoring
84.01 Motor temperature monitor PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
enable selection
84.02 Motor winding phase U1 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
temperature
84.03 Motor winding phase U1 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
fault limit
84.04 Motor winding phase U1 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
warning limit
84.05 Motor winding phase V1 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
temperature
84.06 Motor winding phase V1 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
fault limit
84.07 Motor winding phase V1 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
warning limit
84.08 Motor winding phase W1 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
temperature
84.09 Motor winding phase W1 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
fault limit
84.10 Motor winding phase W1 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
warning limit
84.11 Motor winding phase U2 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
temperature
84.12 Motor winding phase U2 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
fault limit
84.13 Motor winding phase U2 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
warning limit
84.14 Motor winding phase V2 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
temperature
84.15 Motor winding phase V2 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
fault limit
84.16 Motor winding phase V2 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
warning limit
84.17 Motor winding phase W2 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
temperature
84.18 Motor winding phase W2 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
fault limit
84.19 Motor winding phase W2 Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
warning limit
84.20 Motor DE bearing Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
temperature
 Additional parameter data 359

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

84.21 Motor DE bearing Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
temperature fault limit
84.22 Motor DE bearing Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
temperature warning limit
84.23 Motor NDE bearing Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
temperature
84.24 Motor NDE bearing Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
temperature fault limit
84.25 Motor NDE bearing Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1 °C
temperature warning limit
85 SBU control and monitoring
85.01 SBU control and monitoring PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
CW
85.02 SBU control and monitoring PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
SW
85.03 SBU control and monitoring PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
AW
85.04 SBU control and monitoring PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
FW
85.05 Ratio of grid voltage Real 0.0 … 32767.0 - 1=1
transformer
85.06 Ratio of converter voltage Real 0.0 … 32767.0 - 1=1
transformer
85.07 Voltage RMS deviation limit Real 0.0 … 10.0 % 1 = 1%
85.08 Voltage RMS maximum Real 0.0 … 10.0 % 1 = 1%
deviation limit
85.09 Frequency deviation limit Real 0.0 … 10.0 % 1 = 1%
85.10 Angle deviation limit Real 0.0 … 20.0 % 1 = 1degree
85.11 SBU function enable List 0…1 - 1=1
85.12 Motor control mode List 0…1 - 1=1
85.13 SBU control source List 0…1 - 1=1
85.14 MB control signal List 0…1 - 1=1
85.15 MSS control signal List 0…1 - 1=1
85.16 MB MSS BypassContact Real 1…30 s 1 = 1s
control time limit
85.20 MB open control by direct List 0…1 - 1=1
online
85.21 Inductor bypass contactor List 0…1 - 1=1
control
85.22 Inductor bypass contactor List 0…1 - 1=1
control signal
85.30 Inductor temperature Real -100.0 … 500.0 °C 1 = 1°C
85.36 SBU enable CVMI List 0…1 - 1=1
85.37 Grid configuration List 0…1 - 1=1
87 AC500 I/O interface
87.10 AC500 CPU DI status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
 360 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

87.13 AC500 CPU DO status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
87.40 AC500 E P2 DI status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
87.43 AC500 E P2 DO status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
90 Feedback selection
90.01 Motor speed for control Real -32768.00 … 32767.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
90.41 Motor feedback selection List 0…2 - 1=1
90.42 Motor speed filter time Real 0…10000 ms 1 = 1 ms
95 HW configuration
95.88 Capacitor reforming test List - - -
95.89 Capacitor Reforming time Real 1Min ~ 120Min Min 1 = 1 Min
period
96 System
96.01 Language List - - 1=1
96.02 Pass code Data 0…99999999 - 1=1
96.03 Access levels active PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
96.06 Parameter restore List - - 1=1
96.07 Parameter save manually List 0…1 - 1=1
96.08 Control board boot Real 0…1 - 1=1
96.10 User set status List - - -
96.11 User set save/load List - - -
96.12 User set I/O mode in1 Binary - - -
src
96.13 User set I/O mode in2 Binary - - -
src
96.16 Unit selection PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
96.20 Time synchronization source List 0…9 - 1=1
96.23 M/F and D2D clock uint16 0…1 - 1=1
synchronization
96.24 Full days since 1st Jan 1980 Real 1…59999 - 1=1
96.25 Time in minutes within 24 h Real 0…1439 - 1=1
96.26 Time in ms within one Real 0…59999 - 1=1
minute
96.29 Time sync source status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
96.31 Drive ID number Real 0…32767 - 1=1
96.39 Power up event logging List 0…1 - 1=1
96.51 Clear fault and event logger uint16 0…65535 - 1=1
96.53 Actual checksum Real 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
96.54 Checksum action List 0…4 - 1=1
96.55 Checksum control word PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
96.56 Approved checksum 1 Real 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
96.57 Approved checksum 2 Real 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
96.58 Approved checksum 3 Real 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
 Additional parameter data 361

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

96.59 Approved checksum 4 Real 00000000h…FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
96.61 User data logger status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
word
96.63 User data logger trigger Binary - - -
src
96.64 User data logger start Binary - - -
src
96.70 License state List - - -
96.71 License key part 1 Real 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
96.72 License key part 2 Real 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
96.73 License key part 3 Real 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
96.74 License key part 4 Real 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
96.75 License key refresh List - - -
96.85 Factory data logger period uint16 0…1000 h 1=1
96.86 Factory data logger current Real 0.0…1000.0 % 1=1
%
96.87 Factory data logger manual Binary - - -
trigger src
96.88 Factory data logger auto Binary - - -
trigger src
(Parameters 96.100…96.102 only visible when enabled by parameter 96.02)
96.100 Change user pass code Data 10000000…99999999 - 1=1
96.101 Confirm user pass code Data 10000000…99999999 - 1=1
96.102 User lock functionality PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
96.201 Disable adaptive program List 0…1 - 1=1
97 Motor control
97.04 Voltage reserve Real -4…50 % 1 = 1%
97.06 Flux reference select Binary - - 1=1
src
97.07 User flux reference Real 0.00 … 200.00 % 100 = 1%
97.13 IR compensation Real 0.00 … 50.00 % 100 = 1%
97.51 SBU motor voltage RMS Real 0.125 …500.000 ms 1=1ms
filter time
98 User motor parameters
98.02 Rs user Real 0.0000…0.50000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u.
98.03 Rr user Real 0.0000…0.50000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u.
98.04 Lm user Real 0.0000…10.0000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u.
98.05 SigmaL user Real 0.0000…1.0000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u.
98.06 Ld user Real 0.00000 … 10.00000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u.
98.07 Lq user Real 0.00000 … 10.00000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u.
 362 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

98.08 PM flux user Real 0.00000 … 2.00000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u.
98.09 Rs user SI Real 0.0000…100.0000 Ω 100000 = 1 Ω
98.10 Rr user SI Real 0.0000…100.0000 Ω 100000 = 1 Ω
98.11 Lm user SI Real 0.00…100000.00 mH 1000 = 1 mH
98.12 SigmaL user SI Real 0.00…100000.00 mH 1000 = 1 mH
98.13 Ld user SI Real 0.00…100000.00 mH 1000 = 1 mH
98.14 Lq user SI Real 0.00…100000.00 mH 1000 = 1 mH
98.16 Lss user SI Real 0.00…100000.00 mH 1000 = 1 mH
99 Motor data
99.03 Motor type List 0…1 - 1=1
99.06 Motor nominal current Real 0.0 … 6400.0 A 10 = 1 A
99.07 Motor nominal voltage Real 0.0 … 20000.0 V 10 = 1 V
99.08 Motor nominal frequency Real 0.00 … 500.00 Hz 10 = 1 Hz
99.09 Motor nominal speed Real 0 … 30000 rpm 1 = 1 rpm
99.10 Motor nominal power Real 0.00 … 10000.00 kW or kW or hp 1 = 1 unit
0.00 … 10000.00 hp
99.11 Motor nominal cos? Real 0.00 … 1.00 - 100 = 1
99.12 Motor nominal torque Real 0.000… 4000000.000 N·m 1000 = 1 unit
99.13 ID run requested Real - - -
99.14 Last ID run performed Real - - -
99.15 Motor polepairs calculated Real 0 … 1000 - 1=1
99.16 Motor phase order Real 0…1 - 1=1
 Fault tracing 363

7
Fault tracing
What this chapter contains
The chapter lists the warning and fault messages including possible causes and
corrective actions. The causes of most warnings and faults can be identified
and corrected using the information in this chapter. If not, an ABB service
representative should be contacted.
Warnings and faults are listed below in separate tables. Each table is sorted by
warning/fault code.

Safety

WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to service the drive.

Read the Safety instructions on the first pages of the Hardware manual
before working on the drive.

Indications
 Warnings and faults
Warnings and faults indicate an abnormal drive status. The codes and names of
active warnings/faults are displayed on the control panel of the drive as well as
the Drive composer PC tool. Only the codes of warnings/faults are available
over fieldbus.
Warnings do not need to be reset; they stop showing when the cause of the
warning ceases. Warnings do not latch and the drive will continue to operate the
motor.
364 Fault tracing

Faults do latch inside the drive and cause the drive to trip, and the motor stops.
After the cause of a fault has been removed, the fault can be reset from a
selectable source (see parameter 31.11 Fault reset selection) such as the control
panel, Drive composer PC tool, the digital inputs of the drive, or fieldbus. After
the fault is reset, the drive can be restarted. Note that some faults require a
reboot of the control unit either by switching the power off and on, or using
parameter 96.08 Control board boot – this is mentioned in the fault listing
wherever appropriate.

 Pure events
In addition to warnings and faults, there are pure events that are only recorded
in the event log of the drive. The codes of these events are included in the
Warning messages table.

 Editable messages
For some warnings and faults, the message text can be edited and instructions
and contact information added. To edit these messages, choose Menu -
Settings - Edit texts on the control panel.

Warning/fault history and analysis

 Event log
The drive has two event logs. One log contains faults and fault resets; the other
contains warnings, pure events, and clearing entries. Each log contains the 64
most recent events with a time stamp and other information.
The logs can be accessed separately from the main Menu on the control panel.
The logs are displayed as a single list when viewed using the Drive composer PC
tool.
The logs can be cleared using parameter 96.51 Clear fault and event logger.

Auxiliary codes
Some events generate an auxiliary code that often helps in pinpointing the
problem. On the control panel, the auxiliary code is stored as part of the details
of the event; in the Drive composer PC tool, the auxiliary code is shown in the
event listing.

Factory data logger

The drive has a data logger that samples preselected drive values at 500-
microsecond intervals. Approximately 22000 samples recorded immediately
before and after the triggering event (such as a fault) are saved into the
memory unit of the drive. The fault data is accessible in the event log when
 Fault tracing 365

viewed in the Drive composer PC tool. (The fault data is not accessible through
the control panel.)
The values that are recorded in the factory data log are 01.07 Motor current,
01.10 Motor torque, 01.11 DC voltage, 01.24 Flux actual %, 01.40 Phase U2 motor
current, 01.41 Phase V2 motor current, 01.42 Phase W2 motor current, 01.43
Phase U2 motor voltage, 01.44 Phase V2 motor voltage, 01.45 Phase W2 motor
voltage, 01.46 Phase A average DC voltage, 01.47 Phase B average DC voltage,
01.48 Phase C average DC voltage, 01.49 Phase U1 grid current, 01.50 Phase V1
grid current, 01.51 Phase W1 grid current, 01.52 Phase A average secondary
voltage, 01.53 Phase B average secondary voltage, 01.54 Phase C average
secondary voltage, 24.01 Used speed reference, 30.01 Limit word 1 and 90.01
Motor speed for control. The selection of parameters cannot be changed by the
user.

 Other data loggers

User data logger
A custom data logger can be configured using the Drive composer PC tool. This
functionality enables the free selection of up to eight drive parameters to be
sampled at selectable intervals. The triggering conditions and the length of the
monitoring period can also be defined by the user within the limit of
approximately 8000 samples. The collected data is not automatically saved.

 Parameters that contain warning/fault information

The drive is able to store a list of the active faults actually causing the drive to
trip at the present time. The faults are displayed in parameter group 04
Warnings and faults (page 64). The parameter group also displays a list of faults
and warnings that have previously occurred.

 Warning messages
Note: The list also contains events that only appear in the Event log.
Code Warning Cause What to do
(hex)
64FF Fault reset Fault reset has been If the root cause for some of the active
demanded. faults is still present after the reset,
those faults will remain active. Root
cause for the faults should be
removed before reset is attempted.
A186 PM states mismatch Control hub has detected a Check POF wiring to PMs (or replace).
combination of power Check control hub daughter boards
modules' (PM) states that is (or replace).
not valid. Check PM SW version and update if
required.
Contact your local ABB representative.
366 Fault tracing

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
A190 Low frequency Low frequency operation It's better to stop the drive rather than
operation within 2Hz lasts more than running it with low frequency.
30s.
A187 Trafo offset current Transformer primary current Check current sensor.
out of range U1 has exceeded internal limit
Check CVMI2 measurement board.
with open MCB.
Check the event log for an auxiliary
code. The code indicates current p.u.
value * 100, when warning is activated.
For example, 0xA (Dec 10) means 0.10
* 30.41 Rated input current * sqrt(2) is
measured.
After warning is activated, trafo
current offset compensation stops.
1.49 Phase U1 grid current, 1.50 Phase
V1 grid current, 1.51 Phase W1 grid
current show measured current
without offset compensation.
A188 Trafo offset current Transformer primary current Check current sensor.
out of range V1 has exceeded internal limit Check CVMI2 measurement board.
with open MCB.
Check the event log for an auxiliary
code. The code indicates current p.u.
value * 100, when warning is activated.
For example, 0xA (Dec 10) means 0.10
* 30.41 Rated input current * sqrt(2) is
measured.
After warning is activated, trafo
current offset compensation stops.
1.49 Phase U1 grid current, 1.50 Phase
V1 grid current, 1.51 Phase W1 grid
current show measured current
without offset compensation.
A189 Motor offset current Measured motor phase Check current sensor.
out of range U2 currents are exceeding an
Check CVMI2 measurement board.
internal limit with
modulation stopped. Check the event log for an auxiliary
code. The code indicates current p.u.
value * 100, when warning is activated.
For example, 0xA (Dec 10) means 0.10
* 30.40 Rated output current * sqrt(2)
is measured.
After warning is activated, motor
current offset compensation stops.
1.40 Phase U2 motor current, 1.41
Phase V2 motor current, 1.42 Phase W2
motor current show measured current
without offset compensation.
 Fault tracing 367

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
A18A Motor offset current Measured motor phase Check current sensor.
out of range V2 currents are exceeding an
Check CVMI2 measurement board.
internal limit with
modulation stopped. Check the event log for an auxiliary
code. The code indicates current p.u.
value * 100, when warning is activated.
For example, 0xA (Dec 10) means 0.10
* 30.40 Rated output current * sqrt(2)
is measured.
After warning is activated, motor
current offset compensation stops.
1.40 Phase U2 motor current, 1.41
Phase V2 motor current, 1.42 Phase W2
motor current show measured current
without offset compensation.
A283 Motor overload Motor average current Check that the motor parameters in
alarm (absolute value) is high. group 99 Motor data correspond to
the motor rating plate.
Check for proper delta/star
connection of the motor.
Check overload settings for the motor
and settings for this alarm function
(contact your local ABB
representative).
A284 Drive Overload Alarm Current is high either on Check that the motor parameters in
transformer side or Invertor group 99 Motor data correspond to
side. Or motor current is the motor rating plate.
higher than user defined Check for proper delta/star
limit. (30.17) connection of the motor.
Check the auxiliary code for triggered
limit. 0b001 means user current
(30.17) is limiting current while 0b100
means limit on transformer side is
active and 0b010 means limit on
inverter side is working.
Check overload settings for the
transformer or inverter or motor
based on auxiliary code.
A290 LF current limit Low frequency current limit Check motor load and drive ratings.
effective is effective.
368 Fault tracing

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)

Current limitation curve method at low frequency

Long time running at low speed may lead to reduced expected lifetime of drive. By default,
when output frequency is running around low values (Frequency2=10Hz, Frequency1=7Hz,
Frequency0=2Hz), maximum current is limited (Current2=74%, Current1=58%), which can
affect the maximum torque output capability in the low frequency region.
This current limit function is only activated once a parameterable delay time is reached
(default 10 seconds).
A291 Motor pullout alarm The motor cannot produce Check and reduce actual load applied
any more torque. on motor
A2B1 Overcurrent Output current has exceeded Check motor load.
internal alarm limit. Check acceleration times in parameter
group 23 Speed reference ramp (rpm
operation mode) or 28 Frequency
reference chain (Hz operation mode).
Also check parameters 46.01 Speed
scaling and 46.02 Frequency scaling.
Check motor and motor cable
(including phasing and delta/star
connection).
Check there are no contactors opening
and closing in motor cable.
Check that the data in parameter
group 99 Motor data corresponds to
the motor rating plate.
Check that there are no power factor
correction capacitors or surge
absorbers in motor cable.
A2B3 Earth leakage Drive has detected load Check that there are no power factor
unbalance typically due to correction capacitors or surge
earth fault in motor or motor absorbers in motor cable.
cable. Check for an earth fault in motor or
motor cables by measuring the
insulation resistances of motor and
motor cable.
If no earth fault can be detected,
contact your local ABB representative.
 Fault tracing 369

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
A2B4 Short circuit Short-circuit in motor Check motor and motor cable for
cable(s) or motor. cabling errors.
Check that there are no power factor
correction capacitors or surge
absorbers in motor cable.
A3D0 Grid ridethrough Grid voltage is below the Check the transformer secondary
internal threshold so the voltage.
drive is operating in low
voltage ridethrough mode.
A480 Motor cable Calculated motor cable Check the dimensioning of the motor
overload(Editable temperature has exceeded cable in regard to required load.
message text) warning limit. Check the settings in parameter group
35 Motor thermal protection.
A490 Incorrect Sensor type mismatch Check the settings of parameters
temperature sensor 35.11 Temperature 1 source and 35.21
setup Temperature 2 source
Check the wiring of the sensor.
The auxiliary code (see the event log)
identifies the interface module. (0 =
Module 1, 1 = Module 2).
A491 External temperature Measured temperature 1 has Check the value of parameter 35.02
1 exceeded warning limit. Measured temperature 1.
(Editable message text) Check the cooling of the motor (or
other equipment whose temperature
is being monitored).
Check the setting of parameter 35.13
Temperature 1 warning limit.
A492 External temperature Measured temperature 2 has Check the value of parameter 35.03
2 exceeded warning limit. Measured temperature 2.
(Editable message Check the cooling of the motor (or
text) other equipment whose temperature
is being monitored).
Check the setting of parameter 35.23
Temperature 2 warning limit.
A4A0 Control board Control unit temperature is Check the auxiliary code. See actions
temperature excessive. for each code below.
1 Temperature above warning Check ambient conditions.
limit
2 Thermistor damaged Contact your local ABB representative
for control unit replacement.
A5EA Measurement circuit Problem with internal Contact your local ABB representative.
temperature temperature measurement For software version 2.00.0.3 and
of the drive. previous, download latest software
(version after v2.00.0.3)
A5ED Measurement circuit Measurement circuit Contact your local ABB representative.
ADC problem.
A5EE Measurement circuit Measurement circuit Contact your local ABB representative.
DFF problem.
A5F4 Control unit battery The battery of the control Replace control unit battery. Refer to
unit is low. the HW manual for instructions on
battery replacement.
This warning can be suppressed using
parameter 31.40.
370 Fault tracing

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
A684 SD card Error related to SD card used Check the auxiliary code. See actions
for all the codes below.
to store data on BCU
1 No SD card Insert a compatible, writable SD card
into the SD CARD slot of the BCU
2 SD card write-protected
3 SD card unreadable
A685 Power fail saving Power fail saving is Check the power supply of the control
unit. If power internally from the drive,
requested too frequently
check the supply voltage of the drive.
due to oscillating power
supply to the control unit.
Some of the requests may
have been discarded,
potentially causing data loss.
A686 Checksum mismatch The calculated parameter Check that all necessary approved
Programmable warning: checksum does not match (reference) checksums (96.56…96.59)
96.54 Checksum action any enabled reference are enabled in 96.55 Checksum control
checksum. word.
Check the parameter configuration.
Using 96.55 Checksum control word,
enable a checksum parameter and
copy the actual checksum into that
parameter.
A690 SD card write failed Error happened while writing Customer should change a new SD
card
data to SD card located in
BCON.
0x01 change directory fail
0x02 make directory fail
0x04 open file fail
0x10 read space fail
0x20 seek file current writing
position fail
0x40 remove file fail
0x80 remove directory fail
0x640008 Write BCON information fail
0xC80008 Write event logger fail
0x0Y0008 (YY=2…E) Write Data logger (2…14) fail
A692 Flash erase speed The flash memory (in the Pure event – Avoid forcing
exceeded memory unit) has been unnecessary parameter saves by
erased too frequently, parameter 96.07 or cyclic parameter
compromising the lifetime writes (such as user logger triggering
of the memory. through parameters).
Check the auxiliary code (format XYYY
YZZZ). “X” specifies the source of
event (1: generic flash erase
supervision). “ZZZ” specifies the flash
subsector number that generated the
event.
 Fault tracing 371

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
A6A4 Motor nominal value The motor parameters are Check the settings of the motor
set incorrectly. parameters in parameter group 99
Motor data.
The drive is not dimensioned
correctly. Check that the drive is sized correctly
for the motor.
A6A5 No motor data Parameters in group 99 have Check that all the required parameters
not been set. in parameter group 99 Motor data
have been set.
Note: It is normal for this warning to
appear during the start-up and
continue until the motor data is
entered.
A6A6 Supply voltage The supply voltage has not Set supply voltage parameter (contact
unselected been defined. your local ABB representative).
A6D1 FBA A parameter The drive does not have a Check PLC (overriding system)
conflict functionality requested by a programming.
PLC (overriding system), or Check settings of parameter groups
requested functionality has 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA) and 51 FBA
not been activated. A settings.
A6D2 FBA B parameter The drive does not have a Contact your local ABB representative.
conflict functionality requested by a WARNING! FBA B
PLC AC500, or requested communication is reserved for
functionality has not been drive internal communication
activated. and should not be changed by user.
A6E5 AI parametrization The current/voltage Check the event log for an auxiliary
hardware setting of an code. The code identifies the analog
analog input does not input whose settings are in conflict.
correspond to parameter Adjust either the hardware setting
settings. (dip switches on BCU) or parameter
12.15/12.25.
Note: Control board reboot (either by
cycling the power or through
parameter 96.08 Control board boot)
is required to validate any changes in
the hardware settings.
A6FA Trial mode active The drive is running in trial Contact ABB support line to get a valid
mode. After the trial mode license key.
has expired the drive will trip Enter a valid license key in parameters
immediately and license 96.71 License key part 1, 96.72 License
update shall not be possible. key part 2, 96.73 License key part 3,
96.74 License key part 4 and then set
the parameter 96.75 License key
refresh to "Refresh".
A6FB Trial mode expires The trial mode expires soon. Contact ABB support line to get a valid
soon After the trial mode has license key.
expired the drive will trip Enter a valid license key in parameters
immediately and license 96.71 License key part 1, 96.72 License
update shall not be possible. key part 2, 96.73 License key part 3,
96.74 License key part 4 and then set
the parameter 96.75 License key
refresh to "Refresh".
372 Fault tracing

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
A6FD Rating When the drive is Check the auxiliary code. The code
parametrization modulating, it is not possible identifies the parameter whose
failed to change some parameters. writing was not possible. The format
of the code is 0x0GGG 0III."GGG"
represents the parameter group in
decimal representation."III" represents
the parameter index in decimal
representation.
This warning indicates that the
entered license key has a different
setting in a very important parameter.
The parametrization is successful only
if the drive is not modulating. If you
are sure that the settings in the
license key are correct, you can apply
the changes by stopping the drive and
refreshing the license key. If you are
not sure if the settings in the license
key are correct contact your local ABB
representative and provide the
auxiliary code.
A6FE Rating not valid The entered license key Check the auxiliary code. The code
provides an invalid setting. identifies the parameter whose
setting was not valid. The format of
the code is 0x0GGG 0III."GGG"
represents the parameter group in
decimal representation."III" represents
the parameter index in decimal
representation.
Contact your local ABB representative
and provide the auxiliary code.
A6FF PIL PLL error PIL PLL error is out of limit. Monitor parameter 245.20.
Check HW configuration.
Check if grid is connected to converter
output.
Check if there is problem with CVMI
board.
A780 Motor stall Motor is operating in stall Check motor load and drive ratings.
Programmable warning: region because of e.g. Check fault function parameters
31.24 Stall function excessive load or insufficient 31.24…31.28.
motor power.
A781 Motor fan No feedback received from Check external fan (or other
Programmable warning: external fan. equipment controlled) by the logic.
35.106 DOL starter event Check settings of parameters
type 35.100…35.106.
A799 Ext I/O comm loss The I/O extension module Check the auxiliary code (format
Programmable warning: types specified by XXYY YYYY). “XX” specifies the
31.55 Ext I/O comm loss parameters do not match number of the I/O extension module
event the detected configuration. (01: parameter group 14 I/O extension
module 1, 02: 15 I/O extension module
2, 03: 16 I/O extension module 3).
“YY YYYY” indicates the problem (see
actions for each code below).
 Fault tracing 373

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
00 0001 Communication with module Check that the module is properly
failed. seated in its slot.
Check that the module and the slot
connector is not damaged.
Try installing the module into another
slot.
00 0002 Module not found. Check the type and location settings
of the modules (parameters
00 0003 Configuration of module
14.01/14.02, 15.01/15.02 or
failed.
16.01/16.02).
00 0004 Configuration of module Check that the module is properly
failed. seated in its slot.
Check that the module and the slot
connector is not damaged.
Try installing the module into another
slot.
A7AA Extension AI The hardware Check the event log for an auxiliary
parameterization current/voltage setting of an code (format XX00 00YY). “XX”
analog input (on an I/O specifies the number of the I/O
extension module) does not extension module (01: parameter
correspond to parameter group 14 I/O extension module 1, 02:
settings. 15 I/O extension module 2, 03: 16 I/O
extension module 3). “YY” specifies
the analog input on the module.
For example, in case of I/O extension
module 1, analog input AI1 (auxiliary
code 0100 0001), the hardware
current/voltage setting on the module
is shown by parameter 14.29. The
corresponding parameter setting is
14.30. Adjust either the hardware
setting on the module or the
parameter to solve the mismatch.
Note: Control board reboot (either by
cycling the power or through
parameter 96.08 Control board boot)
is required to validate any changes in
the hardware settings.
A7AB Extension I/O The I/O extension module Check the event log for an auxiliary
configuration failure types and locations specified code. The code indicates which I/O
by parameters do not match extension module is affected.
the detected configuration. Check the type and location settings
of the modules (parameters 14.01,
14.02, 15.01, 15.02, 16.01 and 16.02).
Check that the modules are properly
installed.
A7CB MF comm loss Master/follower Check the auxiliary code. The code
Programmable communication is lost. indicates which node address (defined
warning: by
60.09 M/F comm parameter 60.02 in each drive) on the
loss function master/follower link is affected.
Check settings of parameter group 60
DDCS communication.
Check cable connections. If necessary,
replace cables.
374 Fault tracing

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
AFE7 Follower A follower drive has tripped. Check the auxiliary code. Add 2 to the
code to find out the node address of
the
faulted drive.
Correct the fault in the follower drive.
A7C1 FBA A Cyclical communication Check status of fieldbus
communication between drive and fieldbus communication. See user
Programmable warning: adapter module A or documentation of fieldbus interface.
50.02 comm loss func between PLC (overriding Check settings of parameter groups
system) and fieldbus 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA), 51 FBA A
adapter module A is lost. settings, 52 FBA A data in and 53 FBA A
data out.
Check cable connections.
Check if communication master is able
to communicate.
A7C2 FBA B Cyclical communication Contact your local ABB representative.
communication between drive and fieldbus
Programmable warning: adapter module B or WARNING! FBA B
50.32 FBA B comm loss between AC500 PLC and communication is reserved for
func fieldbus adapter module B is drive internal communication
lost. and should not be changed by user.
A7EE Panel loss Control panel or Drive Check Drive composer PC tool or
Programmable warning: composer PC tool selected control panel connection.
49.05 Communication as active control location for Check control panel connector.
loss action drive has ceased Check BCON X13 connector pins.
communicating. Disconnect and reconnect the control
panel.
Replace control panel in mounting
platform.
A7F0 FSCA-01 firmware FSCA-01 firmware version is The warning is active if any of the
incompatible incompatible with the drive FSCA-01 modules (used for FBA A
software. and/or for FBA B communication)
Fieldbus communication will have incompatible FW version.
not be stable. Check parameter 54.33 FBA B appl SW
ver to determine if the FSCA-01
module used for internal
communication is having an
incompatible FW version. Refer to the
release notes for the list of compatible
FW versions.
If second FSCA-01 module is used for
FBA A communication, check
parameter 51.33 appl SW ver.
Replace all FSCA-01 modules that have
incompatible FW version with
compatible ones.
A800 High frequency High frequency injection Check if PM motor is non-salient type.
injection position starting position searching Check parameter settings in group 77.
search time-out is over the defined time limit.
Drive will stop after warning
displayed.
 Fault tracing 375

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
A801 High frequency High frequency injection Check if PM motor is non-salient type.
injection polarity starting polarity Check parameter settings in group 77.
search time-out identification is over the
defined time limit. Drive will
stop after warning
displayed.
A880 Motor bearing Warning generated by an on- Check the event log for an auxiliary
Programmable time timer or a value counter code. Check the source of the warning
warnings: corresponding to the code:
33.14 On-time 1 warn 0: 33.13 On-time 1 source
message
33.24 On-time 2 warn
1: 33.23 On-time 2 source
message 4: 33.53 Value counter 1 source
33.55 Value counter 1 5: 33.63 Value counter 2 source.
warn message
33.65 Value counter 2
warn message
A881 Output relay Warning generated by an Check the event log for an auxiliary
edge counter code. Check the source of the warning
A882 Motor starts
Programmable warnings: corresponding to the code:
A883 Power ups 33.35 Edge counter 1 warn 2: 33.33 Edge counter 1 source
message 3: 33.43 Edge counter 2 source.
A884 Main contactor 33.45 Edge counter 2 warn
message
A885 DC charge
A886 On-time 1 Warning generated by on- Check the source of the warning
(Editable message text) time timer 1 (parameter 33.13 On-time 1 source).
Programmable warning:
33.14 On-time 1 warn
message
A887 On-time 2 Warning generated by on- Check the source of the warning
(Editable message text) time timer 2 (parameter 33.23 On-time 2 source).
Programmable warning:
33.24 On-time 2 warn
message
A888 Edge counter 1 Warning generated by edge Check the source of the warning
(Editable message text) counter 1 (parameter 33.33 Edge counter 1
Programmable warning: source).
33.35 Edge counter 1
warn message
A889 Edge counter 2 Warning generated by edge Check the source of the warning
(Editable message text) counter 2 (parameter 33.43 Edge counter 2
Programmable warning: source).
33.45 Edge counter 2
warn message
A88A Value integrator 1 Warning generated by value Check the source of the warning
(Editable message text) counter 1 (parameter 33.53 Value counter 1
Programmable warning: source).
33.55 Value counter 1
warn message
A88B Value integrator 2 Warning generated by value Check the source of the warning
(Editable message text) counter 2 (parameter 33.63 Value counter 2
Programmable warning: source).
33.65 Value counter 2
warn message
376 Fault tracing

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
A88C Device clean Warning generated by an on- Check the event log for an auxiliary
time timer code. Check the source of the warning
A88D DC capacitor
Programmable warnings: corresponding to the code:
A88E Cabinet fan 33.14 On-time 1 warn message 0: 33.13 On-time 1 source
33.24 On-time 2 warn message 1: 33.23 On-time 2 source
A88F Cooling fan
A890 Additional cooling
fan
A8A0 AI supervision An analog signal is outside Check signal level at the analog input.
Programmable warning: the limits specified for the Check the wiring connected to the
12.03 AI supervision analog input. input.
function
Check the minimum and maximum
limits of the input in parameter group
12 Standard AI.
A8B0 Signal supervision 1 Warning generated by the Check the source of the warning
(Editable message text) signal supervision 1 function (parameter 32.07 Supervision 1 signal).
Programmable warning:
32.06 Supervision 1
action
A8B1 Signal supervision 2 Warning generated by the Check the source of the warning
(Editable message text) signal supervision 2 function (parameter 32.17 Supervision 2 signal).
Programmable warning:
32.16 Supervision 2
action
A8B2 Signal supervision 3 Warning generated by the Check the source of the warning
(Editable message text) signal supervision 3 function (parameter 32.27 Supervision 3 signal).
Programmable warning:
32.26 Supervision 3
action
A981 External warning 1 Fault in external device 1 Check the external device.
(Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.01
Programmable warning: External event 1 source.
31.01 External event 1
source
31.02 External event 1
type
A982 External warning 2 Fault in external device 2 Check the external device.
(Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.03
Programmable warning: External event 2 source.
31.03 External event 2
source
31.04 External event 2
type
A983 External warning 3 Fault in external device 3 Check the external device.
(Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.05
Programmable warning: External event 3 source.
31.05 External event 3
source
31.06 External event 3
type
A984 External warning 4 Fault in external device 4 Check the external device.
(Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.07
Programmable warning: External event 4 source.
31.07 External event 4
source
31.08 External event 4
type
 Fault tracing 377

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
A985 External warning 5 Fault in external device 5 Check the external device.
(Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.09
Programmable warning: External event 5 source.
31.09 External event 5
source
31.10 External event 5
type
A988 PM DC unbalance DC unbalance detected Wait until capacitor reforming process
Waring during capacitor reforming is over. There will be several
process. situations:
If sub capacitor voltage 1 the warning is gone during/after
difference (compared to the capacitor reforming process. If so,
average sub-capacitor nothing to do.
voltage) is bigger than 80V, 2 The warning is still existing even
this warning will report. after capacitor reforming process,
then the capacitor reforming process
is failed. If so re-do capacitor
reforming process? if failed again,
replace the power module which still
has problem.
AFAA Autoreset A fault is about to be Informative warning. See the settings
autoreset. in parameter group 31 Fault functions.
AFE1 Emergency stop Drive has received an Check that it is safe to continue
(off2) emergency stop (mode operation. Then return emergency
selection off2) command. stop push button to normal position.
Restart drive.
AFE2 Emergency stop (off1 Drive has received an
or off3) emergency stop (mode If the emergency stop was
selection off1 or off3) unintentional, check the source
command. selected by parameter 21.05
Emergency stop source.
AFEA Enable operation Enable operation signal not Check the setting of (and source
signal missing received selected by) parameter 20.19 Enable
(Editable message text) operation signal.
AFEB Run enable missing No run enable signal is Check setting of parameter 20.12 Run
received. enable 1 source. Switch signal on (e.g.
in the fieldbus Control Word) or check
wiring of selected source.
AFF6 Identification run Motor ID run is in progress. Informative warning.
selected
B5A2 Power up The drive has been powered Informative event.
programmable event: up.
96.39 Power up event
logging
B5A5 SW LP Version Pure event to indicate the Pure information event.
loading package software The aux code is a packaged version
version information. This information in hexadecimal format.
event will be triggered once Each sub version number are
after BCON reboot. represented by two hexadecimal
numbers. For example, Aux. code:
0x02490003.
02: 2
49: 73
00: 0
03: 3
It means software version: 2.73.0.3
378 Fault tracing

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
B670 Cap Reform Start Capacitor reforming started. Pure event – only appears in the event
log for diagnostic purpose.
B671 Cap Reform Done Capacitor reforming is done Pure event – only appears in the event
successfully. log for diagnostic purpose.
B672 Cap Reform Aborted Capacitor reforming test Pure event – only appears in the event
was aborted log for diagnostic purpose.
B673 Factory data logger Pure event to show that Check the event log for an auxiliary
triggered factory data logger is code. The code indicates the source
triggered. which triggers the logger:
0 - periodically (defined by parameter
96.85, 96.86)
1 - manually by parameter 96.87
2 - MB close command of synchronized
bypass function.
3 - RMS overtime of Synchronized
Bypass function.
4 - Phase synchronization overtime of
Synchronized Bypass function.
5 -Ride through becomes inactive.
6 -Low frequency current limitation
becomes active.
7 -Triggered by some parameter when
96.88 is configured as “Other…”.
B675 Routine test Finish routine test. Pure event – only appears in the event
complete log for diagnostic purpose.

B677 Site commission Finish site commission. Pure event – only appears in the event
complete log for diagnostic purpose.
B678 MCB closed MCB is closed. Pure event – only appears in the event
log for diagnostic purpose.
Aux code: MCB switching time
B679 MCB open MCB is open. Pure event – only appears in the event
log for diagnostic purpose.
Aux code: MCB switching time
B67A MCB open status MCB open status is changed. Pure event – Only display when 82.30
changed MCB feedback signal is set to Two
signals, it shows the MCB open status
is changed.
Aux code:
0000 – MCB open status just changes
from 1 to 0.
0001 - MCB open status just changes
from 0 to 1.
B686 Checksum mismatch The calculated parameter See A686 Checksum mismatch (page
Programmable event: checksum does not match 370).
96.54 Checksum action any enabled reference
checksum.
B690 Drive charged This event is shown each Pure event - only appears in the event
time the drive is charged. log for diagnostic purposes.
B691 Drive starting This event is shown each Pure event - only appears in the event
time the drive is starting. log for diagnostic purposes.
 Fault tracing 379

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
B692 Drive operating This event is shown after the Pure event - only appears in the event
starting procedure is log for diagnostic purposes.
completed and the drive is
able to follow the given
reference.
B693 Drive stopping This event is shown each Pure event - only appears in the event
time the drive is stopping. log for diagnostic purposes.
B694 Modulation stopped This event is shown each Pure event - only appears in the event
time the modulation is log for diagnostic purposes.
stopped after a normal stop.
Before modulation is
stopped the drive shall ramp
the motor speed to zero if
parameter 21.03 Stop mode
is set to "Ramp". If
parameter 21.03 Stop mode
is set to "Coast" the
modulation is stopped as
soon as the stop command
is given.
B695 Drive discharged This event is shown each Pure event - only appears in the event
time the drive is discharged. log for diagnostic purposes.
B696 MCB on command This event is shown each Pure event - only appears in the event
time the MCB close log for diagnostic purposes.
command given.
B697 MCB off command This event is shown each Pure event - only appears in the event
time the MCB open log for diagnostic purposes.
command given.
B698 SBU MSS opened This event is shown each Pure event - only appears in the event
time the MSS breaker is log for diagnostic purposes.
opened (state transition
from RdyRun to RdyOn).
B699 SBU MSS closed This event is shown each Pure event - only appears in the event
time the MSS breaker is log for diagnostic purposes.
closed based on its feedback Aux code shows the time cost during
signal. MSS closed.
B700 MSS on command This event is shown each Pure event - only appears in the event
time the MSS close log for diagnostic purposes.
command is sent by SW.
B701 MSS off command This event is shown each Pure event - only appears in the event
time the MSS open log for diagnostic purposes.
command is sent by SW.
B702 SBU MB closed This event is shown each Pure event - only appears in the event
time the MB breaker is log for diagnostic purposes
closed based on its feedback Aux code shows the time cost during
signal. MB closed.
B703 MB on command This event is shown each Pure event - only appears in the event
time the MB close command log for diagnostic purposes.
is sent by SW.
B704 Sync to mains This event is shown each Pure event - only appears in the event
command time sync to mains log for diagnostic purposes.
command is received.
380 Fault tracing

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
B6B3 Par changed Event shows a parameter Aux code shows which parameter has
has been changed been changed. The last two hex
numbers indicate the index number,
the middle two hex numbers indicate
the group number.
B6B4 Commissioning step Commissioning steps Commissioning steps are finished.
complete finished. Pure event – only appears in the event
log for diagnostic purpose.
Commissioning steps Aux.code (Hex):
0001 - SW downloading complete
0002 - License key refreshed
0003 - Motor parameters filled
0004 - App para setting complete
0005 - Common para setting complete
0006 - Ctrl supply monitoring testing
0007 - Door interlock monitoring
testing
0008 - MCB Testing
0009 - Overriding system
communication testing
000A - Master Follower Setting
000B - Remote Connectivity Setting
000C - MV is connected
000D - Capacitor reforming
000E - Charging Test/PEBB FW
loading
000F - Cooling/heating system
testing
0010 - Vector ctrl setting (CT/MF)
0011 - No load testing
0012 - Flying start testing
0013 - Overriding system ctrl testing
0014 - Load testing
0015 - Stop mode testing
0016 - Vector ctrl testing (ST)
0017 - Master Follower Testing
0018 - SBU Testing
 Fault tracing 381

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
B6B5 Motor overcurrent The instantaneous motor Check the event log for auxiliary code.
phase U2 while sync current has exceeded the The code indicates which threshold
internal fault limit while sync. has been exceeded.
1 - inverter overcurrent
2 - hardware overcurrent (95% of the
maximum measureble current)
3 - motor overcurrent
Check for motor cable phase to phase
short circuit.
Check for motor winding phase to
phase short circuit.
Check for delta/star connection of the
motor.
Check whether the motor parameters
in 99 Motor data are consistent with
the motor rating plate.
Ensure no power factor correction
capacitors or surge absorbers are in
the motor cable circuit.
If a start of rotating motor is
attempted, check whether
"Automatic" is selected in parameter
21.19 Scalar start mode or 21.01 Vector
Start mode according to the motor
control mode.
When motor is still magnetized,check
whether restart has not been
requested after a fault occurred (at
least 2 rotor time constants should be
allowed before another start attempt).
382 Fault tracing

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
B6B6 Motor overcurrent The instantaneous motor Check the event log for auxiliary code.
phase V2 while sync current has exceeded The code indicates which threshold
internal has been exceeded.
fault limit while sync. 1 - inverter overcurrent
2 - hardware overcurrent (95% of the
maximum measureble current)
3 - motor overcurrent
Check for motor cable phase to phase
short circuit.
Check for motor winding phase to
phase short circuit.
Check for delta/star connection of the
motor.
Check whether the motor parameters
in 99 Motor data are consistent with
the motor rating plate.
Ensure no power factor correction
capacitors or surge absorbers are in
the motor cable circuit.
If a start of rotating motor is
attempted, check whether
"Automatic" is selected in parameter
21.19 Scalar start mode or 21.01 Vector
Start mode according to the motor
control mode.
When motor is still magnetized,check
whether restart has not been
requested after a fault occurred (at
least 2 rotor time constants should be
allowed before another start attempt).
 Fault tracing 383

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
B6B7 Motor overcurrent The instantaneous motor Check the event log for auxiliary code.
phase W2 while sync current has exceeded The code indicates which threshold
internal fault limit while sync. has been exceeded.
1 - inverter overcurrent
2 - hardware overcurrent (95% of the
maximum measureble current)
3 - motor overcurrent
Check for motor cable phase to phase
short circuit.
Check for motor winding phase to
phase short circuit.
Check for delta/star connection of the
motor.
Check whether the motor parameters
in 99 Motor data are consistent with
the motor rating plate.
Ensure no power factor correction
capacitors or surge absorbers are in
the motor cable circuit.
If a start of rotating motor is
attempted, check whether
"Automatic" is selected in parameter
21.19 Scalar start mode or 21.01 Vector
Start mode according to the motor
control mode.
When motor is still magnetized,check
whether restart has not been
requested after a fault occurred (at
least 2 rotor time constants should be
allowed before another start attempt).
B6B8 PM DC link The measured DC link Check the event log for an auxiliary
overvoltage while voltage of a power module code. The code indicates which PM is
sync (PM) has exceeded the affected. Check the input primary
maximum level while sync. voltage of the drive.
Special situations: If the fault occurred on the site
1. One specific PM has matches any of the 3 special situations
higher DC voltage than listed in the left, and the software
others while motor is version is V3.11.0.2 or below, upgrade
ramping down. to the latest released version.
2. Grid voltage loss Check the deceleration time of rpm
(ridethrough) while motor operation mode in parameter group
is ramping down. 23 Speed reference ramp or check the
3. When SBU is applied, DC deceleration time of Hz operation
voltage increases after MB mode in group 28 Frequency reference
closed. chain.
Use coast-to-stop function (if
applicable). Replace the PM (if always
the same PM gives the fault).
B6B9 PM HB1 short circuit The desaturation detection Check the event log for an auxiliary
turn off while sync of the IGBTs in HB1 (half code. The code indicates which PM is
bridge 1) of a power module affected. Check converter output
(PM) has detected a short terminals for a phase to phase short
circuit while sync. circuit.
Replace the faulty PM.
384 Fault tracing

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
B6BA PM HB2 short circuit The desaturation detection Check the event log for an auxiliary
turn off while sync of the IGBTs in HB2 (half code. The code indicates which PM is
bridge 2) of a power module affected. Check converter output
(PM) has detected a short terminals for a phase to phase short
circuit while sync. circuit.
Replace the faulty PM.
B6BB PM HB1 or HB2 short The desaturation detection Check the event log for an auxiliary
circuit turn off while of the IGBTs in HB1 or HB2 of code. The code indicates which PM is
sync a power module (PM) has affected. Check converter output
detected a short circuit while terminals for a phase to phase short
sync. circuit.
Replace the faulty PM.
B6BC PM HB1 and HB2 The desaturation detection Check the event log for an auxiliary
short circuit turn off of the IGBTs in HB1 and HB2 code. The code indicates which PM is
while sync of a power module (PM) has affected. Check converter output
detected a short circuit while terminals for a phase to phase short
sync. circuit.
Replace the faulty PM.
B932 PM heatsink IGBT heatsink temperature Check the event log for the auxiliary
temperature high measured of a power module code. The code indicates which PM is
(PM) is high. affected.
Check the hestsink and remove the
dust inside. Check the dust filter mat
of the PM.
Note: Each bit of the auxiliary code
(binary) represents the warning status
of a PM. Each phase has at most 9
PMs, the first nine bits of the auxiliary
code,from right to left, represent the
warning status of the 9 PMs of phase
A.
For example, auxiliary code (binary)
0100 00000 0010 00000 0001 means
that PM1 of phase A, PM2 of phase B,
PM3 of phase C have higher
temperature.
C6A3 Notice This notice is shown when This is an notification and does not
changing language. This affect the operation of the drive. No
notice can be observed in SD action is needed.
card log.
C6B3 Notice This notice is shown when This is an notification and does not
parameter refreshment affect the operation of the drive. No
occurs. This notice can be action is needed.
observed in SD card log.
D204 Ambient temperatur The lowest temperature of Check the ambient temperature of the
e low the inverter unit is less than electrical roomand and increase it to
0 ˚ C. above 0 ˚C.
D23A MCB ON inhibited MCB closed inhibited on Stop sync to mains or change to multi
after Sync to mains single motor mode after motors mode.
sync to mains.
D240 Charging count There are too many DC link Two attempts in P82.92 s is allowed to
charging attempts.? prevent DC capacitor overheating.
 Fault tracing 385

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
E200 Control supply alarm Control supply alarm has Check the control supply failure alarm
been detected based on signal.
monitoring of the digital Check setting of the parameter 81.10
signal.
Control supply monitoring.
Alarm is activated according
to selection in 81.10 Control
supply monitoring.
E201 Trafo phase U1 The winding temperature of Check cooling of the transformer
temperature high
the indicated transformer (door air inlet filter pads, fan
primary phase is operation).
approaching temperature Check overload settings for
limit. transformer (contact your local ABB
representative).
E202 Trafo phase V1 The winding temperature of Check cooling of the transformer
temperature high
the indicated transformer (door air inlet filter pads, fan
primary phase is operation).
approaching temperature Check overload settings for
limit. transformer (contact your local ABB
representative).
E203 Trafo phase W1 The winding temperature of Check cooling of the transformer
temperature high
the indicated transformer (door air inlet filter pads, fan
primary phase is operation).
approaching temperature Check overload settings for
limit. transformer (contact your local ABB
representative).
E204 Ambient The air inlet temperature of Check and improve the cooling of the
temperature high the inverter unit is electric room where converter is
approaching the maximum placed.
converter ambient
temperature.

E205 INU air pressure high The air pressure drop across Check PM heatsinks for dust pick up
the inverter unit is and clean if required.
approaching the limit value. Check pressure drop sensor on control
hub and replace control hub if
required.
E206 Redundant fan Redundant fan group is After fixing the root cause of the
running
active. cooling fan failure, reset with
parameter 83.15 Fan alarm reset.
E207 AC500 AC500 has detected Check Modbus cable.
communication error communication errors Check FSCA-01 module.
alarm between BCU and AC500
communication link.
(Once ModMaster_Read and
ModeMaster_Write module
has errors in IO controller)
386 Fault tracing

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
E208 AC500 The watchdog supervision of Check Modbus cable.
communication the communication link Check FSCA-01 module.
alarm between BCU and AC500 has Check setting of parameter groups 54
detected a communication FBA B settings, 55 FBA B data in and
failure. Alarm is activated 56 FBA B data out (changes allowed
according to selection in only by ABB authorized personnel).
parameter 50.32 FBA B Note: Make sure that up to maximum
comm loss func. of two fieldbus extension modules are
used on the BCU.
E209 MCB not available MCB available signal is Check MCB available signal.
missing. Check setting of parameters:
82.40 MCB available monitoring,
82.42 MCB available Grp+Indx,
82.43 MCB available BitNum.
E20A MCB external MCB external protection Check MCB external protection signal.
protection active Check setting of parameters:
82.50 MCB external protection
monitoring,
82.52 MCB external protection
Grp+Indx,
82.53 MCB external protection
BitNum.
E20B MCB ON inhibited MCB ON inhibition active. Check MCB ON inhibition signal.
Check setting of parameters:
82.45 MCB ON inhibition monitoring,
82.47 MCB ON inhibition Grp+Indx,
82.48 MCB ON inhibition BitNum.
E20C Ambient The air inlet temperature of Check air inlet temperature sensor
temperature sensor the inverter unit has wiring of the inverter unit.
failure exceeded internal warning
level.
E20D TRU air filter dirty Transformer unit air filter Check air inlet filter pads on the
has been detected dirty. transformer unit cabinet.
E20E INU cooling fan 1 Temperature relay Check wiring of fan 1 temperature
warning
integrated in INU cooling fan contacts (open circuit, loose
1 has opened. A redundant terminals). Check if fan is mechanically
fan group is activated. blocked or makes excessive noise
(bearing problem).
E20F INU cooling fan 2 Temperature relay Check wiring of fan 2 temperature
warning
integrated in INU cooling fan contacts (open circuit, loose
2 has opened. A redundant terminals). Check if fan is mechanically
fan group is activated. blocked or makes excessive noise
(bearing problem).
E210 INU cooling fan 3 Temperature relay Check wiring of fan 3 temperature
warning
integrated in INU cooling fan contacts (open circuit, loose
3 has opened. A redundant terminals). Check if fan is mechanically
fan group is activated. blocked or makes excessive noise
(bearing problem).
 Fault tracing 387

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
E211 INU cooling fan 4 Temperature relay Check wiring of fan 4 temperature
warning
integrated in INU cooling fan contacts (open circuit, loose
4 has opened. A redundant terminals). Check if fan is mechanically
fan group is activated. blocked or makes excessive noise
(bearing problem).
E212 INU air pressure low The air pressure drop across Check or replace inverter unit air inlet
inverter unit is approaching filter pads.
lower limit value. Check pressure drop sensor and
measuring tube on control hub and
replace control hub or tube if required.
E214 TRU cooling fan 1 Temperature relay Check wiring of fan 1 temperature
warning
integrated in TRU cooling fan contacts (open circuit, loose
1 has opened. A redundant terminals).
fan group is activated. Check if fan is mechanically blocked or
makes excessive noise (bearing
problem).
E215 TRU cooling fan 2 Temperature relay Check wiring of fan 2 temperature
warning
integrated in TRU cooling fan contacts (open circuit, loose
2 has opened. A redundant terminals).
fan group is activated. Check if fan is mechanically blocked or
makes excessive noise (bearing
problem).
E216 TRU cooling fan 3 Temperature relay Check wiring of fan 3 temperature
warning
integrated in TRU cooling fan contacts (open circuit, loose
3 has opened. A redundant terminals).
fan group is activated. Check if fan is mechanically blocked or
makes excessive noise (bearing
problem).
E217 DC link not DC link voltage is still high Check the MCB. It might happen that
discharged
although the MCB open one or more MCB contacts are stuck in
command was given 15 closed position.
minutes ago. Or when BCON
reboot, DC link voltage is
high.
E218 INU door not closed During charging of the drive, Lock the inverter unit door.
the inverter unit door lock Check internal wiring of the door lock
has reported that the door is signals (open circuit, loose terminals).
not locked. Check if fan is mechanically blocked or
makes excessive noise (bearing
problem).
388 Fault tracing

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
E219 IO Controller version IO Controller SW version Upgrade IO Controller SW (Contact
incompatible (shown in parameter 81.07 IO your local ABB representative).
Controller version) is lower
than the expected value
(shown in parameter 81.08
IO Controller version
required).
E21B TRU cooling fan 4 Temperature relay Check wiring of fan 4 temperature
warning
integrated in TRU cooling fan contacts (open circuit, loose
4 has opened. A redundant terminals).
fan group is activated. Check if fan is mechanically blocked or
makes excessive noise (bearing
problem).
E21D Cooling fan test run Cooling fans are operated in The fan test mode is controlled by
the test mode independent parameter 83.12 Fan control.
of drive state. As soon as this parameter is set to
"Auto run" the test run is ended and
the alarm is removed.
E21E Control backup Control backup supply alarm Check the control backup supply alarm
supply alarm has been detected based on signal.
monitoring of the digital Check setting of the parameter 81.11
signal.
Control backup supply monitoring.
E21F Motor phase U1 The winding temperature of Check cooling of the motor.
temperature high the indicated motor phase is Check warning limit setting for the
approaching the motor temperature84.04 Motor
temperature limit. winding phase U1 warning limit.

E220 Motor phase V1 The winding temperature of Check cooling of the motor.
temperature high the indicated motor phase is Check warning limit setting for the
approaching the motor temperature84.07 Motor
temperature limit. winding phase V1 warning limit.

E221 Motor phase W1 The winding temperature of Check cooling of the motor.
temperature high the indicated motor phase is Check warning limit setting for the
approaching the motor temperature84.10 Motor
temperature limit. winding phase W1 warning limit.

E222 Motor phase U2 The winding temperature of Check cooling of the motor.
temperature high the indicated motor phase is Check warning limit setting for the
approaching the motor temperature84.13 Motor
temperature limit. winding phase U2 warning limit.

E223 Motor phase V2 The winding temperature of Check cooling of the motor.
temperature high the indicated motor phase is Check warning limit setting for the
approaching the motor temperature84.16 Motor
temperature limit. winding phase V2 warning limit.

E224 Motor phase W2 The winding temperature of Check cooling of the motor.
temperature high the indicated motor phase is Check warning limit setting for the
approaching the motor temperature84.19 Motor
temperature limit. winding phase W2 warning limit.
 Fault tracing 389

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
E225 Motor DE bearing The DE bearing temperature Check cooling of the motor.
temperature high of the motor is approaching Check warning limit setting for the
the temperature limit. motor temperature84.22 Motor DE
bearing temperature warning limit.

E226 Motor NDE bearing The NDE bearing Check cooling of the motor.
temperature high temperature of the motor is Check warning limit setting for the
approaching the motor temperature84.25 Motor NDE
temperature limit. bearing temperature warning limit.

E227 Converter space Converter space heater has Check if the space heater short circuit
heater overload been detected based on or overload.
warning monitoring of the digital Check setting of the parameter 81.21
signal. Converter space heater monitoring.

E228 Motor space heater Motor space heater has been Check if the space heater short circuit
overload warning detected based on or overload.
monitoring of the digital Check setting of the parameter 81.22
signal. Motor space heater monitoring.

E229 Inductor Inductor temperature is Check cooling of the inductor.

temperature high approaching the
temperature limit.
E230 Inductor Inductor temperature rising Check cooling of the inductor.
temperature rising relative to ambient
high temperature is approaching
the temperature rising limit.
E231 Incorrect operation Customer gives Sync to Correct operation command.
mains and Sync to VSD
command together.
E232 Inductor bypassed Synchronize command is Stop the drive and open the inductor
inhibited by inductor bypass contactor.
bypassed.
E233 Sync to mains not Cannot exit Sync to mains Stop the drive or wait unitl
finished mode if it is not finished synchronize to mains is finished then
when drive is running. exit Sync to mains mode.
E234 MB not closed Sync to VSD mode command MB has already opened and motor can
is inhibited by MB open be controlled on VSD mode directly.
status.
E235 Sync to VSD not Sync to VSD functionality Contact your local ABB represenative
support isn’t supported currently. and pay attention to ABB latest
released version.
390 Fault tracing

Code Warning Cause What to do

(hex)
E237 Phase angle sync 1 minute after Check wiring of the RSYC-01 board
overtime synchronization is started meets the specification.
(drive started modulation Check the RSYC-01 board. Monitor
and sync to mains command signal 12.21 AI2 actual value using Drive
is received), grid and motor composer. Par12.21 should try to
voltage phase angle are still approach 5V in normal synchronizing
out of expected limit. process. If it keeps at a constant
voltage, the RSYC-01 board is probably
broken. Another board broken
situation is that the voltage (angle and
frequency) adjusting works. Par12.21
AI2 actual value can stay at about 5V
stably, but BCON DI6 (signal 10.01
bit5) is always low (0).
Check acceleration time and
deceleration time settings, these two
values should not be set to very long.
For CVMI2B solution (if setting P85.36
is Yes), check (monitor by Drive
Composer) if motor speed, current,
torque are oscillating, if yes, consider
to change acceleration / deceleration
time (for scalar control) or 25.02 speed
proportional gain (for vector control)
to stabilize motor speed. Contact ABB
support if problem cannot be solved
E238 RMS sync overtime 1 minute after Check actual voltage of grid and
synchronization is started motor voltage via Par1.170 SBU Grid
(drive started modulation voltage and Par1.171 SBU motor
and sync to mains command voltage. If the voltage is abnormal,
is received), grid and motor check PT, voltage RMS transducer
voltage RMS deviation is still board and wiring.
out of expected limit. Change parameter 85.8 to higher
value.
5018 PM HB1 IGBT Desat The desaturation detection Pure event - Check the event log for an
of the IGBTs in HB1 (half auxiliary code. The code indicates
bridge 1) of a power module which PM is affected.
(PM) has detected a short
circuit.
5019 PM HB2 IGBT Desat The desaturation detection Pure event - Check the event log for an
of the IGBTs in HB2 (half auxiliary code. The code indicates
bridge 2) of a power module which PM is affected.
(PM) has detected a short
circuit.
501A PM HB1 or HB2 IGBT The desaturation detection Pure event - Check the event log for an
Desat of the IGBTs in HB1 (half auxiliary code. The code indicates
bridge 1) or HB2 (half bridge which PM is affected.
2) of a power module (PM)
has detected a short circuit.
501B PM HB1 and HB2 The desaturation detection Pure event - Check the event log for an
IGBT Desat of the IGBTs in HB1 (half auxiliary code. The code indicates
bridge 1) and HB2 (half which PM is affected.
bridge 2) of a power module
(PM) has detected a short
circuit.
 Fault tracing 391

 Fault messages
Code Fault Cause What to do
(hex)
1010 Power module fault A general PM fault has Check the more detailed fault
tripped the drive. A more message with the auxiliary code
detailed fault message with followed to this fault message. The
indication of which PM has a code indicates which PM is affected.
fault is followed to this
message.
1011 Control hub fault Control hub detects a power Check the control power supply. The
fail or a pressure sensor fault may happen in case control
error. power is lost.
Check the FO connection between
BCON and control hub.
If no problem is identified with the
power supply and connection to BCON
replace the control hub.
Auxiliary code bits meaning (more
than one bit can be 1 at same time):
Bit0 =1 (0x1): Multilink frame error
(from Control hub to BCON)
Bit8 =1 (0x100): Multilink watchdog
error (from Control hub to BCON)
Bit16 =1 (0x10000): Control hub power
fail
Bit17 =1 (0x20000): Multilink frame
error or watchdog error (from BCON
to Control hub)
1012 PM states mismatch Control hub has detected a Check POF wiring to PMs (or replace).
combination of PMs' states Check control hub daughter boards
that is not valid. (or replace).
Check PM SW version and update if
required.
Contact your local ABB representative.
2110 Trafo overcurrent The transformer primary Check the event log for an auxiliary
current has exceeded code. The code indicates the threshold
internal fault limit. which has been exceeded:
1 - Hardware overcurrent (95% of
maximum measurable current)
2 - Transformer overcurrent

Check the primary cabling.

Check the transformer.
Contact your local ABB representative.
2113 Trafo no-load Transformer primary current There is a short circuit on the
overcurrent has exceeded internal fault secondary side of the transformer =>
limit while converter is not check transformer secondaries, wiring
modulating and the inrush and PM input main power circuit.
current has declined after
MCB has been closed. Transformer inrush current has not yet
declined during the blanking time =>
fine tune the inrush current blanking
time (Contact your local ABB
representative).
2118 Unintended MCB MCB close command is not Check if MCB close command come
closed given by drive from other sources, instead of drive.
392 Fault tracing

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
211B Grid current The difference between Check the event log for an auxiliary
asymmetry measured transformer code.
primary currents has The code indicates which value has
exceeded internal fault limit. exceed the threshold:
1 - Difference of phase A and B current
RMS values
2 - Difference of phase B and C current
RMS values
3 - Difference of phase C and A current
RMS values
Check for grid voltage asymmetry.
Check the fault limit settings (Contact
your local ABB representative).
Check LEM connection.?
Check?trafo?primary side terminals
and cabling for weak contact or open
circuit.?
211C Grid phase loss The instantaneous grid Check LEM connection.
current is less than limit Check trafo primary side terminals
during charging. and cabling for weak contact or open
circuit.
Check the event log for an auxiliary
code. The code indicates which phase
has problem.
1 - Phase U1
2 - Phase V1
3 - Phase W1
211D Grid power Grid power is not avaliable Check the power grid supply.
unavailable when MCB is closed for
charging.
211E Grid voltage and There is a mismatch between Check the grid voltage is matching
motor voltage grid voltage (RMS value) and with the motor nominal voltage or not.
mismatch grid nominal voltage. Check if HVRB voltage measurement
terminal (6kV/10kV) connection is
correct.
2281 Calibration Measured offset of output Try performing the current calibration
phase current measurement again (Contact your local ABB
or difference between representative).
output phase U2 and W2
current measurement is too
big (the values are updated
during current calibration).
 Fault tracing 393

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
2310 Overcurrent Output current has exceeded Check motor load.
internal fault limit. Check acceleration times in parameter
group 23 Speed reference ramp for
rpm operation mode or in group 28
Frequency reference chain for Hz
operation mode.
Check motor and motor cable
(including phasing and delta/star
connection).
Check that the start-up data in
parameter group 99 Motor data
corresponds to the motor rating plate.
Check that there are no power factor
correction capacitors or surge
absorbers in motor cable.

2330 Earth leakage Drive has detected load Check that there are no power factor
unbalance typically due to correction capacitors or surge
earth fault in motor or motor absorbers in motor cable.
cable. Check for an earth fault in motor or
motor cables by measuring the
insulation resistances of motor and
motor cable.
If no earth fault can be detected,
contact your local ABB representative.
2340 Short circuit Short-circuit in motor Check motor and motor cable.
cable(s) or motor. Check that there are no power factor
correction capacitors or surge
absorbers in motor cable.
394 Fault tracing

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
2350 Motor overcurrent The instantaneous motor Check the event log for auxiliary code.
phase U2 current has exceeded The code indicates which threshold
internal fault limit. has been exceeded.
1 - inverter overcurrent
2 - hardware overcurrent (95% of the
maximum measureble current)
3 - motor overcurrent
Check for motor cable phase to phase
short circuit.
Check for motor winding phase to
phase short circuit.
Check for delta/star connection of the
motor.
Check whether the motor parameters
in 99 Motor data are consistent with
the motor rating plate.
Ensure no power factor correction
capacitors or surge absorbers are in
the motor cable circuit.
If a start of rotating motor is
attempted, check whether
"Automatic" is selected in parameter
21.19 Scalar start mode or 21.01 Vector
Start mode according to the motor
control mode.
When motor is still magnetized,check
whether restart has not been
requested after a fault occurred (at
least 2 rotor time constants should be
allowed before another start attempt).
 Fault tracing 395

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
2351 Motor overcurrent The instantaneous motor Check the event log for auxiliary code.
phase V2 current has exceeded The code indicates which threshold
internal fault limit. has been exceeded.
1 - inverter overcurrent
2 - hardware overcurrent (95% of the
maximum measureble current)
3 - motor overcurrent
Check for motor cable phase to phase
short circuit.
Check for motor winding phase to
phase short circuit.
Check for delta/star connection of the
motor.
Check whether the motor parameters
in 99 Motor data are consistent with
the motor rating plate.
Ensure no power factor correction
capacitors or surge absorbers are in
the motor cable circuit.
If a start of rotating motor is
attempted, check whether
"Automatic" is selected in parameter
21.19 Scalar start mode or 21.01 Vector
Start mode according to the motor
control mode.
When motor is still magnetized,check
whether restart has not been
requested after a fault occurred (at
least 2 rotor time constants should be
allowed before another start attempt).
396 Fault tracing

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
2352 Motor overcurrent The instantaneous motor Check the event log for auxiliary code.
phase W2 current has exceeded The code indicates which threshold
internal fault limit. has been exceeded.
1 - inverter overcurrent
2 - hardware overcurrent (95% of the
maximum measureble current)
3 - motor overcurrent
Check for motor cable phase to phase
short circuit.
Check for motor winding phase to
phase short circuit.
Check for delta/star connection of the
motor.
Check whether the motor parameters
in 99 Motor data are consistent with
the motor rating plate.
Ensure no power factor correction
capacitors or surge absorbers are in
the motor cable circuit.
If a start of rotating motor is
attempted, check whether
"Automatic" is selected in parameter
21.19 Scalar start mode or 21.01 Vector
Start mode according to the motor
control mode.
When motor is still magnetized,check
whether restart has not been
requested after a fault occurred (at
least 2 rotor time constants should be
allowed before another start attempt).
2355 Motor phase U2 lost The converter is operated at Check motor terminals and cabling for
greater than 5% rated speed weak contact or open circuit.
and one motor phase current Check if MCB is opened unexpectedly
undershoots the internal while drive is operating.
fault limit.
MCB open during drive
operating may trigger this
fault.
2356 Motor phase V2 lost The converter is operated at Check motor terminals and cabling for
greater than 5% rated speed weak contact or open circuit.
and one motor phase current Check if MCB is opened unexpectedly
undershoots the internal while drive is operating.
fault limit.
MCB open during drive
operating may trigger this
fault.
2357 Motor phase W2 lost The converter is operated at Check motor terminals and cabling for
greater than 5% rated speed weak contact or open circuit.
and one motor phase current Check if MCB is opened unexpectedly
undershoots the internal while drive is operating.
fault limit.
MCB open during drive
operating may trigger this
fault.
 Fault tracing 397

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
323A PM charging timeout PM charging time was longer Check the event log for an auxiliary
fault than 2 seconds code.
The code indicates which PM is
affected.
Replace the faulty PM.
3230 PM DC link The measured DC link Check the event log for an auxiliary
overvoltage voltage of a PM has code. The code indicates which PM is
exceeded the maximum affected.
level. Check converter primary voltage. If the
Special situations: fault triggered on site mathces any of
a) One specific power the situations listed in the left and the
module has higher DC software version is V3.11.0.2 or below,
voltage than others while upgrade to the latest released version.
motor is ramping down. Check the deceleration times in
b) Grid voltage loss parameter group 23 Speed reference
(ridethrough) while motor is ramp for rpm operation mode or in
ramping down. group 28 Frequency reference chain
c) When SBU is applied, DC for Hz operation mode.
voltage increases after MB Use coast-to-stop function (if
closed. applicable).
Replace the PM (if always the same PM
gives the fault).
3231 PM DC link The measured DC link Check the event log for an auxiliary
undervoltage voltage of a PM has code. The code indicates which PM is
undershot the minimum affected.
level. Contact your local ABB representative.
3233 PM +5V power supply The +5V power supply of a Check the event log for an auxiliary
fault PM has failed. code. The code indicates which PM is
affected.
Replace the faulty PM.
3234 PM +5V power supply The measured +5V power Check the event log for an auxiliary
regulation fault supply voltage of a PM is out code. The code indicates which PM is
of tolerance. affected.
Replace the faulty PM.
3236 PM DC link The series connected Check the event log for an auxiliary
capacitors not capacitors in the DC link of a code. The code indicates which PM is
balanced PM are heavily unbalanced. affected.
Replace the faulty PM.
3237 PM input voltage The input voltage Check the event log for an auxiliary
deviation measurement of a PM has a code. The code indicates which PM is
large deviation compared to affected.
the average input voltages of Check PM input fuses.
all PMs. Replace the faulty PM.
Check transformer secondary voltage.
3238 PM input overvoltage The measured input voltage Check the event log for an auxiliary
of a PM has exceeded the code. The code indicates which PM is
maximum level. affected.
Check converter primary voltage.
Reduce transformer primary tapping
one step.
Replace the PM (if always the same PM
gives the fault).
398 Fault tracing

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
3239 PM diode open PM rectifier's diode open Check the event log for an auxiliary
circuit circuit is detected. code. The code indicates which PM is
affected.
Replace the faulty PM.
3280 Standby timeout Drive start is requested but If parameters 20.02 Ext1 start trigger
the DC link voltage is too type and/or 20.07 Ext2 start trigger
low. type.
are set to “Level” this fault might
come immediately after closing the
MCB. Use “Edge” trigger type instead.
If the drive is controlled over fieldbus
check the corresponding settings for
fieldbus control.
3330 Motor voltage sense The measured motor phase Check voltage divider resistance value.
fault phase U2 to ground voltage has Check CVMI2 board and wiring to it.
exceeded internal fault level.
3331 Motor voltage sense The measured motor phase Check voltage divider resistance value.
fault phase V2 to ground voltage has Check CVMI2 board and wiring to it.
exceeded internal fault level.
3332 Motor voltage sense The measured motor phase Check voltage divider resistance value.
fault phase W2 to ground voltage has Check CVMI2 board and wiring to it.
exceeded internal fault level.
3333 Ground fault The common mode motor Check for drive internal ground faults
voltage of the drive has (secondary cabling, PMs, transformer,
exceeded internal fault limit. terminal unit).
Check for drive external ground faults
(motor cable, motor windings).
Check the HVD board.
3381 Output phase loss Motor circuit fault due to Connect motor cable.
missing motor connection
(all three phases are not
connected).
4100 Ambient Ambient temperature is too Check proper cooling of the control
temperature high. unit cabinet.
4110 Control board Control board temperature Check proper cooling of the control
temperature is too high unit cabinet.
4220 PM heatsink Measured IGBT heatsink Check the event log for an auxiliary
overtemperature temperature of a PM has code. The code indicates which PM is
exceeded the maximum affected.
level. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check PM to air channel gasket. Check
the door air inlet filter pads.
4221 PM HCB Measured charging relay Check the event log for an auxiliary
overtemperature temperature on Heavy code. The code indicates which PM is
Copper Board (HCB) of a PM affected.
has exceeded the maximum Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
level. Check PM to air channel gasket.
Check the door air inlet filter pads.
 Fault tracing 399

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
4981 External temperature Measured temperature 1 has Check the value of parameter 35.02
1 exceeded fault limit. Measured temperature 1.
(Editable message text) Check the cooling of the motor (or
other equipment whose temperature
is being measured).
Check the value of parameter 35.12
Temperature 1 fault limit.
4982 External temperature Measured temperature 2 has Check the value of parameter 35.03
2 exceeded fault limit. Measured temperature 2.
(Editable message text) Check the cooling of the motor (or
other equipment whose temperature
is being measured).
Check the value of parameter 35.22
Temperature 2 fault limit.
5001 Control board power The power supply of the Check the control power supply.
fail control board was below the
internal fault limit.This fault
is also shown, if the control
board is intentionally
powered off.
5002 CVMI2 power fail The power supply of the Check if CVMI power supply is normal.
CVMI2 is below the power fail (Only valid for SYS0) Refresh license
voltage level. key to trigger CT type identification
CT type identification (only process again: Select ‘Refresh’ in 96.75
for SYS0) failed due to CVMI2 License key refresh and press Enter,
power supply failure, then the parameter should change
resulting in 95.37 CVMI2 into ‘Done’ automatically. Fault should
power fail voltage being set be able to be reset now.
to 40V. Fault can be reset Replace a new CVMI2 board.
only after CT type
identification process is re-
triggered.
5003 SBU CVMI power fail The power supply of the SBU Check supply voltage of the SBU
CVMI is below the power fail CVMI2B.
voltage level.
5010 PM HB1 short circuit The desaturation detection Check the event log for an auxiliary
turn off of the IGBTs in HB1 (half code. The code indicates which PM is
bridge 1) of a PM has affected.
detected a short circuit. Check converter output terminals for a
phase to phase short circuit.
Replace the faulty PM.
5011 PM HB2 short circuit The desaturation detection Check the event log for an auxiliary
turn off of the IGBTs in HB2 (half code. The code indicates which PM is
bridge 2) of a PM has affected.
detected a short circuit. Check converter output terminals for a
phase to phase short circuit.
Replace the faulty PM.
5012 PM HB1 or HB2 short The desaturation detection Check the event log for an auxiliary
circuit turn off of the IGBTs in HB1 (half code. The code indicates which PM is
bridge 1) or HB2 (half bridge affected.
2) of a PM has detected a Check converter output terminals for a
short circuit. phase to phase short circuit.
Replace the faulty PM.
400 Fault tracing

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
5013 PM charging relay The voltage across the Check the event log for an auxiliary
not closed charging relay contact of a code. The code indicates which PM is
PM is larger than it would be affected.
expected if the contact was Replace the faulty PM.
closed.
5014 PM rating One or more power modules Check the event log for an auxiliary
incompatibility have different rating from code. The code indicates which PM is
the one specified by the affected.
drive license key. The Replace the PM.
converter can only operates
if all power modules have the
correct rating.
5015 PM DC voltage sense The DC link voltage Check the event log for an auxiliary
fault measurement of a PM is out code. The code indicates which PM is
of range during self test. affected.
Replace the faulty PM.

5016 PM heatsink The heatsink temperature Check the event log for an auxiliary
temperature sense measurement of a PM is out code. The code indicates which PM is
fault of range during self test. affected.
Replace the faulty PM.
5017 PM HB1 and HB2 The desaturation detection Check the event log for an auxiliary
short circuit turn off of the IGBTs in HB1 (half code. The code indicates which PM is
bridge 1) and HB2 (half affected.
bridge 2) of a PM has Check converter output terminals for a
detected a short circuit. phase to phase short circuit.
Replace the faulty PM.
501C Repeated PM HB1 The desaturation detection Check the event log for an auxiliary
IGBT Desat of the IGBTs in HB1 (half code. The code indicates which PM is
bridge 1) of a power module affected.
(PM) has detected a Check converter output terminals for a
repeated short circuit in cool phase to phase short circuit.
down time. Replace the faulty PM.
501D Repeated PM HB2 The desaturation detection Check the event log for an auxiliary
IGBT Desat of the IGBTs in HB2 (half code. The code indicates which PM is
bridge 2) of a power module affected.
(PM) has detected a Check converter output terminals for a
repeated short circuit in cool phase to phase short circuit.
down time. Replace the faulty PM.
501E Repeated PM HB1 or The desaturation detection Check the event log for an auxiliary
HB2 IGBT Desat of the IGBTs in HB1 (half code. The code indicates which PM is
bridge 1) or HB2 (half bridge affected.
2) of a power module (PM) Check converter output terminals for a
has detected a repeated phase to phase short circuit.
short circuit in cool down Replace the faulty PM.
time.
501F Repeated PM HB1 The desaturation detection Check the event log for an auxiliary
and HB2 IGBT Desat of the IGBTs in HB1 (half code. The code indicates which PM is
bridge 1) and HB2 (half affected.
bridge 2) of a power module Check converter output terminals for a
(PM) has detected a phase to phase short circuit.
repeated short circuit in cool Replace the faulty PM.
down time.
 Fault tracing 401

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
5029 PM Sub Capacitor Power module sub capacitor Check the auxiliary code which
Overvoltage1 over voltage set by Par95.90 indicates which power module
during capacitor reforming reported this fault.
process happened. Try to do the capacitor reforming test
again or replace the problematic
power modules.
5030 PM Sub Capacitor Power module sub capacitor Check the auxiliary code which
Overvoltage2 over voltage set by Par95.91 indicates which power module
and last over time period set reported this fault.
by Par95.92 during capacitor Try to do the capacitor reforming test
reforming process again or replace the problematic
happened. power modules.
5031 Cap Reform failed Capacitor reforming test Check Par 95.93, 95.94 and 95.95
was done and failed because which indicates which power
DC unbalance warning is still module(s) caused this fault.
active after specified time Try to do the capacitor reforming test
period. again or replace the problematic
power modules.
5032 PIL grid contactor PIL grid contactor control Check wiring of control and feedback
control fault fault. The feedback is not between converter and grid contactor.
correct 3s after command is Check grid contactor.
given.
5094 Measurement circuit Problem with internal Contact your local ABB representative.
temperature temperature measurement
of the drive.
50A1 Emergency OFF Emergency OFF button on Check that it is safe to release the
button pressed the cabinet door has been emergency OFF button on the front
pressed. door and if it is, release the emergency
OFF button.
If the emergency OFF button is
released but the warning is still active,
check the wiring of the signals from
the emergency OFF button.
Check if the shield cover inside SBU
cabinet is installed correctly.
5691 Measurement circuit Measurement circuit fault. Contact your local ABB representative.
ADC
5693 Measurement circuit Measurement circuit fault. Contact your local ABB representative.
DFF
6000 Internal SW error Internal software error Contact your local ABB representative.
Quote the auxiliary code (check the
event details in the event log).
607A Trial mode expired The entered license key of Contact ABB support line to get a valid
the drive is not valid and the license key.
trial mode time has expired. Enter a valid license key in parameters
96.71 License key part 1, 96.72 License
key part 2, 96.73 License key part 3,
96.74 License key part 4 and then set
the parameter 96.75 License key
refresh to "Refresh".
402 Fault tracing

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
607C License key missing License key for the drive has Contact ABB support line to get a valid
not been entered. license key.
Enter a valid license key in parameters
96.71 License key part 1, 96.72 License
key part 2, 96.73 License key part 3,
96.74 License key part 4 and then set
the parameter 96.75 License key
refresh to "Refresh".
607D Control hub version Incompatible version of the Check the parameter 07.16 Control
incompatibility control hub firmware has hub FW version. If this version is older
been detected. (smaller) than the 07.18 Control Hub
FW version required the control hub
FW needs to be upgraded.

Contact your local ABB representative.

607E PM Software update An incorrect software The fault cannot be reset until the SW
in progress version on the power download is finished. When the SW
modules was identified and download is finished a fault 607F PM
a software update is in Software update done will be shown.
progress.
This fault is active due to Wait for the fault 607F PM Software
safety reasons to keep the update done to show up. Then it is
MCB open until valid SW is possible to reset the fault and to re-
downloaded to all Power charge the drive.
modules.
SW download to Power
modules lasts 4 minutes.
607F PM Software update An incorrect software Reset the fault.
done version on the power
modules was identified and
a software update was done.
6080 PM Software An incorrect software The fault cannot be reset until the SW
Checksum wrong checksum number on the download is finished. When the SW
power modules was identified download is finished a fault 607F PM
and a PM software update is in Software update done will be shown.
Wait for the fault 607F PM Software
progress.
update done to show up. Then it is
This fault is active due to possible to reset the fault and to recharge
safety reasons to keep the the drive.

MCB open until valid SW is Aux code meaning:

downloaded to all power Any bits=1 means corresponding power
modules. module’s checksum number is wrong:
SW download to Power Bit0=1: A1 … Bit8=1: A9
modules lasts 4 minutes.
Bit9=1: B1 … Bit17=1: B9
Bit18=1:C1 … Bit26=1:C9
6110 PM configuration fail An undefined fault code from Check the event log for an auxiliary
a PM has been received. code. The code indicates which PM is
affected.
Check PM SW version and update if
required.
Replace the PM (if always the same PM
gives the fault).
Contact your local ABB representative.
 Fault tracing 403

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
6111 PM undefined fault An undefined fault code from Check the event log for an auxiliary
a PM has been received. code. The code indicates which PM is
affected.
Check PM SW version and update if
required.
Replace the PM (if always the same PM
gives the fault).
Contact your local ABB representative.
6112 PM undefined state Control hub has detected an Note: It is normal for this fault to
undefined PM state. appear after drive discharge.
If the fault reappears after reset:
Check POF wiring to the PMs (or
replace).
Check control hub daughter boards
(or replace).
Check PM SW version and update if
required.
Contact your local ABB representative.
6120 CVMI2 configuration During initialization of the Replace the CVMI2 board.
fault CVMI2 measurement board a
fault was detected.
6122 CVMI2 version Incompatible version of the The Aux code is the minimum version
incompatibility CVMI2 firmware has been for normal running.
detected. If the detected version (‘07.17 CVMI2
FW version’) is older (smaller) than
required (07.119 CVMI2 FW version
required), the CVMI2 FW needs to be
upgraded. Please contact your local
ABB representative.
6182 Unrecoverable SW An unrecoverable error has Check the event log for the fault code
Error occurred. and auxiliary code and report those to
your local ABB representative.
Cycle the control power to reboot
control boards.
6200 Checksum mismatch The calculated parameter See A686 Checksum mismatch (page
Programmable fault: 96.54 checksum does not match 370).
Checksum action any enabled reference
checksum.
6306 FBA A mapping file Fieldbus adapter A mapping Contact your local ABB representative.
file read error.
6307 FBA B mapping file Fieldbus adapter B mapping Contact your local ABB representative.
file read error.
6481 Task overload Internal fault Reboot the control unit (using
parameter 96.08 Control board boot)
or by cycling power. If the problem
persists, contact your local ABB
representative.
6487 Stack overflow Internal fault Reboot the control unit (using
parameter 96.08 Control board boot)
or by cycling power. If the problem
persists, contact your local ABB
representative.
404 Fault tracing

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
64A1 Internal file load File read error Reboot the control unit (using
parameter 96.08 Control board boot)
or by cycling power. If the problem
persists, contact your local ABB
representative.
64A2 Internal record load Internal record load error Contact your local ABB representative.
64A3 Application loading Application file incompatible Note: This fault cannot be reset.
or corrupted Check the event log for the auxiliary
code and contact your local ABB
representative.
64B0 Memory unit detached The memory unit was Contact your local ABB representative.
detached when the control
unit was powered.
64B1 Internal SSW fault Internal fault Contact your local ABB representative.
64B2 User set fault Loading of user parameter Contact your local ABB representative.
set failed because
• requested set does not exist
• set is not compatible with
control program
• drive was switched off
during loading.
64E1 Kernel overload Operating system error Note: This fault cannot be reset.
Contact your local ABB representative.
6581 Parameter system Parameter load or save failed Try forcing a save using parameter
96.07 Parameter save manually. Retry.
6591 Backup/Restore Backup or restore action Check panel / PC-tool connection to
Timeout takes too long. BCU.
Abort current backup / restore and
retry.
65A1 FBA A parameter The drive does not have a Check PLC programming.
conflict functionality requested by Check settings of parameter groups
PLC (overriding system), or 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA) and 51 FBA
requested functionality has A settings.
not been activated.
65A2 FBA B parameter The drive does not have a Contact your local ABB representative.
conflict functionality requested by
PLC, or requested WARNING! FBA B
functionality has not been communication is reserved for
activated. drive internal communication
and should not be changed by user.
6881 Text data overflow Internal fault Reset the fault.
If the fault persists contact your local
ABB representative.
6882 Text 32-bit table Internal fault Reset the fault.
overflow If the fault persists contact your local
ABB representative.
6883 Text 64-bit table Internal fault Reset the fault.
overflow If the fault persists contact your local
ABB representative.
6885 Text file overflow Internal fault Reset the fault.
Contact your local ABB representative
if the fault persists.
 Fault tracing 405

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
7081 Panel loss Control panel or Drive Check Drive composer PC tool or
Programmable fault: 49.05 composer PC tool selected control panel connection.
Communication loss as active control location for Check control panel connector.
action drive has ceased Check BCON X13 connector pins.
communicating. Disconnect and reconnect the control
panel.
Replace control panel in mounting
platform.
7082 Ext I/O comm loss The I/O extension module See A799 Ext I/O comm loss (page
Programmable fault: 31.55 types specified by 372).
Ext I/O comm loss event parameters do not match
the detected configuration.
7083 Panel reference Use of saved control panel The control panel reference can only
conflict reference in multiple control be saved for one reference type at a
modes attempted. time. Consider the possibility of using
a copied reference instead of saved
reference (see the reference selection
parameter).
7121 Motor stall Motor is operating in stall Check motor load and drive ratings.
Programmable fault: 31.24 region because of e.g. Check fault function parameters
Stall function excessive load or insufficient 31.24…31.28.
motor power.
71B1 Motor fan No feedback received from Check external fan (or other
Programmable fault: external fan. equipment controlled) by the logic.
35.106 DOL starter event Check settings of parameters
type 35.100…35.106.
7310 Overspeed Motor is turning faster than Check minimum/maximum speed
highest allowed speed due settings, parameters 30.11 Minimum
to incorrectly set speed and 30.12 Maximum speed for
minimum/maximum speed, rpm operation mode or 30.13
insufficient braking torque Minimum frequency and 30.14
or changes in load when Maximum frequency for Hz operation
using torque reference. mode.

Check adequacy of motor braking

torque.
Check applicability of torque control.
73B0 Emergency ramp Emergency stop did not Check the settings of parameters
failed finish within expected time. 31.32 Emergency ramp supervision
and 31.33 Emergency ramp
supervision delay.
Check the predefined ramp times
(23.11…23.19 for mode Off1, 23.23 for
mode Off3).
73F0 Overfrequency Motor is turning faster than Check minimum/maximum frequency
highest allowed speed due setting in parameters 30.13 Minimum
to incorrectly set frequency and 30.14 Maximum
minimum/maximum frequency.
frequency, insufficient
braking torque or changes in Check adequacy of motor braking
load when using torque torque.
reference. Check applicability of torque control.
406 Fault tracing

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
7510 FBA A communication Cyclical communication Check status of fieldbus
Programmable fault: between drive and fieldbus communication. See user
50.02 comm loss func adapter module A or documentation of fieldbus interface.
between PLC (overriding Check settings of parameter groups
system) and fieldbus 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA), 51 FBA A
adapter module A is lost. settings, 52 FBA A data in and 53 FBA A
data out.
Check cable connections.
Check if communication master is able
to communicate.
7520 FBA B communication Cyclical communication Contact your local ABB representative.
Programmable fault: between drive and fieldbus
50.32 FBA B comm adapter module B or WARNING! FBA B
loss func between AC500 PLC and communication is reserved for
fieldbus adapter module B is drive internal communication
lost. and should not be changed by user.
7534 PM Rx link fault A communication fault on Check the event log for an auxiliary
the Rx communication code. The code indicates which PM is
channel of a PM has been affected.
detected. Check POF wiring to the PM (or
replace).
Check control hub daughter board (or
replace).
Replace the PM.
7538 Control hub missing A PM in the converter does Check the event log for an auxiliary
PM not send data to the control code. The code indicates which PM is
hub. This fault can be caused affected.
by a faulty Tx channel of a PM Inspect corresponding power module
and /or by a bad fiber optic (PEBBs).
connection from the PM to Check POF wiring to the PM (or
the control hub. replace).
Check control hub daughter board (or
replace).
Replace the PM.
7539 Hub RX comm err A communication error was Check the event log for an auxiliary
detected in the control hub code. The code indicates which PM is
on the receiver from one affected.
power module (PM). This can Check POF wiring to the PM (or
be caused by a malfunction replace).
on the PM or the fiber optic Check control hub daughter board (or
connection from the PM to replace).
the hub. Replace the PM.
D102 INU air pressure low The air pressure drop across Check inverter cooling fan and
inverter unit is below fault inverter unit filter.
limit value.
D103 INU air pressure The air pressure drop across Check pressure drop sensor and
sensor failure the inverter unit has measuring tube on control hub and
exceeded internal fault level. replace control hub or tube if needed.
 Fault tracing 407

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
7540 CVMI2 There is communication Check communication wiring from
communication lost error between BCON and BCU to CVMI2 board.
CVMI2 board. Check power supply wiring of CVMI2
board.
Replace the CVMI2 board.

Typical auxiliary code:

F010: BCON is rebooted while CVMI2
board is still power-on. The fault is
resettable.
802D: CVMI is rebooted while BCON is
power-on. The fault is resettable.
0029: The communication between
BCON and CVMI2 board is not
established. Check communication
wiring and power supply of CVMI2
board.

Aux code bits meaning (more than one

bit can be 1 at the same time):
From CVMI to BCON:
bit0 =1 (0x1):?No communication
latched
bit1 =1 (0x2): Link error (3 continuous
data check errors)
bit2 =1 (0x4): Communication error
(data check error)
bit4-3: Data Transmission Protocol
state machine
• 00 = NO CONNECTION (Not
initialized)
• 01 = ESTABLISHING CONNECTION
• 10 = CONNECTION ESTABLISHED
From BCON to CVMI:
bit12 =1 (0x1000):?Communication
error (data check error)
bit13 =1 (0x2000): Link error (3
continuous data check errors)
bit14 =1 (0x4000): No communication
latched
bit15 =1 (0x8000): Data type is
recognized and correct.
7541 SBU CVMI There is communication Check communication wiring from
communication lost error between BCON and BCU to SBU CVMI board.
SBU CVMI2 board. Check power supply of SBU CVMI2
board.
Replace the SBU CVMI board.
7582 MF comm loss Master/follower See A7CB MF comm loss (page 373).
Programmable fault: communication is lost.
60.09 M/F comm loss
function
FF7E Follower A follower drive has tripped. Check the auxiliary code. Add 2 to the
code to find out the node address of
the faulted drive.
Correct the fault in the follower drive.
408 Fault tracing

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
80A0 AI supervision An analog signal is outside Check signal level at the analog input.
Programmable fault: the limits specified for the Check the wiring connected to the
12.03 AI supervision analog input. input.
function
Check the minimum and maximum
limits of the input in parameter group
12 Standard AI.
80B0 Signal supervision Fault generated by the signal Check the source of the fault
(Editable message text) supervision 1 function. (parameter 32.07 Supervision 1 signal).
Programmable fault:
32.06 Supervision 1 action
80B1 Signal supervision 2 Fault generated by the signal Check the source of the fault
(Editable message text) supervision 2 function. (parameter 32.17 Supervision 2 signal).
Programmable fault:
32.16 Supervision 2 action
80B2 Signal supervision 3 Fault generated by the signal Check the source of the fault
(Editable message text) supervision 3 function. (parameter 32.27 Supervision 3 signal).
Programmable fault:
32.26 Supervision 3 action
9081 External fault 1 Fault in external device 1. Check the external device.
(Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.01
Programmable fault: 31.01 External event 1 source.
External event 1 source
31.02 External event 1
type
9082 External fault 2 Fault in external device 2. Check the external device.
(Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.03
Programmable fault: 31.03 External event 2 source.
External event 2 source
31.04 External event 2
type
9083 External fault 3 Fault in external device 3. Check the external device.
(Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.05
Programmable fault: 31.05 External event 3 source.
External event 3 source
31.06 External event 3
type
9084 External fault 4 Fault in external device 4. Check the external device.
(Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.07
Programmable fault: 31.07 External event 4 source.
External event 4 source
31.08 External event 4
type
9085 External fault 5 Fault in external device 5. Check the external device.
(Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.09
Programmable fault: 31.09 External event 5 source.
External event 5 source
31.10 External event 5
type
D101 Charging count There are too many DC link Two attempts in Par 82.92 s? is
charging attempts.? allowed to prevent DC capacitor
overheating.
E100 Trafo phase U1 The winding temperature of Check cooling of the transformer
overtemperature the indicated transformer (door air inlet filter pads, fan
primary phase has exceeded operation).
the temperature limit. Check overload settings for the
transformer (contact your local ABB
representative).
 Fault tracing 409

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
E101 Trafo phase V1 The winding temperature of Check cooling of the transformer
overtemperature the indicated transformer (door air inlet filter pads, fan
primary phase has exceeded operation).
the temperature limit. Check overload settings for the
transformer (contact your local ABB
representative).
E102 Trafo phase W1 The winding temperature of Check cooling of the transformer
overtemperature the indicated transformer (door air inlet filter pads, fan
primary phase has exceeded operation).
the temperature limit. Check overload settings for the
transformer (contact your local ABB
representative).
E103 Ambient The air inlet temperature of Check and improve the cooling of the
overtemperature the inverter unit has electric room where converter is
exceeded the maximum placed.
converter ambient
temperature.
E104 IO Controller hardware IO controller module doesn’t Check actual hardware IO modules.
configuration error match with the program Refresh 81.09 IO Controller
hardware configuration. configuration refresh to configure
correct modules.

E105 AC500 AC500 has detected Check Modbus cable.

communication lost communication errors Check FSCA-01 module.
between BCU and AC500
communication link.
E106 Converter space Converter space heater has Check if the space heater short circuit
heater overload fault been detected based on or overload.
monitoring of the digital Check setting of the parameter 81.21
signal. Converter space heater monitoring.

E107 Motor space heater Motor space heater has been Check if the space heater short circuit
overload fault detected based on or overload.
monitoring of the digital Check setting of the parameter 81.22
signal. Motor space heater monitoring.

E108 AC500 The watchdog supervision of Check Modbus cable.

communication the communication link Check FSCA-01 module.
timeout between BCU and AC500 has Check setting of parameter groups 54
detected a communication FBA B settings, 55 FBA B data in and
failure. 56 FBA B data out (changes allowed
only by ABB authorized personnel).
Note: Make sure that up to maximum
of two fieldbus extension modules are
used on the BCU.
E109 MCB not available MCB available signal is Check MCB available signal.
missing. Check setting of parameters:
82.40 MCB available monitoring,
82.42 MCB available Grp+Indx,
82.43 MCB available BitNum.
410 Fault tracing

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
E10A MCB external MCB external protection is Check MCB external protection signal.
protection active. Check setting of parameters:
82.50 MCB external protection
monitoring,
82.52 MCB external protection
Grp+Indx,
82.53 MCB external protection
BitNum.
E10C TRU cooling fan 1 Temperature relay Check wiring of fan 1 temperature
fault integrated in TRU cooling fan contacts (open circuit, loose
1 has opened. terminals).
Check if fan is mechanically blocked or
makes excessive noise (bearing
problem).
E10D TRU cooling fan 2 Temperature relay Check wiring of fan 2 temperature
fault integrated in TRU cooling fan contacts (open circuit, loose
2 has opened. terminals).
Check if fan is mechanically blocked or
makes excessive noise (bearing
problem).
E10E TRU cooling fan 3 Temperature relay Check wiring of fan 3 temperature
fault integrated in TRU cooling fan contacts (open circuit, loose
3 has opened. terminals).
Check if fan is mechanically blocked or
makes excessive noise (bearing
problem).
E10F Control supply Control supply failure has Check the control supply failure signal.
failure been detected based on Check setting of the parameter 81.10
monitoring of the digital Control supply monitoring.
signal.
E111 TRU cooling fan 4 Temperature relay Check wiring of fan 4 temperature
fault integrated in TRU cooling fan contacts (open circuit, loose
4 has opened. terminals).
Check if fan is mechanically blocked or
makes excessive noise (bearing
problem).
E113 INU cooling fan 1 Temperature relay Check wiring of fan 1 temperature
fault integrated in INU cooling fan contacts (open circuit, loose
1 has opened. terminals).
Check if fan is mechanically blocked or
makes excessive noise (bearing
problem).
E114 MCB control fault MCB close command and Check if MCB has tripped on its own,
MCB close feedback do not by means of short circuit protection
match. relay or overload protection relay and
adapt MCB protection relay settings if
required.
Check MCB control wiring between
ACS580MV and MCB.
E115 INU cooling fan 2 Temperature relay Check wiring of fan 2 temperature
fault integrated in INU cooling fan contacts (open circuit, loose
2 has opened. terminals).
Check if fan is mechanically blocked or
makes excessive noise (bearing
problem).
 Fault tracing 411

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
E116 INU cooling fan 3 Temperature relay Check wiring of fan 3 temperature
fault integrated in INU cooling fan contacts (open circuit, loose
3 has opened. terminals).
Check if fan is mechanically blocked or
makes excessive noise (bearing
problem).
E118 INU door not closed During charging or operation Close the inverter unit door.
of the drive, the inverter unit Check internal wiring of the door lock
door lock sensor has signals (open circuits, loose
reported that the door is not terminals).
closed.
E119 MCB discrepancy MCB open feedback signal Check MCB control feedback signals
and MCB close feedback wiring (open circuit, loose terminals).
signal are active at the same
time.
E11A INU cooling fan 4 Temperature relay Check wiring of fan 4 temperature
fault integrated in INU cooling fan contacts (open circuit, loose
4 has opened. terminals).
Check if fan is mechanically blocked or
makes excessive noise (bearing
problem).
E11C INU door not locked During charging or operation Lock the inverter unit door.
of the drive, the inverter unit Check internal wiring of the door lock
door lock has reported that signals (open circuits, loose
the door is not locked. terminals).
E11D Transformer The winding temperature of Check the auxiliary code. The code
temperature sensor the indicated transformer specifies the affected transformer
failure primary phase has exceeded primary phase as follows:
internal fault level. 01: U1
02: V1
03: W1
04: U1 and V1
05: V1 and W1
06: U1 and W1
07: U1, V1 and W1.

Check winding temperature sensor

wiring for the indicated transformer
primary phase.

E123 Motor phase U1 The winding temperature of Check cooling of the motor.
overtemperature the indicated motor phase Check fault limit setting for the motor
has exceeded the temperature84.03 Motor winding
temperature limit. phase U1 fault limit.

E124 Motor phase V1 The winding temperature of Check cooling of the motor.
overtemperature the indicated motor phase Check fault limit setting for the motor
has exceeded the temperature84.06 Motor winding
temperature limit. phase V1 fault limit.
412 Fault tracing

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
E125 Motor phase W1 The winding temperature of Check cooling of the motor.
overtemperature the indicated motor phase Check fault limit setting for the motor
has exceeded the temperature84.09 Motor winding
temperature limit. phase W1 fault limit.

E126 Motor phase U2 The winding temperature of Check cooling of the motor.
overtemperature the indicated motor phase Check fault limit setting for the motor
has exceeded the temperature84.12 Motor winding
temperature limit. phase U2 fault limit.

E127 Motor phase V2 The winding temperature of Check cooling of the motor.
overtemperature the indicated motor phase Check fault limit setting for the motor
has exceeded the temperature84.15 Motor winding
temperature limit. phase V2 fault limit.

E128 Motor phase W2 The winding temperature of Check cooling of the motor.
overtemperature the indicated motor phase Check fault limit setting for the motor
has exceeded the temperature84.18 Motor winding
temperature limit. phase W2 fault limit.

E129 Motor DE bearing The DE bearing temperature Check cooling of the motor.
overtemperature of the motor has exceeded Check fault limit setting for the motor
the temperature limit. temperature84.21 Motor DE bearing
temperature fault limit.

E12A Motor NDE bearing The NDE bearing Check cooling of the motor.
overtemperature temperature of the motor Check fault limit setting for the motor
has exceeded the temperature84.24 Motor NDE bearing
temperature limit. temperature fault limit.

E130 Motor phase U1 The winding temperature of Check winding temperature sensor
temperature sensor the indicated motor phase wiring of the indicated motor phase.
failure has exceeded internal fault
level.
E131 Motor phase V1 The winding temperature of Check winding temperature sensor
temperature sensor the indicated motor phase wiring of the indicated motor phase.
failure has exceeded internal fault
level.
E132 Motor phase W1 The winding temperature of Check winding temperature sensor
temperature sensor the indicated motor phase wiring of the indicated motor phase.
failure has exceeded internal fault
level.
E133 Motor phase U2 The winding temperature of Check winding temperature sensor
temperature sensor the indicated motor phase wiring of the indicated motor phase.
failure has exceeded internal fault
level.
E134 Motor phase V2 The winding temperature of Check winding temperature sensor
temperature sensor the indicated motor phase wiring of the indicated motor phase.
failure has exceeded internal fault
level.
 Fault tracing 413

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
E135 Motor phase W2 The winding temperature of Check winding temperature sensor
temperature sensor the indicated motor phase wiring of the indicated motor phase.
failure has exceeded internal fault
level.
E136 Motor DE bearing The DE bearing temperature Check temperature sensor wiring of
temperature sensor has exceeded internal fault the DE bearing.
failure level.

E137 Motor NDE bearing The NDE bearing Check temperature sensor wiring of
temperature sensor temperature has exceeded the NDE bearing.
failure internal fault level.

E140 MSS control fault MSS command and MSS Check if MSS has tripped on its own,
feedback do not match. by means of short circuit protection
relay or overload protection relay and
adapt MSS protection relay settings if
required.
Check MB control wiring between
ACS580MV and MSS.
E141 MB control fault MB command and MB Check if MB has tripped on its own, by
feedback do not match. means of short circuit protection relay
or overload protection relay and adapt
MB protection relay settings if
required.
Check MB control wiring between
ACS580MV and MB.
E143 Bypass contactor Command and feedback of Check if contactor has tripped on its
control fault contactor do not match. own, by means of short circuit
protection relay or overload
protection relay and adapt contactor
protection relay settings if required.
Check contactor control wiring
between ACS580MV and contactor.
E144 Inductor The inductor temperature Check cooling of the inductor.
overtemperature has exceeded the
temperature limit.
E145 Inductor temperatuer Inductor temperature rising Check cooling of the inductor.
rising overhigh relative to ambient
temperature has exceeded
the temperature rising limit.
E146 Voltage transducer The measured RMS voltage Check the auxiliary code, the code
sensor failure of the grid or drive output specifies affected measuring sensor
for SBU has exceeded as follows:
internal fault level. 01: Grid voltage
02: Drive output voltage
04: Grid and drive output voltages
Check the voltage sensor wiring for
the indicated place.
Check MCR-VAC-UI-0-DC board.
E147 Inductor temperature The temperature of the Check the wiring of the inductor
sensor failure inductor has exceeded temperature sensor.
interal fault level.
414 Fault tracing

Code Fault Cause What to do

(hex)
FA90 STO diagnostics This fault is triggered by Check signal of 7.11 Cpu usage. If it is
failure internal diagnostic. Look at very high, Contact your local ABB
auxiliary code of this fault: representative.
Axu code = 1: The check sum Replace BCON board if the control
verification in specified board is broken.
memory failed.
Aux code = 2: The watchdog
are triggered. Some timer
function which should be
reset in 2ms time level are
not executed as expected.
Possible causes:
• CPU load is too high. Some
tasks are not executed in
specified time.
• BCON board is broken.
FB11 Memory unit missing No memory unit is attached Power down the control unit.
to the control unit. Check that the memory unit is
properly inserted into the control unit.
The memory unit attached to Power down the control unit. Attach a
the control unit is empty. memory unit (with the appropriate
firmware) to the control unit.
FB12 Memory unit The memory unit attached to Power down the control unit.
incompatible the control unit is Attach a compatible memory unit.
incompatible.
FB13 Memory unit FW The firmware on the Power down the control unit.
incompatible attached memory unit is Attach a memory unit with compatible
incompatible with the drive. firmware.
FB14 Memory unit FW load The firmware on the Power down the control unit.
failed attached memory unit could Check that the memory unit is
not be loaded to the drive. properly inserted into the control unit.
If the problem persists, replace the
memory unit.
FF81 FB A force trip A fault trip command has Check the fault information provided
been received through by the PLC (overriding system).
fieldbus adapter A.
 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 415

8
Fieldbus control through a
fieldbus adapter
What this chapter contains
This chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over
a communication network (fieldbus) through an optional fieldbus adapter
module.
The fieldbus control interface of the drive is described first, followed by a
configuration example.

System overview
The drive can be connected to an external control system through an optional
fieldbus adapter mounted onto the control unit of the drive. The drive actually
has two independent interfaces for fieldbus connection, called “fieldbus
adapter A” () and “fieldbus adapter B” (FBA B).

WARNING! Fieldbus adapter B (FBA B) is used for drive internal

communication and therefore is not available for external communication.
Parameters related to FBA B should not be changed by user.

The drive can be configured to receive all of its control information through the
fieldbus interface , or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus
interface and other available sources such as digital and analog inputs,
depending on how control locations EXT1 and EXT2 are configured.
416 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter

Fieldbus adapters are available for various communication systems and

protocols, for example
• PROFIBUS DP (FPBA-01 adapter)
• CANopen (FCAN-01 adapter)
• DeviceNet (FDNA-01 adapter)
• EtherNet/IPTM (FENA-11 adapter)
• EtherCAT® (FECA-01 adapter).
Note: The text and examples in this chapter describe the configuration of the
fieldbus adapter () by parameters 50.01…50.21 and parameter groups 51…53.

Drive
Fieldbus
controller

Fieldbus

Other
devices

Type Fxxx fieldbus

adapter installed onto
drive control unit (slot
1, 2 or 3)

Data Flow
Control word (CW)
References
Process I/O (cyclic)
Status word (SW)
Actual values

Parameter R/W requests/responses Process I/O (cyclic) or

Service messages (acyclic)
 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 417

Basics of the fieldbus control interface

The cyclic communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of
16- or 32-bit input and output data words. The drive is able to support a
maximum of 12 data words (16 bits) in each direction.
Data transmitted from the drive to the fieldbus controller is defined by
parameters 52.01 data in1 … 52.12 data in12. The data transmitted from the
fieldbus controller to the drive is defined by parameters 53.01 data out1 … 53.12
data out12.

Fieldbus network
1)
Fieldbus adapter FBA Profile
EXT1/2
Start func
DATA Profile
OUT 2) selection
4) FBA MAIN CW
4)
FBA REF1
1
DATA OUT FBA REF2
2 20.01
selection 20.06
Fieldbus-specific interface

3
3)
… Speed/Torque
REF1 sel
12 Par. 10.01…99.99

DATA Profile
IN 2) selection
Group 53
FBA MAIN SW 22.11 / 26.11
5)
5) CT1 / 26.12
1
DATA IN CT2
2 selection Speed/Torque
3 REF2 sel
3)
…
12 Par. 01.01…99.99

Cyclic communication 22.12 / 26.11

Group 52 / 26.12
Acyclic communication
See the manual of the fieldbus Parameter
adapter module. table

1) See also other parameters which can be controlled from fieldbus.

2) The maximum number of data words used is protocol-dependent.
3) Profile/instance selection parameters. Fieldbus module specific parameters. For more
information, see the User’s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module.
4) With DeviceNet, the control part is transmitted directly.
5) With DeviceNet, the actual value part is transmitted directly.
418 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter

 Control word and Status word

The Control word is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus
system. It is sent by the fieldbus master station to the drive through the
adapter module. The drive switches between its states according to the bit-
coded instructions in the Control word, and returns status information to the
master in the Status word.
The contents of the Control word and the Status word are detailed on pages 421
and 422 respectively. The drive states are presented in the state diagram (page
423).

Debugging the network words

If parameter 50.12 debug mode is set to Enable, the Control word received from
the fieldbus is shown by parameter 50.13 control word, and the Status word
transmitted to the fieldbus network by 50.16 status word. This “raw” data is
very useful to determine if the fieldbus master is transmitting the correct data
before handing control to the fieldbus network.
 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 419

 References
References are 16-bit words containing a sign bit and a 15-bit integer. A
negative reference (indicating reversed direction of rotation) is formed by
calculating the two’s complement from the corresponding positive reference.
ABB drives can receive control information from multiple sources including
analog and digital inputs, the drive control panel and a fieldbus adapter module.
In order to have the drive controlled through the fieldbus, the module must be
defined as the source for control information such as reference. This is done
using the source selection parameters in groups 22 Speed reference selection,
26 Torque reference chain and 28 Frequency reference chain.

Debugging the network words

If parameter 50.12 debug mode is set to Enable, the references received from
the fieldbus are displayed by 50.14 reference 1 and 50.15 reference 2.

Scaling of references
The references are scaled as defined by parameters 46.01…46.04; which scaling
is in use depends on the setting of 50.04 ref1 type and 50.05 ref2 type.

Fieldbus Drive

46.01 (with speed reference)

20000
46.02 (with frequency reference)

46.03 (with torque reference)

10000
46.04 (with power reference)

0 0

-(46.03) (with torque reference)

-10000
-(46.04) (with power reference)

-(46.01) (with speed reference)

-20000
-(46.02) (with frequency reference)

The scaled references are shown by parameters 03.05 FB A reference 1 and

03.06 FB A reference 2.
420 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter

 Actual values
Actual values are 16-bit words containing information on the operation of the
drive. The types of the monitored signals are selected by parameters 50.07
actual 1 type and 50.08 actual 2 type.

Debugging the network words

If parameter 50.12 debug mode is set to Enable, the actual values sent to the
fieldbus are displayed by 50.17 actual value 1 and 50.18 actual value 2.

Scaling of actual values

The actual values are scaled as defined by parameters 46.01…46.04; which
scaling is in use depends on the setting of parameters 50.07 actual 1 type and
50.08 actual 2 type.

Fieldbus Drive

46.01 (with speed reference)

20000
46.02 (with frequency reference)

46.03 (with torque reference)

10000
46.04 (with power reference)

0 0

-(46.03) (with torque reference)

-10000
-(46.04) (with power reference)

-(46.01) (with speed reference)

-20000
-(46.02) (with frequency reference)
 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 421

 Contents of the fieldbus Control word

The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the state diagram
(page 423).
Bit Name Value STATE/Description
0 Off1 control 1 Proceed to READY TO OPERATE.
0 Stop along currently active deceleration ramp. Proceed to OFF1
ACTIVE; proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks
(OFF2, OFF3) are active.
1 Off2 control 1 Continue operation (OFF2 inactive).
0 Emergency OFF, coast to a stop.
Proceed to OFF2 ACTIVE, proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
2 Off3 control 1 Continue operation (OFF3 inactive).
0 Emergency stop, stop within time defined by drive parameter.
Proceed to OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
WARNING: Ensure motor and driven machine can be
stopped using this stop mode.
3 Run 1 Proceed to OPERATION ENABLED.
Note: Run enable signal must be active. If the drive is set to receive
the Run enable signal from the fieldbus, this bit activates the signal.
0 Inhibit operation. Proceed to OPERATION INHIBITED.
4 Ramp out zero 1 Normal operation. Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:
OUTPUT ENABLED.
0 Force Ramp function generator output to zero. The drive will
immediately decelerate to zero speed (observing the torque limits).
5 Ramp hold 1 Enable ramp function.
Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR
ENABLED.
0 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
6 Ramp in zero 1 Normal operation. Proceed to OPERATING.
Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the
source for this signal by drive parameters.
0 Force Ramp function generator input to zero.
7 Reset 0=>1 Fault reset if an active fault exists. Proceed to SWITCH-ON
INHIBITED.
Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the
source of the reset signal by drive parameters.
0 Continue normal operation.
8 Inching 1 1 Accelerate to inching (jogging) setpoint 1.
Notes:
• Bits 4…6 must be 0.
• See also section Jogging (page 38).
0 Inching (jogging) 1 disabled.
9 Inching 2 1 Accelerate to inching (jogging) setpoint 2.
See notes at bit 8.
0 Inching (jogging) 2 disabled.
10 Remote cmd 1 Fieldbus control enabled.
0 Control word and reference not getting through to the drive, except
for bits 0…2.
11 Ext ctrl loc 1 Select External Control Location EXT2. Effective if control location is
parameterized to be selected from fieldbus.
0 Select External Control Location EXT1. Effective if control location is
parameterized to be selected from fieldbus.
12 to 15 Reserved.
422 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter

 Contents of the fieldbus Status word

The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the state diagram
(page 423 ).
Bit Name Value STATE/Description
0 Ready to switch 1 READY TO SWITCH ON.
ON 0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON.
1 Ready run 1 READY TO OPERATE.
0 OFF1 ACTIVE.
2 Ready ref 1 OPERATION ENABLED.
0 OPERATION INHIBITED.
3 Tripped 1 FAULT.
0 No fault.
4 Off 2 inactive 1 OFF2 inactive.
0 OFF2 ACTIVE.
5 Off 3 inactive 1 OFF3 inactive.
0 OFF3 ACTIVE.
6 Switch-on inhibited 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
0 –
7 Warning 1 Warning active.
0 No warning active.
8 At setpoint 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals reference = is within tolerance
limits (see parameters 46.21…46.23).
0 Actual value differs from reference = is outside tolerance limits.
9 Remote 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2).
0 Drive control location: LOCAL.
10 User bit 4 - See parameter 06.29 MSW bit 10 sel.(Default value is above limit)
11 User bit 0 - See parameter 06.30 MSW bit 11 sel.
12 User bit 1 - See parameter 06.31 MSW bit 12 sel.
13 User bit 2 - See parameter 06.32 MSW bit 13 sel.
14 User bit 3 - See parameter 06.33 MSW bit 14 sel.
15 Reserved
 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 423

 The state diagram

SWITCH-ON from any state

MAINS OFF
INHIBITED SW b6=1
Fault
Power ON CW b0=0

FAULT
NOT READY TO SW b3=1
A B C D SWITCH ON SW b0=0
CW b7=1

CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x110

CW b3=0
READY TO
OPERATION SWITCH ON SW b0=1
INHIBITED from any state
SW b2=0
operation Emergency stop
CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x111 OFF2 (CW b1=0)
inhibited
OFF2
READY TO
from any state ACTIVE SW b4=0
OPERATE SW b1=1

OFF1 (CW b0=0)

CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx 1111
OFF1
ACTIVE SW b1=0 from any state

n(f) = 0 / I = 0 Emergency stop

OFF3 (CW b2=0)
B C D OFF3
ACTIVE SW b5=0
CW b4=0
n(f) = 0 / I = 0
OPERATION
C D ENABLED SW b2=1
A
CW b5=0 CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111
STATE
RFG: OUTPUT
D ENABLED condition
B
CW b6=0 CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111 rising edge of
bit
CW = Control word RFG: ACCELERATOR
SW = Status word ENABLED
bx = bit x
n = Speed C
I = Input Current CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111
RFG = Ramp Function
Generator
f = Frequency OPERATION
SW b8=1
D
424 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter

Setting up the drive for fieldbus control

1. Install the fieldbus adapter module mechanically and electrically according
to the instructions given in the User’s manual of the module.
2. Power up the drive.
3. Enable the communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter
module with parameter 50.01 enable.
4. With 50.02 comm loss func, select how the drive should react to a fieldbus
communication break.
Note: This function monitors both the communication between the fieldbus
master and the adapter module and the communication between the
adapter module and the drive.
5. With 50.03 comm loss t out, define the time between communication break
detection and the selected action.
6. Select application-specific values for the rest of the parameters in group 50
Fieldbus adapter (FBA), starting from 50.04. Examples of appropriate values
are shown in the tables below.
7. Set the fieldbus adapter module configuration parameters in group 51 FBA A
settings. As a minimum, set the required node address and the control
profile.
8. Define the process data transferred to and from the drive in parameter
groups 52 FBA A data in and 53 FBA A data out.
Note: Depending on the communication protocol and profile being used, the
Control word and Status word may already be configured to be
sent/received by the communication system.
9. Save the valid parameter values to permanent memory by setting parameter
96.07 Parameter save manually to Save.
10. Validate the settings made in parameter groups 51, 52 and 53 by setting
parameter 51.27 par refresh to Refresh.
11. Configure control locations EXT1 and EXT2 to allow control and reference
signals to come from the fieldbus. Examples of appropriate values are
shown in the tables below.
 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 425

 Parameter setting example: FPBA (PROFIBUS DP)

This example shows how to configure a basic speed control application that
uses the PROFIdrive communication profile with PPO Type 2. The start/stop
commands and reference are according to the PROFIdrive profile, speed control
mode.
The reference values sent over the fieldbus have to be scaled within the drive so
they have the desired effect. The reference value ±16384 (4000h) corresponds
to the range of speed set in parameter 46.01 Speed scaling (both forward and
reverse directions). For example, if 46.01 is set to 480 rpm, then 4000h sent
over fieldbus will request 480 rpm.
Direction PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6
Out Control word Speed reference Acc time 1 Dec time 1
In Status word Speed actual value Motor current DC voltage

The table below gives the recommended drive parameter settings.

Drive parameter Setting for ACS880 Description
drives
50.01 enable 1…3 = [slot number] Enables communication between the
drive and the fieldbus adapter module.
50.04 ref1 type 4 = Speed Selects the fieldbus A reference 1 type
and scaling.
50.07 actual 1 type 0 = Speed or Selects the actual value type and scaling
frequency according to the currently active Ref1
mode defined in parameter 50.04.

51.01 type 1 = FPBA1) Displays the type of the fieldbus adapter

module.
51.02 Node address 32) Defines the PROFIBUS node address of
the fieldbus adapter module.
51.03 Baud rate 120001) Displays the current baud rate on the
PROFIBUS network in kbit/s.
51.04 MSG type 1 = PPO11) Displays the telegram type selected by
the PLC configuration tool.
51.05 Profile 0 = PROFIdrive Selects the Control word according to the
PROFIdrive profile (speed control mode).
51.07 RPBA mode 0 = Disabled Disables the RPBA emulation mode.

52.01 FBA data in1 4 = SW 16bit1) Status word

52.02 FBA data in2 5 = Act1 16bit Actual value 1
52.03 FBA data in3 01.072) Motor current
52.05 FBA data in5 01.112) DC voltage
53.01 FBA data out1 1 = CW 16bit1) Control word
53.02 FBA data out2 2 = Ref1 16bit Reference 1 (speed)
426 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter

Drive parameter Setting for ACS880 Description

drives
53.03 FBA data out3 23.122) Acceleration time 1
2)
53.05 FBA data out5 23.13 Deceleration time 1

51.27 par refresh 1 = Refresh Validates the configuration parameter

settings.

19.12 Ext1 control mode 2 = Speed Selects speed control as the control
mode 1 for external control location
EXT1.
20.01 Ext1 commands 12 = Fieldbus A Selects fieldbus adapter A as the source
of the start and stop commands for
external control location EXT1.
20.02 Ext1 start trigger type 1 = Level Selects a level-triggered start signal for
external control location EXT1.
22.11 Speed ref1 source 4 = FB A ref1 Selects fieldbus A reference 1 as the
source for speed reference 1.
1)
Read-only or automatically detected/set
2)
Example

 The start sequence for the parameter example:

Control word:
• 477h (1143 decimal) -> READY TO OPERATE
• 47Fh (1151 decimal) -> OPERATING (Speed mode)
• 477h(1143 decimal) -> READY TO OPERATE (Stop command)
MCB can also be controlled by fieldbus. For example, in EXT1 control mode,
RS485 communication and ABB enhanced profile are used, parameters are set
as below:
• Par 82.20 MCB EXT1 commands = Comm.module
• Par53.1 FBA data out 1 (just example) = 82.1
One operating sequence example is like below:
• 476h (1142 decimal) -> READY TO SWITCH ON
• Set register 40004 = 1 in up-level PLC to close MCB.
• 477h (1143 decimal) -> READY TO OPERATE
• 47Fh (1151 decimal) -> OPERATING (Speed mode)
• 477h(1143 decimal) -> READY TO OPERATE (Stop command)
• 476h (1142 decimal) -> READY TO SWITCH ON
• Set register 40004 = 0 in up-level PLC to open MCB.
Note: Don’t use 47E to stop, otherwise it would discharge the MCB.
 Synchronized bypass function 427

9
Synchronized bypass
function
What this chapter contains
This chapter describes the drive extension function of synchronized bypass unit
(SBU) application.

Terms and abbreviations

Term Definition
SBU Synchronized Bypass Unit.
DCS Distributed Control System.
DOL Direct Online.
MB Motor Breaker.
MSS Motor Starting Switch.
RSYC-01 Synchronizing Unit
PT Potential Transformer.
HVRB High Voltage Resistor Board
CVMI2B Current Voltage Measurement Interface Board
VSD Variable Speed Drive.
 428 Synchronized bypass function

Overview
The SBU is used when motor(s) have to be started in a weak network. In such a
case the motor(s) is/are accelerated to synchronous speed (nominal speed or
frequency) via the converter with a predefined ramp, and afterwards they are
connected direct online with a very shot power interruption to the grid and
motor.
SBU function works with bumpless bypass or make before break mode, which
are defined grid current shall be kept below 1.2 times nominal motor current
during the motor starting and synchronization sequence.
Bumpless bypass (make before break) is works with decoupling inductor
between converter and motor.

System setup
ACS580MV SBU function provides standard synchronization control for single
motor solution. With this standard synchronization control, all the other
functionalities like supporting multiple motors, breakers control and
monitoring could be built either by ABB alternatives (Marshalling Unit) or by
system integrators.
The synchronize to mains function requires motor voltage and grid voltage to
be measured. The measurements at motor and grid side are inputs to the SBU
cabinet related interface to determine exact sync instant of motor to mains.
Two different solutions have been developed for SBU function:
Generation 1 solution uses RSYC-01 (see below picture) board as key
component. PTs (can be provided either by ABB or customer) are needed to
measure grid voltage and motor voltage. Refer to below system diagram.
 Synchronized bypass function 429

 RSYC board solution system diagram

MAINSSUPPLY

PT1.1

MCB
MB

Fieldbus

Hardwiring ACS580MV
DCS
SBU
Output
inductor

PT2.1

VSDSUPPLY

MSS

Motor ASM

 RSYC-01 board
 430 Synchronized bypass function

Generation 2 solution doesn’t use RSYC-01 board anymore. For motor voltage
measurement, SBU uses existing converter output voltage measurement
signals which are measured by three HVRBs and CVMI2B. For grid voltage
measurement, if motor will be synchronized to same grid (mains supply) than
converter input supply, then three HVRBs will be used as well to measure grid
voltage; if motor will be synchronized to different grid (mains supply) than
converter input supply, then PT (provide by customer) will be used to measure
the target grid voltage. Refer to below system diagram.

 CVMI2B solution system diagram (motor sync to same mains

supply as drive input)
MAINSSUPPLY

MCB MB

Fieldbus

Hardwiring ACS580MV
DCS HVRB

SBU
Output
inductor

HVRB

VSDSUPPLY

MSS

Motor ASM
 Synchronized bypass function 431

 CVMI2B solution system diagram (motor sync to different mains

supply than drive input)
MAINSSUPPLY MAINSSUPPLY1

PT
MCB

MB

Fieldbus

Hardwiring ACS580MV
DCS HVRB

SBU
Output
inductor

VSDSUPPLY

MSS

Motor ASM
 432 Synchronized bypass function

SBU control
 Sync to mains sequence
For RSYC board solution, when drive works under sync mode, RSYC-01 board is
used to adjust the difference of voltage frequency and angle between motor
and grid, and this board also indicates the frequency and phase is matching or
not. Drive BCU unit adjusts the difference of voltage RMS value between grid
and motor voltage.
After RSYC-01 board sending the frequency and phase angle matching signal,
and the difference between the grid and motor voltage RMS values is within the
required limit. MB will be closed firstly, and then MSS will be opened, thus the
sync to mains sequence will be finished.
For CVMI2B solution (without using RSYC-01 board), both motor voltage
(measured by HVRB) and grid voltage (measured by HVRB or PT) will be sent to
CVMI2B and BCU. And BCU software will calculate real time amplitude,
frequency and phase angle of grid voltage and motor voltage, then adjust
output motor voltage to synchronize with grid voltage.
Once phase angle error, frequency error, amplitude error between grid voltage
and motor voltage are within required limit, stabilize longer than defined
qualification time. BCU will send MB close command and MSS open command
sequentially to complete synchronization bypass process.

 VSD sequence
SBU function supports drive running on VSD mode.
From SBU system setup, MSS must be closed, and MB must be opened before
drive running on VSD mode.
Inductor bypass contactor is optional for customers. If customer has long term
requirement of VSD running, please request customized solution for inductor
bypassing function.

 Reference chain
When sync mode is available, the speed or frequency reference is from 22.26
Constant speed 1 or 28.26 Constant frequency 1, which are selected by 22.22
Constant speed sel1 and 28.22 Constant frequency sel1. These four parameters
are overridden by SBU function.
To make sure the correct reference chain is working on sync mode, user should
confirm the Speed reference source selection II or Reference selection for
torque controller carefully.
 Synchronized bypass function 433

 I/O device and signals

In SBU application, The I/O signals are connected to the ACS580MV drive by
standard I/O devices and extension FIO-01 module.
The following table lists the signals that are provided to SBU function.
Device I/O Direct Description Remark
Sync to mains mode selection command
BCON DI2 Input (enabled by 85.13 SBU control source is
selected IOs control).
Direct on line command (enabled by
BCON DI4 Input 85.13 SBU control source is selected IOs
control).
RSYC-01 board indicates frequency and
BCON DI6 Input Only valid for
phase matching
RSYC board
RSYC-01 board adjusting signal solution
BCON AI2 Input
BUF_OUT.
Inductor bypass contactor feedback
AC500 EMB P2 DI7 Input
status CLOSED
AC500
AI1 Input Grid voltage RMS measurement. Only valid for
Extension P0
RSYC board
AC500 Converter output voltage RMS solution
AI2 Input
Extension P0 measurement.
AC500 Inductor temperature.
AI3 Input
Extension P0
AC500 Inductor temperature monitoring
AO1 Output
Extension P0 supply.
BCON FIO-01 DIO1 Input MSS feedback status CLOSED
BCON FIO-01 DIO2 Input MB feedback status CLOSED
Input MSS OPEN command, or inductor
BCON FIO-01 DIO3
/Output bypass contactor CLOSE command
Input MB OPEN command, or inductor bypass
BCON FIO-01 DIO4
/Output contactor OPEN command
BCON FIO-01 RO1 Output MSS CLOSE command
BCON FIO-01 RO2 Output MB CLOSE command

If SBU function is enabled by 85.11 SBU function enable, above signal interfaces
are fixed except FIO-01 outputs, these four signals need to be configured by
parameters.
 434 Synchronized bypass function

Start sequence of sync to mains

Customer CMD ACS580MV
Ready On =0
NOT RDY ON Ready Run =0
-Aux supply on Ready Ref =0
-no ESTOP
-no Fault

CMD:Reset

6.11 MSW-bit0
RDY ON
Ready on = 1

CMD: Switch ON

Close MCB
Charge DC link

MSS close CMD

RDY RUN 6.11 MSW-bit1
Inductor bypass contactor Ready run = 1
close CMD

MSS closed FBK

Inductor bypass contactor

closed FBK
85.2 SBU-SW-bit0
SBU RDY ON SBU Ready on = 1

CMD: Sync to
Mains

85.2 SBU-SW-bit6
Inductor bypass contactor SYNC Mode Sync to mains Start Modulation
open CMD mode = 1

6.11 MSW-bit2
Inductor bypass contactor Ready ref = 1
opened FBK RDY REF 85.2 SBU-SW
-bit1 SBU running
=1
Inductor isn’t 85.2 SBU-SW-bit11
bypassed Bypass contactor
closed = 1

85.2 SBU-SW-bit6
CMD: Run
SYNC Mode Sync to mains
mode = 1

Start Modulation

6.11 MSW-bit2
Ready ref = 1
RDY REF 85.2 SBU-SW
-bit1 SBU running
=1

Ramp up to nominal frequency and

start synchronizing

85.2 SBU-SW
MB close CMD SYNCHRON -bit5 Sync
permission =1

Coast stop
modulation

85.2 SBU-SW
MB closed FBK
-bit0 SBU Ready on
=0
-bit1 SBU running
MSS open CMD SYNC Done =0
-bit2 SBU finished
=1
-bit6 Sync to mains
MSS RSHQ FBK
mode = 0

RDY RUN

CMD: Switch OFF

Open MCB
Discharge DC link

Inductor bypass contactor option

RDY ON
 Synchronized bypass function 435

Parameter setting example

This example shows how to configure a SBU application. The start/stop
commands and reference are according to the customer requirements.
The table below gives the recommended drive parameter settings.
Setting for
Drive parameter Description Remark
ACS580MV drives
12.25 AI2 unit selection V Set unit to V Only valid for
12.27 AI2 min 0V Set AI2 min value. RSYC board
Voltage range of RSYC- solution
01 BUF OUT is 0~10V.
12.28 AI2 max 10 V Set AI2 max value
16.01 Module 3 type FIO-01 Select type of the
extension module
16.02 Module 3 Slot 3 FIO-01 is installed on slot
location 3.
16.19 DIO3 function Output Select DIO3 as output.
If two signals (open and
close) are used for MSS
control, this paramater
needs to set.
16.21 DIO3 output P 85.2.14 MSS open command
source signal is from SBU
function SW bit 14.
If two signals (open and
close) are used for MSS
control, this paramater
needs to set.
16.24 DIO4 function Output Select the DIO4 as the
output.
If two signals (open and
close) are used for MB
control, this paramater
needs to set.
16.26 DIO4 output P 85.2.15 MB open command
source signal is from SBU
function SW bit 15.
If two signals (open and
close) are used for MB
control, this paramater
needs to set.
16.34 RO1 source P 85.2.12 MSS close command is
from SBU function SW
bit12.
 436 Synchronized bypass function

Setting for
Drive parameter Description Remark
ACS580MV drives
16.37 RO2 source P 85.2.13 MB close command is
from SBU function SW
bit13
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 EXT1 Sync to main only works
selection in external control
(EXT1or EXT2).
20.01 Ext1 commands In1 Start; In2 Dir Select control
commands source of
external control location
EXT1.
22.11 Speed ref1 AI1 scaled Select speed reference
source source of external
control location EXT1
20.24 Negative speed Not selected Disable negative speed
enable
21.03 Stop mode Coast Select the way of motor
stop.
28.11 Frequency ref1 AI1 scaled Select the speed
source reference source for
external control location
EXT1
30.11 Minimum speed 0 Define the minimum
allowed motor speed
30.12 Maximum speed 2000 rpm Define the maximum
allowed motor speed.
Maximum speed must be
higher than motor
nominal speed, so that
converter output voltage
frequency can be
adjusted around the
mains frequency.
30.13 Minimum 0 Define the minimum
frequency allowed motor frequency
30.14 Maximum 60 HZ Define the maximum
frequency allowed motor
frequency. Maximum
frequency must be
higher than motor
nominal frequency, so
that converter output
voltage frequency can be
adjusted around the
mains frequency.
 Synchronized bypass function 437

Setting for
Drive parameter Description Remark
ACS580MV drives
85.05 Ratio of grid 100 Define the ratio of grid
voltage transformer PT (potential
transformer). For
example, if the ratio of
PT is 11000V / 110V, set
this value to 100.
If the PT is provided by
ABB, the type is RZL10
(11000V / 110V).
85.06 Ratio of 100 Define the ratio of Only valid for
converter voltage converter PT (potential RSYC board
transformer transformer).. For solution
example, if the ratio of
PT is 11000V/110V, set
this value to 100.
If the PT is provided by
ABB, the type is RZL10
(11000V / 110V).
85.11 SBU function Enabled Enable SBU function.
enable
85.12 Motor control Single motor If no marshalling PLC is
mode selected (MSS, MB
control signals are from
FIO-01), set it to Single
motor. In Single
motormode, feedbacks
of MSS and MB are
monitored by BCU.
If marshalling PLC is
selected (MSS, MB
control signals are from
marshalling PLC), set it
to Multi motor. In Multi
motor mode, feedbacks
of MSS and MB are
monitored by
marshalling PLC, instead
of BCU.
 438 Synchronized bypass function

Setting for
Drive parameter Description Remark
ACS580MV drives
85.13 SBU control IOs control Select SBU control
source source.
IOs control means:
BCU DI2 0 [Symbol] 1,
start Sync to main
BCU DI4 1 [Symbol] 0,
open MB (85.12 Motor
control mode is Single
motor and 82.20 MB
open by direct online is
Enabled).
Fieldbus control mans
Sync to main and MB
open command is from
85.1 SBU control and
monitoring CW.
85.14 MB control Steady signal Select MB control signal.
signal If it’s pulse signal, pulse
time is 3s.
85.15 MSS control Steady signal Select MSS control
signal signal. If it’s pulse signal,
pulse time is 3s.
85.20 MB open control Disabled If it’s enabled, 1 [Symbol]
by direct online 0 of MB DOL command
(BCU DI4, or 85.1 SBU
control and monitoring
CW bit 2) will open MB.
85.30 Inductor Yes Selection of SBU old
temperature (RSYC) or new (CVMI)
solution
No: RSYC; Yes: CVMI
solution
85.37 Grid configuration Single Selection of grid Only valid for
configuration (valid for CVMI2B solution
SBU feature)
Single: HVRB solution;
Multiple: PT solution
97.40 Output choke 1.4 mH Define the inductance of
inductance the output choke.
 Control chain diagrams 439

10
Control chain diagrams
What this chapter contains
The chapter presents the reference chains of the drive. The control chain
diagrams can be used to trace how parameters interact and where parameters
have an effect within the drive parameter system.
For a more general diagram, see section Operating modes of the drive (page
18).
 22.17 Speed additive 2

>
>
22.15 Speed additive 1 source Selection Selection
source

>
22.13 Speed ref1 function Selection

22.81 Speed reference act 1 ADD

22.84 Speed reference act 4 22.86 Speed reference act 6

>
22.11 Speed ref1 source Selection Value
SUB
+ Value + Value
MUL Value x Value

MIN
22.83 Speed reference act 3 22.85 Speed reference act 5
MAX
Speed reference source selection I

22.82 Speed reference act 2

>
22.12 Speed ref2 source Selection Value

22.16 Speed share Value

>
22.14 Speed ref1/2 selection Selection
440 Control chain diagrams
 22.86 Speed reference act 6 Value

22.21 Const speed function bit 1 Direction enable

AND
Direction (See group 20 Ext1& Ext2 commands) -1

1 x Value
b0

>
22.22 Constant speed sel1 Selection BIN
b1 TO 0

>
22.23 Constant speed sel2 Selection
INT OUT
b2 SEL

>
22.24 Constant speed sel3 Selection 22.87 Speed reference act 7
22.26 Constant speed 1 Value 0 Value Value
22.43 Jogging 2 ref
1
22.27 Constant speed 2 Value 2
3
22.28 Constant speed 3 Value
4
22.29 Constant speed 4 Value 22.42 Jogging 1 ref Value
5
22.30 Constant speed 5 Value 6
7
22.31 Constant speed 6 Value
Fieldbus: Network reference Value
22.32 Constant speed 7 Value
ODVA CIP™ Network control 06.16 bit 9

0 0
1 03.01 Panel reference Value
22.26 Constant speed 1 Value
Panel local 06.16 bit 8
2
22.27 Constant speed 2 Value
3
49.05 Communication loss action =
22.28 Constant speed 3 Value Speed ref safe 22.41 Speed ref safe Value
Speed reference source selection II

Panel comm loss active AND Safe speed reference command CRITICAL
OR SPEEDS

>
22.22 Constant speed sel1 Selection 1 Panel as local control device 22.01 Speed ref unlimited
INT

>
22.23 Constant speed sel2 Selection 2 Value
>

SEL 50.02 FBA A comm loss func = 22.51 Critical speed function Selection

>
22.24 Constant speed sel3 Selection 3 Speed ref safe
22.52 Critical speed 1 low Value
Fieldbus comm loss active AND
22.53 Critical speed 1 high Value
22.21 Const speed function bit 0 Const speed mode Control from Fieldbus active
22.54 Critical speed 2 low Value
12.03 AI supervision function =
Speed ref safe Value

>
20.27 Jogging 2 start source Selection 22.55 Critical speed 2 high
12.04 AI supervision selection 
AND Jogging 2 AND 22.56 Critical speed 3 low Value

>
20.25 Jogging enable Selection 0000b
AI outside supervised limit 22.57 Critical speed 3 high Value

Jogging 1
AND

>
20.26 Jogging 1 start source Selection
Control chain diagrams 441
 06.01 bit 4 Ramp out zero Value
30.12 Maximum speed Value

06.01. bit 5 Ramp hold Value AND

AND
23.24 Speed ramp in zero source 06.01 bit 6 Ramp in zero Value

>
Selection
OR OR
06.01 bit 6 Ramp in zero Value 06.01 bit 8 Inching 1 Value

06.01 bit 9 Inching 2 Value

AND RAMP
22.01 Speed ref unlimited Value
Value 23.01 Speed ref ramp input
0
22.42 Jogging 1 ref Value
23.02 Speed ref ramp output
22.43 Jogging 2 ref Value
30.11 Minimum speed Value Value

06.11 bit 5 Emergency stop Value 23.20 Acc time jogging Value ACC TIME

23.23 Emergency stop time Value 23.21 Dec time jogging Value DEC TIME

>
23.11 Ramp set selection Selection Stop command
AND

>
RAMP 23.26 Ramp output balancing enable Selection
23.12 Acceleration time 1 Value
ACC TIME Value
Value
23.27 Ramp output balancing ref
23.14 Acceleration time 2

23.13 Deceleration time 1 Value

DEC TIME
23.15 Deceleration time 2 Value

23.20 Acc time jogging Value

Speed reference ramping and shaping

SHAPE
23.21 Dec time jogging Value

23.16 Shape time acc 1 Value

20.25 Jogging enable 0
23.17 Shape time acc 2 Value
20.26 Jogging 1 start AND
source 23.28 Variable slope enable 23.18 Shape time dec 1 Value

>
OR Selection
20.27 Jogging 2 start 23.19 Shape time dec 2 Value
source 23.29 Variable slope rate
Value
06.11 bit 5 Emergency stop Value

46.01 Speed scaling

Value

06.01 bit 4 Ramp out zero Value

AND
Stop command
442 Control chain diagrams
 90.42 Motor speed filter time Value 46.11 Filter time motor speed Value

>
90.41 Motor feedback selection Selection

Value 01.01 Motor speed used

Value 90.01 Motor speed for control

21.06 Zero speed limit Value a 06.19 bit 0 Zero speed

6SHHGHVWLPDWH 01.02 Motor speed estimated a>b t Value

ABS b
Motor feedback configuration

21.07 Zero speed delay Value

ABS a 06.11 bit 10 Above limit

a>b Value
46.31 Above speed limit Value b

46.11 Filter time motor speed Value 46.21 At speed hysteresis Value a 06.11 bit 8 At setpoint
a•b Value

- ABS b
22.87 Speed reference 7 act Value
Control chain diagrams 443
 90.53 Load gear numerator Value 90.63 Feed constant numerator Value

>
90.51 Load feedback selection Selection

90.11 Encoder 1 position Value

90.12 Encoder 1 multiturn revolutions Value +

Encoder 1 None
90.13 Encoder 1 revolution extension Value X Encoder 1
Encoder 2 X
Y 90.07 Load position scaled int
90.21 Encoder 2 position Value Encoder 2
Y POSITION
Position estimate COUNTER
90.22 Encoder 2 multiturn revolutions Value + Motor feedback
90.23 Encoder 2 revolution extension Value

90.64 Feed constant denumerator Value

90.54 Load gear denominator Value

90.61 Gear numerator Value 1

Position estimate X
Position estimate X
Motor feedback
Y
90.02 Motor position Value Y
+
90.26 Motor revolution extension Value

90.62 Gear denominator Value 90.58 Pos counter initial value int Value INIT VAL

>
90.59 Pos counter init value int source Selection INIT SRC

INITIALIZATION REQUEST 1 INIT CMD

>
90.67 Pos counter init cmd source Selection

AND

>
90.68 Disable pos counter initialization Selection AND
S 90.35 bit 4 Position counter initialized
Load feedback and position counter configuration

INITIALIZED

>
90.69 Reset pos counter init ready Selection

OR R

OR 90.35 bit 5 Pos counter re-init disabled

6.11 Main status word bit 3 Tripped Value
444 Control chain diagrams
 25.06 Acc comp derivation time Value

25.07 Acc comp filter time Value

d TAccCom Value 25.56 Torque acc compensation

dt
Speed error calculation

24.41 Speed error window control enable Value

30.12 Maximum speed Value Value
24.43 Speed error window high
24.44 Speed error window low Value

-1
x Value 24.04 Speed error inverted
RFE
23.02 Speed ref ramp output Value 24.03 Speed error filtered
24.01 Used speed reference Value
24.11 Speed correction Value - Value
+

30.11 Minimum speed Value

90.01 Motor speed for control Value 24.02 Used speed feedback Value

24.12 Speed error filter time >Value

24.13 RFE speed filter Selection

24.14 Frequency of zero Value

24.15 Damping of zero Value

24.16 Frequency of pole Value

24.17 Damping of pole Value

Control chain diagrams 445
 25.56 Torque acc compensation Value

Speed regulator
06.18 bit 11 Em Off1
PID OR
x -
25.08 Drooping rate Value 06.18 bit 13 Em Off3

24.46 Speed error step Value + 25.14 Max torq sp ctrl em stop Value

24.03 Speed error filtered Value + 25.12 Speed control max torque Value

Value
Speed controller

25.04 Speed derivation time

25.05 Derivation filter time Value 25.10 Speed ctrl balancing reference Value
25.01 Torque reference speed control

>
25.42 Integral term enable Selection Value
+ 25.57 Torque reference unbalanced
Value
Value 25.53 Torque prop reference
0
Value 25.54 Torque integral reference
25.03 Speed integration time Value x Value 25.55 Torque deriv reference
06.18 bit 11 Em Off1
OR
06.18 bit 13 Em Off3
25.15 Proportional gain em stop Value

>
25.09 Speed ctrl balancing enable Selection
25.02 Speed proportional gain Value x AND
Stop command
1
25.22 Ti coef at min speed Value

25.22 06.18 bit 11 Em Off1

25.18 Speed adapt min limit Value 0 OR
25.18 25.19
06.18 bit 13 Em Off3
25.19 Speed adapt max limit Value
1
90.01 Motor speed for control Value 25.13 Min torq sp ctrl em stop Value

25.21 25.11 Speed control min torque Value

5.21 Kp adapt coef at min speed Value 0
25.18 25.19

5.27 Kp adapt coef at min torque Value

1

25.25 Torque adapt max limit Value

25.27
25.26 Torque adapt filt time Value
0 25.25
26.01 Torq ref to TC Value

>
25.30 Flux adaption enable Selection

01.24 Flux actual % Value

0
100
446 Control chain diagrams
 26.09 Maximum torque ref Value
MIN
Internal torque lim max Value

Value 26.72 Torque reference act 3

>
26.14 Torque ref1/2 selection Selection

>
26.13 Torque ref1 function Selection 26.73 Torque reference act 4
Value

Ref 1

06.16 bit 9
26.18 Torque ramp up time
Network control
26.11 Torque ref1 source ADD Value

>
Selection 26.70 Torque reference act 1 SUB
Value
MUL
26.12 Torque ref2 source
MIN
x +

>
Selection 26.71 Torque reference act 2
Value MAX 26.74 Torque ref ramp out
Value
Fieldbus:
ODVA CIP™
26.15 Load share Value Network ref
Value

>
26.16 Torque additive 1 source Selection
03.01 Panel reference 1
Value

Local control 06.16 bit 8

26.08 Minimum torque ref Value

MAX
Internal torque lim min Value

26.17 Torque ref filter time Value

26.19 Torque ramp down time Value

Torque reference source selection and modification
Control chain diagrams 447
 19.12 Ext1 control mode
Value

19.14 Ext2 control mode

Value

>
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection Selection To torque selector
Value 19.01 Actual operation mode
Fieldbus: SPEED
ODVA CIP™

>
Selection

19.16 Local control mode Value

Panel local 06.16 bit 8

SPEED

Last speed active 06.17 bit 6

Operating mode selection

SPEED

Safe reference active 06.17 bit 5

SCALAR

99.04 Motor control mode Value

SPEED

Safety function active Value

6.01 bit 3 Run Value

AND
6.01 bit 0 Off1 control Value

6.01 bit 2 Off3 control Value

448 Control chain diagrams
 >
26.51 Oscillation damping Selection

>
Selection

>
26.53 Oscillation compensation input Selection
Value 26.52 Oscillation damping out enable
26.55 Oscillation damping frequency Value
Oscillation
damping
26.56 Oscillation damping phase Value 26.58 Oscillation damping output Value

26.57 Oscillation damping gain Value

>
26.26 Force torque ref add 2 zero Selection

26.25 Torque additive 2 source

>
Selection Value 26.77 Torque ref add A actual +
Value 26.78 Torque ref add B actual
0
Speed
limitation 26.01 Torque
26.75 Torque reference act 5 Value 26.76 Torque reference act 6
Torque selector reference to TC
+
Value
26.44 Torque step source
ZERO

>
0 SPEED
Selection Value
25.01 Torque reference speed control Value
TORQUE
0 +
MIN
0
26.43 Torque step pointer enable
MAX

>
Value Selection

Value ADD
26.74 Torque ref ramp out
26.41 Torque step Value
29.01 Torque ref DC VOLTAGE
Reference selection for torque controller

Value
voltage control 0 06.17 bit 11 Emergency stop active
26.42 Torque step enable Value

>
Selection
90.01 Motor speed for control
19.01 Actual operation mode Value
30.12 Maximum speed Value

30.11 Minimum speed Value

Control chain diagrams 449
 30.02 Torque limit status
DC voltage Load angle Motor pull-out
limiter Torque limiter limitation limitation Current limiter
To YHFWRUcore
26.01 Torque reference to TC Value 26.02 Torque reference used
Value
Torque limitation

30.02 Torque limit status

Bit Name
0 = Undervoltage
1 = Overvoltage
2 = Minimum torque
3 = Maximum torque
4 = Internal current
5 = Load angle
6 = Motor pullout
30.17 Maximum current Value 7=
8 = TUDIRFXUUHQW
Internal 9 = ,QYPRWFXUUHQW
torque lim 10 = User current
30.26 Power motoring limit Value min 11 = Thermal IGBT
MAX 12 = IGBT overtemperature
Power to 13 = IGBT overload
torque limits 14 =
30.27 Power generating limit Value MIN
15 =
Internal torque lim max

>
30.18 Minimum torque sel Selection

30.19 Minimum torque 1 Value

30.21 Minimum torque 2 source

>
30.23 Minimum torque 2 Value Selection

30.20 Maximum torque 1 Value

30.22 Maximum torque 2 source

>
30.24 Maximum torque 2 Value Selection

>
30.25 Maximum torque sel Selection
450 Control chain diagrams
 Torque controller

1.11 DC voltage

26.02 Torq ref used 1.10 Motor torque

Torque controller

>
97.04 Voltage reserve Selection 9HFWRU motor
control
97.06 Flux reference select
mode

>
97.07 User flux reference Value Selection
1.24 Flux actual %

rpm

>
19.20 Scalar control reference unit Selection

Hz
Scalar
motor
23.02 Speed ref ramp output Value
control
28.02 Frequency ref ramp output Value mode

97.13 IR compensation Value

Control chain diagrams 451
 >
28.14 Frequency ref1/2 selection Selection

>
28.13 Frequency ref1 function Selection

28.11 Frequency ref1 source Ref 1

>
Selection 28.90 Frequency ref act 1 Add

Value Sub

Mul
28.92 Frequency ref act3
28.12 Frequency ref2 source Min
Value
Max

>
Selection

Value 28.91 Frequency ref act 2 -1 28.96 Frequency ref act7

Value
28.21 Constant frequency function bit 1 Direction enable 1 x
AND
Direction (See group 20 Ext1& Ext2 commands)
b0

>
28.22 Constant frequency sel1 Selection BIN
b1 TO

>
28.23 Constant frequency sel2 Selection 0
INT
b2 SEL OUT

>
28.24 Constant frequency sel3 Selection

Network reference
Value 0
Fieldbus:
28.26 Constant frequency 1
Frequency reference selection

1 ODVA CIP™ Network control 06.16 bit 9

28.27 Constant frequency 2 Value 2
3
28.28 Constant frequency 3 Value 03.01 Panel reference Value
4
28.29 Constant frequency 4 Value
Local control 06.16 bit 8
5
28.30 Constant frequency 5 Value 6
7
28.31 Constant frequency 6 Value
28.41 Frequency ref safe Value
28.32 Constant frequency 7 Value

0 49.05 Communication loss action = Speed ref safe

0
1 Panel comm loss active AND
28.26 Constant frequency 1 Value
2 Panel as local control device
28.27 Constant frequency 2 Value
3
28.28 Constant frequency 3 Value
50.02 FBA A comm loss func = Speed ref safe
Fieldbus comm loss active AND OR

>
28.22 Constant frequency sel1 Selection 1 Safe frequency reference command
INT
Control from Fieldbus active

>
28.23 Constant frequency sel2 Selection 2
SEL

>
28.24 Constant frequency sel3 Selection 3
12.03 AI supervision function = Speed ref safe
28.21 Constant frequency function bit 0 Const freq mode 12.04 AI supervision selection  0000b AND

AI outside supervised limit

452 Control chain diagrams
 >
28.76 Freq ramp in zero source Selection
OR
06.01 bit 6 Ramp in zero Value

>
28.51 Critical frequency function Selection CRITICAL
FREQ
28.52 Critical frequency 1 low Value
06.01 bit 5 Ramp hold Value FREQ
28.53 Critical frequency 1 high Value
OR REF

>
28.77 Freq ramp hold Selection
28.54 Critical frequency 2 low Value RAMP
28.55 Critical frequency 2 high Value 28.79 Freq ramp out

>
Selection
28.56 Critical frequency 3 low Value balancing enable
28.78 Freq ramp output balancing Value
28.57 Critical frequency 3 high Value
30.14 Maximum frequency Value

28.96 Frequency ref act 7 Value 28.97 Frequency ref unlimited

28.01 Frequency ref ramp input
Value 0
Value

30.13 Minimum frequency Value

28.72 Freq acceleration time 1 Value

Frequency reference modification

ACC TIME
28.74 Freq acceleration time 2 Value

28.73 Freq deceleration time 1 Value

28.75 Freq deceleration time 2 Value DEC TIME

>
28.71 Freq ramp set selection Selection
28.02 Frequency ref ramp
23.23 Emergency stop time Value output
0
06.11 bit 5 Emergency stop Value Value

06.01 bit 4 Ramp out zero Value

Control chain diagrams 453
 Follower node 2 receive
Dataset
Master MF link
receive
setup
config
Group 60

>
DS44.1 62.28 Follower node 2 data 1 value Selection 62.04 Follower node 2 data 1 sel
MF link

>
DS44.2 62.29 Follower node 2 data 2 value Selection 62.05 Follower node 2 data 2 sel

>
DS44.3 62.30 Follower node 2 data 3 value Selection 62.06 Follower node 2 data 3 sel

Follower node 3 receive

Dataset
receive

>
DS46.1 62.31 Follower node 3 data 1 value Selection 62.07 Follower node 3 data 1 sel
MF link

>
DS46.2 62.32 Follower node 3 data 2 value Selection 62.08 Follower node 3 data 2 sel

>
DS46.3 62.33 Follower node 3 data 3 value Selection 62.09 Follower node 3 data 3 sel

Follower node 4 receive

Dataset
receive

>
DS48.1 62.34 Follower node 4 data 1 value Selection 62.10 Follower node 4 data 1 sel
MF link

>
DS48.2 62.35 Follower node 4 data 2 value Selection 62.11 Follower node 4 data 2 sel

>
DS48.3 62.36 Follower node 4 data 3 value Selection 62.12 Follower node 4 data 3 sel
Master/Follower communication I (Master)

Signal selection for Master’s broadcast message

Dataset
> transmit
61.01 M/F data 1 selection Selection 61.25 M/F data 1 value DS41.1 MF link
>

61.02 M/F data 2 selection Selection 61.26 M/F data 2 value DS41.2
>

61.03 M/F data 3 selection Selection 61.27 M/F data 3 value DS41.3
454 Control chain diagrams
 Follower MF link
setup
config
Group 60

Follower receive 60.10 M/F ref1 type

>
Selection
Dataset Drive
60.08 M/F comm loss timeout receive 46.01 Speed scaling Ref1 scaling
Control
60.09 M/F com loss function 62.01 M/F data 1 selection = CW 16 bit logic 46.02 Frequency scaling

>
DS41.1 62.25 M/F data 1 value Selection
46.03 Torque scaling
MF link x
62.02 M/F data 2 selection = Ref 1 16bit 46.04 Power scaling
3.13 M/F or D2D ref1

>
DS41.2 62.26 M/F data 2 value Selection
60.11 M/F ref2 type
>

62.03 M/F data 3 selection = Ref 2 16bit Selection

>
DS41.3 62.27 M/F data 3 value Selection
46.01 Speed scaling Ref2 scaling
46.02 Frequency scaling
46.03 Torque scaling
x
46.04 Power scaling
3.14 M/F or D2D ref2

Signal selection for Master’s read request

>
61.01 M/F data 1 selection Selection DS4x.1 MF link
Master/Follower communication II (Follower)

61.25 M/F data 1 value

>
61.02 M/F data 2 selection Selection 61.26 M/F data 2 value DS4x.2

>
61.03 M/F data 3 selection Selection 61.27 M/F data 3 value DS4x.3
Control chain diagrams 455
 Process PID parameter set 1 40.27 Set 1 setpoint max Value

>
40.57 PID set1/set2 selection Selection
Par 40.07...40.56 (shown)

>
40.18 Set 1 setpoint function Selection
Process PID parameter set 2
Par 41.07...41.56 (not shown)
In1 or In2

ADD 40.30 Set 1 setpoint freeze enable

>
SUB Selection

>
40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source Selection MUL

DIV RAMP
Add
40.03 Process PID
MIN
setpoint actual
MAX
Mul

>
40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source Selection Value
AVE
+
a

>
40.25 Set 1 setpoint selection Selection Z-1
a-b
a+b
40.21 Set 1 internal setpoint 1 Value a+ b
40.22 Set 1 internal setpoint 2 Value
Internal setpoint (see 40.16, 40.17)
40.23 Set 1 internal setpoint 3 Value
40.26 Set 1 setpoint min Value
40.24 Set 1 internal setpoint 4 Value
40.28 Set 1 setpoint increase time Value

>
40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1 Selection
40.29 Set 1 setpoint decrease time Value

>
40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2 Selection

40.06 Process PID status word: bit 4 PID sleep mode Value Pulse
40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time Value

>
40.10 Set 1 feedback function Selection 0

40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step Value

Feedback 1

ADD

40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source SUB

40.11 Set 1 feedback filter time Value

>
Selection MUL

DIV
Add

MIN
Value 40.02 Process PID feedback actual
40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source MAX
Mul

>
Selection AVE

a
Process PID setpoint and feedback source selection

a-b

a+b

a+ b
Note! Process PID parameter set 2 is also available. See parameter group 41.
456 Control chain diagrams
 TRIM FUNCTION 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust Value
40.52 Set 1 trim selection Value 40.51 Set 1 trim mode Value

30.20 Maximum torque 1 Value Off 0

Value
Direct
30.12 Maximum speed
30.14 Maximum frequency Value Proportional x

x Combined
40.54 Set 1 trim mix Value +
(range 0...1)

1 40.56 Set 1 trim source Value

- 40.05 Process PID trim output act
x
40.03 Process PID setpoint actual Value Value
x

>
40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer Selection
Process PID controller

>
PROCESS PID FUNCTION 40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable Selection
Comp Process
40.39 Set 1 deadband range Value
PID
40.40 Set 1 deadband delay Value 40.06 Process PID status word
status
Value

40.37 Set 1 output max Value

>

40.49 Set 1 tracking mode Selection

40.04 Process PID deviation actual Value

40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection
PID
>

Selection
40.03 Process PID setpoint actual Value
- x Scale
Value
PID output
40.02 Process PID feedback actual Value

40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion 40.32 Set 1 gain Value 40.01 Process PID output actual
Z-1

>
Selection
40.33 Set 1 integration time Value
Sleep
1 40.34 Set 1 derivation time Value Value
40.43 Set 1 sleep level Function
-1 40.35 Set 1 derivation filter time Value
40.44 Set 1 sleep delay Value
40.07 Set 1 PID operation mode Value
40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation Value

>
40.57 PID set1/set2 selection Selection
Value

40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay Value

40.14 Set 1 setpoint scaling Value
40.36 Set 1 output min Value

40.15 Set 1 output scaling Value

>

40.42 Set 1 sleep enable Selection

40.41 Set 1 sleep mode Value

Note! Process PID parameter set 2 is also available. See parameter group 41.
Control chain diagrams 457
458 Control chain diagrams
—

Further information
Product and service inquiries
Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB
representative, quoting the type designation and serial number
of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales, support and service
contacts can be found by navigating to abb.com/searchchannels.

Product training
For information on ABB product training, navigate to
new.abb.com/service/training.

Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals

Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Navigate to
new.abb.com/drives/manuals-feedback-form.

Document library on the Internet

You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format
on the Internet at abb.com/drives/documents.
 abb.com/drives

3BHS811381 Rev V (EN) 2024-06-01

© 2024 ABB. All rights reserved.

Specifications subject to change without notice.